Sigma Coating S

PROTECTIVE COATINGS
MANUAL
DATA SHEETS | SYSTEM SHEETS | INFORMATION SHEETS
www.sigmacoatings.com/protective

FLUORGUARD 7000
3 pages March 2013 Revision of September 2004
Description
two component, air drying, uoropolymer based topcoat with excellent weather resistance and color retention excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions very good colour and gloss retention excellent resistance to chemical, acid, alkali can be applied by airless spray, roller and brush
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA Mass density Volume solids Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
colours available on request gloss 1.2 g/cm approx. 36% by volume 20 - 40 m 18.0 m/l for 20 m 9.0 m/l for 40 m 1 hours at 20 C min.5 hours at 20 C max. unlimited 12 months previous coat; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 7:1 mix thoroughly by a mechanical mixer before application Agitate continuously during application none 5 hours at 20 C Thinner 21-06 5 - 10% approx. 1.0 - 1.5 mm (= 0.039 - 0.059 in) 30 - 40 MPa (= approx. 300 - 400 bar; 4351 - 5802 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% approx. 0.33 - 0.48 mm (= 0.013 - 0.019 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1740 - 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 3%
Induction time Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner
page 1/3
FLUORGUARD 7000
March 2013
CLEANING SOLVENT Worldwide availability
Thinner 21-06 It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets
page 2/3
FLUORGUARD 7000
March 2013
WARRANTY PPG warrants (i) its title to the product, (ii) that the quality of the product conforms to PPGs specications for such product in effect at the time of manufacture and (iii) that the product shall be delivered free of the rightful claim of any third person for infringement of any U.S. patent covering the product. THESE ARE THE ONLY WARRANTIES THAT PPG MAKES AND ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, UNDER STATUTE OR ARISING OTHERWISE IN LAW, FROM A COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY OTHER WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, ARE DISCLAIMED BY PPG. Any claim under this warranty must be made by Buyer to PPG in writing within ve (5) days of Buyers discovery of the claimed defect, but in no event later than the expiration of the applicable shelf life of the product, or one year from the date of the delivery of the product to the Buyer, whichever is earlier. Buyers failure to notify PPG of such non-conformance as required herein shall bar Buyer from recovery under this warranty.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WILL PPG BE LIABLE UNDER ANY THEORY OF RECOVERY (WHETHER BASED ON NEGLIGENCE OF ANY KIND, STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT) FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN ANY WAY RELATED TO, ARISING FROM, OR RESULTING FROM ANY USE MADE OF THE PRODUCT. The information in this sheet is intended for guidance only and is based upon laboratory tests that PPG believes to be reliable. PPG may modify the information contained herein at any time as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the PPG product, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specic inquiry, or otherwise, are based on data, which to the best of PPGs knowledge, is reliable. The product and related information is designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills in the industry and it is the end-users responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its own particular use and it shall be deemed that Buyer has done so, as its sole discretion and risk. PPG has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. Therefore, PPG does not accept any liability arising from any loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this information (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). Variations in the application environment, changes in procedures of use, or extrapolation of data may cause unsatisfactory results. This sheet supersedes all previous versions and it is the Buyers responsibility to ensure that this information is current prior to using the product. Current sheets for all PPG Protective & Marine Coatings Products are maintained at www.ppgpmc.com. The English text of this sheet shall prevail over any translation thereof.
PDS
8570
page 3/3
Hi-Temp 1027
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
- CUI - Stainless Steel - DTR - Primer - Cryogenic
Prevents Corrosion Under Insulation Prevents Stress Corrosion Cracking Direct to Tight, Adherent Rust Application High Build, High Solids Protects Cryogenic Equipment
Service Temperature: minus 300F to 1200F [minus 185C to 650C] Surface Application Temperatures: 50F to 600F [10C to 316C]* Hi-Temp 1027 is a high-build, single component coating formulated to prevent corrosion under insulation of carbon and stainless steel. Hi-Temp 1027 is formulated to help prevent chloride induced stress corrosion cracking of stainless steel and has been tested by an independent laboratory for low leachable chlorides, sulfides and halides. It helps protect against chlorides: 1) from the atmosphere, 2) from by-products of process operations, and 3) which may be incorporated in the insulation, from coming in contact with stainless steel. Hi-Temp 1027 is a low VOC, high build primer which air dries at ambient temperatures to a UV resistant and stable film, and provides excellent corrosion resistance at the full range of service temperatures. Hi-Temp 1027 can be top coated with a full range of Hi-Temp color top coats. Hi-Temp 1027 can be applied directly to hot substrates having a metal temperature up to 600F [316C]*, eliminating the need for costly shutdown during maintenance. Hi-Temp 1027 does not require a heat cure to achieve superior corrosion resistance. Hi-Temp 1027 is resistant to thermal shock and thermal cycling in intermittent (wet, steam, dry) service. Hi-Temp 1027 can be applied to tightly adhering rust in maintenance and repair situations. Hi-Temp 1027 will protect cryogenic equipment in continuous or cyclic operation from minus 300F to 1000F [minus 185C to 538C]. Hi-Temp 1027 provides a UV-resistant, chalking-free film with no maximum recoat interval, regardless of operating temperature, as long as the surface to be recoated is clean and free of all contaminants.
TECHNICAL DATA:
Components: One Type: Inert Multipolymeric Matrix Dry Temperature Resistance: 1200F [650C] Continuous, 1400F [760C] Peak Cryogenic Service: Minus 300F to 1000F [Minus 185C to 538C] Adhesion ASTM 3359-09: 4A to 5A Impact ASTM G-14 (direct): 30 lbs. Colors Available: Black (Dark Gray), Gray, and Light Gray Minor color change may occur in exposed service, but corrosion protection will not be compromised. Finish: Flat Dry Time @ 50% R.H., 70F [21C]: To touch 2 hours (Recoat and dry times are reduced when To ship 24 hours applied to hot substrates) To topcoat 6 hours Substrate Temperature During Application: 50F [10C] and rising to 600F [316C]* Thinner/Cleanup: See Mixing, Thinning, and Cleanup Table Volume Solids: 65% 2% as applied Coverage @ 1 mil DFT 1042 ft2/gal @ 25 microns DFT [25.5 m2/l] VOC: 3.5 lbs/gal [420 g/l] Weight: 16 lbs/gallon [1.92 kg/liter] Packaging: 1 gallon cans; 50 gallon drums Storage Temperatures: 40F to 120F [4C to 49C] Shelf Life: Two years
*
For direct application to hot substrates over 500F and up to 600F [260C to 316C] consult Hi-Temp Technical Service.
HI-TEMP COATINGS TECHNOLOGY P.O. Box 2347 Acton, MA 01720 Tel: 978-635-1110 Fax: 978-635-1124 hitemp@hitempcoatings.com www.hitempcoatings.com
Rev. 090412 Page 1 of 4
SURFACE PREPARATION:
As with all coatings, the performance and service life of Hi-Temp 1027 are relative to the quality of surface preparation accomplished. CARBON STEEL All surfaces to be coated with Hi-Temp 1027 shall be free of all weld splatter, oil, dirt, grease, and all other contaminants, especially salts. Round off all rough welds and sharp edges. In maintenance and repair situations, Hi-Temp 1027 can be applied over a surface in which tightly adhering rust is still present; remove all rust scale and loosely adhering rust until glints of bright metal are visible. The remaining rust must be tightly adherent and not easily removed by lightly wiping with a cloth. Hi-Temp 1027 should only be used to overcoat inorganic zinc or itself. When overcoating aged inorganic zinc, prepare a small test patch and check for adhesion. If previously applied coatings other than inorganic zinc or HiTemp 1027 are not fully removed by the method of surface preparation utilized, feather the edges of any remaining old coating, and use Hi-Temp 1027 to spot prime only the areas where the substrate is exposed. Non-insulated surfaces: Recommended: Dry abrasive blast clean to SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast [Sa 2] with a 1.0 to 2.0 mil [25 to 50 micron] profile.
When abrasive blast cleaning is not an option, the following methods are acceptable: SSPC-SP 15 Commercial Grade Power Tool Cleaning, with a minimum 1.0 mil [25 micron] profile. SSPC-SP 12, Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by Waterjetting Prior to Recoating to meet the visual definition of WJ-3, Thorough Cleaning. Use potable water. SSPC-SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning [St 3] or SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning [St 2].
Insulated surfaces: Recommended: Dry abrasive blast clean to SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast [Sa 2] or better, with a 1.0 to 2.0 mil [25 to 50 micron] profile.
When abrasive blasting is not an option, the following methods are acceptable: SSPC-SP 15 Commercial Grade Power Tool Cleaning, with a minimum 1.0 mil [25 micron] profile. SSPC-SP 12, Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by Waterjetting Prior to Recoating to meet the visual definition of WJ-2 Very thorough or Substantial Cleaning. Use potable water. All existing coating must be removed except for aged inorganic zinc or existing Hi-Temp 1027. Power Tool Clean or Hand Tool Clean to remove all existing coating except for aged inorganic zinc or existing Hi-Temp 1027.
STAINLESS STEEL All surfaces to be coated with Hi-Temp 1027 shall be free of all weld splatter, oil, dirt, grease, and all other contaminants, especially salts. Round off all rough welds and sharp edges. IMPORTANT: DO NOT USE CHLORINATED SOLVENTS ON STAINLESS STEEL SURFACES. Non-insulated and insulated surfaces: Small surfaces may be cleaned with a chloride free solvent. Large surfaces may be cleaned utilizing a high or low pressure wash or steam cleaning with an alkaline detergent, followed by a freshwater rinse. Water used should be potable grade or better and should be checked to assure minimal salt content. Do not use any chemical additives in the rinse water. An anchor profile is not mandatory for adhesion of Hi-Temp 1027 on stainless steel surfaces. o As an option, following cleaning, a light abrasive sweep blast using an appropriate chloride free abrasive may be performed. After completion of this mechanical surface preparation, rinse the surface with potable grade water or better. Always allow rinsed surfaces to dry before coating.
Product: Hi-Temp 1027 Rev. 090412
Page 2 of 4
MIXING, THINNING, AND CLEANUP:

Hi-Temp 1027 is a heavy bodied material; use mechanical agitation for mixing immediately before application and as needed during application. Be sure any settled solids are incorporated during mixing. If thinning is needed, thin only with Hi-Temp thinners and in accordance with applicable regulations. Agitate as needed during application.
Application to ambient substrate Below 150F [66C] Flush equipment and thin with Hi-Temp #10 or #11 Application to hot substrate 150F to 500F [66C to 260C] Flush equipment and thin with Hi-Temp #5
Clean up with Thinners #5, #10, #11
For application to hot substrates over 150F and up to 500F [66C to 260C] thin (if needed) only with HiTemp thinner #5. For application to substrates over 500F and up to 600F [260C to 316C] consult Hi-Temp Technical Service.
APPLICATION:
For ambient application, surface temperature should be a minimum of 5F [3C] above the dew point. Do not apply to surfaces with surface temperature below 50F [10C]. Do not exceed recommended maximum dry film thicknesses for the appropriate service type and temperatures.
APPLICATION TO HOT SURFACES:

IMPORTANT! It is essential to apply multiple thin passes of Hi-Temp 1027 during application to hot steel. This process, similar to mist coating, prevents blistering and also allows solvent to escape without leaving pinholes. Use of a solvent other than Hi-Temp #5 thinner could produce a fire hazard, and dry spray and poor film characteristics may also result. If blisters are observed in Hi-Temp 1027 applied to hot surfaces, immediately brush out the blisters before they set, using a wood-handled china bristle brush. Note that the higher the substrate temperature, the shorter the recoat time. For direct application to hot substrates over 500F and up to 600F [260C to 316C] consult Hi-Temp Technical Service.
APPLICATION EQUIPMENT:
Spray application is recommended: Use conventional or airless spray and good painting practices. Typical equipment is as follows: Product 1027 Air Pressure 60-80 psi Conventional Spray Fluid Fluid Tip Pressure Pressure <40 psi 1.8 to 2.2 mm 3000 psi Airless Spray Minimum Fluid Line 1/4 to 3/8 Tip size 417 to 521
Brush and Roll: Spray application is recommended but when spray painting is not possible, brush or roll application may be used. The coating should be applied with a suitable brush or short nap roller. Brushing and rolling only in one direction may aid in building film thickness. For more specific instructions, refer to the Hi-Temp Coatings Application Guideline titled Guidelines for Roller and Brush Application of Hi-Temp Coatings Products.
APPLICATION SYSTEMS:
I. INSULATED AND NON-INSULATED SERVICE Carbon Steel / Stainless Steel Applied direct to hot or ambient steel Hi-Temp 1027 2 coats @ 5 to 6 mils DFT [125 to 150 microns]; total of 10 to 12 mils DFT [250 to 300 microns] Optional 3rd coat @ 5 to 6 mils DFT [125 to 150 microns]; total of 15 to 18 mils DFT [375 to 450 microns]
Product: Hi-Temp 1027 Rev. 090412 Page 3 of 4
II. PRIMER / TOPCOAT SYSTEM NON-INSULATED SERVICE Carbon Steel / Stainless Steel Applied direct to hot or ambient steel Primer Coat - Hi-Temp 1027 - 1 coat @ 5 to 6 mils DFT [125 to 150 microns] Hi-Temp Color Topcoats a] Ambient apply: b] Hot apply: (See appropriate topcoat PDS) Hi-Temp 500VS or Hi-Temp 1000VS Hi-Temp 500VHA or Hi-Temp 1000VHA
III. CRYOGENIC INSULATED AND NON-INSULATED SERVICE Ambient Stainless Steel Hi-Temp 1027 [1.] For service temperature of minus 100 F to 400 F [minus 73C to 204C] 2 coats @ 5 to 6 mils [125 to 150 microns] DFT per coat; total of 10 to12 mils [250 to 300 microns] [2.] For service temperature of minus 300 F to 1000 F [minus 185 C to 538C] 1 coat @ 5 to 6 mils [125 to 150 microns] - DO NOT EXCEED 8 mils [200 microns] total DFT
RECOMMENDED APPLICATION PER COAT:

Minimum Dry Film Thickness Wet Film Thickness Coverage Mils 5 7.7 208 ft2/gal Microns [125] [192] [5.1 m2/l] Maximum Mils Microns 6 [150] 9.2 [230] 174 ft2/gal [4.3 m2/l]
APPROXIMATE DRY SCHEDULE:

Substrate Temperature at 50% RH Dry to Recoat, Minimum Dry to Recoat, Maximum Dry to Ship Cured 70F [21C] 50F [10C] 100F [38C] 302F [150C] 24 hours 6 hours 5 hours 1/4 hour No maximum as long as the surface is clean and free of contaminants 24 hours 24 hours 24 hours N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Dry times can vary based on environmental and substrate conditions. Do not exceed maximum dry film thickness recommendations as this can affect dry times.
PRECAUTIONS:
This product is for use only by professional applicators in accordance with information in this data sheet and the applicable material safety data sheets (MSDS). Refer to the appropriate MSDS before using this material. All use and application of this product should be performed in compliance with all relative federal, state and local health, safety and environmental regulations or in compliance with all pertinent local, regional and national regulations as well as good safety practices for painting, and in conformance with recommendations in SSPC-PA 1, Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting of Steel.
WARRANTY:
Hi-Temp Coatings Technology, Inc. (Hi-Temp) warrants that its products are free from defects in material and workmanship. Hi-Temps sole obligation and buyers exclusive remedy shall be limited to replacement of products not conforming to this warranty. Any claim for replacement product must be made within one year from the delivery date. Hi-Temp makes no other warranties, expressed or implied, such as warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Hi-Temp products are intended for buyers with the knowledge and skills to evaluate the suitability of Hi-Temps products for buyers intended use. In no event shall Hi-Temp be liable for consequential or incidental damage.
Product: Hi-Temp 1027 Rev. 090412
Page 4 of 4
HI-TEMP 1000VS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
For use as a topcoat for Hi-Temp 1027
Heat Resistant Standard and Custom Color Topcoats Superior Color Stability to 1000F [538C] Ambient Temperature Cure & VOC < 3.5 lb/gal
Hi-Temp 1000VS is formulated with a highly engineered silicone resin, enabling it to withstand severe thermal cycling to 1200F [649C]. This also allows Hi-Temp 1000VS to have superior color stability as compared to most generic silicone topcoats, which tend to discolor at elevated temperatures. Hi-Temp 1000VS is available in both standard and custom colors. Hi-Temp 1000VS air dries rapidly and does not require heat cure. Hi-Temp 1000VS has excellent spray application properties. Hi-Temp 1000VS is a user-friendly system that can be brushed and rolled. Hi-Temp 1000VS has excellent weathering and corrosion resistance when applied over properly primed surfaces. Hi-Temp 1000VS does not soften in thermal cyclic service. Color stability may be affected at the top end of the temperature range. Hi-Temp 1000VS is specifically formulated as an ambient, heat resistant topcoat for Hi-Temp 1027.
TECHNICAL DATA:
Type: Dry Temperature Resistance: Color Stability: Standard & Custom Black Colors: Finish: Components: Dry Time @ 50% R.H., 70F [21C] - To touch - To ship Cure: Metal Temperature During Application: Thinner: Volume Solids: Theoretical Coverage @1 mil DFT Theoretical Coverage @25 microns VOC Content: Weight per Gallon: Storage Temperature: Shelf Life: Silicone To 1200F [650C] To 1000F [538C] To 1200F [650C] Standard & Custom Flat One Two Hours 24 Hours N/A 50F to 150F [10C to 66C] Hi-Temp #10 or #11 34% 545 ft2/gal 13.4 m2/l 3.5 lb/gal [420 g/l] 11.4 lb. [5.2 kg] 40F to 120F [4C to 49C] One year
SURFACE PREPARATION:
Performance of the coating system is relative to the surface preparation accomplished. Hi-Temp 1000VS is designed to be applied over Hi-Temp 1027 primer.
HI-TEMP COATINGS TECHNOLOGY P.O. Box 2347 Acton, MA 01720 Tel: 978-635-1110 Fax: 978-635-1124 hitemp@hitempcoatings.com www.hitempcoatings.com
Rev. 082012 Page 1 of 3
New or Corroded Surfaces: For corrosion resistant service, use of an approved corrosion resistant primer is necessary. Surfaces to be coated must be primed in accordance with the Hi-Temp 1027 product data sheet. Consult HiTemp for alternate and approved primers. Allow appropriate dry time. Apply one coat of Hi-Temp 1000VS at 2 to 2.5 mils [50 to 63 microns] DFT. For cosmetic service only, use of an approved corrosion resistant primer is recommended but not necessary. Abrasive blast clean to SSPC-SP 6 Commercial Blast [Sa 2] with profile of 1 to 1.5 mils [25 to 38 microns] or pressure wash to an equivalent of SSPC-SP 6 [Sa 2] condition. Surfaces to be coated must be dry and free of salts, weld splatter, oil, dirt, grease, and all other contaminants. Round off all rough welds and sharp edges. Apply two coats of Hi-Temp 1000VS at 2 to 2.5 mils [50 to 63 microns] DFT per coat for a total of 4 to 5 mils [100 to 125 microns] DFT. Previously Painted Surfaces in Good Condition: If old coating is intact and there is no evidence of cracking, fracturing, and/or delamination, pressure wash surface to remove all salts, oil, grease, and contaminants and apply one coat of Hi-Temp 1000VS at 2 to 2.5 mils [50 to 63 microns] DFT. Previously Painted Surfaces in Poor Condition or with some Localized Corrosion: If old coating shows evidence of cracking, fracturing, delamination, and/or corrosion, follow surface preparation guidelines for new steel. If there is no evidence of cracking, fracturing, or delamination, just small areas of corrosion (less than 10% of the area to be coated), power wash the entire structure, removing all salts, oil, grease, and other contaminants. Once dry, perform surface preparation and apply Hi-Temp 1027 in accordance with the data sheet on all areas where the existing paint has been removed. Once these areas are primed and dry, apply one coat of Hi-Temp 1000VS at 2 to 2.5 mils [50 to 63 microns] DFT over the entire surface.
Prior to application of 1000VS over other coatings, prepare a small test patch area and test for adhesion.
MIXING, THINNING, AND CLEANUP:

Use mechanical agitation for mixing. Mix materials until uniform in consistency. Thinning is not normally needed. If a condition warrants thinning, thin only with Hi-Temp Thinners #10 or #11. Thin only in accordance with applicable regulations. Application to Ambient Substrate 50F [10C] to 150F [66C] Flush, Thin, and Clean up with: Hi-Temp Thinner #10 or #11
APPLICATION:
Surface temperature must be a minimum of 5F [3C] above the dew point. Do not apply at substrate temperatures below 50F [10C] or above 150F [66C].
APPLICATION EQUIPMENT:
Spray: Standard conventional or airless spray is highly recommended. Use good painting practices. Typical equipment is as follows:
Product
1000VS
Conventional Spray Air Fluid Fluid Tip Pressure Pressure Pressure 60-80 psi <40 psi 1.8 to 2.2 mm 3000 psi
Airless Spray Minimum Fluid Line 1/4 to 3/8
Tip size 417 to 521
Brush and Roll: Spray application is recommended but when spray painting is not possible, brush or roll is an appropriate application method. The coating should be applied with a suitable brush or short nap roller.
Product: Hi-Temp 1000VS Rev. 082012 Page 2 of 3
APPLICATION SYSTEMS:
Un-insulated steel Do not exceed recommended dry film thickness Primer Topcoat Total Dry Film Thickness Hi-Temp 1027 Hi-Temp 1000VS 5.0 to 6.0 mils [125 to 150 microns] DFT 2.0 to 2.5 mils [50 to 63 microns] DFT 7.0 to 8.5 mils [175 to 213 microns] DFT
RECOMMENDED APPLICATION PER COAT:

Minimum
Hi-Temp 1000VS Dry Film Wet Film Theoretical Coverage
Mils 2 5.9 273 ft2/gal
Microns [50] [148] [6.7 m2/l ]
Mils 2.5
7.3
218 ft2/gal.
Maximum Microns [63] [183] [5.4 m2/l]
DRY SCHEDULE:
Substrate Temperature at 50% RH Dry to touch Dry to Ship Cure 50F [10C] 4 hours 72 hours 70F [21C] 2 hours 24 hours 90F [32C] 2 hours 16 hours N/A 150F [66C] hour hour
When shipping and handling equipment coated with Hi-Temp 1000VS follow procedures for thin film coatings. Avoid mechanical damage and abrasion.
PRECAUTIONS:
This product is for use only by professional applicators in accordance with information in this data sheet and the applicable material safety data sheets (MSDS). Refer to the appropriate MSDS before using this material. All use and application of this product should be performed in compliance with all relative federal, state and local health, safety and environmental regulations or in compliance with all pertinent local, regional and national regulations as well as good safety practices for painting, and in conformance with recommendations in SSPC PA 1, Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting of Steel.
WARRANTY:
Hi-Temp Coatings Technology, Inc. (Hi-Temp) warrants that its products are free from defects in material and workmanship. Hi-Temps sole obligation and buyers exclusive remedy shall be limited to replacement of products not conforming to this warranty. Any claim for replacement product must be made within one year from the delivery date. Hi-Temp makes no other warranties, expressed or implied, such as warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Hi-Temp products are intended for buyers with the knowledge and skills to evaluate the suitability of Hi-Temps products for buyers intended use. In no event shall Hi-Temp be liable for consequential or incidental damage.
Product: Hi-Temp 1000VS Rev. 082012
Page 3 of 3
NOVAGUARD 830
3 pages April 2009 Revision of November 2005
DESCRIPTION
two component solvent free amine cured phenolic epoxy compound
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS sprayable caulking to overlap the welding seams suitable caulking compound for use under SigmaGuard CSF 650 and Novaguard 840 excellent chemical resistance against crude oil, unleaded gasolines and a wide range of petrochemicals and solvents can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) good visibility due to light colour reduced explosion risk and re hazard COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after cream - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 100% max. 105 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 144 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) 3500 - 5000 m depending on system 6 hours min. 16 hours * max. 3 months * 5 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE at least 12 months steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m steel with suitable holding primer (SigmaGuard 260 or SigmaCover 280) which must be dry, clean and free from any contamination mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 when mixing the temperature of the base and hardener should be at least 20C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added Induction time Pot life none 1 hour at 20C *
* see additional data
page 1/3
NOVAGUARD 830
April 2009
AIRLESS SPRAY
Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment with a minimum of 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx. 0.67 mm (= 0.026 in) at an angle of 30 40 at 20C (paint temperature) min. 30 MPa (= approx. 350 bar; 5000 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 25 MPa (= approx. 250 bar; 3500 p.s.i.) Thinner 90-83 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 0.3 3000
CLEANING SOLVENT
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
structure: in different layers wet in wet in order to reach the required lm thickness Overcoating table with solvent free tanklinings substrate temperature 10C minimum interval maximum interval 30 hours 3 months 20C 16 hours 2 months 30C 12 hours 1 month
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 30 hours 16 hours 10 hours full cure 7 days 5 days 3 days
although the paint is solvent free adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434)
page 2/3
NOVAGUARD 830
April 2009
Pot life 20C 30C 60 min. 45 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY The information in this data sheet is based upon laboratory tests we believe to be accurate and is intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the Sigma Coatings products made by PPG Protective & Marine Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specic enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does therefore not accept any liability arising from loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). The data contained herein are liable to modication as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. This data sheet replaces and annuls all previous issues and it is therefore the user's responsibility to ensure that this sheet is current prior to using the product. The English text of this document shall prevail over any translation thereof.
PDS
7945
page 3/3
NOVAGUARD 840
5 pages February 2013 Revision of March 2011
Description
two component solvent free amine cured novolac phenolic epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS one coat tank coating system clear version for glassmat reinforced solvent free tank bottom system (see system sheet 4145) excellent resistance to crude oil up to 90C suitable for storage of unleaded gasolines good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals and solvents good visibility due to light colour glossy and smooth appearance easy to clean can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) reduced explosion risk and re hazard approved to Air BP F2D2 section 2.1 for the storage of jet fuels COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) VOC (EPA Method 24) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after green, cream, clear gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 100% max. 106 g/kg max. 142 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) 73 g/ltr (0.6 lb/gal) (by EPA Method 24) see information sheet 1411 300 - 600 m depending on system 3.3 m/l for 300 m * 6 hours at 20C min. 24 hours * max. 2 months * 5 days * at 20C (data for components) at least 12 months
Shelf life (cool and dry place)
RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing steel with suitable primer (SigmaGuard 260) which must be dry, clean and free from any contamination
page 1/5
NOVAGUARD 840
February 2013
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be at least 20C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added for recommended application instructions: see working procedure none 1 hours at 20C *
*see additional data
Induction time Pot life
AIRLESS SPRAY
use heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses/in -line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (= 0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4061 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22Mpa (=approx. 220 bar: 3000 p.s.i.) only for spot repair and stripe coating no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 3.3 300 1.7 600 150 m
BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m
page 2/5
NOVAGUARD 840
February 2013
measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating with Novaguard 840 (spot repair and stripe coating) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 80 hours 3 months 10C 36 hours 3 months 20C 24 hours 2 months 30C 16 hours 1 month
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 60 hours 30 hours 16 hours 10 hours full cure 15 days 7 days 5 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) for storage and transport of drinking water the recommended working procedure should be followed WASHING PROCEDURE all personnel should wear watertight suits, boots and gloves properly cleaned with a sodium hypochlorite solution (1% active chlorine per liter) all tank sides, bottom and deckheads etc. should be brush cleaned or highpressure spray cleaned with 1% active chlorine solution as above note: this can also be done by butterworth washing all parts should be high pressure cleaned with tap water and tanks drained concentrated active chlorine solution should be sprinkled on bottom; approx. 1 ltr/10 m tanks should be lled with tap water to a depth of approx. 20 cm and the water should remain in the tank for at least 2 hours (max. 24 hours) tanks should be thoroughly ushed out with tap water depending upon local regulations it may be necessary to take water samples, after lling tank completely, to check on bacteria after this procedure the tanks will be t to carry drinking water
page 3/5
NOVAGUARD 840
February 2013
Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 60 min. 45 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Safety indications Safe working in conned spaces Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Explanation to product data sheets Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Directives for ventilation practice Specication for mineral abrasives Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature Conversion tables see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1650 see information sheet 1410
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes no solvent present; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
page 4/5
NOVAGUARD 840
February 2013
237775 180207
PDS cream green
7468 3012002200 4000001400
page 5/5
NOVAGUARD 890
5 pages September 2013 Revision of November 2012
Description
two component solvent free amine cured novolac phenolic epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS one coat tank coating system excellent resistance to crude oil up to 90C suitable for storage of unleaded gasolines blended up to 100% ethanol (E5 up to E100) suitable for storage of biodiesel (EN14214) good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals and solvents good visibility due to light colour semigloss and smooth appearance clear version for glassmat reinforced solvent free tank bottom system (see system sheet 4155) easy to clean can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) reduced explosion risk and re hazard COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) green, cream, clear semi-gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 100% max. 94 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 131 g/l (approx. 1.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 300 - 600 m depending on system 3.3 m/l for 300 m * 8 hours at 20C min. 24 hours * max. 2 months * 6 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing steel with suitable primer (SigmaGuard 260) which must be dry, clean and free from any contamination
page 1/5
NOVAGUARD 890
September 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be at least 20C no thinner should be added for recommended application instructions: see working procedure at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application none 1 hour at 20C *
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (=0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4061 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22Mpa (=approx. 220 bar: 3000 p.s.i.) use heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses
for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 3.3 300 1.7 600 150 m
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/5
NOVAGUARD 890
September 2013
measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table with itself (spot repair and stripe coating) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 36 hours 3 months 20C 24 hours 2 months 30C 16 hours 1 month
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 40 hours 18 hours 12 hours full cure 10 days 6 days 4 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) for storage and transport of drinking water the recommended working procedure should be followed Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 60 min. 45 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used
page 3/5
NOVAGUARD 890
September 2013
REFERENCES
Conversion tables Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature
see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
NOVAGUARD 890
September 2013
269264 282887
PDS green cream
7755 4194542200 3002002200
page 5/5
Phenguard 253
4 pages November 2012 Revision of September 2011
Description
two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS excellent resistance to a wide range of organic acids, alcohols, edible oils and solvents maximum cargo exibility low cargo absorbtion recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyds register) See sheet 1886 good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) grey, offwhite semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm ( mixed product ) 72% 3% max. 200 g/l (approx. 1.7 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 125 - 150 m 7.2 m/l for 100 m min.10 hours* max. 5 days * at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned in situ to at least ISO-Sa2 and free from rust, scale, shop primer and any other contamination blasting prole 50 - 100 m the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of Phenguard 253 substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components allow induction time before use 15C - 45 min. 20C - 30 min. 25C - 15 min. 4 hours at 21.1C / 70F
Induction time
Pot life
page 1/4
Phenguard 253
November 2012
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 15 - 15 MPa (= approx. 150 - 150 bar; 2176 - 2176 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Overcoating tabel for Phenguard 253 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C 3 hours 3 days 7.2 100 4.8 150
24 hours 16 hours 10 hours 4 hours 7 days 6 days 5 days 4 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C Service 14 day 10 days 7 days 4 days 4 days
minimum curing time of Phenguard 253 tank coating systems before the transport of cargoes please contact your PPG representative for further details
page 2/4
Phenguard 253
November 2012
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 6 hours 4 hours 2 hours
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets This is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
page 3/4
Phenguard 253
November 2012
PDS
7447
page 4/4
PHENGUARD 930
5 pages July 2012 Revision of March 2011
Description
two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS primer coat in the Phenguard tankcoating system excellent resistance to a wide range of organic acids, alcohols, edible oils, fats (regardless of free fatty acid content) and solvents maximum cargo exibility low cargo absorption good resistance to hot water recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) offwhite eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 66% 2% max. 191 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 315 g/l (approx. 2.6 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 100 m * 6.6 m/l for 100 m * 2 hours at 20 C min. 36 hours * max. 21 days * see curing table * at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned in situ to at least ISO-Sa2 and free from rust, scale, shop primer and any other contamination blasting prole 50 - 100 m the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of Phenguard 930 substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing marine tankcoatings system sheet: 3141 system sheet: 3322
SYSTEM SPECIFICATION
page 1/5
PHENGUARD 930
July 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 88 : 12 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components 4 hours at 20 C * allow induction time before use 15C - 20 min. 20C - 15 min. 25C - 10 min. Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) only for spot repair and stripe coating Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: Overcoating table for Phenguard 935 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C 60 m 6.6 100 5.3 125
Pot life Induction time
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
60 hours 48 hours 36 hours 24 hours 16 hours 28 days 25 days 21 days 14 days 7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination
page 2/5
PHENGUARD 930
July 2012
Curing
Curing table for Phenguard tankcoating system before transport of cargoes without note 4, 7, 8 or 11 and ballast water and tanktest with sea water substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C Service 14 days 14 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
minimum curing time of Phenguard tankcoating system before transport of cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List for transport of methanol and vinyl acetate monomer, a hot cure is required which cannot be substituted by a service period of 3 months with nonaggressive cargoes adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) the performance of the applied system strongly depends on the curing degree of the rst coat at time of recoating. Therefore overcoating time between 1st and 2nd coat is extended in comparison between 2nd and 3rd coat (see overcoating details) when used as a primer under solvent free tank-linings the dft must be limited to a maximum of 100 m Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 6 hours 4 hours 1.5 hour
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.
page 3/5
PHENGUARD 930
July 2012
REFERENCES
Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
page 4/5
PHENGUARD 930
July 2012
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WILL PPG BE LIABLE UNDER ANY THEORY OF RECOVERY (WHETHER BASED ON NEGLIGENCE OF ANY KIND, STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT) FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN ANY WAY RELATED TO, ARISING FROM, OR RESULTING FROM ANY USE MADE OF THE PRODUCT. The information in this data sheet is intended for guidance only and is based upon laboratory tests that PPG believes to be reliable. PPG may modify the information contained herein at any time as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the PPG product, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specic inquiry, or otherwise, are based on data, which to the best of PPGs knowledge, is reliable. The product and related information is designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills in the industry and it is the end-users responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its own particular use and it shall be deemed that Buyer has done so, as its sole discretion and risk. PPG has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. Therefore, PPG does not accept any liability arising from any loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). Variations in the application environment, changes in procedures of use, or extrapolation of data may cause unsatisfactory results. This data sheet supersedes all previous versions and it is the Buyers responsibility to ensure that this data sheet is current prior to using the product. Current data sheets for all PPG Protective & Marine Coatings products are maintained at www.ppgpmc.com. The English text of this data sheet shall prevail over any translation thereof.
180706
PDS offwhite
7409 7001002200
page 5/5
PHENGUARD 935
5 pages November 2012 Revision of July 2012
Description
two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS second coat in the Phenguard tankcoating system excellent resistance to a wide range of organic acids, alcohols, edible oils, fats (regardless of free fatty acid content) and solvents maximum cargo exibility low cargo absorption good resistance to hot water recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) pink eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 66% 2% max. 191 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 315 g/l (approx. 2.6 lb/gal) 100 m * 6.6 m/l for 100 m * 2 hours at 20 C min. 24 hours * max. 21 days *
see curing table *
(data for components) at least 12 months

previous coat of Phenguard 930; dry and free from any contamination the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of Phenguard 935 substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing marine tankcoatings system sheet: 3141 system sheet: 3322
page 1/5
PHENGUARD 935
November 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 88 : 12 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components allow induction time before use 15C - 20 min. 20C - 15 min. 25C - 10 min. 4 hours at 20 C
Induction time
Pot life
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 6.6 100 5.3 125 60 m
page 2/5
PHENGUARD 935
November 2012
Overcoating table for Phenguard 935 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Min.curing time of Phenguard tankcoating system before transport of cargoes without note 4, 7, 8 or 11 and ballast water and tanktest with sea water substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C Service 14 days 14 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
minimum curing time of Phenguard tankcoating system before transport of cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List for transport of methanol and vinyl acetate monomer, a hot cure is required which cannot be substituted by a service period of 3 months with nonaggressive cargoes adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) the performance of the applied system strongly depends on the curing degree of the rst coat at time of recoating. Therefore overcoating time between 1st and 2nd coat is extended in comparison between 2nd and 3rd coat (see overcoating details)
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C 6 hours 4 hours 1.5 hour
page 3/5
PHENGUARD 935
November 2012
Worldwide availability
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
PHENGUARD 935
November 2012
179115
PDS pink
7435 6007002200
page 5/5
PHENGUARD 940
Description
two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy nish
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS nish coat in the Phenguard tankcoating system excellent resistance to a wide range of organic acids, alcohols, edible oils, fats (regardless of free fatty acid content) and solvents maximum cargo exibility low cargo absorption good resistance to hot water recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface easy to clean COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) light grey eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 66% 2% max. 191 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 315 g/l (approx. 2.6 lb/gal) 100 m * 6.6 m/l for 100 m * 2 hours at 20 C min. 24 hours * max. 21 days * see curing table * at 20 C
at least 12 months
previous coat of Phenguard 935; dry and free from any contamination the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of Phenguard 940 substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/5
PHENGUARD 940
July 2012
marine tankcoatings
system sheet: 3141 system sheet: 3322
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 88 : 12 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components 4 hours at 20 C *
allow induction time before use 15C - 20 min. 20C - 15 min. 25C - 10 min.
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 60 m 6.6 100 5.3 125
page 2/5
PHENGUARD 940
July 2012
Overcoating table for Phenguard 940 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Min.curing time of Phenguard tankcoating system before transport of cargoes without note 4, 7, 8 or 11 and ballast water and tanktest with sea water substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C Service 14 days 14 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
minimum curing time of Phenguard tankcoating system before transport of cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List for transport of methanol and vinyl acetate monomer, a hot cure is required which cannot be substituted by a service period of 3 months with nonaggressive cargoes adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) the performance of the applied system strongly depends on the curing degree of the rst coat at time of recoating. Therefore overcoating time between 1st and 2nd coat is extended in comparison between 2nd and 3rd coat (see overcoating details) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 6 hours 4 hours 1.5 hour
page 3/5
PHENGUARD 940
July 2012
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
PHENGUARD 940
July 2012
179118
PDS grey
7436 5000002200
page 5/5
PHENGUARD 965
4 pages March 2011 Revision of April 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS Phenguard 965 system excellent resistance to a wide range of organic acids, alcohols, fats (regardless of free fatty acid content) and solvents maximum cargo exibility low cargo absorption easy to clean good resistance to hot water can be applied and cures at temperatures down to +5C good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES offwhite, pink, grey - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 68 2% max. 195 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 329 g/l (approx. 2.7 lb/gal) 100 m * 6.8 m/l for 100 m * 2 - 3 hours at 20C, 14 - 16 hours at 5C min. 8 hours * max. 14 days * see curing table * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned in situ to at least ISO-Sa2 and free from rust, scale, shop primer and any other contamination blasting prole 50 - 100 m the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of Phenguard 965 substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing Phenguard 965 offwhite Phenguard 965 pink Phenguard 965 grey 100 m 100 m 100 m
page 1/4
PHENGUARD 965
March 2011
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 87 : 13 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components
Induction time
allow induction time before use 5C - 20 min. 10C - 15 min. 15C - 10 min. 2 hours at 20C *
Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: 6.8 100 5.4 125 60 m
page 2/4
PHENGUARD 965
March 2011
Overcoating table for Phenguard 965 for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 24 hours 28 days 10C 20 hours 25 days 15C 14 hours 21 days 20C 8 hours 14 days 30C 6 hours 7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature min. curing time of Phenguard 965 system before transport of cargoes without note 4, 7, 8 or 11 and ballast water and tanktest with sea water 7 days 5 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
5C 10C 15C 20C 30C
minimum curing time of Phenguard 965 system before transport of cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List for transport of methanol and vinyl acetate monomer, a hot cargo cure is required which cannot be substituted by a service period of 3 months with non-aggressive cargoes adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) when used as a primer under solvent free tank-linings the dft must be limited to a maximum of 100 m Pot life (at application viscosity) 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 2 hours 1 hour
page 3/4
PHENGUARD 965
March 2011
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
199289 199282 199284
PDS offwhite pink grey
7959 7001002200 6007002200 5000002200
page 4/4
PITT-CHAR XP
4 pages July 2013 Revision of July 2010
Description
solvent free thick lm intumescent epoxy coating for hydrocarbon pool and jet res
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS highly durable intumescent coating for protection of steel against hydrocarbon and jet res; typical applications include: Offshore - structural steel members, bulkheads and decks Onshore - pipework, storage tanks and vessels unique exibility offers enhanced performance on vibrating structures and in conditions of explosion overpressure suitable for use in cryogenic conditions good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals excellent abrasion resistance suitable for corrosivity categories up to C5-I and C5-M meets the requirements for Norsok M501 rev 5 accelerated aging tests approved by ABS, BV, DNV, LR, UL and GASAFE COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness grey matt (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.10 g/cm note:the applied density is dependent upon many variables such as temperature, test method and application method 100% max. 0 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 0 g/l (0.0 lb/gal) normally 1000 - 7000 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.10 kg/m for 1000 m * 10 hours * min. 4 hours max. 1 month base: at least 24 months hardener: at least 24 months
Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place)
approved primer, dry, sound and free from contamination where mesh reinforcement of PITT-CHAR XP is necessary, this should be carried out in accordance with the PITT-CHAR XP Application Guidelines substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing curing will be retarded at temperatures below 10C and will cease below 5C relative humidity during application must be lower than 85%
page 1/4
PITT-CHAR XP
July 2013
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 2.33 : 1 mixing ratio by weight 3.25 : 1 for details see the PITT-CHAR XP Application Guidelines 45 minutes at 25C * single feed application 5% - 7% of Thinner 60-30 may be necessary, but the quantity shall never exceed 10%. The addition of thinner will affect sag resistance and overcoating intervals. approx. 0.84 - 0.89 mm (= 0.033 - 0.035 in) 35 MPa (= approx. 350 bar; 5076 p.s.i.) use of spray equipment with a ratio of 74 : 1 is recommended material temperature (mixed): 23 - 35C the maximum length of the hoses should not exceed 30 m
Nozzle angle 40 (for large at surfaces)
twin feed application no thinner should be added approx. 0.89 -1.09 mm (=0.035 - 0.043 in) 24 MPa (= approx. 240 bar; 3481 p.s.i.) twin feed spray equipment utilising a minium 10 inch king air motor is recommended base and hardener need to be pre-heated to a minium of 60C while circulating through the unit suitable insulated and/or heated hoses should be used
Nozzle angle 40 (for large at surfaces)
TROWEL Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
(recommended for small areas and touch up only) no thinner should be added Thinner 90-53
page 2/4
PITT-CHAR XP
July 2013
Curing ADDITIONAL DATA
Curing table (for solvent free application) substrate temperature 5C / 41F 10C / 50F 20C / 68F 30C / 86F 40C / 104F Time to outdoor exposure 70 hours 45 hours 18 hours 7 hours 5 hours Dry to walk on 30 hours 26 hours 18 hours 10 hours 4 hours
curing times may vary depending on substrate, ambient and material temperature adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) substrate temperature 5C / 41F 10C / 50F 20C / 68F 30C / 86F 40C / 104F REFERENCES dry to handle 80 hours 52 hours 18 hours 10 hours 7 hours full cure 52 days 36 days 15 days 10 days 7 days see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Conversion tables Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
page 3/4
PITT-CHAR XP
July 2013
281999
grey PDS
3000002504 7589
page 4/4
"
&
&
'
'
'
&
'
&
&
'
&
'
<
&
'
>
>
<
'
&
>
'
&
>
&
>
>
>
PSX 700
4 pages October 2012 Revision of November 2011
Description
two component engineered siloxane coating unique, high gloss, engineered siloxane can be applied directly over inorganic zinc excellent colour and gloss retention high solids, VOC compliant applied by brush, roller or spray, without thinning good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C
full colour range gloss
(data for mixed product) Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) VOC (EPA Method 24) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES 1.36 g/cm 90% 2% max. 119 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 164 g/l (approx. 1.4 lb/gal) 84 g/ltr (0.7 lb/gal) (by EPA Method 24) 75 - 175 m per coat 7.2 m/l for 125 m 2 hours at 20 C *
min. 3 hours *
previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened prepare damaged areas to original surface preparation specications, feathering edges of intact coating for touch-up and repair; apply additional material after removing dirt, contaminants and old loose coatings or antifoulings substrate temperature should be above 0C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing relative humidity should be at least 40% to obtain optimal curing properties below 40% curing will continue, but time is extended mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 use power mixer powered by an air- or an explosion proof electric motor none 4 hours at 20 C *
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Induction time Pot life
page 1/4
PSX 700
October 2012
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner BRUSH/ROLLER
Thinner 60-12/ Thinner 21-06 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions the recommended dft cannot be reached in one coat Natural bristle. Maintain a wet edge. Level any air bubbles with bristle brush.
CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
Thinner 90-58 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 12 75 7.2 125 5.1 175
Overcoating table for PSX 700 for dft up to 175 m at RH 40% or above substrate temperature minimum interval 5C 12 hours 10C 7 hours 20C 3 hours 30C 2 hours
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 175 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C touch dry 7 hours 4.5 hours 2 hours 1 hour dry to handle 16 hours 8.5 hours 4.5 hours 3 hours
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 6.5 hours 4 hours 1.5 hour
page 2/4
PSX 700
October 2012
REFERENCES
Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Surface preparation of concrete (oors) Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature
see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1496 see information sheet 1650
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets
page 3/4
PSX 700
October 2012
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WILL PPG BE LIABLE UNDER ANY THEORY OF RECOVERY (WHETHER BASED ON NEGLIGENCE OF ANY KIND, STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT) FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN ANY WAY RELATED TO, ARISING FROM, OR RESULTING FROM ANY USE MADE OF THE PRODUCT. The information in this sheet is intended for guidance only and is based upon laboratory tests that PPG believes to be reliable. PPG may modify the information contained herein at any time as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the PPG product, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specic inquiry, or otherwise, are based on data, which to the best of PPGs knowledge, is reliable. The product and related information is designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills in the industry and it is the end-users responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its own particular use and it shall be deemed that Buyer has done so, as its sole discretion and risk. PPG has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. Therefore, PPG does not accept any liability arising from any loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this information (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). Variations in the application environment, changes in procedures of use, or extrapolation of data may cause unsatisfactory results. This sheet supersedes all previous versions and it is the Buyers responsibility to ensure that this information is current prior to using the product. Current sheets for all PPG Protective & Marine Coatings products are maintained at www.ppgpmc.com. The English text of this data sheet shall prevail over any translation thereof.
PDS
7546
page 4/4
PSX 700A CLEAR COAT

3 pages December 2012 Revision of October 2012
Description
two component engineered polysiloxane clearcoat
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS High gloss: Weathering and UV resistance superior to the best polyurethane clear coats Universal clear nish; Compatible with primed steel, clean metals like stainless steal,copper,bronze and aluminium. As additional protection for existing coatings. Directly on concrete or mortar COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE clear gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.1 g/cm 78% 2% max. 200 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 222 g/l (approx. 1.9 lb/gal) 20 m 39 m/l for 20 m 2 hours at 20 C min. 12 hours *
7 days * (data for components)
at least 12 months substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 83 : 17 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components none 4 hours at 20 C *
page 1/3
PSX 700A CLEAR COAT

December 2012
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA Curing
Thinner 60-12 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i) Thinner 60-12 0 - 5% Thinner 90-58 Curing table substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 16 hours 9 hours 5 hours 3 hours full cure 16 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) relative humidity lower than 40% will extend the drying times Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C REFERENCES 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
PSX 700A CLEAR COAT

December 2012
PDS
7549
page 3/3
SFF 1078
2 pages March 2013 Revision of July 2006
Description
an acrylic resin based uorescent paint with excellent color brightness and uorescence and resistance to stain
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS marking of trafc signs outdoor sign boards facilities for serial security COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner SAFETY PRECAUTIONS approx. 50% by volume 40 m 12.5 m/l for 40 m min.2 hours at 20 C max. unlimited at least 12 months the surface should be free from dust, oil, grease, moisture and other contaminants white, orange, yellow at
Thinner 21-06 0 - 10% BRUSH Thinner 21-06 0 - 10% adequate ventilation to remove solvent must be maintained during application and curing this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes respiratory protection is recommended when applying this material in conned spaces or stagnant air.
page 1/2
SFF 1078
March 2013
page 2/2
SF ALKYD FINISH
Description
alkyd nishing coat suitable for interior and exterior use quick drying good weather resistance good colour retention not suitable for immersion in water or continuous splash of water can be applied over intact alkyd paints
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
various colours on request gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.1 g/cm 34 % 50 m 6.8 m/l for 50 m 1 hour at 25 C ( dry to hard: 8 hours at 25C) min. 24 hours at 25 C max. unlimited at least 12 months previous suitable coat; (e.g. SF ALKYD PRIMER) dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Thinner 20-05 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.0 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 20-05 0 - 3%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.38 - 0.46 mm (= 0.015 - 0.018 in) 8 - 12 MPa (= approx. 80 - 120 bar; 1160 - 1740 p.s.i.) Thinner 20-05 0 - 5%
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner
page 1/3
SF ALKYD FINISH
March 2013
Thinner 20-05 It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SF ALKYD FINISH
March 2013
PDS
8574
page 3/3
SF ALKYD PRIMER
Description
zinc phosphate alkyd primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS economic general purpose anticorrosive primer suitable for use on superstructures and on steel surfaces not normally exposed to water immersion Lead and Chromate free should not be used over zinc primer, except when exposed to dry interior conditions to be recoated with conventional paint systems quick drying COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES grey, redbrown, orange at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.26 g/cm 45 - 50 % 75 m 11.3 - 12.5 m/l for 75 m 1 hour at 25 C ( dry to hard: 4 hours at 25C) min. 3 hours at 25 C max. no limitations at least 12 months steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 steel; power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St2 previous coat; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point but not above 50C
stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Thinner 20-05 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.0 - 1.5 mm Thinner 20-05 0 - 3%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 - 0.53 mm (= 0.017 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.)
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
page 1/3
SF ALKYD PRIMER
March 2013
BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT Worldwide availability
Thinner 20-05 0 - 5% Thinner 20-05 It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SF ALKYD PRIMER
March 2013
PDS
8573
page 3/3
SF Chloro Finish
2 pages March 2013 Revision of May 2004
Description
Air drying type chlorinated rubber nish with good water and color retention chlorinated rubber nish very good colour and gloss retention quick drying cures at temperatures down to -10C
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA Mass density Volume solids Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner REFERENCES
colours available on request gloss approx. 1.1 g/cm (depending on colours) approx. 38% by volume 35 m 10.8 m/l for 35 m 30 min. at 20 C min.6 hours at 20C max. unlimited 12 months previous coat (chlorinated rubber, vinyl, acryl ): dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point Thinner 21-06 5 - 10% 1.8 - 2.0 mm 0.2 - 0.3 MPa (= approx. 2 - 3 bar; 29 - 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 3% 0.019 - 0.023 in (0.5 - 0.6 mm) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1740 - 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 3% Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 1/2
SF Chloro Finish
March 2013
PDS
7323
page 2/2
SF Chloro High Build

Description
High build chlorinated rubber type primer/ sealer anticorrosive primer/sealer excellent water resistance can be applied at low temperatures, down to -10C can be applied by airless spray, roller and brush
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA Mass density Volume solids Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
Grey, redbrown & colors available on request at approx. 1.3 g/cm (depending on colours) approx. 43% by volume 75 - 100 m 5.73 m/l for 75 m 4.30 m/l for 100 m 1 hour at 20 C min.6 hours at 20C max. unlimited 12 months steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point SF Chloro Sealer, SF Chloro Finish or according to coating system Thinner 21-06 5 - 10% 1.8 - 2.0 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.)
SYSTEM SPECIFICATION AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
page 1/3

March 2013
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner REFERENCES
Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% 0.019 - 0.025 in (0.5 - 0.6 mm) 14 MPa (= approx. 145 bar; 2100 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3

March 2013
PDS
7319K
page 3/3
SF Chloro Sealer
Description
Air drying type chlorinated rubber sealer with good corrosion and water resistance used as sealer or coating excellent corrosion and water resistance excellent adehesion with subsequent coating anticorrosive tiecoat
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA Mass density Volume solids Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
Light grey, light brown ( aluminium pigmented) at approx. 1.3 g/cm (depending on colours) approx. 38% by volume 75 - 100 m 5.07 m/l for 75 m 3.80 m/l for 100 m 2 hours at 20 C min.6 hours at 20C max. unlimited 12 months steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point SF Chloro Finish, antifouling or according to coating system Thinner 21-06 5 - 10% 1.8 - 2.0 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% 0.019 - 0.025 in (0.5 - 0.6 mm) 14 MPa (= approx. 145 bar; 2100 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%
SYSTEM SPECIFICATION AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner
page 1/3
SF Chloro Sealer
March 2013
REFERENCES
Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard
see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SF Chloro Sealer
March 2013
PDS
7320
page 3/3
SF EPOXY PRIMER
3 pages March 2013 Revision of March 2006
Description
two component polyamide cured anticorrosive epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS anticorrosive primer for structural steel suitable as a system primer in various paint systems fast curing type COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES redbrown, grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) approx. 1.4 g/cm 52% 3% by volume 50 m depending on system 10.4 m/l for 50 m min. 6-8 hours at 20 C max. 30 days, depending on exposure conditions at least 12 months ( store pigment moisture free ) for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole (Rz )40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss, welds, rusty and damaged areas blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 for atmospheric exposure; : steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole (Rz )40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer pretreated according to SPSS or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 mix thoroughly together for half an hour prior to application in the proportions as delivered 8 hours at 20 C Thinner 91-92 5 - 10% 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% approx. 0.48 - 0.64 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.)
Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
page 1/3
SF EPOXY PRIMER
March 2013
Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 91-92 It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SF EPOXY PRIMER
March 2013
PDS
8571
page 3/3
SF EPOXY FINISH
3 pages March 2013 Revision of January 2012
Description
two component polyamide cured high gloss epoxy nish
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS high gloss epoxy nish general purpose epoxy build coat in protective coating systems for steel and concrete structures exposed to atmospheric land or marine conditions can be overcoated after long term outdoor exposure excellent decontamination property excellent durability COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE colours available on request gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) approx. 1.2 g/cm (depending on colours) approx. 56% by volume 40 m depending on system 14.0 m/l for 40 m min. 8 hours at 20 C max. 3 months 12 months previous coat; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 mix thoroughly by a mechanical mixer before application Agitate continuously during application none 5 hours at 20 C Thinner 91-92 10 - 30% approx. 1.5 - 2.0 mm (= 0.059 - 0.079 in) 30 - 40 MPa (= approx. 300 - 400 bar; 4351 - 5802 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 20% approx. 0.43 - 0.48 mm (= 0.017 - 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%
page 1/3
SF EPOXY FINISH
March 2013
Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Overcoating table substrate temperature 0C 10C 20C 30C 6 hours 40C 4 hours 14.0 40
with itself
minimum interval maximum interval
24 hours 12 hours 8 hours
6 months 4 months 3 months 2 months 1 month
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table substrate temperature 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 18 hours 10 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours full cure 16 days 10 days 7 days 6 days 5 days
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C REFERENCES 8 hours 5 hours 4 hours 2 hours see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431
Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SF EPOXY FINISH
March 2013
PDS
8572
page 3/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 20
4 pages January 2013 Revision of September 2009
Description
one component water borne high build zinc phosphate primer/coating based on acrylic dispersion
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons excellent adhesion to well pretreated steel good anticorrosive properties fast drying can be overcoated with most water borne acrylics, water borne epoxy coatings and alkyd paints as well as certain solvent borne two component products COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES RAL colours (other colours available on request) at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.3 g/cm 43% 2% max. 19 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 25 g/l (approx. 0.2 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 75 m per coat 5.7 m/l for 75 m 30 minutes at 20 C min. 4 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel; pretreated according to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; sweep blasted or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Ss or SPSS-Pt2 substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75% stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much tap water results in reduced sag resistance must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport tap water 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.)
*for localized areas of difcult access only
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
page 1/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 20
January 2013
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
tap water 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1740 - 2176 p.s.i.) long haired brush or polyether roller with rounded edges tap water 0 - 5%
* for localised areas of difcult access only
tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator lter and tip lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2) Table 1: from solvent borne- to water borne paints 1st cleaning 2nd cleaning 3rd cleaning With Thinner 90-53 With Thinner 70-05 With warm tap water (30 - 35C) after which water borne paints can be sprayed
CLEANING PROCEDURE
Table 2: from water borne- to solvent borne paints 1st cleaning 2nd cleaning 3rd cleaning
Thinner 70-05 can be re-used
With warm tap water (30 - 35C) With Thinner 70-05 With Thinner 90-53
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for Sigma Aquacover 20 for dft up to 75 m substrate temperature 5C 16 hours unlimited 10C 6 hours unlimited 20C 4 hours unlimited 30C 3 hours unlimited
with water borne acrylic and alkyd nishes
page 2/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 20
January 2013
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a water borne paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
page 3/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 20
January 2013
186582 177804
PDS RAL 7030 redbrown
7149 7030262200 2008002200
page 4/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 40
4 pages February 2013 Revision of September 2009
Description
one component water borne acrylic dispersion nish
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons good weather resistance good colour retention fast drying fast handling not suitable for immersion in water COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES RAL colours (other colours available on request) semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.1 g/cm 42% 2% max. 12 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 14 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 50 m per coat 8.2 m/l for 50 m 30 minutes min. 4 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months steel coated with suitable primer (e.g. Sigma AquaCover 20) previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75% stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra tap water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much tap water results in reduced sag resistance must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport tap water 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.)
page 1/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 40
February 2013
tap water 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1740 - 2176 p.s.i.) long haired brush or polyether roller with rounded edges tap water 0 - 5% *for localised areas of difcult access only tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator lter and tip lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2) Table 1: from solvent borne- to water borne paints 1st cleaning 2nd cleaning 3rd cleaning With Thinner 90-53 With Thinner 70-05 with warm tap water (30 - 35C) after which waterborne paints can be sprayed
CLEANING PROCEDURE
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for Sigma Aquacover 40 for dft up to 50 m substrate temperature 5C 16 hours unlimited 10C 6 hours unlimited 20C 4 hours unlimited 30C 3 hours unlimited
with itself
page 2/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 40
February 2013
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 40
February 2013
199310 199313
PDS base L base Z
7251 0710002197 0070002185
page 4/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 45
Description
one component water borne acrylic dispersion nish
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS nish for interior accommodation, machinery spaces and superstructure particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons fast drying and recoatable good weather resistance good colour retention allows safer working during hull outtting of new buildings certicate for low ame spread: see sheet 1883 COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES white (other colours on request) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.2 g/cm 34% 2%, depending on colour max. 9 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 10 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 50 m per coat 6.8 m/l for 50 m 6 hours at 5 C 3 hours at 10 C 1 hour at 20 C min. 6 hours * max. unlimited * at least 12 months, keep above 0C previous suitable coat; (e.g. Sigma Aquacover 25) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75% marine system sheets: 3104, 3105
SYSTEM SPECIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra tap water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much tap water results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport
page 1/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 45
February 2013
tap water 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2.0 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) tap water 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1740 - 2176 p.s.i.) long haired brush or polyether roller with rounded edges tap water 0 - 5%
* for localised areas of difcult access only
tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator lter and tip lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2) Table 1: from solvent borne- to water borne paints 1st cleaning 2nd cleaning 3rd cleaning With Thinner 90-53 With Thinner 70-05 With warm tap water (30 - 35C) after which water borne paints can be sprayed
CLEANING PROCEDURE
page 2/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 45
February 2013
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for Sigma Aquacover 45 for dft up to 50 m substrate temperature 5C 16 hours unlimited 10C 6 hours 20C 4 hours 30C 3 hours
with itself
minimum interval maximum intervalinterior
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Worldwide availability It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
page 3/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 45
February 2013
146103 146104
PDS white white
7250 7000002200 7000001400
page 4/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 80
4 pages September 2012 Revision of June 2009
Description
water borne high build acrylic coating reduced explosion risk and re hazard excellent adhesion to various types of old or weathered paints fast drying can be overcoated with dispersion paints single coat application excellent elongation (exible)
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
grey RAL 7032 (other colours on request) semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.2 g/cm 45% 2% max. 29 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 35 g/l (approx. 0.3 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) see information sheet 1411 150 - 300 m per coat 3.0 m/l for 150 m 1.5 m/l for 300 m 4 hours * at 20 C min. 6 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 for good corrosion protection substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing preferably relative humidity should not exceed 80% clean, dry and free from any contamination good ventilation is required during application and curing (please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434) stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra tap water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much tap water results in reduced sag resistance tap water 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.58 mm (= 0.019 - 0.023 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1740 - 2176 p.s.i.)
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
page 1/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 80
September 2012
preferable not to be thinned, if necessary tap water tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator lter and tip lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2) Table 1: from solvent borne- to water borne paints Paint type: 1st cleaning with Thinner Alkyd 20-05 Chlorinated rubber 21-22 Epoxy 90-53 Pur 91-88
CLEANING PROCEDURE
2nd cleaning with Thinner 70-05 3rd cleaning with warm tap water (30 - 35C) after which waterborne paints can be sprayed Table 2: from water borne- to solvent borne paints Paint type: Alkyd Chlorinated rubber Epoxy Pur
1st cleaning with warm tap water (30 - 35C) 2nd cleaning with Thinner 70-05 3rd cleaning withThinner
none
none
90-53
91-84
Overcoating table for Sigma Aquacover 80 for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval Worldwide availability 10C 6 hours unlimited 20C 4 hours unlimited 30C 3 hours unlimited 40C 2 hours unlimited
page 2/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 80
September 2012
REFERENCES
see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 80
September 2012
PDS
7152
page 4/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 200

5 pages December 2012 Revision of September 2009
Description
two component polyamine cured water borne epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy primer in protective coating systems for steel structures in atmospheric exposure particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons excellent rust preventing properties in industrial or coastal atmospheres good adhesion to steel and galvanised steel free from lead and chromate containing pigments can be overcoated with most dispersion and alkyd paints and 2 component durable nishes easy application by brush/roller and (airless) spray suitable for application on concrete COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES grey (RAL 7038), buff (RAL 1015) eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 53% 2% max. 5 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 6 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 75 - 100 m depending on system 7.1 m/l for 75 m 5.3 m/l for 100 m 1.5 hours at 20 C min. 2 hours (with itself) max. 6 months
at least 6 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m or power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 galvanised steel; sweep blasted or otherwise roughened; dry and free from salts and other contamination concrete; surface must be cured, clean, dry and free of disintegrated or chalky materials substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75%
page 1/5
SIGMA AQUACOVER 200

December 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 70 : 30 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much water results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure water should be added after mixing the components adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport none 3 hours at 20 C *
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
tap water 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) tap water 0 - 5% tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator lter and tip lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2)
CLEANING PROCEDURE
Table 1: from solvent borne- to water borne paints 1st cleaning 2nd cleaning 3rd cleaning With Thinner 90-53 With Thinner 70-05 With warm tap water (30 - 35C) after which water borne paints can be sprayed
page 2/5
SIGMA AQUACOVER 200

December 2012
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for Sigma Aquacover 200 for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 10C 3 hours 24 hours 6 months 20C 2 hours 16 hours 6 months 30C 1 hour 12 hours 6 months 40C 45 min. 8 hours 6 months
with Sigma AquaCover 400
with SigmaDur 520, SigmaDur 550 minimum interval
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 3 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour 45 min. dry to handle 16 hours 5 hours 4 hours 3 hours full cure 6 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C Worldwide availability 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
page 3/5
SIGMA AQUACOVER 200

December 2012
REFERENCES
Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Surface preparation of concrete (oors) Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature
see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1496 see information sheet 1650
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMA AQUACOVER 200

December 2012
220700 240678
PDS 7870 RAL 7038 (grey) 7038262160 RAL 1015 (buff) 1015262160
page 5/5
SIGMA AQUACOVER 400

5 pages January 2013 Revision of September 2009
Description
two component polyamine cured water borne epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy build coat in protective coating systems for steel structures in atmospheric exposure particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons free from lead and chromate containing pigments can be overcoated with most dispersion and alkyd paints and 2 component durable nishes easy application by brush/roller and (airless) spray suitable for concrete oors COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES limited colour range available semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 53% 2% max. 5 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 6 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 75 - 100 m depending on system 7.1 m/l for 75 m 5.3 m/l for 100 m 1.5 hours at 20 C min. 2 hours (with itself) max. 6 months
at least 6 months
steel with suitable primer (e.g. Sigma AquaCover 200); dry and free from any contamination and within the recoat times galvanised steel; sweep blasted or otherwise roughened; dry and free from salts and other contamination concrete; surface must be cured, clean, dry and free of disintegrated or chalky materials substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75%
page 1/5
SIGMA AQUACOVER 400

January 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 70 : 30 adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport too much water results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra water may be required to obtain application viscosity water should be added after mixing the components none 3 hours at 20 C *
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
tap water 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) tap water 0 - 5% tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator lter and tip lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2) Table 1: from solvent borne- to water borne paints 1st cleaning 2nd cleaning 3rd cleaning With Thinner 90-53 With Thinner 70-05 With warm tap water (30 - 35C) after which water borne paints can be sprayed
CLEANING PROCEDURE
page 2/5
SIGMA AQUACOVER 400

January 2013
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for Sigma Aquacover 400 for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 10C 3 hours 24 hours 6 months 20C 2 hours 16 hours 6 months 30C 1 hour 12 hours 6 months 40C 45 min. 8 hours 6 months
with itself
with SigmaDur 520, SigmaDur 550 minimum interval
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 3 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour 45 min. dry to handle 18 hours 6 hours 5 hours 4 hours full cure 6 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C Worldwide availability 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used
page 3/5
SIGMA AQUACOVER 400

January 2013
REFERENCES
Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Surface preparation of concrete (oors) Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMA AQUACOVER 400

January 2013
220702
PDS 7871 RAL 5011 (grey) 5011262160
page 5/5
SIGMA AQUACOVER 500

4 pages June 2012 Revision of March 2011
Description
two component polyamine cured water borne epoxy nish
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy nish coat in protective coating systems for steel structures in atmospheric exposure particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons free from lead and chromate containing pigments easy application by brush/roller and (airless) spray COLOURS AND GLOSS limited colour range available gloss due to the lead and chromate free pigmentationbright colours might have a reduced opacity a primer in a suitable colour may be necessary (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after 1.3 g/cm 52% 2% max. 5 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 6 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) 50 m depending on system 10.4 m/l for 50 m 4 hours at 20 C min. 16 hours (with itself) 4 days at 20 C
(data for components)
BASIC DATA AT 20 C
Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
at least 6 months steel with suitable primer (e.g. Sigma AquaCover 200); dry and free from any contamination and within the recoat times galvanised steel; sweep blasted or otherwise roughened; dry and free from salts and other contamination substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75%
page 1/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 500

June 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 35 : 65 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much water results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure water should be added after mixing the components adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport none 1.5 hours at 20 C *
tap water 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) tap water 0 - 5% tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator lter and tip lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2) Table 1: from solvent borne- to water borne paints 1st cleaning 2nd cleaning 3rd cleaning With Thinner 90-53 With Thinner 70-05 With warm tap water (30 - 35C) after which water borne paints can be sprayed
CLEANING PROCEDURE
page 2/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 500

June 2012
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 3 hours 1.5 hours 1 hour
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 500

June 2012
PDS
7872
page 4/4
SIGMA AQUAWELD 100

5 pages May 2013 Revision of August 2010
Description
two component moisture curing, water borne low zinc (ethyl) silicate prefabrication primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates fast drying properties good cutting and excellent welding properties, including MIG/MAG welding in various positions (either automatic or manual welding) provides regular, smooth weld seams low fume release during welding and cutting no adherence of weldspatter at surrounding primed surface good thermal stability minimizes heat damage during hot work procedures for use in sea water immersion in combination with controlled cathodic protection systems please contact your nearest PPG Protective & Marine Coatings sales ofce certied by Lloyds Register and SLV COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval redbrown at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 30 2% 0 - 40 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC,SED) 0 - 25 g/l (0 - 0.3 lb/gal ) *See information sheet 1411 18 m - see further: "Recommended substrate conditions and temperatures" 15 m/l for 18 m * *See additional data Under optimal ventilation conditions and a substrate temperature of: 10 min. at 20C 6 min. at 40C min. 7 days max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition (data for components) binder: at least 9 months (store above 5C) powder: at least 12 months (store powder moisture free)
page 1/5
SIGMA AQUAWELD 100

May 2013
dry and free from oil and grease and any contamination steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m on steel blasted to above prole, the recommended dft, 18 m, corresponds to 22 m as measured on a smooth test panel minimum thickness for a closed lm is 15 m measured on a smooth test panel substrate temperature should be between 25C and 40C for automatic application a substrate temperature of 30C - 35C is recommended substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point relative humidity during curing should be above 50% preferably the relative humidity should not exceed 85% adequate ventilation is required rst coat shall be SigmaCover 280 or SigmaPrime 200 or other approved systems during storage and construction, contamination of the prefabrication primer should be limited after fabrication, surface defects should be treated according to the scheme below where two possible surface treatments are indicated, the choice of treatment is dependent on the location and on the system to be applied (see system sheets) the preferred pre-treatment for optimal results is shown; other possibilities are indicated in brackets areas contamination weldseams burned damaged corroded white rust immersed conditions to be removed ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) SPSS-ID Pt2 (SCAP *) atmospheric conditions to be removed SPSS-Pt2 SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-ID Pt1 (SCAP*)
SECUNDARY SURFACE PREPARATION
* cleaning by silicon carbide impregnated abrasive pad Note that the back of welded plate may show discoloration (especially on plate where llets have been welded on), this is not to be confused with burned areas and does not require special treatment. Burned through areas may be present (this happens especially when welding thin steel) and these should then be treated as per 'burned areas' above.
page 2/5
SIGMA AQUAWELD 100

May 2013
mixing ratio by weight: binder to powder 48 : 52 pour the binder in the empty steeldrum add the powder to the binder the temperature of the mixture of binder and powder should preferably be above 15C stir the powder thoroughly into the binder stir thoroughly till homogeneous strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen mixed paint is ready for use agitate continuously during application, adjust speed so foam formation will be minimized best performance is obtained when sprayed steel structure stored dry for 24 hours mixed paint should not be stored in closed containers, please consult your local PPG Protective & Marine Coatings sales ofce 4 hours at 20C restricter plate PN029025 (Nordson) prior to nozzle no thinner should be added approx. 0.43 - 0.53 mm (= 0.017 - 0.021 in) 8 - 12 MPa (= approx. 80 - 120 bar; 1160 - 1740 p.s.i.) tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator lter and tip lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2) Table 1: from solvent borne- to water borne shop primer Paint type: 1st cleaning 2nd cleaning 3rd cleaning Solvent borne shop primer With suitable cleaning thinner for previous product With Thinner 70-05 With warm tap water (30 - 35C) after which water borne paints can be sprayed
Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT
CLEANING PROCEDURE
page 3/5
SIGMA AQUAWELD 100

May 2013
Table 2: from water borne- to solvent borne shop primer 1st cleaning 2nd cleaning 3rd cleaning Paint type: With warm tap water (30 - 35C) With Thinner 70-05 with suitable cleaning thinner for the next product Solvent borne shop primer
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMA AQUAWELD 100

May 2013
268430
PDS redbrown
7124 2008002180
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 2
(SigmaCover 640 LT)
4 pages January 2013 Revision of July 2012
Description
two component high solids epoxy coating low temperature curing down to 0C high performance self priming universal epoxy high solids, low VOC surface tolerant and abrasion resistant compatible with prepared damp surfaces good adhesion on most existing coatings available in a wide colour range also available with MIO pigmentation good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (EPA Method 24) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
RAL colours (other colours available on request) semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm (white) 85% 3% max. 114 g/kg 163 g/l ( 1.4 lb/gal) 180 g/ltr (1.5 lb/gal) 100 - 200 m 8.5 m/l for 100 m 6 hours* 10 C min. 14 hours * max. see tables * at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 or hand tool clean to ISO-St2 or ultra high pressure water jet to WJ2L for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 concrete and other cement-bonded substrates; dry, hard and free from contamination such as laitance, grease and dust aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened for single pack coatings; extra precautions are necessary mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 1 : 1 the paint should be stirred well before use, preferably by means of a mechanical mixer, to ensure homogeneity add cure to resin and continue stirring until homogeneous 1 hour at 20 C *
Pot life
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 2
(SigmaCover 640 LT)
January 2013
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions no extra thinner needed approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 - 18 MPa (= approx. 150 - 180 bar; 2176 - 2611 p.s.i.) apply evenly using a well loaded brush or roller Application by brush or roller will provide approx. 80 microns dft. in a single coat application. Thinner 90-58 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m/l dft in m 8.5 100 6.8 125 4.3 200
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 2 for dft at 125 m substrate temperature with itself with polyurethanes minimum interval maximum interval minimum interval maximum interval 5C 24 hours 1 month 24 hours 14 days 10C 12 hours 1 month 12 hours 14 days 20C 6 hours 1 month 6 hours 7 days 30C 3 hours 1 month 3 hours 4 days
*An extended recoatable window may be allowable in some circumstances. Please contact your PPG PMC representative for more details
Curing
Curing table for dft at 125 m substrate temperature 0C 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 38 hours 14 hours 5 hours 3 hours full cure 21 days 7 days 4 days 3 days
during the curing period precautions must be taken to avoid contact of the coating with moisture, otherwise blushing may occur
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 2
(SigmaCover 640 LT)
January 2013
Pot life 0C / 32F 10C / 50F 20C / 68F 30C / 86F Worldwide availability 4 hours 2 hours 1 hour 30 min.
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Surface preparation of concrete (oors) Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1496 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 2
(SigmaCover 640 LT)
January 2013
PDS
7989
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 2 AL (SigmaCover 640 Aluminium LT )

4 pages July 2012 Revision of October 2011
Description
two component high solids epoxy coating low temperature curing down to 0C high performance self priming universal epoxy high solids, low VOC surface tolerant and abrasion resistant compatible with prepared damp surfaces good adhesion on most existing coatings good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals
aluminium semigloss (data for mixed product) 1.2 g/cm 79% 3% max. 197 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 240 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 125 m 6.3 m/l for 125 m * 2 hours at 10 C * min. 16 hours * max. see tables * at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 or hand tool clean to ISO-St2 or ultra high pressure water jet to WJ2L for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 concrete and other cement-bonded substrates; dry, hard and free from contamination such as laitance, grease and dust aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened For single pack coatings, extra precautions are necessary. mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 1 : 1 the paint should be stirred well before use, preferably by means of a mechanical mixer, to ensure homogeneity add cure to resin and continue stirring until homogeneous 2.5 hours at 10 C
Pot life
page 1/4

July 2012
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions no extra thinner needed approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 - 18 MPa (= approx. 150 - 180 bar; 2176 - 2611 p.s.i.) apply evenly using a well loaded brush or roller Application by brush or roller will provide approx. 80 microns dft. in a single coat application. Thinner 90-58 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 7.9 m/l 100 m 6.3 m/l 125 m
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 2 Al for dft at 125 m substrate temperature with itself minimum interval maximum interval 5C 24 hours extended* 10C 16 hours extended* 20C 8 hours extended*
Please contact your PPG PMC representative for more details
Curing
Curing table for dft at 125 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C dry to handle 18 hours 14 hours 4 hours full cure 21 days 7 days 4 days
during the curing period precautions must be taken to avoid contact of the coating with moisture, otherwise blushing may occur Pot life 5 C (41 F) 10 C (50 F) 4 hours 2.5 hours
page 2/4

July 2012
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Surface preparation of concrete (oors) Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet {1410} see information sheet {1411} see information sheet {1430} see information sheet {1431} see information sheet {1433} see information sheet {1434} see information sheet {1490} see information sheet {1491} see information sheet {1496} see information sheet {1650}
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets {1430}, {1431} and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
page 3/4

July 2012
PDS
7993
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 211
Description
two component polyamide cured epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS epoxy primer in protective coating systems for concrete and sand/cement substrates (oors and walls) can be recoated with most two component coatings good water resistance fair chemical resistance to spillage and splash resistant to impact and abrasion easy to clean COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE white eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 51% 2% max. 278 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 396 g/l (approx. 3.3 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 35 m 14.6 m/l for 35 m 30 minutes * min. 16 hours * max. 10 days *
7 days *

concrete, sand/cement; dry and free from any contamination moisture content of concrete should be max. 4% substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components for impregnation of concrete 30% thinner should be added none 14 hours at 20 C *
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 211
March 2013
Thinner 91-92 10 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 10 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.33 mm (= 0.013 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 14.6 35 12.8 40 10.2 50
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 211 for dft up to 35 m substrate temperature with most 2 component coatings minimum interval maximum interval 10C 48 hours 21 days 15C 24 hours 14 days 20C 16 hours 10 days 30C 8 hours 7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 35 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 120 min. 60 min. 45 min. 30 min. 20 min. dry to handle 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour full cure 21 days 14 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 211
March 2013
Pot life (at application viscosity) 15 C 20 C 25 C 30 C 35 C Worldwide availability 16 hours 14 hours 11 hours 8 hours 5 hours
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Surface preparation of concrete (oors) Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1496 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 211
March 2013
179505 179506
PDS white white
7406 7000001400 7000002200
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 240
5 pages May 2013 Revision of May 2013
Description
two component high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating can be used directly to metal very good surface wetting excellent corrosion resistance outstanding (sea)water resistance resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection good resistance against chemically polluted water good abrasion resistance low temperature cure down to -18 C
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
limited colour range available semi-gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 87 2% max. 102 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 153 g/l (approx. 1.3 lb/gal) 100 - 300 m depending on system * 8.7 m/l for 100 m 5 hours at 20 C min. 5 hours * max. 6 months * at least 12 months
for immersion exposure: steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; pretreated preferably to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m or according to ISO-St3, hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3L shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 previous coat; (e.g. SigmaCover 240 or suitable primer) dry and free from any contamination and within the minimum and maximum overcoating time suitable for wet blast or ultra high pressure water (UHPWW) cleaned substrates (damp or dry) substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 240
May 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components 15 minutes at 20C 1.5 hours at 20 C *
Induction time Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
Thinner 21-06 or Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 or Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.58 mm (= 0.019 - 0.023 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) no extra thinner is necessary, but up to 5% Thinner 21-06 or Thinner 91-92 can be added if desired Thinner 90-58 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 8.7 100 2.9 300
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 240
May 2013
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 240 for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature with itself with urethane, PSX minimum interval maximum interval minimum interval maximum interval -5C 0C 10C 20C 5 hours 30C 2 hours 4 hours 15 days
6 months 6 months 6 months 3 months 1 month 36 hours 24 hours 14 hours 7 hours 3 months 3 months 2 months 1 month
surface should be dry and free from any contamination A detergent wash with SigmaRite 88 or equivalent is required prior to application of topcoats after 30 days of exposure if maximum recoating time is exceeded, then roughen surface Alkyd coatings and waterborne acrylic coatings should be applied after the lm is dry to handle and not greater than three times dry to handle time. Maximum recoating time is highly dependent upon actual surface temperature - not simply air temperatures. Sun-Exposed or otherwise heated surface will shorten the maximum recoat window Curing Curing table for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C touch dry 36 hours 24 hours 10 hours 5 hours 3 hours dry to handle 60 hours 36 hours 16 hours 10 hours 8 hours Service - water immersion 21 days 14 days 10 days 6 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing Drying times are dependent on air and surface temperatures as well as lm thickness, ventilation and relative humidity. Pot life (at application viscosity) 15C 20C 30C 2 hours 90 min. 40 min.
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 240
May 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 240
May 2013
PDS
7991
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 256
5 pages June 2012 Revision of January 2011
Description
two component high build polyamide cured recoatable zinc phosphate epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy primer or build coat for steel and concrete structures suitable for atmospheric and marine conditions can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings even after long weathering periods lead- and chromate free excellent rust preventing properties in industrial or coastal atmospheres tough, with long term exibility cures even at temperatures down to -10C good adhesion to steel, galvanised steel and aged epoxy coatings easy application, both by airless spray and brush can be used as epoxy primer/nish (for dry internal areas) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES cream, pink (other colours on request) eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 63% 2% max. 245 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 338 g/l (approx. 2.8 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 75 - 150 m depending on system 6.3 m/l for 100 m * 2 hours at 20 C min. 3 hours * max. unlimited 4 days * at 20 C at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 / SSPC-SP3 galvanised steel; free from any contamination and sweep blasted till an even at appearance (only for internal dry exposure conditions) aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is acceptable provided substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 95%
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 256
June 2012
Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 82 : 18 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components 8 hours at 20 C * Thinner 91-92 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Overcoating table for dft up to 100 m 8.4 75 6.3 100 4.2 150
for SigmaCover 256, SigmaCover 435, SigmaCover 456, SigmaCover 410
substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval
-5C 36 hours
5C 10 hours
10C
20C
30C
40C
4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 2 hours
no limitation, provided that the surface is free from any contamination
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 256
June 2012
Overcoating table for dft up to 100 m for SigmaDur 520, SigmaDur 550, various chlorinated rubbers, vinyls, acrylates and alkyd paints substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 72 hours 5C 10C * 20C 8 hours 30C 5 hours 40C 3 hours
24 16 hours hours
nishes require a corresponding undercoat SigmaCover 256 should not be overcoated with coal tar epoxy coatings Curing Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature -10C -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C full cure 20 days 14 days 10 days 8 days 6 days 5 days 4 days 3 days 2 days dry to handle 24 - 48 hours 24 - 30 hours 18 - 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 256
June 2012
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 15 C 20 C 30 C 35 C Worldwide availability 16 hours 10 hours 8 hours 5 hours 4 hours
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Conversion tabels see information sheet 1410 Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in conned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1491 Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1650 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
Reference
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 256
June 2012
179630 179635
PDS cream pink
7412 3012002200 6007002200
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 280
6 pages October 2012 Revision of November 2010
Description
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy primer in protective coating systems for steel and non ferrous metals good adhesion to steel and galvanised steel good adhesion to non ferrous metals good ow and wetting properties good water and corrosion resistance cures at temperatures down to +5C suitable for touching up of weld seams and damages of epoxy coatings during construction excellent recoatability can be overcoated with most alkyd-, chlorinated rubber-, vinyl-, epoxy- and two component polyurethane coatings suitable on wet blast cleaned substrates (damp or dry) compatible with well designed cathodic protection systems COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) yellow/green (redbrown on request) eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 57% 2% max. 327 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 432 g/l (approx. 3.6 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 50 - 100 m depending on system 11.4 m/l for 50 m 5.7 m/l for 100 m * 1.5 hour at 20 C min. see tables * max. see tables *
at least 24 months * see additional data
page 1/6
SIGMACOVER 280
October 2012
for immersion exposure: steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned (dry or wet) to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2 L (blasting prole 30 - 75 m) IMO-MSC.215(82) Requirements for Water Ballast Tanks: steel; ISO 8501-3:2006 grade P2, with all edges treated to a rounded radius of minimum 2 mm or subject to three pass grinding steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m for shop primer with IMO type approval; no additional requirements for shop primer without IMO type approval; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 removing at least 70% of intact shop primer, blasting prole 30 - 75 m dust quantity rating "1 for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992) for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or according to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 galvanised steel; cleaned from grease, salts, contamination and roughened up substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85%
marine
system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3104, 3105, 3106 (spec. 5,7), 3107, 3108
page 2/6
SIGMACOVER 280
October 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components none 8 hours at 20 C *
Induction time Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 mm (= 0.018 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) no extra thinner is necessary, but up to 5% Thinner 91-92 can be added if desired Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 11.4 50 7.6 75 5.7 100 50 m
page 3/6
SIGMACOVER 280
October 2012
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 280 for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature with various two pack epoxy- and polyurethane coatings minimum interval Max interval when exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval Max interval when not exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval 5C 10C 20C 30C 6 hours 40C 4 hours
3 months 3 months 3 months 2 months 2 months
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Overcoating table for SigmaCover 280 for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature with other types of paint like: most chlorinated rubber-, vinyl-, alkyd coatings minimum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 20C 30C 3 hours 7 days 40C 2 hours 4 days
16 hours 10 hours 5 hours 21 days 21 days 10 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination glossy nishes require a corresponding undercoat Curing Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 8 hours 4 hours 2 hours 1 hour 45 min. dry to handle 13 hours 6 hours 2.5 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour full cure 21 days 14 days 7 days 5 days 3 days
page 4/6
SIGMACOVER 280
October 2012
Pot life (at application viscosity) 15 C 20 C 30 C 35 C Worldwide availability 10 hours 8 hours 5 hours 4 hours
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Conversion tabels see information sheet 1410 Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in conned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1491 Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1650 PPG Protective & Marine Coatings Ballast Tank Working Procedure New Building for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 5/6
SIGMACOVER 280
October 2012
179083 179085
PDS yellow/green redbrown
7417 4009002200 (144497 base, 142014 hardener) 6137002200 (144493 base, 142014 hardener)
page 6/6
SIGMACOVER 280 LT
6 pages October 2012 Revision of February 2010
Description
two component polyamide cured epoxy primer general purpose epoxy primer in protective coating systems for steel good adhesion to steel and galvanised steel good ow and wetting properties good water and corrosion resistance suitable for touching up of weld seams and damages of epoxy coatings during construction recoatable with most two component epoxy and polyurethane coatings compatible with well designed controlled cathodic protection systems cures at temperatures down to -10C yellow/green eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 57% 2% max. 332 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 438 g/l (approx. 3.7 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 50 - 100 m depending on system 11.4 m/l for 50 m 5.7 m/l for 100 m * 3 hours at 10 C min. 8 hours * max. see overcoating table *
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place)
at least 24 months
page 1/6
SIGMACOVER 280 LT
October 2012
for immersion exposure: steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned (dry or wet) to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 IMO-MSC.215(82) Requirements for Water Ballast Tanks: steel; ISO 8501-3:2006 grade P2, with all edges treated to a rounded radius of minimum 2 mm or subject to three pass grinding steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m for shop primer with IMO type approval; no additional requirements for shop primer without IMO type approval; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 removing at least 70% of intact shop primer, blasting prole 30 - 75 m dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992) for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or according to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 galvanised steel; cleaned from grease, salts, contamination and roughened up substrate temperature should be between -10C up to 15C during application and curing and at least 3C above dew point and free from ice and any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is possible, but curing to hardness takes longer and complete resistance will be reached when temperature increases maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85%
marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3104,3105, 3106 (spec. 7, 8), 3107, 3108
page 2/6
SIGMACOVER 280 LT
October 2012
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 mm (= 0.018 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) no extra thinner is necessary, but up to 5% Thinner 91-92 can be added if desired Thinenr 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 11.4 50 7.6 75 5.7 100 50 m
page 3/6
SIGMACOVER 280 LT
October 2012
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 280 LT for dft up to 75 m substrate temperature with other types of paint like: most chlorinated rubber-, vinyl-, alkyd coatings minimum interval -10C -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C
24 hours 16 hours 12 hours 8 hours 4 hours 3 hours 4 days 4 days 4 days
maximum interval 10 days 10 days 7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination glossy nishes require a corresponding undercoat Overcoating table for SigmaCover 280 LT for dft up to 75 m substrate temperature with various two pack epoxy- and polyurethane coatings minimum interval -10C -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C
48 hours 24 hours 16 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours
Max interval 2 months 2 months 2 months 1 month 1 month 1 month when exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval Max interval when 3 months 3 months 3 months 2 months 2 months 1 month not exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval surface should be dry and free from any contamination
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 75 m substrate temperature -10C -5C 5C 10C 15C touch dry 20 hours 10 hours 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours dry to handle 32 hours 16 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours full cure 21 days 14 days 9 days 7 days 5 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 5 C 10 C 10 hours 8 hours
page 4/6
SIGMACOVER 280 LT
October 2012
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Conversion tabels see information sheet 1410 Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in conned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1491 Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1650 PPG Protective & Marine Coatings Ballast Tank Working Procedure New Building for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 5/6
SIGMACOVER 280 LT
October 2012
181451
PDS yellow/green
7424 4009002200 (144497 base, 181453 hardener)
page 6/6
SIGMACOVER 300
5 pages September 2009 Revision of September 2005
DESCRIPTION
two component high build polyamine adduct cured coaltar epoxy coating outstanding (sea)water resistance (outside hull and ballast tanks) outstanding water and crude oil resistance excellent corrosion resistance good resistance against chemically polluted water can be applied and cures at low temperatures (application possible down to -5C, provided the substrate is free from ice) good abrasion resistance Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection black, brown - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 71 2% max. 207 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 305 g/l (approx. 2.5 lb/gal) 125 - 500 m (see system sheets) 5.7 m/l for 125 m * 4 hours min. 6 hours * max. 5 days * 7 days * (data for components)
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after
at least 12 months
for immersion in water, with cathodic protection: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 existing coal tar epoxy coating; sufciently roughened and free from any contamination for immersion in water, without cathodic protection: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 existing coal tar epoxy coating; sufciently roughened and free from any contamination for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 300
September 2009
steel with approved shop primer; power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 or SPSS-Pt3 existing coal tar epoxy coating; sufciently roughened and free from any contamination in order to obtain the maximum resistance against chemical- and mechanical inuences the substrate temperature should be above 5C during application and curing application at temperatures down to -5C is possible but curing to hardness takes longer and complete cure will be reached when temperature increases substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point SYSTEM SPECIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3106, 3107
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 86 : 14 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
none 6 hours at 20C *

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
Thinner 91-79 0 - 5% for a dft of 250 m 10 - 15% for a dft of 125 m approx. 0.53 - 0.64 mm (= 0.021 - 0.025 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
Thinner 91-79 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 2 - 4 bar; 28 - 57 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 91-79 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 300
September 2009
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 5.7 125 2.8 250 2.4 300 1.8 400 1.4 500 125 m
max. dft when brushing (touch up and spot repair): Overcoating table for dft up to 250 m substrate temperature with SigmaCover 300 and SigmaCover 510 and other compatible paints minimum interval maximum interval when exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval when not exposed to direct sunshine -5C 48 hours 21 days 5C 24 hours 21 days 10C 18 hours 12 days 15C 12 hours 8 days 20C 6 hours 4 days 30C 4 hours 3 days
40C 3 hours 2 days
40 days
40 days
30 days
24 days
18 days
14 days
7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination when overcoated with other paints, tar bleeding will occur when overcoating work is to be carried out on coats thicker than 250 m applied in one coat, the minimum overcoating interval must be extended as follows: for 300 m : 2 times as long for 400 m : 3 times as long for 500 m : 4 times as long adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 300
September 2009
Curing table for dft up to 250 m substrate temperature dry to handle initial cure for exposure to sea water and to slightly polluted atmosphere 96 hours 48 hours 30 hours 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours full cure for immersion in polluted water or crude oil -15 days 10 days 7 days 3 days 2 days
5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Drydockings exposure to sea water is permitted after the initial curing time if SigmaCover 300 has been applied by means of hot airless spray, exposure to sea water is permitted after an initial cure of 4 hours at dfts ranging from 250 - 500 m applied in a one coat application the curing times have to be doubled in order to obtain sufcient mechanical strength the mechanical strength, when cured at low temperature, is low initially, but will increase quickly when exposed to sea water Pot life (at application viscosity) 15C 20C 25C 30C 35C Worldwide availability 8 hours 6 hours 5 hours 4 hours 2 hours
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 300
September 2009
REFERENCES
Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust
see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490
179000 178998
PDS black brown
7472 8000002200 2000002200
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 300 LT
Description
two component high build polyamine adduct cured coaltar epoxy primer/coating outstanding sea water resistance (outside hull and ballast tanks) excellent corrosion resistance good resistance against chemically polluted water cures even at temperatures down to -10C rapid throughput of work can be maintained even at low temperatures resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after
black, brown eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 71% 2% max. 207 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 305 g/l (approx. 2.5 lb/gal) 125 - 250 m 5.7 m/l for 125 m 2.8 m/l for 250 m * 6 hours at 20 C min. 12 hours * max. see overcoating table * 7 days * at 20 C
at least 12 months
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 300 LT
November 2012
for immersion in water, with or without cathodic protection steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 existing suitable epoxy coating or coaltar epoxy coating; in sound condition and sufciently roughened and free from any contamination for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO Sa2 or ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved shop primer; power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 or SPSS-Pt3 existing suitable epoxy coating or coaltar epoxy coating; in sound condition and sufciently roughened and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be between -10C up to 15C during application and curing and at least 3C above dew point and free from ice and any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is possible, but curing to hardness takes longer and complete resistance will be reached when temperature increases maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% marine system sheets: 3101, 3106
Induction time Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
Thinner 91-79 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 2 - 4 bar; 29 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-79 0 - 5% for a dft of 250 m 10 -15% for a dft of 125 m approx. 0.53 - 0.64 mm (= 0.021 - 0.025 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.)
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 300 LT
November 2012
BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 91-79 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: Overcoating table for dft up to 125 m substrate temperature -10C 48 hours 15 days 0C 24 hours 5 days 10C 12 hours 3 days 15C 8 hours 2 days 5.7 125 2.8 250 70 m
with SigmaCover 300 and SigmaCover 510 and other compatible paints
minimum interval Max interval when exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval Max interval when not exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval
30 days
30 days
30 days
20 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination and ice when overcoated with other paints, tar bleeding will occur when overcoating work is to be carried out on coats thicker than 125 m applied in one coat, the minimum overcoating interval must be extended as follows: for 250 m : 2 times as long for 375 m : 3 times as long for 500 m : 4 times as long adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) when application has to be executed at low temperature care should be taken that the temperature of the mixed paint is at least 15C, the induction time should be increased to at least one hour
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 300 LT
November 2012
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 125 m substrate temperature Initial cure for exposure to sea water and to slightly polluted atmosphere 12 days 7 days 5 days 3 days 48 hours 42 hours Full cure for immersion in polluted water or crude oil -21 days 15 days 10 days 7 days 5 days dry to handle
-10C -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 5 C 10 C Worldwide availability 8 hours 6 hours
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 300 LT
November 2012
179014 179015
PDS brown black
7483 2000002200 8000002200
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 385
4 pages September 2011
DESCRIPTION
two component high build multi purpose epoxy primer/ coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy primer or build coat for steel and concrete structures suitable for atmospheric and marine conditions can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings even after long weathering periods lead- and chromate free excellent rust preventing properties in industrial or coastal atmospheres tough, with long term exibility good adhesion to steel, galvanised steel and aged epoxy coatings easy application, both by airless spray and brush COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES white, oxide red, black, buff - at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 68 2% max. 231 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 326 g/l (approx. 2.7 lb/gal) 276 g/ltr (2.3 lb/gal) (by EPA Method 24) 100 - 200 m depending on system * 6.8 m/l for 100 m * 2 hours min. 8 hours * max. 6 months ( with itself) 4 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 / SSPC-SP3 aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 50 : 50 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
Pot life
3 hours at 20C *
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 385
September 2011
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 6.8 100 3.4 200
Overcoating table for dft up to 100 m with itself substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 10 hours 6 months 20C 8 hours 6 months 30C 6 hours 6 months
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 385
September 2011
Overcoating table for dft up to 100 m with polyurethanes substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 10 hours 42 days 20C 8 hours 30 days 30C 6 hours 14 days
Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 24 hours 16 hours 10 hours full cure 6 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 4 hours 2.5 hours 1.5 hour
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 385
September 2011
PDS
7453
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 400
(SigmaCover 640 )
4 pages December 2012 Revision of May 2012
Description
two component high solids epoxy coating high performance self priming universal epoxy high solids, low VOC surface tolerant and abrasion resistant compatible with prepared damp surfaces good adhesion on most existing coatings available in a wide colour range also available with MIO pigmentation good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C
RAL colours (other colours available on request) semigloss
(data for mixed product) Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (EPA Method 24) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES 1.4 g/cm (white) 85% 3% max. 114 g/kg 163 g/l ( 1.4 lb/gal ) 180 g/ltr (1.5 lb/gal) 100 - 200 m (3.9 - 7.9 mils) 8.5 m/l for 100 m 6 hours* at 20 C *
min. 16 hours * max. see tables * at least 12 months

steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 or hand tool clean to ISO-St2 or ultra high pressure water jet to WJ2L for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 concrete and other cement-bonded substrates; dry, hard and free from contamination such as laitance, grease and dust aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened for single pack coatings; extra precautions are necessary mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 1 : 1 the paint should be stirred well before use, preferably by means of a mechanical mixer, to ensure homogeneity add cure to resin and continue stirring until homogeneous 2 hours at 20 C *
Pot life
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 400
(SigmaCover 640 )
December 2012
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions no extra thinner needed approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 - 18 MPa (= approx. 150 - 180 bar; 2176 - 2611 p.s.i.) Brush - Apply evenly using a clean, well loaded brush Application by brush or roller will provide approx. 80 microns dft. in a single coat application. Thinner 90-58 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m/l dft in m 8.5 100 6.8 125 4.3 200
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 400 for dft at 125 m substrate temperature with itself with polyurethanes minimum interval maximum interval minimum interval maximum interval 10C 36 hours 3 months 36 hours 1 month 20C 16 hours 3 months 16 hours 1 month 30C 6 hours 2 months 6 hours 14 days 40C 4 hours 1 month 4 hours 7 days
Curing
Curing table for dft at 125 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 24 hours 6 hours 3 hours 1 hour dry to handle 48 hours 20 hours 12 hours 8 hours full cure 21 days 7 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation to remove solvent must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 400
(SigmaCover 640 )
December 2012
Pot life 10C / 50F 21C / 70F 32C / 90F 40C / 104F Worldwide availability 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour 30 min.
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Surface preparation of concrete (oors) Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1496 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 400
(SigmaCover 640 )
December 2012
PDS
7988
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 410
4 pages August 2012 Revision of August 2011
Description
two component high solids, high build, polyamide cured epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy build coat in protective coating systems for steel and concrete structures exposed to atmospheric land or marine conditions excellent durability can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings even after long weathering periods easy application by airless spray available in MIO or conventional pigmented grade COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after MIO and a selected range of colours at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.9 g/cm (MIO) ,1.5 g/cm (conventional pigmented grade) 80% 2% max. 126 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 240 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 75 - 200 m depending on system 10.7 m/l for 75 m * 3 hours * at 20 C min. 10 hours * max. 6 months * 7 days * at 20 C
at least 12 months
previous suitable primer; dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts, and sufciently roughened if necessary when applied to zinc silicate, a mist coat and full coat technique is required substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components none
Induction time
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 410
August 2012
Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner
6 hours at 20 C *
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, 30 - 40% when mist coat applied approx. 0.45 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 20 - 25 MPa (= 200 - 250 bar; 2901 - 3626 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Application by brush may show brush marking, due to the thixotropic nature of the paint and is most suitable to small areas, tight angle areas or for stripe coating or touch up. Application by roller will leave roller marking and is suitable for minimum dft requirements only. A roller suitable for epoxy application only must be used. Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 10.7 75 5.3 150 4 200
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 410 for dft up to 200 m substrate temperature for various two pack epoxy- or polyurethane paint minimum interval 5C 10C 20C 30C 6 hours 40C 4 hours
* This product has an unlimited maximum overcoating interval provided the surface is free from chalking and other contamination. In cases of exposure to direct sunlight or when the surface is contaminated it is recommended that the surface be cleaned and roughened to ensure good adhesion of the subsequent coating. The optimum intercoat adhesion is obtained when the subsequent coating is applied before the full cure time of the previous coating has elapsed.
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 410
August 2012
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 200 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 12 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1.5 hour dry to handle 30 hours 24 hours 10 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours full cure 20 days 14 days 10 days 7 days 5 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 15 C 20 C 25 C 30 C 40 C Worldwide availability 12 hours 10 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Conversion tabels Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 410
August 2012
PDS
6823
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 410 LT
5 pages November 2012 Revision of May 2011
Description
two component high solids, high build, polyamide cured epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy build coat in protective coating systems for steel and concrete structures exposed to atmospheric land or marine conditions excellent durability can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings even after long weathering periods easy application by airless spray good drying and curing properties at low substrate temperature (down to -5C) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES MIO and a selected range of colours at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 - 1.9 g/cm, depending on colour 80% 2% max. 126 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 240 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 75 - 200 m depending on system 10.7 m/l for 75 m * 4 hours * at 10 C min. 12 hours * max. 6 months * 7 days * at 10 C
at least 12 months
previous suitable primer; dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts, and sufciently roughened if necessary when applied to zinc silicate, a mist coat and full coat technique is required substrate temperature should be above -5C during application and curing and at least 3C above dew point and free from ice and any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is possible, but curing to hardness takes longer and complete resistance will be reached when temperature increases
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 410 LT
November 2012
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, 30 - 40% when mist coat applied approx. 0.45 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 20 - 25 MPa (= 200 - 250 bar; 2901 - 3626 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Application by brush may show brush marking, due to the thixotropic nature of the paint and is most suitable to small areas, tight angle areas or for stripe coating or touch up. Application by roller will leave roller marking and is suitable for minimum dft requirements only. A roller suitable for epoxy application only must be used. Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 10.7 75 5.3 150 4.0 200
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 410 LT
November 2012
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 410 LT for dft up to 200 m substrate temperature for various two pack epoxy- or polyurethane paint minimum interval maximum interval -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C
48 hours 24 hours 16 hours 12 hours 8 hours ------
* This product has an unlimited maximum overcoating interval provided the surface is free from chalking and other contamination. In cases of exposure to direct sunlight or when the surface is contaminated it is recommended that the surface be cleaned and roughened to ensure good adhesion of the subsequent coating. The optimum intercoat adhesion is obtained when the subsequent coating is applied before the full cure time of the previous coating has elapsed. Curing Curing table for dft up to 200 m substrate temperature -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C touch dry 20 hours 12 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours dry to handle 24 hours 16 hours 12 hours 8 hours 5 hours full cure 20 days 14 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 15 C Worldwide availability 10 hours 6 hours
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 410 LT
November 2012
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 410 LT
November 2012
PDS
6833
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 435
5 pages October 2012 Revision of April 2012
Description
two component high build micaceous iron oxide pigmented polyamide cured recoatable epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy build coat or nish in protective coating systems for steel and concrete structures exposed to atmospheric land or marine conditions easy application, both by airless spray and brush cures even at temperatures down to -10C a high relative humidity max. 95%, during application and curing does not inuence the quality of the coating good adhesion on most aged, sound alkyd-, chlorinated rubber- and epoxy coatings can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings even after long weathering periods resistant to water and splash of mild chemicals excellent durability tough, with long term exibility resistant to temperatures up to 200C (see system sheet 4062) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after light grey (9553-05), dark grey ( 9558-05), green (9441-05), aluminium (9590-05) eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 63% 2% max. 241 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 344 g/l (approx. 2.9 lb/gal) 75 - 150 m depending on system 6.3 m/l for 100 m * 2 hours at 20 C min. 3 hours * max. unlimited 4 days * at 20 C
at least 24 months
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 435
October 2012
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to SPSS or powertool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 previous coat; dry and free from any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is acceptable provided substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point marine mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 82 : 18 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity thinner should be added after mixing the components too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance none 5 hours at 20 C
system sheets: 3102, 3103
Thinner 91-92 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.58 mm (= 0.019 - 0.023 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 8.4 75 6.3 100 4.2 150 75 m
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 435
October 2012
Overcoating table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature for Sigma Vikote 46, SigmaDur 550, SigmaDur 520 and Sigmarine 40 for SigmaCover 435, SigmaCover 456 minimum interval -5C 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
maximum interval no limitation minimum interval 36 hours 10 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 2 hours
maximum interval no limitation surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination SigmaCover 435 should not be overcoated with coal tar epoxy coatings nishes require a corresponding undercoat
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature -10C -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 24 - 48 hours 24 - 30 hours 18 - 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours full cure 20 days 14 days 10 days 8 days 6 days 5 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
In exceptional cases SigmaCover 435 may be applied at lower substrate temperatures (down to -15C) provided that the surface is free from ice and other contamination. In such cases special care must be taken to avoid thick lm application as this may lead to checking/crazing or solvent entrapment.It should be clear that application at lower temperatures will require additional thinning to obtain application viscosity, however this will affect the sag resistance of the applied coating and can induce solvent retention. Optimal curing and designed product properties will only be achieved when minimum required substrate temperature is reached.
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 435
October 2012
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Conversion tabels Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 435
October 2012
179025 179496
PDS lightgrey darkgrey
7465 9553052200 9558052200
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 456
5 pages April 2012 Revision of August 2010
Description
two component high build polyamide cured recoatable epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy build coat or nish in protective coating systems for steel and concrete structures exposed to atmospheric land or marine conditions easy application, both by airless spray and brush cures even at temperatures down to -10C a high relative humidity max. 95%, during application and curing does not inuence the quality of the coating good adhesion on most aged, sound alkyd-, chlorinated rubber- and epoxy coatings can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings even after long weathering periods resistant to water and splash of mild chemicals excellent durability tough, with long term exibility COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after white and various other colours (see also the SigmaCare Shade Card of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings) semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 65% 2% max. 250 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 344 g/l (approx. 2.9 lb/gal) 75 - 150 m depending on system 6.5 m/l for 100 m 8.7 m/l 2 hours at 20 C min. 3 hours * max. unlimited 4 days * at 20 C
Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES SYSTEM SPECIFICATION
at least 24 months
previous coat; dry and free from any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is acceptable provided substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point marine system sheets: 3102, 3103, 3104, 3105
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 456
April 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 82 : 18 too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity thinner should be added after mixing the components none 5 hours at 20 C
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.58 mm (= 0.019 - 0.023 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 8.7 75 6.5 100 4.3 150 60 m
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 456
April 2012
Overcoating table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature for Sigma Vikote 46, SigmaDur 550, SigmaDur 520 and Sigmarine 40 for SigmaCover 435, SigmaCover 456 for Sigma Vikote 56 * and Sigmarine 48 * minimum interval -5C 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
maximum interval no limitation minimum interval 36 hours 10 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 2 hours 4 days 2 days
maximum interval no limitation maximum interval 17 days 14 days 10 days 7 days
nishes require a corresponding undercoat surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination SigmaCover 456 should not be overcoated with coal tar epoxy coatings surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination
* colour of SigmaCover 456 should be adapted to the colour of Sigma Vikote 56 or Sigmarine 48
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature -10C -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 24 - 48 hours 24 - 30 hours 18 - 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours full cure 20 days 14 days 10 days 8 days 6 days 5 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
In exceptional cases SigmaCover 456 may be applied at lower substrate temperatures (down to -15C) provided that the surface is free from ice and other contamination. In such cases special care must be taken to avoid thick lm application as this may lead to checking/crazing or solvent entrapment. It should be clear that application at lower temperatures will require additional thinning to obtain application viscosity, however this will affect the sag resistance of the applied coating and can induce solvent retention. Optimal curing and designed product properties will only be achieved when minimum required substrate temperature is reached.
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 456
April 2012
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Conversion tabels Surface preparation of concrete (oors) Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1496 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 456
April 2012
179073
PDS white
7466 7000002200
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 456KRA
5 pages March 2013 Revision of October 2007
Description
two component high build polyamide cured recoatable epoxy high solid coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy build coat or nish in protective coating systems for steel and concrete structures exposed to atmospheric land or marine conditions can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings even after long weathering periods excellent durability tough, with long term exibility cures even at temperatures down to -10C a high relative humidity max. 95%, during application and curing does not inuence the quality of the coating good adhesion on most aged, sound alkyd-, chlorinated rubber- and epoxy coatings easy application, both by airless spray and brush resistant to water and splash of mild chemicals COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) according to Sigma Protective Coatings Shade card eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) approx. 1.5 g/cm (depending on colours) 65% max. 347 g/l (approx. 2.9 lb/gal) 75 - 150 m depending on system 7.2 m/l for 100 m 2 hours at 20 C min. 3 hours * max. unlimited 4 days * at 20 C (data for components) at least 12 months
previous coat; dry and free from any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is acceptable provided substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 456KRA
March 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components none 6 hours at 20 C
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10% 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 8.7 75 6.5 100 4.3 150
Overcoating table for SigmaCover CM HS KRA substrate temperature minimum interval -5C 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
maximum interval no limitation, when cleaned from chalking an contamination
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 456KRA
March 2013
Overcoating table substrate temperature with Chlorinated Rubber, Polyurethane and alkyd paints minimum interval -5C 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
maximum interval no limitation, when cleaned from chalking an contamination glossy nishes require an undercoat
Curing
Curing table substrate temperature -10C -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 48 hours 30 hours 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours full cure 20 days 14 days 10 days 8 days 6 days 5 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C Worldwide availability 12 hours 5 hours 4 hours 2 hours
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 456KRA
March 2013
REFERENCES
Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Surface preparation of concrete (oors) Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature
see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1496 see information sheet 1650
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 456KRA
March 2013
PDS
7466K
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 456 HS
5 pages April 2013 Revision of September 2009
Description
two component high solids polyamide cured recoatable zinc phosphate epoxy primer/coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy primer/coating for steel and concrete structures in atmospheric exposure can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings even after long weathering periods free from lead and chromate containing pigments excellent rust preventing properties in industrial or coastal atmospheres tough, with long term exibility cures at temperatures down to -5C good adhesion to steel easy application, both by airless spray and brush COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES cream (other colours on request) eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 73% 2% max. 192 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 277 g/l (approx. 2.3 lb/gal) 75 - 150 m depending on system 7.3 m/l for 100 m * 8 hours min. 8 hours * max. unlimited 4 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 456 HS
April 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components 20 minutes if applied at temperatures below 10C none above 10C 4 hours at 20 C *
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% to obtain optimal ow Sigma thinner 91-99 should be used
Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 9.7 75 7.3 100 4.9 150
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 456 HS
April 2013
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 456 HS for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature minimum interval -5C 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
maximum interval unlimited for polyurethane paints the minimum overcoating time should be raised with 100% surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 24 - 48 hours 24 - 30 hours 18 - 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours full cure 14 days 10 days 8 days 6 days 5 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 15 C 20 C 30 C 35 C Worldwide availability 8 hours 5 hours 4 hours 2.5 hour 2 hours
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 456 HS
April 2013
REFERENCES
Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Surface preparation of concrete (oors) Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 456 HS
April 2013
215902
PDS cream
7712 9010262200
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 480
4 pages June 2013 Revision of September 2009
Description
two component chemical resistant nish based on polyamide cured epoxy resins general purpose epoxy nish easy application by brush/roller and (airless) spray good water resistance good chemical resistance to spillage and splash resistant to impact and abrasion easy to clean
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
selected range of colours is available semi-gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 50 2% max. 308 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 418 g/l (approx. 3.5 lb/gal) 50 m 10.0 m/l for 50 m 30 min. * min. 8 hours * max. 2 - 3 months * 7 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
previous epoxy coats; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 76 : 24 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components 8 hours at 20C *
Pot life
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 480
June 2013
Thinner 91-92 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 mm (= 0.018 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 12.5 40 10.0 50 8.3 60
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 480 for dft up to 50 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C 6 hours
surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 50 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 4 hours 2 hours 1 hour 30 min. 30 min. dry to handle 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours full cure 21 days 14 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 480
June 2013
Pot life (at application viscosity) 15C 20C 30C 40C Worldwide availability 12 hours 8 hours 5 hours 3 hours
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tables Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 480
June 2013
179559
PDS white
7441 7000002200
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 522
Description
two component micaceous iron oxide pigmented polyamide cured epoxy primer/ sealer/coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS may be used as a primer, sealer or coating excellent adhesion to and sealing of weathered, cleaned zinc rich primers and metal sprayed steel good adhesion to properly pretreated galvanised steel excellent adhesion to blast cleaned steel can be used in systems for atmospheric or water immersed exposure conditions good resistance to industrial or chemical contaminated atmospheric exposure conditions good abrasion and impact resistance good adhesion characteristics for subsequent coats resistant to temperatures up to 200C in dry atmospheric exposure conditions COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) redbrown, greenish grey low metallic sheen (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.8 g/cm 60% 2% max. 210 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 374 g/l (approx. 3.1 lb/gal) 40 - 80 m depending on system * 15 m/l for 40 m * 2 hours * at 20 C min. 8 hours * max. 1 month * 7 days * (data for components) at least 24 months
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 522
April 2013
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 zinc primed steel; free from any contamination and zinc salts galvanised steel; for atmospheric exposure conditions disc sanding, free from any contamination and zinc salts; for water immersed exposure conditions sweep blasting is required not weathered metal sprayed steel; free from any contamination and salts previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing for atmospheric exposure conditions the minimum substrate temperature for application may be 5C, but at low temperature the curing slows down according to the overcoating and curing tables REMARK when used as an adhesion primer or when a long overcoating interval is expected a max. dft of 50 m must be specied in order to preserve the rough texture
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 82 : 18 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components none 8 hours at 20 C *
Induction time Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
Thinner 91-92 10 - 30%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10% for dft of approx. 80 m 25 - 30% for dft of approx. 40 m when used for sealing inorganic zinc and metal sprayed steel approx. 0.48 - 0.53 mm (= 0.019 - 0.021 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1740 - 2176 p.s.i.)
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 522
April 2013
BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner ADDITIONAL DATA
Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 15.0 40 7.5 80
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 522 for dft 50 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 20C 30C 6 hours 14 days 40C 4 hours 7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Note the minimum overcoating time should be multiplied by 5 when SigmaCover 522 is to be applied on top of an existing old (alkyd) primer or coating the maximum overcoating time of SigmaCover 522 could be extended up to 6 months provided the dft is not higher than 50 m surface should be properly cleaned glossy nishes require an adhesion promoting undercoat Overcoating table for SigmaCover 522 for dft 80 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 3 days 28 days 10C 20C 30C 40C
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Note the minimum overcoating time should be multiplied by 5 when SigmaCover 522 is to be applied on top of an existing old (alkyd) primer or coating the maximum overcoating time of SigmaCover 522 could be extended up to 6 months provided the dft is not higher than 50 m surface should be properly cleaned glossy nishes require an adhesion promoting undercoat
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 522
April 2013
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 40 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 25C touch dry 8 hours 5 hours 3.5 hours 2 hours 1.5 hour dry to handle 18 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 4 hours full cure -15 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) for optimum resistance in tankcoating systems a minimum substrate temperature of 10C is essential Pot life (at application viscosity) 15 C 20 C 25 C 30 C 35 C Worldwide availability 10 hours 8 hours 6 hours 5 hours 4 hours
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 522
April 2013
179510 179508
PDS greenish grey redbrown
7420 9048052200 9028052200
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 630
Description
two component surface tolerant high build polyamine cured epoxy primer/ coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS surface tolerant coating for lower grade of steel preparation particularly suited as maintenance coating for dry cargo holds, decks and hulls general purpose epoxy build coat or nish in protective coating systems for steel and concrete structures exposed to atmospheric land or marine conditions compatible with various aged coatings overcoatable with most types of coatings excellent corrosion resistance resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals good exibility COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after green, grey, redbrown, black, aluminium semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 83% 2% max. 166 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 232 g/l (approx. 1.9 lb/gal) 60 - 100 m for brush/roller 125 - 200 m for airless spray 6.6 m/l for 125 m 4.1 m/l for 200 m 6 hours at 20 C min. 9 hours * max. 9 months * 7 days at 20 C (data for components) at least 12 months
page 1/6
SIGMACOVER 630
March 2013
for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, for excellent corrosion protection steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m or power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 for good corrosion protection shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L existing sound epoxy coating systems and most sound alkyd coating systems; sufeciently roughened, dry and free from any contamination for immersion in sea water: (resistant to Cathodic Protection in systems) steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 rst coat SigmaCover 630 Aluminium substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.53 mm (= 0.019 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%
page 2/6
SIGMACOVER 630
March 2013
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 13.8 60 (for brush/ roller) 6.6 125 (for airless spray) 8.3 100 (for brush/ roller) 4.1 200 (for airless spray) 100 m
Maximum dft when brushing: Overcoating table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature with itself minimum interval maximum interval 10C 20 hours 12 months 20C 9 hours 9 months 30C 5 hours 6 months
40C 3 hours 3 months
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Overcoating tabel for dft up to 150 m. substrate temperature with various alkyds minimum interval maximum interval 10C 24 hours 21 days 20C 16 hours 10 days 30C 8 hours 7 days 40C 5 hours 3 days
after exceeding of the maximum interval, glossy nishes require a corresponding undercoat surface should be dry and free from any contamination best intercoat adhesion occurs when the subsequent coat is applied before the preceding coat is fully cured if this time is exceeded it may be necessary to roughen the surface Overcoating table (dft up to 150 m) substrate temperature with polyurethanes minimum interval maximum interval 10C 48 hours 6 months 20C 24 hours 3 months 30C 12 hours 1 month 40C 6 hours 1 month
page 3/6
SIGMACOVER 630
March 2013
Overcoating table with dft up to 150 m substrate temperature with various two pack epoxy coatings Curing minimum interval maximum interval 10C 20 hours 6 months 20C 9 hours 3 months 30C 5 hours 1 month 40C 3 hours 1 month
Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 14 hours 6 hours 4 hours 2 hours dry to handle 20 hours 9 hours 5 hours 3 hours full cure 15 days 7 days 4 days 2 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 15 C 20 C 30 C 40 C Worldwide availability 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour 0.5 hour
page 4/6
SIGMACOVER 630
March 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 5/6
SIGMACOVER 630
March 2013
179101 179103 179105 179106 179583 179586 179099
PDS grey redbrown black aluminium RAL 6002 offwhite green
7430 5177052200 6179052200 8000002200 9000002200 6002262200 7001002200 4199052200
page 6/6
SIGMACOVER 630 LT
5 pages August 2012 Revision of November 2010
Description
two component surface tolerant high solids polyamine cured epoxy primer/ coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS self priming coating tolerant to lower grades of steel preparation for atmospheric exposure cures at temperatures down to -5C particularly well suited as maintenance coating for steel structures excellent corrosion resistance resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals good abrasion resistance good exibility compatible with various aged coatings good recoatability with most epoxy-, polyurethane-, chlorinated rubber-, alkyd- and acrylic paints COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after grey, offwhite (other colours on request) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 83% 2% max. 190 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 268 g/l (approx. 2.2 lb/gal)(UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 60 - 150 m 14.2 m/l for 60 m 5.7 m/l for 150 m 12 hours* at 10 C
min. 16 hours * max. 2 months * 7 days at 10 C

at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 for excellent corrosion protection steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m or power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 for good corrosion protection shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 existing sound epoxy coating systems and most sound alkyd coating systems; sufciently roughened, dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 630 LT
August 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 83 : 17 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity thinner should be added after mixing the components 15 minutes, for substrate temperatures below +10C 2 hours at 10 C *
Thinner 91-92 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.53 mm (= 0.019 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 or Thinner 91-99 for better ow 5 - 10% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 14.2 60 8.5 100 5.7 150
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 630 LT
August 2012
Overcoating table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature with various two pack epoxy coatings with polyurethanes minimum interval maximum interval minimum interval maximum interval -5C 0C 5C 10C 20C
48 hours 24 hours 20 hours 16 hours 8 hours 2 months 2 months 2 months 2 months 2 months 96 hours 64 hours 36 hours 24 hours 16 hours 1 month 1 month 1 month 1 month 1 month
surface should be dry and free from any contamination best intercoat adhesion occurs when the subsequent coat is applied before the preceding coat is fully cured after exceeding of the maximum interval, glossy nishes require a corresponding undercoat if this time is exceeded it may be necessary to roughen the surface Curing Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature -5C 0C 5C 10C 20C touch dry 48 hours 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 4 hours dry to handle 48 hours 24 hours 20 hours 16 hours 8 hours full cure 21 days 14 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 0 C 10 C 20 C Worldwide availability 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 630 LT
August 2012
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 630 LT
August 2012
179613 179609 173524
PDS base L base Z clear
7434 20 ltr 20 ltr hardener
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 400 AL ( SigmaCover 640 Aluminium)

4 pages October 2012 Revision of October 2011
Description
two component high solids epoxy coating high performance self priming universal epoxy high solids, low VOC surface tolerant and abrasion resistant compatible with prepared damp surfaces good adhesion on most existing coatings good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals
aluminium semigloss (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 85% 3% max. 157 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 196 g/l (approx. 1.6 lb/gal) 125 m 8.5 m/l for 100 m 6.8 m/l for 125 m 6 hours* at 20 C *
min. 16 hours * max. see tables * at least 12 months

steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 or hand tool clean to ISO-St2 or ultra high pressure water jet to WJ2L for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 concrete and other cement-bonded substrates; dry, hard and free from contamination such as laitance, grease and dust aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened For single pack coatings, extra precautions are necessary. mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 1 : 1 the paint should be stirred well before use, preferably by means of a mechanical mixer, to ensure homogeneity add cure to resin and continue stirring until homogeneous 4 hours at 20 C *
Pot life
page 1/4

October 2012
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions no extra thinner needed approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 - 18 MPa (= approx. 150 - 180 bar; 2176 - 2611 p.s.i.) apply evenly using a well loaded brush or roller Application by brush or roller will provide approx. 80 microns dft. in a single coat application. Thinner 90-58 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 8.5 m/l 100 m 6.8 m/l 125 m
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 400 AL for dft at 125 m substrate temperature with itself minimum interval maximum interval 10C 24 hours extended* 20C 16 hours extended* 30C 8 hours extended*
Please contact your PPG PMC representative for more details
Curing
Curing table for dft at 125 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C touch dry 16 hours 6 hours 4 hours dry to handle 72 hours 24 hours 10 hours full cure 21 days 7 days 4 days
during the curing period precautions must be taken to avoid contact of the coating with moisture, otherwise blushing may occur Pot life 10 C 20 C 30 C 6 hours 4 hours 2 hours
page 2/4

October 2012
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4

October 2012
PDS
7992
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 400 SEALER (SigmaCover 640 Sealer)

4 pages October 2012 Revision of January 2010
Description
two component surface tolerant solvent free rust penetrating epoxy sealer penetrates rust and adheres to aged coatings surface tolerant coating for lower grade of steel preparation primer for concrete surfaces Compatible with damp surfaces low dry m thickness
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
green, cream, clear gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.1 g/cm 100% max. 0 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 0 g/l (0.0 lb/gal) 40 m 25 m/l for 40 m 6 hours* at 20 C
max. 1 month * min. 24 hours 5 days at 20 C *

at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 / SSPC-SP3 coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3L substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 1 : 1 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be at least 20C no thinner should be added none approx. 1 hour at 20 C
page 1/4

October 2012
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
no thinner should be added approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Overcoating table for dft up to 40 m substrate temperature 5C 24 hours 1 month 10C 18 hours 1 month 20C 12 hours 1 month 30C 8 hours 1 month 25 m/l 40 m 16.7 m/l 60 m
for e.g. SigmaCover 456, minimum interval SigmaCover 385, SigmaCover 400 maximum interval
surface should be dry and free from any contamination best intercoat adhesion occurs when the subsequent coat is applied before the fully cured stage is reached if this time is exceeded the surface has to be roughened Curing Curing table for dft up to 40 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 48 hours 36 hours 28 hours 22 hours full cure 15 days 7 days 5 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets {1433} and {1434})
page 2/4

October 2012
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 100 min. 60 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during pot life may increase up to 60C at gel point
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications explosion hazard- toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet {1410} see information sheet {1411} see information sheet {1430} see information sheet {1431} see information sheet {1433} see information sheet {1434} see information sheet {1490} see information sheet {1491} see information sheet {1650}
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets {1430}, {1431} and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes no solvent present ; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask and gloves should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
page 3/4

October 2012
PDS
7995
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 690
(SIGMACOVER ALUPRIMER)
4 pages May 2012 Revision of October 2009
Description
two component high solids aluminium pigmented polyamine cured modied epoxy primer/coating PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS primer/coating designed for maintenance low VOC good ow properties self priming coating tolerant to lower grades of steel preparation compatible with most aged good adhering coatings good recoatability with epoxy- and polyurethane paints good curing at temperatures down to +5C good impact and abrasion resistance if the substrate temperature drops below +5 till 0C, the wintergrade type should be used (see {7414WG}) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES aluminium light and dark semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 90% 2% max. 150 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 198 g/l (approx. 1.7 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 75 - 125 m * depending on system and application method 12 m/l for 75 m 7.2 m/l for 125 m 4 hours at 20 C min. 12 hours * max. 4 months *
5 days (data for components)
at least 12 months
for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 or blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 for good corrosion protection steel with approved shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 existing sound coating systems; sufciently roughened, dry and cleaned for immersion in water: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 steel with approved shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 690
May 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 77.5 : 22.5 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components none 3 hours at 20 C *
Induction time Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DAT
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.53 mm (= 0.019 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 12.0 75 9.0 100 7.2 125
Overcoating table for most epoxy and polyurethane paints * substrate temperature minimum interval 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C
maximum interval 6 months 6 months 6 months 4 months 3 months 3 months surface should be dry and free from any contamination
* for polyurethane paints the minimum overcoating time should be raised with 50%
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 690
May 2012
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 125 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 16 hours 9 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours dry to handle 48 hours 36 hours 20 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours full cure 10 days 7 days 6 days 5 days 4 days 2 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 15 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C Worldwide availability 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour 1 hour
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 690
May 2012
179331 179333
PDS dark light
7414 0100002200 0200002200
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 805
Description
two component high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating can be used directly to metal very good surface wetting excellent corrosion resistance outstanding (sea)water resistance resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection good resistance against chemically polluted water good abrasion resistance tar free
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) Ready for immersion RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
limited colour range available gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.6 g/cm 82% 2% max. 158 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 221 g/l (approx. 1.8 lb/gal) 150 m depending on system 5.5 m/l for 150 m * 3 hours at 20 C min. 16 hours * max. 28 days * at least 12 months
* see additional data 3 days * (data for components)
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to SPSS-Ss substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; pretreated preferably to ISO-Sa2, , blasting prole 40 - 70 m or according to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 previous coat; (e.g. SigmaCover 805 or suitable primer) dry and free from any contamination and within the minimum and maximum overcoating time substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 805
April 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components 2 hours at 20 C *
Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.53 mm (= 0.019 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 5.5 150
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 805 for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature with itself minimum interval maximum interval 5C 36 hours 28 days 10C 24 hours 28 days 20C 16 hours 28 days 30C 8 hours 14 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
* for polyurethane paints like SigmaDur 550 and SigmaDur 520 the minimum overcoating time should be raised with 50%
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 805
April 2013
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C Pot life (at application viscosity) 15 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour 0.5 hour Service - water immersion 10 days 7 days 5 days 3 days 2.5 days 1.5 day
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 805
April 2013
182345 190856 182348
PDS offwhite brown black
7726 7001002200 2000002200 8000002200
page 4/4
SigmaCover 850
4 pages October 2012 Revision of October 2012
Description
two component glassake high build polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating for use in both offshore and onshore business designed for use in heavy duty and corrosive environments glassake reinforced for improved impact and abrasion resistance excellent seawater, cracking and corrosion resistance long term protection in a single coat application resistant to well designed cathodic protection strong adhesion properties, suitable for wet blast cleaned substrates (damp or dry)
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
light grey (other colours on request ) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.55 g/cm 90% 3% max. 97 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 150 g/l (1.3 lb/gal) 250 - 1000 m 3 m/l for 300 m 4 hours at 20 C min. see tables * max. see tables * coating performance will depend upon the surface preparation degree blast cleaning steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2, blasting prole of 40 - 80 m is recommended hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L coated steel: existing sound adhering epoxy coating systems: sufciently roughened and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/4
SigmaCover 850
October 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 do not thin more than is required too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure if required, thinner should be added after mixing the components none 2 hours at 20 C
Thinner 91-92 4 - 8%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 2 - 4 bar; 29 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) only for touch up and repair Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 3 300 1.8 500 0.9 1000
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 850 for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature with epoxy coatings with polyurethanes with itself with various epoxy- and polyurethane coatings minimum interval minimum interval maximum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 20C 4 hours 28 days 10 days 30C 2 hours 21 days 7 days 40C 1.5 hour 14 days 4 days
16 hours 8 hours 38 days 20 days 32 days 14 days
28 hours 20 hours 14 hours 10 hours 6 hours
page 2/4
SigmaCover 850
October 2012
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 12 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hour dry to handle 30 hours 18 hours 10 hours 6 hours 3 hours
premature exposure to water will lead to whitening of dark colours when applied between tides on jetties, piling etc. this will not affect anticorrosive properties of the coating adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 2 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SigmaCover 850
October 2012
340975
PDS lightgrey
7850 7035262200
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 1000
5 pages June 2013 Revision of September 2009
Description
two component solvent free amine cured epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS one coat protection for steel structures with excellent corrosion resistance can be applied at a dft up to 1000 m by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) one coat heavy duty deck system reduced explosion risk and re hazard good visibility due to light colour resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection can be immersed in (sea)water after 4 hours of curing at 20C COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES grey (other colours on request) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 100% max. 62 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 86 g/l (approx. 0.7 lb/gal) *See information sheet 1411 min. 500 - 1000 m depending on system 2.0 m/l for 500 m 12 hours * min. 20 hours * max. 20 days *
at least 12 months
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m shop primed steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L (blasting prole 40 - 70 m) for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L (blasting prole 50 - 100 m) substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 1000
June 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 when mixing the temperature of the base and hardener should be at least 20C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added none 1 hour at 20C *
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4061 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.)
use heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in -line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature application with 45: 1 spray equipment possible provided in-line heated high pressure hoses are used in case of using 45: 1 airless spray equipment the paint must be heated to approx. 30C in order to obtain the right application viscosity length of hoses should be as short as possible
only for spot repair and stripe coating no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 1000
June 2013
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m min. dft for closed lm with airless spray: 400 m max. dft when brushing 150 m measuring wet lm thickness a difference is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time a practical recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for SigmaCover 1000 for dft up to 1000 m (spot repair and stripe coating) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 3 days 28 days 10C 20C 30C 40C 2.0 500 1.0 1000
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 1000 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 48 hours 24 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours dry to handle 3 days 2 days 24 hours 16 hours 12 hours full cure 14 days 10 days 5 days 3 days 2 days
early exposure to sea water is permitted after the initial cure of 3 hours at 20C
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 1000
June 2013
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tables Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 1000
June 2013
179640
PDS grey
7450 5000002200
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 1500
DESCRIPTION
two component surface tolerant solvent free polyamine cured epoxy primer/ coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose primer/buildcoat for long term protection of steel structures excellent corrosion resistance compatible with various aged coating like aged alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane reduces explosion risk and re hazard in conned spaces good ow and wetting properties can be used from temperatures above 5C can be applied by roller COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) grey - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 99 1% max. 2 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 3 g/l (approx. 0.0 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 125 m 7.9 m/l for 125 m 12 hours * max. see tables * min. see tables * 7 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 12 months
Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 for excellent corrosion protection steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 for good corrosion protection steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 stainless steel; degreased and blast cleaned to roughness of 40 - 70 m existing sound epoxy coating, polyurethane and most sound alkyd coating systems; sufciently roughened dry and cleaned substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 80%
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 1500
September 2009
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 for airless application the temperature of base and hardener should be at least 20C lower temperatures possible for roller application no thinner should be added
none approx. 1 hour at 20C *

AIRLESS SPRAY
Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature no thinner should be added approx. 0.43 mm (= 0.017 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) ROLLER: nylon suitable for 2 component epoxy with hair length 8 mm BRUSH: for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask and gloves should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate max. dft when brushing: 100 m
measuring wet lm thickness a difference is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft, this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 1500
September 2009
measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured for some days (depending on ambient temperature) after application due to the penetration of the measuring device into the paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for dft up to 125 m substrate temperature SigmaCover 1500, SigmaCover 456, SigmaCover 435 and polyurethanes minimum interval maximum interval when not exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval when exposed to direct sunshine 5C 3 days 1 month 10C 48 hours 20C 24 hours 30C 16 hours 40C 12 hours
1 month
surface should be dry and free from any contamination best intercoat adhesion occurs when the subsequent coat is applied before the fully cured stage is reached if this time is exceeded the surface has to be roughened Curing table for dft up to 125 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 48 hours 24 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours dry to handle 3 days 2 days 24 hours 16 hours 12 hours full cure 21 days 14 days 7 days 3 days 2 days
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 1500
September 2009
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
REFERENCES
231790 237619
PDS grey grey
7715 5000001400 5000002200
page 4/4
SIGMADUR 188
5 pages November 2012 Revision of November 2005
Description
two component aliphatic acrylic polyurethane nish unlimited recoatable excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions excellent colour and gloss retention non-chalking, non-yellowing cures at temperatures down to -5C tough and abrasion resistant resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, parafns, aliphatic petroleum products and mild chemicals can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure white and black, colors available on request gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) approx. 1.2 g/cm 56% 2% max. 398 g/l (approx. 3.3 lb/gal) 50 - 60 m depending on system 11.2 m/l for 50 m 1 hour at 20 C min. 6 hours * max. unlimited
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place)
at least 24 months
previous coat; (epoxy or polyurethane) dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change
page 1/5
SIGMADUR 188
November 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 88 : 12 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity thinner should be added after mixing the components too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance none 5 hours at 20 C *
Thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.0 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 8 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 0.28 - 0.33 mm (= 0.011 - 0.013 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2901 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 5 - 10% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Overcoating table for SigmaDur 188 substrate temperature minimum interval -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C 11.2 50 9.3 60
maximum interval unlimited surface should be dry and free from any contamination
page 2/5
SIGMADUR 188
November 2012
Curing
Curing table substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 24 hours 16 hours 8 hours 6 hours 5 hours 3 hours full cure 15 days 11 days 6 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C APPLICATION METHODS 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours
High gloss thin lm polyurethane nishes tend to atomise less easy. The widely used airless spray application method is for those kind of nishes possible but would not be the best option as small nozzles and high pressures can easily result in overspray. Better suitable methods are Pressure pot and air assisted airless (e.g. airmix) application which result in better dry lm thickness controle, better appearance and much less overspray. Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Directives for ventilation practice Safety indications Safe working in conned spaces see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1433
REFERENCES
page 3/5
SIGMADUR 188
November 2012
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes contains a toxic polyisocyanate curing agent avoid at all times inhalation of aerosol spraymist
page 4/5
SIGMADUR 188
November 2012
PDS
6824
page 5/5
SIGMADUR 520
(SIGMADUR HB FINISH)
4 pages May 2013 Revision of March 2010
Description
two component high build semigloss aliphatic acrylic polyurethane nish easy application by roller and airless spray unlimited recoatable excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions good colour and gloss retention (aluminium version becomes grey) non-chalking, non-yellowing cures at temperatures down to -5C tough and abrasion resistant resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, parafns, aliphatic petroleum products and mild chemicals can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure full colour range and aluminium as RAL 9006 available semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm (white) 1.1 g/cm (aluminium) 58 2% (white), 48 2% (aluminium) max. 287 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) (white) max. 377 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) (RAL 9006) max. 383 g/l (approx. 3.2 lb/gal) (white) max. 405 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) (aluminium) 50 - 75 m depending on system 11.6 m/l for 50 m 7.7 m/l for 75 m * 1 hour at 20C min. 6 hours * max. unlimited 4 days * (data for components) at least 24 months
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied)
Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place)
page 1/4
SIGMADUR 520
May 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 88 : 12 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components Aluminium version has lower gloss than standard version and color could be different by application method none 5 hours at 20 C *
Thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.0 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 mm (= 0.018 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m colours 11.6 m/l aluminium 9.6 m/l 50 colours 7.7 m/l aluminium 6.4 m/l 75
Overcoating table for SigmaDur products substrate temperature minimum interval -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C
maximum interval unlimited when cleaned from any contamination surface should be dry and free from any contamination
page 2/4
SIGMADUR 520
May 2013
Curing
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C 40C Worldwide availability 7 hours 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Directives for ventilation practice Safe working in conned spaces Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMADUR 520
May 2013
119852 183212
PDS white aluminium
7524 7000002200 9006262200
page 4/4
SIGMADUR 540
4 pages November 2012 Revision of December 2010
Description
two component high gloss VOC compliant epoxy acrylic nish non-isocyanate colour and gloss retention superior to standard epoxy coatings non-chalking, non-yellowing long pot life but quick drying
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Full cure after
wide colour range highgloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 54% 2% max. 324 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 411 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) 50 - 60 m 10.9 m/l for 50 m * 2 hours at 20 C 7 days at 20 C
Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
at least 12 months
previous epoxy coats; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 90 : 10 too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity if required, thinner should be added after mixing the components none 6 hours at 20 C
page 1/4
SIGMADUR 540
November 2012
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.0 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.38 - 0.46 mm (= 0.015 - 0.018 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.)
Sigmadur 540 can be applied to an industrial nish using standard airless spray equipment with recommended pressure and tip sizes. In order to achieve the optimum nish and cosmetic appearance, the product may be thinned by 10% and applied using an air-assisted airless spray gun set up with a smaller tip size ( 0.011-0.015 in )
BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 91-92 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Overcoating table substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 24 hours 10C 16 hours 20C 8 hours 30C 6 hours 10.9 50 9.1 60
Curing
Curing table at 50 m for SigmaDur 540 substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 22 hours 16 hours 10 hours 6 hours full cure 14 days 12 days 7 days 4 days
page 2/4
SIGMADUR 540
November 2012
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 10 hours 6 hours 3 hours
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes avoid at all times inhalation of aerosol spraymist
page 3/4
SIGMADUR 540
November 2012
WARRANTY WARRANTY STATEMENT PPG warrants (i) its title to the product, (ii) that the quality of the product conforms to PPGs specications for such product in effect at the time of manufacture and (iii) that the product shall be delivered free of the rightful claim of any third person for infringement of any U.S. patent covering the product. THESE ARE THE ONLY WARRANTIES THAT PPG MAKES AND ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, UNDER STATUTE OR ARISING OTHERWISE IN LAW, FROM A COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY OTHER WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, ARE DISCLAIMED BY PPG. Any claim under this warranty must be made by Buyer to PPG in writing within ve (5) days of Buyers discovery of the claimed defect, but in no event later than the expiration of the applicable shelf life of the product, or one year from the date of the delivery of the product to the Buyer, whichever is earlier. Buyers failure to notify PPG of such non-conformance as required herein shall bar Buyer
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WILL PPG BE LIABLE UNDER ANY THEORY OF RECOVERY (WHETHER BASED ON NEGLIGENCE OF ANY KIND, STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT) FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN ANY WAY RELATED TO, ARISING FROM, OR RESULTING FROM ANY USE MADE OF THE PRODUCT. The information in this sheet is intended for guidance only and is based upon laboratory tests that PPG believes to be reliable. PPG may modify the information contained herein at any time as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the PPG product, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specic inquiry, or otherwise, are based on data, which to the best of PPGs knowledge, is reliable. The product and related information is designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills in the industry and it is the end-users responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its own particular use and it shall be deemed that Buyer has done so, as its sole discretion and risk. PPG has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. Therefore, PPG does not accept any liability arising from any loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this information (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). Variations in the application environment, changes in procedures of use, or extrapolation of data may cause unsatisfactory results. This sheet supersedes all previous versions and it is the Buyers responsibility to ensure that this information is current prior to using the product. Current sheets for all PPG Protective & Marine Coatings Products are maintained at www.ppgpmc.com. The English text of this sheet shall prevail over any translation thereof.
204030
PDS white
7740 7000001400
page 4/4
SIGMADUR 550
4 pages May 2012 Revision of December 2010
Description
two component aliphatic acrylic polyurethane nish unlimited recoatable excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions excellent colour and gloss retention non-chalking, non-yellowing cures at temperatures down to -5C resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, parafns, aliphatic petroleum products and mild chemicals can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure good application properties white and various other colours (see also the SigmaCare Shade Card of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 55% 2% max. 334 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 430 g/l (approx. 3.6 lb/gal) 50 - 60 m depending on system 11.0 m/l for 50 m * 1 hour at 20 C min. 6 hours * max. unlimited 4 days * at 20 C
COLOURS AND GLOSS
BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after
at least 24 months
page 1/4
SIGMADUR 550
May 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 88 : 12 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity thinner should be added after mixing the components too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance none 5 hours at 20 C *
Thinner 21-06 3 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.0 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 3 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.44 - 0.49 mm (= 0.017 - 0.019 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2901 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Overcoating table for SigmaDur products substrate temperature minimum interval -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C 11 50 9.2 60
page 2/4
SIGMADUR 550
May 2012
Curing
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C Worldwide availability 7 hours 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMADUR 550
May 2012
238761 238763
PDS white white
7537 7000001400 7000002200
page 4/4
SIGMADUR 568
4 pages June 2012 Revision of April 2011
Description
two component high solids high build polyurethane nish excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions good colour and gloss retention cures at temperatures down to -5C resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, parafns, aliphatic petroleum products and mild chemicals can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure good application properties by airless, brush and roller high lm build-up to 150 m for one coat can be applied direct to metal
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
White and various other colours (see also Marine shade card) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 68% 2% max. 220 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 330 g/l (approx. 2.8 lb/gal) 50 - 150 m depending on system min. 8 hours * max. unlimited at least 24 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 previous coat; (alkyd, epoxy or polyurethane) dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 87 : 13 do not thin more than is required by appropriate application property too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components Thinner 21-06 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.0 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.)
page 1/4
SIGMADUR 568
June 2012
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner
Thinner 21-06 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.44 - 0.49 mm (= 0.017 - 0.019 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2901 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 13.6 50 9 75 6.8 100 4.5 150
Overcoating table for SigmaDur products substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 36 hours 0C 24 hours 10C 16 hours 20C 8 hours 30C 4 hours 40C 3 hours
unlimited when cleaned from any contamination
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 24 hours 15 hours 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour dry to handle 40 hours 30 hours 20 hours 12 hours 6 hours 3 hours
page 2/4
SIGMADUR 568
June 2012
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C Worldwide availability 4 hours 2.5 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in conned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes avoid at all times inhalation of aerosol spraymist
Reference
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMADUR 568
June 2012
324054
PDS white
6832 7000002200
page 4/4
SIGMADUR 580
(SIGMADUR HS SEMIGLOSS)
Description
two component high solids semigloss recoatable acrylic polyurethane nish excellent resistance against corrosion and sea water excellent colour and gloss retention non-chalking, non-yellowing cures at temperatures down to -5C tough and abrasion resistant resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, parafns, aliphatic petroleum products and mild chemicals can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure lead- and chromate free white (other colours on request) semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 75% 2% max. 191 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 269 g/l (approx. 2.2 lb/gal) 75 m depending on system 10 m/l for 75 m * 2 hours at 20 C min. 12 hours * max. unlimited 7 days * at 20 C
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place)
at least 12 months
previous coat; (epoxy or polyurethane) dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 82 : 18 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components 5 hours at 20 C *
Pot life
page 1/4
SIGMADUR 580
September 2012
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
Thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.38 - 0.42 mm (= 0.015 - 0.017 in) 18 MPa (= approx. 180 bar; 2611 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 5 - 10% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 10 75 7.5 100 6 125
Overcoating table for SigmaDur products substrate temperature minimum interval -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C
maximum interval unlimited when cleaned from any contamination Curing Curing table substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 8 hours 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour 0.5 hour full cure 22 days 18 days 10 days 7 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) please note that should condensation occur during or soon after application this may result in a reduction of gloss
page 2/4
SIGMADUR 580
September 2012
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMADUR 580
September 2012
180158
PDS white
7530 7000002200
page 4/4
SIGMADUR 590
4 pages May 2012 Revision of May 2011
Description
two component high solids aliphatic acrylic polyurethane nish excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions excellent colour and gloss retention non-chalking, non-yellowing resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, parafns, aliphatic petroleum products and mild chemicals good application properties white and various other colours (see also the SigmaCare Shade Card of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 73% 2% max. 207 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 185 g/l (approx. 1.5 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 100 - 125 m depending on system 7.3 m/l for 100 m * 2.5 hours at 20 C min. 8 hours * max. 7 days 4 days * at 20 C
COLOURS AND GLOSS
BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after
at least 24 months
page 1/4
SIGMADUR 590
May 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components none 2.5 hours at 20 C *
Thinner 60-15 3 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.0 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 60-15 3 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.44 - 0.49 mm (= 0.017 - 0.019 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2901 p.s.i.) Thinner 60-15 0 - 5% Thinner 90-58 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Overcoating table for SigmaDur products substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 48 hours 7 days 20C 8 hours 7 days 30C 4 hours 12 hours 7.3 100 5.8 125
page 2/4
SIGMADUR 590
May 2012
Curing
Curing table substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 72 hours 10 hours 5 hours full cure 6 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 4 hours 2.5 hours 1 hour
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMADUR 590
May 2012
PDS
7518
page 4/4
SIGMADUR 1800
4 pages January 2013 Revision of May 2008
Description
two component high solids polymeric urethane excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions outstanding colour and gloss retention non-chalking, non-yellowing cures at temperatures down to -5C tough and abrasion resistant resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, parafns, aliphatic petroleum products and mild chemicals can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure white and various other colours (see also the SigmaCare Shade Card of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 68% 2% max. 226 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 289 g/l (approx. 2.4 lb/gal) 75 m depending on system 9.1 m/l for 75 m 2 hours at 20 C min. 12 hours * max. unlimited
7 days *
COLOURS AND GLOSS
BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place)

previous coat; (epoxy or polyurethane) dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 83 : 17 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity thinner should be added after mixing the components too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance none 5 hours at 20 C *
page 1/4
SIGMADUR 1800
January 2013
Thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.0 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 3 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.38 - 0.42 mm (= 0.015 - 0.017 in) 18 MPa (= approx. 180 bar; 2611 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m/l dft in m Overcoating table substrate temperature -5C 3 days 0C 2 days 10C 1 day 20C 30C 40C 9.1 75 6.8 100 5.4 125
with itself
minimum interval
maximum interval unlimited when cleaned from any contamination Curing Curing table substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 8 hours 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour 0.5 hour full cure 22 days 18 days 10 days 7 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) please note that should condensation occur during or soon after application this may result in a reduction of gloss
page 2/4
SIGMADUR 1800
January 2013
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes avoid at all times inhalation of aerosol spraymist contains a toxic polyisocyanate curing agent
page 3/4
SIGMADUR 1800
January 2013
236077 236081
PDS white white
7529 7000001400 7000002200
page 4/4
SIGMADUR 2800
Description
two component, air drying, high solids uorocarbon nish
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions excellent colour and gloss retention resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, parafns, aliphatic petroleum products and mild chemicals unlimited recoatable good application properties low surface energy, good decontamination and easy clean properties COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES white and various other colours (see also PPG shade card) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 56 2% max. 321 g/kg, 418 g/l (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 330 g/kg, 430 g/l for special colours 25 - 40 m depending on system 16 m/l for 35 m * 3 hours at 20C min. 20 hours * max. unlimited at least 12 months
previous coat; (epoxy or polyurethane) dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 91: 9 do not thin more than is required by appropriate application property too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components none 5 hours at 20C *
page 1/4
SIGMADUR 2800
July 2013
Thinner 91-88 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.0 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-88 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.28 - 0.38 mm (= 0.011 - 0.015 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2901 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-88 0 - 5% Thinner 91-88 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 22.4 25 18.7 30 16.0 35 14.0 40
Overcoating table for SigmaDur 2800 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 36 hours unlimited 20C 20 hours 30C 10 hours 40C 3 hours
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 35 m substrate temperature 5C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 24 hours 3 hours 1 hour 0.5 hour dry to handle 36 hours 20 hours 10 hours 3 hours
page 2/4
SIGMADUR 2800
July 2013
Pot life (at application viscosity) 5C 20C 30C 40C Worldwide availability 8 hours 5 hours 2 hours 1 hour
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMADUR 2800
July 2013
PDS
6836
page 4/4
SIGMADUR CLEARCOAT
4 pages November 2012 Revision of November 2009
Description
two component aliphatic clear acrylic polyurethane gloss nish recoatable clear acrylic polyurethane nish suitable for application over aluminium pigmented polyurethanes excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions excellent gloss retention non-chalking, non-yellowing tough and abrasion resistant resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, white spirit, parafns, aliphatic petroleum products and mild chemicals reduced sensitivity to early condensation and rain can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure cures at temperatures down to -5C suitable for use on stainless, non-ferrous materials not subject to immersion
clear gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.0 g/cm 50% 2% max. 463 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 450 g/l (approx. 3.8 lb/gal) 35 - 50 m depending on system 14.3 m/l for 35 m 1 hour at 20 C min. 12 hours * max. unlimited
at least 12 months previous coat; (polyurethane) dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from water or ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% stainless steel, non-ferrous metal; clean, dry and free from any contamination such as oil, grease, salt and sufciently roughened by light sanding
page 1/4
SIGMADUR CLEARCOAT
November 2012
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
Thinner 21-06 10 - 12%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.0 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 21-06 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Overcoating table with itself substrate temperature minimum interval -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C 14.3 35 10 50
page 2/4
SIGMADUR CLEARCOAT
November 2012
Curing
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C Worldwide availability 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMADUR CLEARCOAT
November 2012
192494
PDS clear
7531 0000001400
page 4/4
SIGMA EP 110 PRIMER

4 pages July 2010
DESCRIPTION
two component zinc phosphate blast primer / sealer epoxy blast primer for steel cures at temperatures down to +5C excellent adhesion to steel excellent rust preventing properties in industrial or coastal atmospheres registered as Highway Agency item 110 approved Network Rail RT 98 item 7.1.2
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) Flash point RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
Buff BS 08C35 - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 43 2% 544 g/l 25 - 50 m depending on system 17.2 m/l for 25 m 20 minutes * min. 4 hours * max. 3 months 5 days * (data for components) at least 12 months base 23C, hardener 24C
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m galvanised steel; pretreated with Sigma Etch during application and curing a substrate temperature down to 5C is acceptable provided substrate is dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature must be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
none 8 hours at 20C

page 1/4
SIGMA EP 110 PRIMER

July 2010
Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 - 0.58 mm (= 0.017 - 0.023 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 17.2 25 12.3 35 8.6 50
Overcoating table for Sigma EP 110 Primer substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 8 hours 3 months 20C 4 hours 3 months 30C 3 hours 2 months
page 2/4
SIGMA EP 110 PRIMER

July 2010
Curing table for Sigma EP 110 Primer for dft up to 50 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C touch dry 40 min. 20 min. 15 min. dry to handle 2 hours 1 hour 30 min. full cure 7 days 5 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 10 hours 8 hours 4 hours
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMA EP 110 PRIMER

July 2010
PDS
0660UK
page 4/4
SIGMA EP 111 PRIMER

4 pages August 2012 Revision of July 2010
Description
two component high solids polyamide cured recoatable zinc phosphate epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy primer or build coat in protective coating systems for steel and concrete structures in atmospheric exposure can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings even after long weathering periods free from lead and chromate containing pigments excellent rust preventing properties in industrial or coastal atmospheres tough with long term exibility cures at temperatures down to -5C excellent adhesion to steel easy application, both by airless spray and brush VOC compliant registered as Highway Agency item 111 approved Network Rail RT 98 COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES cream eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 68% 2% max. 214 g/l (approx. 1.8 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 75 - 150 m depending on system 6.8 m/l for 100 m * 4 hours at 20 C min. 8 hours * max. 6 months 4 days * at 20 C
at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided substrate is dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85%
page 1/4
SIGMA EP 111 PRIMER

August 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components 4 hours at 20 C
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 9.1 75 6.8 100 4.5 150
Overcoating table for Sigma EP 111 Primer substrate temperature minimum interval -5C 5C 10C 16 hours 20C 8 hours 30C 6 hours 40C 4 hours
48 20 hours hours
maximum interval 6 months for polyurethane paints the minimum overcoating time should be raised with 100%
page 2/4
SIGMA EP 111 PRIMER

August 2012
Curing
Curing table for Sigma EP 111 Primer for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C full cure 14 days 10 days 8 days 6 days 5 days 4 days 3 days 2 days dry to handle 24 - 48 hours 24 - 30 hours 18 - 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMA EP 111 PRIMER

August 2012
PDS
0708UK
page 4/4
SIGMA EP 112 MIOCOAT

4 pages August 2012 Revision of October 2007
Description
two component high solids micaceous iron oxide pigmented polyamine cured recoatable epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy build coat in protective coating systems for steel and concrete structures exposed to atmospheric land or marine conditions good adhesion characteristics for subsequent coats free from lead and chromate containing pigments excellent durability easy application, both by airless spray and brush VOC compliant resistant to temperatures up to 200C in dry atmospheric exposure conditions approved Network Rail RT 98 item 7.2.1 registered as Highway Agency item 112 COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES dark grey, light grey eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.8 g/cm 70% 2% max. 245 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 75 - 150 m depending on system 7.0 m/l for 100 m 2 hours at 20 C min. 8 hours * max. 6 months 7 days * at 20 C
at least 24 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 during application and curing a substrate temperature down to +5C , overcoating times are affected as stated in the tables substrate temperature at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination
page 1/4

August 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components 6 hours at 20 C Thinner 91-92 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.58 mm (= 0.019 - 0.023 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 9.3 75 7.0 100 4.7 150
Overcoating table for Sigma EP 112 Miocoat substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 20C 30C 6 hours 40C 4 hours
6 months 6 months 6 months 3 months 1 month
for polyurethane paints the minimum overcoating time should be raised with 100%
page 2/4

August 2012
Curing
Curing table for Sigma EP 112 Miocoat for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 25C full cure 21 days 15 days 10 days 7 days 5 days dry to handle 18 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 4 hours
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4

August 2012
PDS
0709UK
page 4/4
SIGMA EP 159 SEALER

3 pages July 2010
DESCRIPTION
two component epoxy sealer pigmented with aluminium epoxy sealer for metal sprayed steel cures at temperatures down to +5C registered as Highway Agency item 159 approved Network Rail RT 98 item 7.1.1
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) Flash point RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
grey (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.0 g/cm 45 2% 549 g/l 25 m depending on system 18 m/l 45 minutes * min. 8 hours * max. 4 days * 5 days * (data for components) at least 12 months base 25C, hardener 25C
thermally sprayed steel and dry and free from any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to 5C is acceptable provided substrate is dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature must be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
none 8 hours at 20C

approx. 0.43 - 0.58 mm (= 0.017 - 0.023 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
page 1/3
SIGMA EP 159 SEALER

July 2010
AIR SPRAY Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 18.0 25
Overcoating table for Sigma EP 159 Sealer substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 8 hours 4 days 20C 8 hours 4 days 30C 6 hours 4 days
Curing table for Sigma EP 159 Sealer for dft of 25 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C touch dry 90 min. 45 min. 25 min. dry to handle 4 hours 3 hours 1 hour full cure 7 days 5 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C 10 hours 8 hours 4 hours
page 2/3
SIGMA EP 159 SEALER

July 2010
REFERENCES
PDS
0665UK
page 3/3
SIGMA PU 162 MIOCOAT

3 pages August 2012 Revision of April 2008
Description
one component moisture curing micaceous iron oxide containing primer/build coat low temperature cure good anticorrosive properties excellent adhesion to galvanised steel and aluminium ready for use miox primer/build coat for maintenance situations
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
light and dark grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.5 g/cm 71% 2% 50 - 80 m 14.2 m/l for 50 m 9 m/l for 80 m 2 hours at 20 C min. 4 hours max. 6 months 3 days at 20 C at least 6 months previous coat; (e.g. Sigma PU 160 primer) dry and free from any contamination steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m or power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 during application and curing a substrate temperature down to +5C is acceptable galvanised steel and aluminium; dry and free from any contamination and roughened (e.g. sandpapering, sweepblasting) stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance take out working quantity from the tin and re-seal immediately to prevent moisture contamination in the can ensure surfaces are sound, clean and dry before coating and are within maximum overcoating restrictions adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
page 1/3

August 2012
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT Worldwide availability
Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 21-06 Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3

August 2012
PDS
0712 UK
page 3/3
SIGMA PU 160 PRIMER

3 pages August 2012 Revision of April 2008
Description
one component moisture curing polyurethane primer low temperature cure good anticorrosive properties excellent adhesion to galvanised steel and aluminium ready for use primer for maintenance situations
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
red at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.3 g/cm 46% 2% 40 m 11.5 m/l for 40 m 2 hours at 20 C min. 6 hours max. 6 months 3 days at 20 C at least 6 months steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m or power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 during application and curing a substrate temperature down to +5C is acceptable galvanised steel and aluminium; dry and free from any contamination and roughened (e.g. sandpapering, sweepblasting) stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance take out working quantity from the tin and re-seal immediately to prevent moisture contamination in the can adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.)
page 1/3
SIGMA PU 160 PRIMER

August 2012
Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 21-06 Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMA PU 160 PRIMER

August 2012
PDS
0710 UK
page 3/3
SIGMA ETCH
3 pages August 2012 Revision of December 2010
Description
phosphoric acid based etch solution for treating new unweathered galvanised surfaces prior to painting
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS for pretreatment of new galvanised steel where blasting or abrasion is not possible may be overcoated with a wide range of protective coating systems may be used to give adhesion of high temperature coatings to new galvanised steel changes colour on application from blue to black to indicate the effectiveness of primary pretreatment meets the requirements of British Rail's 'T-wash' solution not recommended for immersed conditions COLOURS AND GLOSS pale blue solution which turns grey-black on application to clean galvanised surfaces (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.0 g/cm not applicable max. 335 g/l (approx. 2.8 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) not applicable apply at 15 m/l min. 2 hours * max. 2 days * at least 12 months
BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place)
new galvanised steel degreased using a water soluble oil and grease remover washed with fresh water to remove emulsied residues, dirt and other contaminants surfaces which following application do not uniformly blacken, indicate insufcient primary surface preparation and these should be re-prepared by abrading galvanised surfaces are variable and the preferred method of treatment is to lightly sweep blast followed by degreasing and cleaning any traces of soluble zinc salts should be removed by abrading and washing mix thoroughly before application
over-application will produce a dense black powdery layer which is unsuitable for the application of top coats such areas will require either abrading or washing to remove powdery deposits otherwise the adhesion of topcoats will be adversely affected
page 1/3
SIGMA ETCH
August 2012
AIR SPRAY
not suitable
AIRLESS SPRAY
not suitable
BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner
brush recommended, apply at 15 m/l, roller is suitable not normally required if however application results in a black powdery surface then Sigma Etch can be diluted with clean water clean water Overcoating table substrate temperature 10C 2 hours 2 days 20C 2 hours 2 days 30C 1 hour 2 days 40C 30 min. 2 days
CLEANING SOLVENT
with recommended topcoats
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
this product contains phosphoric acid before commencing application refer to material safety data sheet see safety sheets 1430, 1431 although this is a water borne paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
page 2/3
SIGMA ETCH
August 2012
131931
PDS pale blue
7185 0000001500
page 3/3
SIGMARITE 88
3 pages August 2012 Revision of March 2011
Description
Water based cleaner excellent cleaning of soiled & chalked surfaces dramatically improves aged recoatability reduces repainting costs biodegradable cleaner contains no solvents contains no phosphates halogens, chlorinated solvents or petroleum destillates removes deposites of oil and grease from metal, concrete and previously painted surfaces (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.0 g/cm max. 0 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 0 g/l (0.0 lb/gal) at least 12 months steel; concrete: substrate temperature should be at least 5C painted surfaces
BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
Sigmarite 88 cleans intact, painted surfaces SigmaRite 88 is used to clean metal and concrete surfaces and avoids in many cases abrasive blasting or mechanical cleaning SigmaRite 88 is ideal for dry-dock painting, maintenance painting and new construction painting Outstanding characteristics; SigmaRite 88 is a quick working bio degradable cleaner for removing deposits of oil or grease from metal or previously painted surfaces When washed off with water, SigmaRite 88 leaves a clean surface with no oily lm or residu SigmaRite 88 cleans better than solvent type of cleaners. When dry, the surface is ready for either abrasive blasting (if required) or for application of a protective coating SigmaRite 88 reduces repainting costs by avoiding sweepblasting or roughening of old paint systems. SigmaRite 88 is relatively non hazardous to use, as compared with other types or cleaning compounds SigmaRite 88 contains no caustics, phosphates and no hazardous chlorinated solvents
page 1/3
SIGMARITE 88
August 2012
1. apply SigmaRite 88 generously using spray, brush, roller or mop on the surface to be cleaned. For most applications SigmaRite 88 can be reduced 2 to 3 times with fresh clean water. Use concentrated SigmaRite 88 cleaner for heavy oil residues. 2. Allow SigmaRite 88 to remain on the surface for 5 to 10 minutes, then scrub off with a broom or high pressure water wash. The longer the SigmaRite 88 can be allowed to work before scrubbing, the more effective it is in loosening deposits IMPORTANT: DO NOT allow SigmaRite 88 to dry on the surface 3. Hose with water under high pressure. On rough or pitted surfaces, it may be necessary to scrub with a stiff brush while washing. Hot water or low pressure steam greatly facilitates removal 4. If any deposits of grease or oil remain, repeat the application of SigmaRite 88 and scrub with a cloth or scrape deposit away 5.Wash again with water as described before. Allow to dry before application of protective coatings 6. If surfaces are hot, pre-wet before applcation of SigmaRite 88 7. DO NOT apply under freezing conditions. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SigmaRite 88 is an alkaline cleaner. Care should be taken to prevent eye contact and avoid prolonged or repeated skin contact. During application the use of eye protection and waterproof gloves are recommended. See material safety datasheet and product label for complete safety and precaution requirements.
page 2/3
SIGMARITE 88
August 2012
page 3/3
SigmaRite 2136
3 pages August 2012 Revision of January 2010
Description
high build micaceous iron oxide pigmented vinyl coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS excellent adhesion to weathered hot dipped galvanised steel unsaponiable resistant to industrial atmospheric exposure COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES black,medium grey,silver grey, light silver at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) small deviations depending on colour 1.5 g/cm 53% 2% max. 304 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 484 g/l (approx. 4.0 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 75 m depending on system 7.1 m/l for 75 m 60 min. at 20 C 3 hours at 5 - 10C min. 16 hours at a dft of 75 m max. unlimited at least 12 months weathered galvanised steel; dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts fresh galvanised steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss previous coat; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance Thinner 21-06 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 8 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.45 mm (= 0.018 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1740 - 2176 p.s.i.)
page 1/3
SigmaRite 2136
August 2012
Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 21-06 Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SigmaRite 2136
August 2012
PDS
7330
page 3/3
SIGMARITE 2143
Description
high build pigmented vinyl nish
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS excellent adhesion to weathered hot dipped galvanised steel unsaponiable resistant to industrial atmospheric exposure COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES RAL and BS colours semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) small deviations depending on colour 1.3 g/cm 42% 2% max. 470 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 555 g/l (approx. 4.6 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 75 m depending on system 5.6 m/l for 75 m 60 min. at 20 C 3 hours at 5 - 10C min. 16 hours at a dft of 75 m max. unlimited at least 12 months weathered galvanised steel; dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts fresh galvanised steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss previous coat; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance Thinner 21-06 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 8 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.45 mm (= 0.018 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1740 - 2176 p.s.i.)
page 1/3
SIGMARITE 2143
August 2012
BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT REFERENCES
Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 21-06 Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMARITE 2143
August 2012
PDS
7331
page 3/3
SIGMARITE 37-B-1
Description
Temperature indication paint blue
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS Indicates potentential dangerous hot spots colour changes above 200C from blue to white COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES blue at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.2 g/cm 44% 2% max. 384 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 449 g/l (approx. 3.7 lb/gal) 25 - 40 m 18.8 m/l for 25 m min. 16 hours at 20C max. unlimited at least 12 months steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 suitable primer; SigmaZinc 11 dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.35 MPa (= approx. 3.5 bar; 51 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 mm (= 0.017 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 2% Thinner 21-06
page 1/3
SIGMARITE 37-B-1
August 2012
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaRite 37-B-1 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 48 hours unlimited 20C 16 hours unlimited 30 min. 30C 8 hours unlimited 20 min.
Dry through maximum interval 60 min. REFERENCES Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMARITE 37-B-1
August 2012
PDS
7593
page 3/3
SIGMARITE 37-G-1
Description
Temperature indication paint green
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS Indicates potentential dangerous hot spots colour changes above 260C from green to white COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES green at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.2 g/cm 44% 2% max. 398 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 487 g/l (approx. 4.1 lb/gal) 25 - 40 m 17.6 m/l for 25 m min. 24 hours at 20C max. unlimited at least 12 months steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 suitable primer; SigmaZinc 11 dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing stir well before use too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.35 MPa (= approx. 3.5 bar; 51 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 mm (= 0.017 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 2%
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner
page 1/3
SIGMARITE 37-G-1
August 2012
CLEANING SOLVENT
Thinner 21-06 Overcoating table for SigmaRite 37-G-1 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval Dry through maximum interval 10C 48 hours unlimited 16 hours 20C 24 hours unlimited 4 hours 30C 16 hours unlimited 3 hours
REFERENCES
Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMARITE 37-G-1
August 2012
PDS
7594
page 3/3
SIGMAFAST 20
Description
high build zinc phosphate primer based on modied alkyd resin
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS good anticorrosive properties under atmospheric conditions fast drying fast handling recoatable with most one and two component coatings suitable for atmospheric exposure conditions lead- and chromate free COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES redbrown, grey (other (RAL) colours on request) at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.5 g/cm 55% 2% max. 258 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 382 g/l (approx. 3.2 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 50 - 75 m per coat 11.0 m/l for 50 m 7.3 m/l for 75 m 15 minutes at 20 C min. 45 minutes for 75 m dft * at higher dft's drying time will be longer at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 steel; power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St2 shop primed steel; sweep blasted or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Ss or SPSS-Pt2 substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.35 MPa (= approx. 3.5 bar; 51 p.s.i.)
page 1/5
SIGMAFAST 20
June 2012
Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.38 - 0.48 mm (= 0.015 - 0.019 in) 12 - 16 MPa (= approx. 120 - 160 bar; 1740 - 2321 p.s.i.) Thinner 20-05 0 - 2% Thinner 21-06 Overcoating table for SigmaFast 20 for dft up to 75 m substrate temperature 10C 12 hours unlimited 15C 10 hours 20C 8 hours
with two component products: SigmaCover 456, SigmaCover 435, SigmaDur 520
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Overcoating table for SigmaFast 20 for dft up to 75 m substrate temperature with alkyd based products (e.g. SigmaFast 20 and 40) minimum interval maximum interval 10C 75 min. unlimited 15C 60 min. 20C 45 min.
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.
page 2/5
SIGMAFAST 20
June 2012
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/5
SIGMAFAST 20
June 2012
page 4/5
SIGMAFAST 20
June 2012
178249 181056 179897 179898
redbrown grey base L base Z PDS
2008002200 7035262200 0710002194 0070002158 7155
page 5/5
SIGMAFAST 40
Description
high build nish coating, based on modied alkyd resin suitable for atmospheric exposure conditions fast drying fast handling good gloss and colour retention not suitable for immersion in water
RAL colours (other colours available on request) semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.3 g/cm 45% 2% max. 390 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 490 g/l (approx. 4.1 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 50 m per coat 9.0 m/l for 50 m 45 minutes at 20 C min. 4 hours for 50 m dft max. unlimited at higher dft's drying time will be longer at least 24 months previous suitable coat; (e.g. SigmaFast 20) dry and free from any contamination old existing sound coating; sufciently roughened, dry and cleaned substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.)
page 1/3
SIGMAFAST 40
February 2013
Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.38 - 0.48 mm (= 0.015 - 0.019 in) 12 - 16 MPa (= approx. 120 - 160 bar; 1740 - 2321 p.s.i.) Thinner 20-05 0 - 2% Thinner 21-06 Overcoating table for SigmaFast 40 for dft up to 50 m substrate temperature 10C 8 hours unlimited 15C 6 hours 20C 4 hours 30C 3 hours
with itself
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Worldwide availability It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMAFAST 40
February 2013
235942 235941 235290 235289
PDS base L base L base Z base Z
7234 0710001492 0710002197 0070001448 0070002179
page 3/3
SIGMAFAST 205
Description
two component high build polyamide cured zinc phosphate epoxy primer/ coating general purpose epoxy primer/coating for atmospheric conditions direct to metal and concrete in selected environments fast curing recoatable with most two component epoxy- and polyurethane coatings tough, with long term exibility easy application by airless spray
grey (other (RAL) colours on request) eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 70% 2% max. 224 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 322 g/l (approx. 2.7 lb/gal) 80 - 150 m depending on system 8.8 m/l for 80 m 4.7 m/l for 150 m 2 hours at 20 C min. 4 hours for 150 m dft * max. 6 months * 4 days * at 20 C at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing concrete: abrasive blast, acid etch or equivalent methods moisture content of concrete should be max. 4% mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components 6 hours at 20 C * none above 10C 10 minutes if applied at temperatures below 10C
page 1/4
SIGMAFAST 205
July 2012
Thinner 91-92 5 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 8.8 80 7 100 4.7 150
Overcoating table for SigmaFast 205 for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature with SigmaFast 205, SigmaCover 435, SigmaCover 456 and various two component polyurethane coatings minimum interval 5C 10C 20C 4 hours 30C 3 hours 40C 2 hours
10 hours 6 hours
maximum interval
page 2/4
SIGMAFAST 205
July 2012
Curing
Curing table substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C full cure 8 days 6 days 4 days 3 days 2 days dry to handle 18 hours 12 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 10 hours 6 hours 3 hours
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMAFAST 205
July 2012
225064
PDS grey
7802 5188052200
page 4/4
SIGMAFAST 205 LT
4 pages December 2012 Revision of August 2012
Description
two component high build polyamide cured zinc phosphate epoxy primer/ coating good low temperature curing general purpose epoxy primer/coating for atmospheric conditions fast curing recoatable with most two component epoxy and polyurethane coatings tough, with long term exibility easy application by airless spray
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
grey (other (RAL) colours on request) eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 70% 2% max. 213 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 310 g/l (approx. 2.6 lb/gal) 75 - 150 m depending on system 8.8 m/l for 80 m 4.7 m/l for 150 m 2.5 hours at 20 C 4 hours at 10 C * min. 4 hours for 150 m dft * max. 6 months
at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m substrate temperature should be between -5C up to 20C during application and curing and at least 3C above dew point, dry and free from ice and any contamination mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components 6 hours at 10 C *
Pot life
page 1/4
SIGMAFAST 205 LT
December 2012
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m/l dft in m 8.8 80 7 100 4.7 150
Overcoating table for SigmaFast 205 LT for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature with SigmaFast 205, SigmaCover 435,SigmaCover 456 and various two component polyurethane coatings minimum interval maximum interval -5C 0C 5C 10C 4 hours 20C 3 hours
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table substrate temperature -5C 0C 5C 10C 20C dry to handle 24 hours 20 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours full cure 21 days 14 days 7 days 7 days 3 days
page 2/4
SIGMAFAST 205 LT
December 2012
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C (50 F) 21 C (69.8 F) 32 C (89.6 F) Worldwide availability 6 hours 4 hours 1.5 hours
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMAFAST 205 LT
December 2012
PDS
7800
page 4/4
SIGMAFAST 210
4 pages April 2013 Revision of March 2011
Description
two component high build zinc phosphate polyurethane primer/nish fast curing specially designed for in-shop application easy application by airless spray unlimited recoatable good adhesion to steel and galvanised steel good resistance to atmospheric exposure good colour retention non-chalking, non-yellowing cures at temperatures down to -5C
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
a wide range of colours available by PPG colornet tinting system semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for white, for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 55 2% max. 270 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 383 g/l (approx. 3.2 lb/gal) 80 - 120 m depending on system 6.9 m/l for 80 m 4.6 m/l for 120 m 1 hour at 20C min. 4 hours * max. unlimited 4 days * (data for components) at least 24 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m galvanised steel; dry and free from any contamination and roughened (e.g. sandpapering, sweepblasting) during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change
page 1/4
SIGMAFAST 210
April 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 88 : 12 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components none 5 hours at 20C *
Thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.0 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.45 mm (= 0.018 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 6.9 80 4.6 120
Overcoating table for SigmaFast 210 for dft up to 120 m substrate temperature with itself and two component polyurethane nishes minimum interval maximum interval -5C 0C 10C 20C 4 hours 30C 2 hours
24 hours 16 hours 6 hours unlimited
page 2/4
SIGMAFAST 210
April 2013
Curing
Curing table substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 24 hours 16 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours full cure 15 days 11 days 5 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C Worldwide availability 5 hours
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMAFAST 210
April 2013
240785 240786 240787 240788
PDS black black white white
7541 8000002200 8000001400 7000002200 7000001400
page 4/4
SIGMAFAST 213
Description
two component high build polyamine cured vinyl epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS epoxy primer or build coat in protective coating systems for steel structures in atmospheric exposure tough, with long term exibility cures at temperatures down to -5C fast drying and handling COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES grey, yellow at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 60% 2% max. 235 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 345 g/l (approx. 2.9 lb/gal) 80 - 180 m depending on system 7.5 m/l for 80 m 3.3 m/l for 180 m * 50 minutes at 20 C * min. 45 min * max. 1 year * at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components 15 minutes at 20C 6 hours at 20 C *
page 1/4
SIGMAFAST 213
November 2012
Thinner 21-06 20 - 30%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 20 - 30%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Overcoating table for 150 m dft substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 0C 4.5 hours 12 months 10C 2.5 hours 12 months 20C 1 hour 12 months 30C 35 min. 12 months 7.5 80 6 100 3.3 180
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Overcoating table for 80 m dft substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 0C 3 hours 12 months 10C 1.5 hour 12 months 20C 45 min. 12 months 30C 25 min. 12 months
page 2/4
SIGMAFAST 213
November 2012
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMAFAST 213
November 2012
219313 219315
PDS yellow grey
7705 3000002200 5000002200
page 4/4
SIGMAFAST 220
4 pages September 2013 Revision of March 2011
Description
two component high build zinc phosphate polyurethane primer/nish fast curing specially designed for in-shop application easy application by airless spray unlimited recoatable good adhesion to steel and galvanised steel good resistance to atmospheric exposure good colour retention non-chalking, non-yellowing cures at temperatures down to -5C
a wide range of colours available by PPG colornet tinting system gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for white, for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 54 2% max. 275 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 395 g/l (approx. 3.3 lb/gal) 80 - 120 m depending on system 6.8 m/l for 80 m 4.5 m/l for 120 m 1 hours at 20C min. 4 hours * max. unlimited 4 days * (data for components) at least 24 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m galvanised steel; dry and free from any contamination and roughened (e.g. sandpapering, sweepblasting) during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change
page 1/4
SIGMAFAST 220
September 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 88 : 12 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components none 2.5 hours at 20C *
Thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.0 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.45 mm (= 0.018 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 6.8 80 4.5 120
Overcoating table for SigmaFast 220 for dft up to 120 m substrate temperature with itself and two component polyurethane nishes minimum interval maximum interval -5C 0C 10C 20C 4 hours 30C 2 hours
unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited
page 2/4
SIGMAFAST 220
September 2013
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 120 m substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 24 hours 16 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours full cure 15 days 11 days 5 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 4 hours 2.5 hours 1.5 hour
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMAFAST 220
September 2013
PDS
7542
page 4/4
SIGMAFAST 278
4 pages March 2013 Revision of July 2012
Description
two component high solids, zinc phosphate epoxy primer and build coat, rapid curing and overcoat even under low temperature epoxy primer or build coat in protective coating systems excellent corrosion resistance in atmospheric exposure cures at temperatures down to -5C speed curing in steel fabrication easy application by airless spray wide application range
redbrown, grey and a selected range of (MIO) colours at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for white, for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 80% 3% max. 153 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 230 g/l (approx. 1.9 lb/gal) 75 - 250 m 6.4 m/l for 125 m 1 hour at 20 C min. 2 hours * max. unlimited * (data for components) 3 days * at 20 C * at least 24 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 galvanized steel; cleaned from grease, salts, contaminations and roughened up previous suitable primer; dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts, and sufciently roughened if necessary when applied to zinc silicate, a mist coat and full coat technique is required during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components none 1 hour at 20 C *
page 1/4
SIGMAFAST 278
March 2013
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, 30-40% when mist coat applied approx. 0.45 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 20 - 25 MPa (= 200 - 250 bar; 2901 - 3626 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Application by roller will leave roller marking and is suitable for minimum d.f.t. requirements only A roller suitable for epoxy application must be used
Application by brush may show brush marking, due to the thixotropic nature of the paint and is most suitable to small areas, tight angle areas or for stripe coating or touch up.
CLEANING SOLVENT
Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 10.6 75 6.4 125 3.2 250
Overcoating table for SigmaFast 278 for dft up to 125 m substrate temperature with various two pack epoxy- and polyurethane coatings minimum interval -5C 0C 10 C 20C 2 hours 30C 1 hour
This product has an unlimited maximum overcoating interval provided the surface is free from chalking and other contamination, in which case it should be cleaned and roughened up to ensure good adhesion of subsequent coat. The optimum intercoat adhesion is obtained when the subsequent coating is applied before the full cure time of the previous coating has elapsed Tendency to yellow exposure in the sun; this has no inuence on the performance nor does the yellowing affect any topcoat applied.
page 2/4
SIGMAFAST 278
March 2013
Curing
Curing table at 125 m substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C touch dry 16 hours 11 hours 4 hours 2 hours 1.0 hour dry to handle 38 hours 24 hours 8 hours 4 hours 2 hours full cure -21 days 8 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) -5 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 20 hours 10 hours 3 hours 1 hour 0.5 hour
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications explosion hazard- toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMAFAST 278
March 2013
PDS
6829
page 4/4
"
&
'
&
&
'
&
&
&
'
&
'
&
'
&
&
&
'
<
>
'
<
>
'
&
>
&
'
'
'
>
&
'
>
>
>
&
'
'
'
&
'
'
&
>
'
'
&
'
>
&
'
>
'
>
'
>
&
&
'
&
'
'
'
&
&
'
&
&
'
&
'
'
'
'
'
&
&
'
&
&
&
&
'
&
'
&
'
'
'
&
&
&
&
>
'
'
>
>
<
>
>
>
>
&
'
<
<
>
>
>
<
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
<
>
>
<
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
"
SIGMAFAST 370
Description
two component high build epoxy primer/coating general purpose epoxy primer/coating for atmospheric conditions fast curing recoatable with most two component epoxy and polyurethane coatings tough, with long term exibility easy application by airless spray
grey (other (RAL) colours on request) eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 66% 2% max. 179 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 306 g/l (approx. 2.6 lb/gal) 100 - 150 m depending on system * 6.6 m/l for 100 m * 15 min. at 20 C min. 2 hours for 100 m dft * max. 6 months * 4 days * at 20 C
at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components none above 10C 10 minutes if applied at temperatures below 10C 4 hours at 20 C *
page 1/4
SIGMAFAST 370
June 2012
Thinner 21-06 5 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 90-58 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 6.6 100 4 150
Overcoating table for SigmaFast 370 for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature with SigmaFast 370, minimum interval SigmaCover 435 and SigmaDur 550 maximum interval 5C 8 hours 6 months 10C 4 hours 6 months 20C 2 hours 6 months 30C 1 hour 6 months
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 16 hours 8 hours 5 hours 2 hours full cure 8 days 6 days 4 days 3 days
page 2/4
SIGMAFAST 370
June 2012
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMAFAST 370
June 2012
PDS
7803
page 4/4
SIGMAFAST HS ENAMEL
4 pages August 2012 Revision of November 2004
Description
one component, modied acrylic based, air drying industrial enamel fast drying good exterior durability excellent gloss and colour retention VOC compliant as a nish
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
Wide range of colours, lead free: BS 4800, BS381C, RAL gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.1 - 1.3 g/cm ( depending on colour) 53% 2% max. 420 g/l (approx. 3.5 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 25 - 40 m ( can be achieved by a single coat application or using a "wet on wet" technique) 21.2 m/l for 25 m 13.3 m/l for 40 m * 40 min. at 20 C see overcoating table * at least 12 months can be applied on most sound clean paint systems or onto clean bare metal which has been primed with a suitable primer application temperature range 5 - 30 C substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) addition of thinner may increase the VOC value of the product to greater than 420 g/litre no extra thinner should be required but if necessary Thinner 21-06 can be added to the mixed components 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.)
page 1/4
SIGMAFAST HS ENAMEL
August 2012
no extra thinner should be required but if necessary Thinner 21-06 can be added to the mixed components 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.33 - 0.43 mm (= 0.013 - 0.017 in) 15 - 28 MPa (= approx. 2176 - 4061 p.s.i.) no extra thinner is required but if necessary Thinner 21-06 can be added if desired to mixed components 0 - 5% if required Overcoating table for SigmaFast HS Enamel for dft up to 25 m substrate temperature 5C 8 hours 30 hours 20C 5 hours 24 hours 30C 2 hours 16 hours
with itself
wrinkling of the topcoat may occur if overcoating takes place between the times stated Curing Drying table substrate temperature 5C 20C 30C Worldwide availability touch dry 75 min. 40 min. 30 min. full cure 24 hours 24 hours 12 hours dry to handle 120 min. 60 min. 50 min.
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
page 2/4
SIGMAFAST HS ENAMEL
August 2012
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMAFAST HS ENAMEL
August 2012
PDS
0672UK
page 4/4
SIGMAGLIDE 890
4 pages March 2013 Revision of March 2010
Description
two component silicone based nish for fouling release system
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS non-toxic, fouling release coating for ships, installations and sea water intakes under all fouling conditions for use at newbuilding or maintenance COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) Reoating time RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES redbrown (other colours on request) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.1 g/cm 77% 2% max. 196 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 215 g/l (approx. 1.8 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 150 m 5.1 m/l for 150 m 1 hour at 20 C min. 2 hours * (data for components) at least 12 months
* see additional data min. 8 hours *
for new Buildings or spot/full blast, SigmaGlide 890 should only be applied over SigmaGlide 790 as a re-fresh coat, SigmaGlide 890 can be applied over itself in line with PPG Protective & Marine Coatings SigmaGlide General Working Procedure previous coat; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% relative humidity should be above 40%
page 1/4
SIGMAGLIDE 890
March 2013
marine system sheet: 3127 In order to achieve optimal performance from the SigmaGlide system, the individual SigmaGlide products must be applied in strict accordance with the minimum specied dry lm thickness and also with the PPG Protective & Marine Coatings SigmaGlide General Working Procedure. Please consult PPG Protective & Marine Coatings for details of the application procedure which has been prepared to the best of our knowledge and in accordance with World-wide application best practices in order to ensure optimal workmanship and application results. mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 open drum just before use stir base well before use for 5 minutes add hardener to the base and stir well again for at least 5 minutes no thinner should be added all equipment must be thoroughly cleaned prior to use and before re-use with other materials, to prevent contamination overspray on paint which will not be recoated with the SigmaGlide 890 should be avoided as much as possible none 4 hours at 20 C *
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle angle Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER CLEANING SOLVENT
no thinner should be added from 35 to 60, depending on nozzle orce approx. 0.43 - 0.53 mm (= 0.017 - 0.021 in) 15 - 20 MPa (= approx. 150 - 200 bar; 2176 - 2901 p.s.i.) for small areas only (touch up and repair) Thinner 90-83 or 50/50 mixture of Thinner 21-06 and Thinner 50-02 please note that used cleaning solvent must not be allowed to contaminate other paints
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaGlide 890 with itself at a dft up to 150 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 3 hours 8 hours 20C 2 hours 8 hours 30C 1 hour 8 hours 40C 1 hour 8 hours
surface should be dry and free from any contamination relative humidity should be above 40%
page 2/4
SIGMAGLIDE 890
March 2013
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 PPG Protective & Marine Coatings' General working procedure for application of SigmaGlide for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMAGLIDE 890
March 2013
236471 240643
PDS redbrown white
7399 2008002200 7000001250
page 4/4
SIGMAGUARD 215
DESCRIPTION
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS epoxy primer approved by KIWA under certied coatings for contact with drinking water good adhesion to steel good ow and wetting properties good water and corrosion resistance cures at temperatures down to +5C long recoating intervals are possible when overcoating with epoxy coatings compatible with cathodic protection systems certied by KIWA - K12827/01 of 1998-09-01 COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Curing time yellow/green - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 57 2% max. 312 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 424 g/l (approx. 3.5 lb/gal) 75 m depending on system 7.6 m/l for 75 m * 30 minutes min. 16 hours * max. 3 - 6 months * 7 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 12 months
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
none 14 hours at 20C *

page 1/4
SIGMAGUARD 215
April 2009
Thinner 91-92 10 - 25% for dft 35 - 80 m approx. 0.46 mm (= 0.018 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)
no extra thinner is necessary, but up to 5% Thinner 91-92 can be added if desired Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: 7.6 75 50 m
page 2/4
SIGMAGUARD 215
April 2009
Overcoating table for SigmaGuard 215 for dft up to 75 m for SigmaGuard CSF 575, SigmaGuard CSF 585 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval when not exposed to daylight maximum interval when exposed to daylight 5C 72 hours 6 months 10C 48 hours 6 months 15C 24 hours 6 months 20C 16 hours 6 months 30C 12 hours 4 months 40C 8 hours 3 months
3 months
3 months
3 months
3 months
2 months
2 months
surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination Curing table for dft up to 75 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 2 hours 1 hour 45 min. 30 min. 20 min. dry to handle 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour full cure 21 days 14 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 15C 20C 25C 30C 35C Worldwide availability 16 hours 14 hours 11 hours 8 hours 5 hours
page 3/4
SIGMAGUARD 215
April 2009
REFERENCES
179386
PDS yellow/green
7415 4009002200
page 4/4
SIGMAGUARD 260
5 pages May 2013 Revision of September 2012
Description
two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy holding primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS holding primer for SigmaGuard CSF 650, Novaguard 840 and Novaguard 890 can be applied and cures at temperatures down to +5C good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface good abrasion resistance COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES pink eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 68 2% max. 194 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 328 g/l (approx. 2.7 lb/gal) 50 - 75 m 9.10 m/l for 75 m 13.65 m/l for 50 m 2 - 3 hours at 20C, 14 - 16 hours at 5C min. 8 hours * max. 1 month *
see curing table *

steel; blast cleaned in situ to at least ISO-Sa2 and free from rust, scale, shop primer and any other contamination blasting prole 50 - 100 m the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of SigmaGuard 260 substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/5
SIGMAGUARD 260
May 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 87 : 13 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components allow induction time before use 5C - 20 min. 10C - 15 min. 15C - 10 min. 2 hours at 20 C *
Induction time
Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.53 mm (= 0.019 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) only for spot repair and stripe coating Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 13.65 50 9.10 75 6.80 100 60 m
page 2/5
SIGMAGUARD 260
May 2013
Overcoating table for SigmaGuard 260 for dft up to 75 m substrate temperature with SigmaGuard CSF 650, Novaguard 840 or Novaguard 890 minimum interval 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C
Max interval when 2 months 2 months 2 months 1 month 1 month 1 month not exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval surface should be dry and free from any contamination
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 75 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 40C dry to handle 20 hours 10 hours 3 hours 1 hour full cure 10 days 7 days 5 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) when used as a primer under solvent free tank-linings the dft must be limited to a maximum of 100 m Pot life (at application viscosity) 5C 10C 15C 20C 40C Worldwide availability 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 2 hours 30 min.
page 3/5
SIGMAGUARD 260
May 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMAGUARD 260
May 2013
241815
PDS pink
7944 6007002200
page 5/5
SIGMAGUARD 603
4 pages July 2011 Revision of February 2010
DESCRIPTION
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS one coat protection for maintenance or major refurbishment of ballast water tanks and crude oil tanks tolerant to marginal surface preparation good corrosion resistance can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) reduced explosion risk and re hazard good visibility due to light colour COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES light grey - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 100% max. 111 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 144 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 300 m 3.3 m/l for 300 m * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 5 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 for good corrosion protection coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L (blasting prole 50 - 100 m) previous epoxy coat; in sound condition, dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary pitted steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 is recommended suitable primer; SigmaCover 280 substrate temperature must be above 5C during application and curing There are no restrictions regarding dew point temperature and relative humidity. suitable for damp surfaces marine 1 x 300 m SigmaGuard 603
page 1/4
SIGMAGUARD 603
July 2011
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be at least 20C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY
none approx. 1 hour at 20C *

use heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature application with 45:1 airless spray equipment is possible provided in-line heated high pressure hoses are used in case of using 45:1 airless spray equipment the paint must be heated to approx. 30C in order to obtain the right application viscosity length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 - 0.64 mm (= 0.021 - 0.025 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes no solvent present; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/4
SIGMAGUARD 603
July 2011
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: 3.3 300 2.5 400 150 - 200 m
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating with SigmaGuard 603 (spot repair and stripe coating) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 80 hours 20 days 10C 36 hours 20 days 20C 24 hours 20 days 30C 16 hours 14 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature dry to handle minimum curing time before exposure to sea water 10 days 5 days 4 days 2 days full cure
5C 10C 20C 30C
15 days 7 days 5 days 3 days
page 3/4
SIGMAGUARD 603
July 2011
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
REFERENCES
267450
PDS lightgrey
7985 5163052200
page 4/4
"
&
'
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
'
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
<
>
&
>
&
&
&
>
<
<
&
<
&
&
<
<
<
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
<
'
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
'
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
"
"
&
'
"
&
<
>
? @ A B
; B C
@ A
@ A E
B @ A B
&
'
&
'
'
&
&
@ A ?
>
B @ A
>
"
'
'
'
&
<
>
>
>
<
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
"
>
>
>
<
>
<
>
>
>
<
>
D B
<
>
>
>
>
<
>
>
<
>
D B
<
>
>
>
>
>
<
>
D B B
<
>
>
>
<
>
D B
>
>
<
>
<
>
<
>
>
<
>
>
>
>
<
>
>
>
>
>
<
>
>
>
>
>
<
D B
D B
>
>
<
SIGMAGUARD 720
Description
two component reinforced high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS tank coating with good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals short curing periods good low temperature curing easy to clean recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's Register) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES light green, grey gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 78% 2% max. 163 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 233 g/l (approx. 1.9 lb/gal) 125 - 160 m depending on system 6.2 m/l for 125 m * 7 - 8 hours at 5 C 5 - 6 hours at 10 C 2 - 3 hours at 20 C min. 8 hours * max. 28 days *
see curing table *

steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m previous coat; dry, free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing IMO-MSC 288(87) Requirements for Cargo Tanks of Crude Oil Tankers steel; ISO 8501-3:2006 grade P2, with all edges treated to a rounded radius of minimum 2 mm or subject to three pass grinding steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m dust quantity rating 1 for dust size class 3, 4 or 5, lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992)
page 1/5
SIGMAGUARD 720
March 2013
tankcoatings mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25
system sheet: 3320
the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components Induction time allow induction time before use 15C - 15 min. 20C - 10 min. 25C - 5 min. 1.5 hour at 20 C *
Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
Thinner 91-92 5 - 15% for a one coat application of 125 m dft 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 up to 10% for a one coat application of 125 m dft approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) not recommended, only for spot repair and stripe coating Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 7.8 100 6.2 125 4.9 160 100 m
page 2/5
SIGMAGUARD 720
March 2013
Overcoating table for SigmaGuard 720 for dft up to 125 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 20C 30C 4 hours 14 days 40C 3 hours 7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 125 m for SigmaGuard 720 tankcoating system before transport of substrate temperature alpihatic petroleum products and ballast water and tanktest with sea water 10 days 7 days 5 days 3 days 2.5 days 1.5 day cargoes without note 4,7,8 or 11
5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C
17 days 14 days 8 days 5 days 4 days 3 days
minimum curing time of SigmaGuard 720 tankcoating system before transport of cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to the latest issue of the Tank coating Resistance List (TRIS) adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 15 C 20 C 25 C 30 C Worldwide availability 3 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour 30 min.
page 3/5
SIGMAGUARD 720
March 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMAGUARD 720
March 2013
179122 180730 191734 191736
PDS grey green grey green
7433 5000002200 (171570 base, 171569 hardener) 4000002200 (171568 base, 171569 hardener) 5000002150 (191733 base, 191732 hardener) 4000002150 (191735 base, 191732 hardener)
page 5/5
SIGMALINE 855 (11)

4 pages September 2013 Revision of July 2013
Description
two component solvent free polyurethane coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS solvent free coating for the protection of the internal and external of pipelines and underground storage tanks excellent corrosion resistance extremely fast curing good abrasion and impact resistance excellent adhesion good water resistance approved for exterior protection by EN10290, AWWA C222-08 and SANS1217 (Ed.2) approved for potable water by BS6920 (Grey only) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES grey, blue gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 100% max. 1 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 1 g/l (approx. 0.0 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 500 - 1500 m depending on requirements 0.7 m/l for 1500 m * 1.5 - 2 minutes 12 hours (data for components) at least 6 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 75 - 125 m substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point, lower temperatures will reduce ow properties during application the relative humidity may not exceed 75% and a good ventilation is necessary for atmospheric exposure a top coat of SigmaDur 520 is recommended mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 50 : 50 application with twin feed hot airless spray equipment no thinner should be added none 10 seconds at 60C *
page 1/4
SIGMALINE 855 (11)

September 2013
no thinner should be added approx. 0.58 - 0.78 mm (= 0.023 - 0.031 in) depending on required production speed and dft 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.)
Temperature at nozzle 60C
twin feed hot airless spray pumping viscosity is achieved at 40C - 60C temperature in the mixing unit must be between 65C and 75C CLEANING SOLVENT Thinner 90-58 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: mixed material will become insoluble within a few seconds after mixing at 60C parts of the spraying equipment containing mixed base and hardener must be cleaned immediately after completion of the job or during any interruption Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Overcoating for a good intercoat adhesion it is necessary that a coated surface which should be repaired or completely recoated is roughened up by means of sweep blasting or abrading for manual repaint of small damages special repair sets are available called: "SigmaLine 855 repair", product data sheet {7655 RP} Curing Curing table for dft up to 1500 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 40C 60C touch dry 2-4 min. 1.5-3 min. 50 - 90 seconds 30 - 60 seconds dry to handle 8 - 10 minutes 4 - 7 minutes 3 - 5 minutes 1 - 2 minutes full cure 24 hours 12 hours 8 hours 4 hours 0.7 1500 1.0 1000 2.0 500
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMALINE 855 (11)

September 2013
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 30C 60C REFERENCES 1 min. 20 - 30 seconds 5 - 10 seconds
Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 SigmaLine 855 repair see product data sheet 7655 RP Conversion tables see information sheet 1410 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1491 Surface preparation of steel pipes and ttings Shop application see information sheet 1492 Internal chemical cleaning of steel pipes in-situ application see information sheet 1493 Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1650 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMALINE 855 (11)

September 2013
PDS
7656
page 4/4
SIGMAGUARD 730
5 pages December 2012 Revision of April 2009
Description
two component high solids polyamine cured phenolic epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS tank coating with good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals short curing periods good low temperature curing easy to clean can be used under insulation up to 150C COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES offwhite, cream gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 78% 2% max. 169 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 242 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 150 m * 5.2 m/l 3 hours at 20 C min. 8 hours * max. 28 days * See curing table* at 20 C
at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m previous coat; dry, free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/5
SIGMAGUARD 730
December 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components allow induction time before use 15C - 15 min. 20C - 10 min. 25C - 5 min. 1.5 hour at 20 C *
Induction time
Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
Thinner 91-92 5 - 15% for a one coat application of 150 m dft 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 up to 10% for a one coat application of 150 m dft approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) not recommended, only for spot repair and stripe coating Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 6.2 125 5.2 150 100 m
page 2/5
SIGMAGUARD 730
December 2012
Overcoating table for SigmaGuard 730 for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 20C 30C 4 hours 14 days 40C 3 hours 7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 150 m min. curing time of SigmaGuard 730 tankcoating system before transport of substrate temperature aliphatic petroleum products and ballast water and tanktest with sea water 10 days 7 days 3 days 2.5 days 1.5 day cargoes without note 4,7,8 or 11
5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
17 days 14 days 5 days 4 days 3 days
minimum curing time of SigmaGuard 730 tankcoating system before transport of cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 15 C 20 C 25 C 30 C Worldwide availability 3 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour 30 min.
page 3/5
SIGMAGUARD 730
December 2012
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMAGUARD 730
December 2012
247818 247817
PDS offwhite cream
7459 7001002200 3000002200
page 5/5
SIGMAGUARD 750
Description
two component moisture curing zinc rich (ethyl) silicate coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS tankcoating with excellent solvent and chemical resistance to be used as tankcoating or as a system primer in various paint systems based on unsaponiable binders can withstand substrate temperatures from -90C up to +400C, under normal atmospheric exposure conditions high zinc content resulting in excellent corrosion protection good impact and abrasion resistance certicate for ASTM A-490 class 'B' for slip co-efcient recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 must not be used for immersion in alkaline (more than pH 9) or acidic (less than pH 5.5) liquids COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.7 g/cm 65% 2% max. 167 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 452 g/l (approx. 3.8 lb/gal) average dft 75 m to 100 m with a minimum of 75 m on smooth nonpitted blast cleaned steel average dft 100 m with a minimum of 75 m on rough or light pitted, blast cleaned steel heavy pitted steel substrate is not acceptable 8.7 m/l for 75 m 6.5 m/l for 100 m * 30 min. at 20 C min. 12 hours * max. unlimited, zinc salts must be removed
12 hours * (data for components)
Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place)
binder: at least 9 months pigment: at least 24 months (store pigment moisture free)
page 1/7
SIGMAGUARD 750
June 2012
steel; blast cleaned in-situ to at least ISO-Sa2, completely free from rust, scale, shop primer and contaminations, blasting prole 40 - 70 m galvanised steel; sweep blasted to roughen the surface and to remove any zinc salts which might be present a heavy pitted steel substrate is not acceptable substrate temperatures ranging from -5C up to +40C during application are acceptable substrate temperature must be at least 3C above dew point during application and curing relative humidity during curing should be above 50% marine mixing ratio by volume: binder to zinc powder 74 : 26 Many of Sigma's zinc silicates are supplied as 2 pack materials consisting of a jerrycan with pigmented binder and a drum containing a bag of zinc powder. To ensure proper mixing of both components the instructions given below must be followed. To avoid lumps in the paint do not add the binder to the zinc powder. 1) Take the bag with zinc powder out of the drum. 2) Shake the binder in the jerrycan a few times to reach a certain degree of homogenisation. 3) Pour about 2/3 of the binder in the empty drum. 4) With the jerrycan now reduced in weight and containing more free space, shake it vigorously to obtain a homogeneous mix with no deposits left on the bottom, and add this to the drum. 5) Add the zinc powder gradually to the pigmented binder in the drum and at the same time continuously stir the mixture by using a mechanical mixer (keep the speed low). 6) Stir the zinc dust powder thoroughly through the binder (high speed) and keep stirring till, a homogeneous mixture is obtained. 7) Strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen. 8) Agitate continuously during application (low speed). The use of a dedicated pump with a constant agitation for a zinc silicate coating is recommended. Note: At application temperature above 30C addition of max 10% by volume of Thinner 90-53 may be necessary. none 12 hours at 20 C *
system sheet: 3323
page 2/7
SIGMAGUARD 750
June 2012
Thinner 90-53 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.)
a dedicated pump for a zinc silicate coating with constant agitation must be used
Thinner 90-53 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.64 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 9 - 12 MPa (= approx. 90 - 120 bar; 1305 - 1740 p.s.i.)
BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner
only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 90-53 5 - 15% apply a visible wet coat with a max. dft of 25 m same for subsequent coats in order to obtain the required dft Thinner 90-53 when for some reason the dft is below specication and an extra coat of SigmaGuard 750 has to be applied, SigmaGuard 750 should be thinned down with 25 - 50% Thinner 90-53, in order to obtain a visible wet coat that remains wet for some time this is only valid for spray application very highly pigmented zinc silicate primers produce dry lms with void spaces in between the particles Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing:
above 150 m mudcracking can occur
CLEANING SOLVENT Upgrading Dft
ADDITIONAL DATA
8.7 75
6.5 100 35 m
page 3/7
SIGMAGUARD 750
June 2012
Overcoating table for SigmaGuard 750 for dft up to 75 m (50% RH and higher) substrate temperature minimum interval -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C
maximum interval unlimited, provided the surface is dry and cleaned from contamination and zinc salts a relative humidity below 50% requires a much longer overcoating time if part of a coating system and in order to avoid possible popping effects (pinholes) SigmaGuard 750 should be sealed with approved coatings SigmaGuard 750 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water (from the atmosphere or immersion) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time before entering service or overcoating, a sufcient degree of cure should be obtained when curing conditions are unfavourable or when reduced overcoat times are desired, curing can be accelerated 4 hours after application by: wetting or soaking with water, keeping the surface wet for the next 2 hours, followed by drying wetting or soaking with a 0.5% ammonia solution, followed by drying before overcoating with topcoats, SigmaGuard 750 should always be visibly dry and checked on sufcient curing for measuring of the curing, the MEK rub test according to ASTM 4752 is a suitable method: after 50 double rubs with a cloth soaked in MEK (or alternatively Thinner 90-53) no dissolving of the coating should be observed
page 4/7
SIGMAGUARD 750
June 2012
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 75 m (50% RH and higher) substrate temperature 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C full cure 4 days 4 days 2 days 2 days 2 days Service - water immersion 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 6 hours 4 hours
SigmaGuard 750 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water (from the atmosphere or immersion) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time relative humidity during curing recommended to be above 50% adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 24 hours 16 hours 12 hours 6 hours
page 5/7
SIGMAGUARD 750
June 2012
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 6/7
SIGMAGUARD 750
June 2012
295032
PDS grey
7551 0000002135
page 7/7
SIGMAGUARD CSF 575

7 pages April 2013 Revision of March 2010
Description
two component solvent free amine cured modied epoxy coating tankcoating for drinking water can be applied by single feed airless spray equipment reduced explosion risk and re hazard good visibility in conned spaces due to light colour approved for potable water by: National Institute of Public Health, Norway for other approvals see sheet 1882 recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886
cream gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 100% max. 33 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 44 g/l (approx. 0.4 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 300 - 400 m depending on system 3.3 m/l for 300 m * 8 hours at 20 C min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 12 days * at 20 C (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m if a holding primer is required SigmaGuard 215, SigmaCover 280 (dft of 50 m) or SigmaPrime 200 (dft of 75 m) should be used concrete; blast cleaned to remove loose particles, laitance and contamination if a primer is required to withstand hydrostatic pressure; use SigmaShield 1090 prior to application of SigmaGuard CSF 575 substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/7
SIGMAGUARD CSF 575

April 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be at least 20C no thinner should be added for recommended application instructions: see working procedure none approx. 1 hour at 20 C *
no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (= 0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4061 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) use heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature application with 45: 1 spray equipment possible provided in-line heated high pressure hoses are used in case of using 45: 1 airless spray equipment the paint must be heated to approx. 30C in order to obtain the right application viscosity length of hoses should be as short as possible
only for spot repair and stripe coating no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired
page 2/7
SIGMAGUARD CSF 575

April 2013
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 3.3 300 2.5 400 100 m
measuring wet lm thickness a difference is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time a practical recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for SigmaGuard CSF 575 for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 4 days 28 days 20C 24 hours 20 days 30C 16 hours 14 days 40C 10 hours 14 days
page 3/7
SIGMAGUARD CSF 575

April 2013
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature 10C * 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 4 days 1 day 16 hours 10 hours full cure 20 days 12 days 7 days 5 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) for drinking water tanks SigmaGuard CSF 575 must not be applied at temperatures below 10C for drinking water tanks, a tankwash should be carried out after full cure and before the tank goes into service for storage and transport of drinking water the recommended working procedure should be followed WASHING PROCEDURE all personnel should wear watertight suits, boots and gloves properly cleaned with a sodium hypochlorite solution (1% active chlorine per liter) all tank sides, bottom and deckheads etc. should be brush cleaned or highpressure spray cleaned with 1% active chlorine solution as above note: this can also be done by butterworth washing all parts should be high pressure cleaned with tap water and tanks drained concentrated active chlorine solution should be sprinkled on bottom; approx. 1 ltr/10 m tanks should be lled with tap water to a depth of approx. 20 cm and the water should remain in the tank for at least 2 hours (max. 24 hours) tanks should be thoroughly ushed out with tap water depending upon local regulations it may be necessary to take water samples, after lling tank completely, to check on bacteria after this procedure the tanks will be t to carry drinking water
* for the rst 24 hours the maximum RH must be 50% or lower
page 4/7
SIGMAGUARD CSF 575

April 2013
Pot life (at application viscosity) 20 C 30 C 60 min. 45 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase DISCLAIMER SigmaGuard CSF 575 is especially developed for the storage and transport of drinking water and is approved for purpose in accordance with the requirements of the relevant certicate (See sheet 1882). In order to fulll the requirements it is important that the coating is well ventilated during application and curing and that the coating has received full curing. Furthermore the recommended washing procedure should be followed before exposure to drinking water, in line with our latest datasheet and working procedure. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does not accept any responsibility or liability for any odour, taste or contamination imparted to the drinking water from the coatings or products retained in the coating. Worldwide availability It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1650 see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
REFERENCES
page 5/7
SIGMAGUARD CSF 575

April 2013
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility no solvent present; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask should be used during spraying
page 6/7
SIGMAGUARD CSF 575

April 2013
179135
PDS cream
7475 3012002200
page 7/7
SIGMAGUARD CSF 585

7 pages October 2012 Revision of May 2011
Description
two component solvent free amine cured epoxy coating tankcoating for drinking water can be applied by single feed airless spray equipment reduced explosion risk and re hazard good visibility in conned spaces due to light colour approved for drinking water by: KIWA Holland for other approvals see sheet 1882
blue, white gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 100% max. 5 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 6 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) 250 - 400 m depending on system 3.3 m/l for 300 m * 5 hours at 20 C min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 12 days * at 20 C
at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing if a holding primer is required SigmaGuard 215, SigmaCover 280 or SigmaPrime 200 can be used for KIWA only SigmaGuard 215 is approved as a holding primer
page 1/7
SIGMAGUARD CSF 585

October 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 77.5 : 22.5 at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be at least 20C no thinner should be added for recommended application instructions: see working procedure allow induction time before use 10C - 15 min. approx. 90 minutes at 20 C *
no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (=0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4061 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4061 p.s.i.) use heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in -line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature application with 45: 1 spray equipment possible provided in-line heated high pressure hoses are used in case of using 45: 1 airless spray equipment the paint must be heated to approx. 30C in order to obtain the right application viscosity length of hoses should be as short as possible.
for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired
page 2/7
SIGMAGUARD CSF 585

October 2012
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 4 250 3.3 300 2.5 400 100 m
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time a practical recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for SigmaGuard CSF 585 for dft up to 300 m (for spot repair and stripe coating only) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 4 days 28 days 20C 24 hours 20 days 30C 16 hours 14 days 40C 10 hours 14 days
page 3/7
SIGMAGUARD CSF 585

October 2012
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature 10C * 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 4 days 1 day 16 hours 10 hours full cure 20 days 12 days 7 days 5 days
* for the rst 24 hours the maximum RH must be 50% or lower adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) SigmaGuard CSF 585 must not be applied at temperatures below 10C for drinking water tanks, a tankwash should be carried out after full cure and before the tank goes into service for storage and transport of drinking water the recommended working procedure should be followed WASHING PROCEDURE The recommended washing procedure must be applied after completion of the application. Sufcient time for full-curing and ventilation must be allowed in accordance with the recommendations as stated in the latest Product Data Sheets and working procedure. Always an adequate washing procedure should be followed. Several adequate washing procedures are available and may be used (see e.g. washing procedure described in relevant certicate). Example of adequate washing procedures: 1. after full curing of the system as per the latest PDS, the tank should be lled completely with fresh tap water the fresh tap water should remain in the tanks at least 4 full days afterwards all tank compartments such as inner hull sides, bottom and deckheads etc. should be thoroughly washed using high pressure water after washing, the tanks should be thoroughly drained after this procedure the tanks will be t to carry drinking water
page 4/7
SIGMAGUARD CSF 585

October 2012
2. all personnel should wear watertight suits, boots and gloves properly cleaned with a sodium hypochlorite solution (1% active chlorine per liter) all tank sides, bottom and deckheads etc. should be brush cleaned or highpressure spray cleaned with 1% active chlorine solution as above note: this can also be done by butterworth washing all parts should be high pressure cleaned with tap water and tanks drained concentrated active chlorine solution should be sprinkled on bottom; approx. 1 ltr/10 m tanks should be lled with tap water to a depth of approx. 20 cm and the water should remain in the tank for at least 2 hours (max. 24 hours) tanks should be thoroughly ushed out with tap water depending upon local regulations it may be necessary to take water samples, after lling tank completely, to check on bacteria after this procedure the tanks will be t to carry drinking water Pot life (at application viscosity) 20 C 30 C 90 min. 60 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase DISCLAIMER SigmaGuard CSF 585 is especially developed for the storage and transport of drinking water and is approved for purpose in accordance with the requirements of the relevant certicate (See sheet 1882). In order to fulll the requirements it is important that the coating is well ventilated during application and curing and that the coating has received full curing. Furthermore the recommended washing procedure should be followed before exposure to drinking water, in line with our latest datasheet and working procedure.After the washing procedure PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does not accept any responsibility or liability for any odour, taste or contamination imparted to the drinking water from the washing products retained in the coating.
page 5/7
SIGMAGUARD CSF 585

October 2012
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 6/7
SIGMAGUARD CSF 585

October 2012
219191 219190
PDS blue white
7785 1000002200 7000002200
page 7/7
SIGMAGUARD CSF 650

6 pages June 2013 Revision of May 2012
Description
two component solvent free amine cured epoxy coating tank coating for crude oil/ballast and aliphatic petroleum products also suitable as coating system for storage and transport of drinking water good resistance to various chemicals one coat protection for steel structures, ships and storage tanks with excellent corrosion resistance can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) reduced explosion risk and re hazard good visibility due to light colour also a conductive version is available, see sheet 7753 can be reinforced with chopped glassbre or mat clear version for glassmat reinforced solvent free tank bottom system (see system sheet 4144) meets the requirements of Mil-C-4556E concerning resistance against aircraft fuel and fuel degradation excellent resistance to crude oil up to 60C
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after
green, offwhite, clear gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 100% max. 109 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 143 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) 300 - 600 m depending on system 3.3 m/l for 300 m * 8 hours at 20C min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 5 days * at 20C (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m suitable primer; SigmaGuard 260, SigmaCover 280, SigmaPrime series or SigmaCover 522, depending on system requirements substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing Steel; power tooling to ISO-St3 for small and isolated areas (like repairs and joint welds) in fresh water and potable water tanks where spot blasting might be impractical
page 1/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 650

June 2013
marine or suitable primer (min. dft of 50 m) +
1 x 300 m SigmaGuard CSF 650 1 x 250 m SigmaGuard CSF 650
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application for recommended application instructions: see working procedure the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 20C no thinner should be added none approx. 1 hour at 20C *
no thinner should be added approx. 0.64 mm (= 0.025 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4061 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min.22 MPa (+ approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) use heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses /n-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature application with 45: 1 spray equipment possible provided in-line heated high pressure hoses are used in case of using 45: 1 airless spray equipment the paint must be heated to approx. 30C in order to obtain the right application viscosity length of hoses should be as short as possible
for stripe coating and spot repair only/no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired
page 2/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 650

June 2013
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 4 250 3.3 300 1.7 600 150 - 200 m
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for SigmaGuard CSF 650 for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature with itself minimum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 60 hours 30 hours 16 hours 10 hours 8 hours full cure 15 days 7 days 5 days 3 days 2 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) for drinking water tanks, a tankwash should be carried out after full cure and before the tank goes into service when used as coating system for storage and transport of drinking water the recommended working and washing procedure should be followed
page 3/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 650

June 2013
WASHING PROCEDURE The recommended washing procedure must be applied after completion of the application. Sufcient time for full-curing and ventilation must be allowed in accordance with the recommendations as stated in the latest Product Data Sheets and working procedure. Always an adequate washing procedure should be followed. Several adequate washing procedures are available and may be used (see e.g. washing procedure described in relevant certicate). Example of adequate washing procedures: 1. after full curing of the system as per the latest PDS, the tank should be lled completely with fresh tap water the fresh tap water should remain in the tanks at least 4 full days afterwards all tank compartments such as inner hull sides, bottom and deckheads etc. should be thoroughly washed using high pressure water after washing, the tanks should be thoroughly drained after this procedure the tanks will be t to carry drinking water 2. all personnel should wear watertight suits, boots and gloves properly cleaned with a sodium hypochlorite solution (1% active chlorine per liter) all tank sides, bottom and deckheads etc. should be brush cleaned or highpressure spray cleaned with 1% active chlorine solution as above note: this can also be done by butterworth washing all parts should be high pressure cleaned with tap water and tanks drained concentrated active chlorine solution should be sprinkled on bottom; approx. 1 ltr/10 m tanks should be lled with tap water to a depth of approx. 20 cm and the water should remain in the tank for at least 2 hours (max. 24 hours) tanks should be thoroughly ushed out with tap water depending upon local regulations it may be necessary to take water samples, after lling tank completely, to check on bacteria after this procedure the tanks will be t to carry drinking water
page 4/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 650

June 2013
Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 40C 60 min. 45 min. 25 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Disclaimer for storage and transport of drinking water: SigmaGuard CSF 650 is approved for purpose in accordance with the requirements of the relevant certicate (see sheet 1882) PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does not accept any responsibility or liability for any odour, taste or contamination imparted to the drinking water from the coatings or products retained in the coating. Worldwide availability It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tables Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility no solvent present; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask should be used during spraying
page 5/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 650

June 2013
179131 179511
PDS green clear
7443 4000002200 0000002200
page 6/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 660

4 pages April 2009 Revision of February 2006
DESCRIPTION
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS solvent free coating for the protection of steel storage tanks against petroleum products can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) reduced explosion risk and re hazard good conductive properties (<1x108Ohm) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) dark grey - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 100% max. 98 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 133 g/l (approx. 1.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 300 - 400 m depending on system 3.3 m/l for 300 m * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 5 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 12 months
Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 when mixing the temperature of the base and hardener should be at least 20C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added
none 1 hour at 20C *

page 1/4
SIGMAGUARD CSF 660

April 2009
AIRLESS SPRAY
heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature application with 45:1 airless spray equipment is possible provided in-line heated high pressure hoses are used in case of using 45:1 airless spray equipment the paint must be heated to approx. 30C in order to obtain the right application viscosity length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 - 0.58 mm (= 0.021 - 0.023 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2800 p.s.i.) for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes no solvent present; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 3.3 300 2.5 400
page 2/4
SIGMAGUARD CSF 660

April 2009
measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for SigmaGuard CSF 660 for dft up to 300 m (for spot repair and stripe coating only) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 80 hours 20 days 10C 36 hours 20 days 20C 24 hours 20 days 30C 16 hours 14 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 60 hours 30 hours 16 hours 10 hours full cure 15 days 7 days 5 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 60 min. 45 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.
page 3/4
SIGMAGUARD CSF 660

April 2009
REFERENCES
220926
PDS darkgrey
7753 5004002200
page 4/4
SIGMALINE 403
Description
two component polyamine cured epoxy ow coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS reduces the frictional resistance of the inside of steel pipes for the transportation of puried natural gas good anticorrosive properties meets API specication RP 5L2 third edition suitable for dry natural gas in the temperature range of -20C till 110 C COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES redbrown gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 54% 1% max. 312 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 406 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) 60 - 100 m, depending on surface preparation 9.0 m/l for 60 m 5.4 m/l for 100 m 45 min. * at 20 C min. 8 hours * max. 2 months *
at least 12 months
ambient temperature should be mininal 5C to maximum 40 C steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or chemically cleaned according to sheet {1492}, blushing prole (Rz) 25- 50 m substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing during the curing time coated pipes should be protected against adverse weather conditions such as condensation, rain, fog and snow maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 80%
page 1/5
SIGMALINE 403
September 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 5C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity thinner should be added after mixing the components too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure none 8 hours at 20 C *
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 - 0.57 mm (= 0.017 - 0.022 in) 16 - 20 MPa (= approx. 160 - 200 bar; 2321 - 2901 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 21-06 0 - 3% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 9 60 5.4 100
Overcoating table for SigmaLine 403 for dft up to 60 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 20C 30C 4 hours 40C 3 hours 1 month 50C 2 hours 1 month
24 hours 8 hours
2 months 2 months 1 month
surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination
page 2/5
SIGMALINE 403
September 2012
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 60 m for pipes at ambient temperatures substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 25C 30C touch dry 3 hours 2 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour 45 min. 30 min. dry to handle 2 days 1 day 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours full cure 30 days 20 days 12 days 7 days 5 days 4 days
Curing table for dft up to 60 m for pipes preheated to 45C, and stored at ambient temperatures substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 25C 30C touch dry 40 min. 30 min. 20 min. 15 min. 15 min. 15 min. dry to handle 24 hours 12 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours full cure 21 days 14 days 7 days 5 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets {1433} and {1434}) during the curing period precautions must be taken to avoid contact of the coating with moisture, otherwise blushing may occur
page 3/5
SIGMALINE 403
September 2012
Pot life (at application viscosity) 15 C 20 C 25 C 30 C 35 C APPLICATION 10 hours 8 hours 7 hours 5 hours 3 hours
Physical state: viscous Size of Container: 15L base / 5 L hardener Storage conditions: Shaded and dry place, temperature between minimal 10 C and maximal 30 C Viscosity: Base 8-11 Poise / Hardener 7-14 Poise Application viscosity: 10 Poise ( Din 4) Ash content: 38 2% Weight solids: 71 2% Bucholz hardness: 110 10 Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Surface preparation of steel pipes and ttings Shop application see information sheet {1411} see information sheet {1430} see information sheet {1431} see information sheet {1433} see information sheet {1434} see information sheet {1490} see information sheet {1492}
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMALINE 403
September 2012
123868 123870
PDS redbrown clear
7603GDF 2008002200 (base) 0000002200 (hardener)
page 5/5
SIGMALINE 415
3 pages May 2006
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids epoxy in situ lining
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS to be applied to the internals of steel pipes by using in-situ application techniques suitable for pipelines transporting sweet crude oil, diesel fuel, salt and fresh water, and many chemical solutions meets NSF Standard 61 for potable water NSF certification valid for pipes of 10" diameter or greater temperature resistance (dry) 121C (250F) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry film thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES redbrown - semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.7 g/cm 82 2% max. 95 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 156 g/l (approx. 1.3 lb/gal) 50 - 100 m depending on system 16 m/l for 50 m * 5 hours min. 16 hours max. 3 days 7 days at least 12 months internal steel pipe has to be cleaned by either of two methods (sheet 1493): inhibited acid cleaning abrasive blasting existing pipelines may have to be cleaned first by scraper pigs and solvents substrate temperature should be above 10C (50F) and at least 3C (37F) above dew point
page 1/3
SIGMALINE 415
May 2006
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 3 : 1 base component has to be agitated in the drum before adding hardener two 6-gallon pails of hardener are to be added to each drum of base under continuous agitation till homogeneous no solvents or thinners should be added to the mixture no induction time necessary in order to assure maximum potlife, the drums should be stored as cool as possible the amount of material mixed ate any one time should be less than what can be applied within 3 hours of mixing when storage and application temperatures are 24C (75F) or less, coating should be applied within 4 hours of mixing
IN SITU APPLICATION
application of this coating to internal pipe surfaces is accomplished by the use of pigs, pupjoints, compressors and other specialized equipment this application should be referred to contractors specializing and experienced in this type of work coating performance is dependent upon proper surface preparation, application and curing; these factors are not under the control of Sigma Coatings and therefore no warranty can be offered after the application of each coat, dry air has to be blown through the coated pipe until the next coat is applied (minimum overcoating interval) this will remove the solvents and accelerate the curing after the last coat is applied, fresh air blowing has to continue for a minimum of 24 hours depending on line length, it may be necessary to switch the direction of the fresh air Sigma thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent based paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modification of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.
page 2/3
SIGMALINE 415
May 2006
REFERENCES
Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in confined spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Internal chemical cleaning of steel pipes in-situ application
see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1493
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
The information in this data sheet is based upon laboratory tests we believe to be accurate and is intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the products made by Sigma Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use. Sigma Coatings has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. Sigma Coatings does therefore not accept any liability arising from loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). The data contained herein are liable to modification as a result of practical experience and continous product development. This data sheet replaces and annuls all previous issues and it is therefore the user's responsibility to ensure that this sheet is current prior to using the product. The English text of this document shall prevail over any translation thereof.
DS
5415
page 3/3
SIGMALINE 523
5 pages May 2013 Revision of April 2012
Description
two component solvent free polyamine cured epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS solvent free coating for the protection of pipes against the effects of potable water resistant against bacterial attack fast curing especially when applied to preheated substrates can be applied to rotating pipes at a dry lm thickness (dft) up to 600 m at a substrate temperature of 50C and up to 900 m at a substrate temperature of 10C by twin feed hot airless spray equipment approved for drinking water by: BS6920 COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES yellow, redbrown, green gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 100% max. 29 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 42 g/l (approx. 0.4 lb/gal) 600 m in one coat 1.7 m/l for 600 m * 3 hours * min. wet in wet within 30 min. max. see additional data * 2.5 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point, lower temperatures will reduce ow properties the recommended substrate temperature should be preferably between 35C and 50C an even pipe temperature ensures an even curing and appearance (ow and gloss) mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 2 : 1 no thinner should be added application with twin feed hot airless spray equipment none approx. 4 minutes at 60C *
page 1/5
SIGMALINE 523
May 2013
no thinner should be added approx. 0.58 - 0.78 mm (= 0.023 - 0.031 in) depending on required production speed and dft 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.)
Substrate temperature min. 60C
twin feed hot airless spray pumping viscosity is achieved at 40C - 60C temperature in the mixing unit must be between 55C and 65C BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner for touch up and spot repair only no thinner should be added Pot life at 20C approx. 30 min. Substrate temperature min. 15C CLEANING SOLVENT Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: parts of the spraying equipment containing mixed base and hardener must be cleaned immediately after completion of the job or during any interruption mixed material will become insoluble within a few minutes after mixing at 60C Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: Film thickness because SigmaLine 523 will be applied in a one coat operation it is necessary to check the specied dft by measuring the wet lm thickness (wft) weld seams may need a thicker coat to obtain the specied dft alongside the welds Overcoating for a good intercoat adhesion it is necessary that a coated surface which should be repaired or completely recoated is roughened up by means of sweep blasting or abrading 2 500 1.7 600 250 m
page 2/5
SIGMALINE 523
May 2013
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 600 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C 40C 50C touch dry 8 hours 3 hours 1 hour 45 min. 30 min. dry to handle 12 hours 5 hours 3 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour full cure 7 days 2.5 days 1 day 12 hours 6 hours
a curing temperature below 10C is not recommended adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 50C 60C 70C 30 min. 8 min. 4 min. 2 min.
for a repair set of 1 litre and for small quantities in hose and mixing chamber Worldwide availability It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used
page 3/5
SIGMALINE 523
May 2013
REFERENCES
Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes no solvent present; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility protective clothing and spray masks should be provided to avoid any dermatitic or toxic hazard
page 4/5
SIGMALINE 523
May 2013
149883 149832 151209
PDS redbrown blue oxide yellow
7623 2008002200 (base) 1000003200 (base) 3002003200 (hardener)
page 5/5
"
&
'
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
'
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
<
>
<
&
&
&
&
>
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
>
'
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
'
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
'
&
&
&
&
&
&
"
&
'
&
'
&
'
&
'
&
'
&
'
&
'
"
'
<
<
<
>
>
<
>
>
>
<
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
<
>
<
<
>
>
<
>
<
>
>
<
>
>
<
>
<
>
<
<
>
>
<
<
SIGMALINE 859
(SIGMALINING PURTAR SF 59)
4 pages January 2011 Revision of November 2005
DESCRIPTION
two component solvent free polyurethane tar coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS solvent free coating for the protection of external of pipelines and underground storage tanks excellent corrosion resistance fast curing excellent adhesion good abrasion resistance good water resistance COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) Flash point black - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.8 g/cm 100% max. 1 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 2 g/l (approx. 0.0 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 1500 m in one coat 0.7 m/l for 1500 m * 1 hour * 4 days * (data for components) at least 6 months base and hardener above 65C
RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m substrate temperature should be above 15C and at least 3C above dew point, lower temperatures will reduce ow properties mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 application with twin feed hot airless spray equipment no thinner should be added
none 1 minute at 60C *

page 1/4
SIGMALINE 859

January 2011
twin feed hot airless spray pumping viscosity is achieved at 50C - 70C temperature in the mixing unit must be between 65C and 75C no thinner should be added approx. 0.58 - 0.81 mm (= 0.023 - 0.032 in) depending on required production speed and dft 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
CLEANING SOLVENT
Thinner 91-88 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: mixed material will become insoluble within a few minutes after mixing at 60C parts of the spraying equipment containing mixed base and hardener must be cleaned immediately after completion of the job or during any interruption for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility if any symptoms arise immediately seek medical advice
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 0.7 1500 250 m
min. dft for closed lm with airless spray: Overcoating
for a good intercoat adhesion it is necessary that a coated surface which should be repaired or completely recoated is roughened up by means of sweep blasting or abrading for manual repaint of small damages special repair sets are available called: "SigmaLine 859 repair", product data sheet 7659 RP
page 2/4
SIGMALINE 859

January 2011
Curing table substrate temperature 15C 20C 30C 40C 50C touch dry 1 hour 30 min. 15 min. 6 min. 3 min. dry to handle 2 hours 1 hour 30 min. 15 min. 6 min. full cure 6 days 4 days 2 days 24 hours 12 hours
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 50C 60C 70C Worldwide availability 5 min. 2 min. 1 min. 0.5 min.
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMALINE 859

January 2011
155313 155314
PDS black transparent
7659 180 ltr base 200 ltr hardener
page 4/4
SIGMALINE 2000
Description
two component solvent free amine cured phenolic epoxy coating one coat system direct to metal for pipe externals suitable for e.g. bell holing jobs resistant to well designed cathodic protection glossy and smooth appearance can be applied by heavy duty twin feed hot airless spray equipment can be applied at a substrate temperature of 90C reduced explosion risk and re hazard approved to Saudi Aramco APCS 113A
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
redbrown gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 100% max. 108 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 146 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 600 - 1500 m depending on system 1.7 m/l for 600 m * 6 hours min. 24 hours * max. 2 months * 5 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 when mixing the temperature of the base and hardener should be at least 20C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added none 1 hour at 20 C *
page 1/5
SIGMALINE 2000
June 2013
no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (= 0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4061 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min.22 MPa (+ approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature length of hoses should be as short as possible
only for spot repair and stripe coating no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 1.7 600 1.0 1000 0.7 1500 150 m
ADDITIONAL DATA
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device
page 2/5
SIGMALINE 2000
June 2013
Overcoating table for SigmaLine 2000 for dft up to 600 m (for spot repair and stripe coating only) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 80 hours 3 months 10C 36 hours 3 months 20C 24 hours 2 months 30C 12 hours 1 month
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 600 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 60 hours 30 hours 16 hours 10 hours full cure 15 days 7 days 5 days 3 days
although the paint is solvent free adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 40C 60 min. 45 min. 20 min. *
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase
* it is recommended to use plural airless equipment due to the short pot life
page 3/5
SIGMALINE 2000
June 2013
REFERENCES
Conversion tables Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Surface preparation of steel pipes and ttings Shop application Internal chemical cleaning of steel pipes in-situ application Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature
see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1492 see information sheet 1493 see information sheet 1650
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
page 4/5
SIGMALINE 2000
June 2013
189997
PDS redbrown
7497 2008002200
page 5/5
SIGMALINE 2500
5 pages July 2013 Revision of April 2009
Description
two component solvent free amine cured phenolic epoxy coating one coat system direct to metal for pipe externals excellent resistance to cathodic protection glossy and smooth appearance reduced explosion risk and re hazard fast curing especially when applied to preheated substrates can be applied to rotating pipes at a dry lm thickness (dft) up to 600 m at a substrate temperature up to 90C approved to Saudi Aramco APCS 113 dark brown gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 100% max. 83 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 125 g/l (approx. 1.0 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 600 m depending on system 1.7 m/l for 600 m * 30 min. at 60C min. equal to dry to handle time (see curing table) max. 2 days (external exposure) or 1 month (in-shop exposure) 3 hours at 60C * (data for components) at least 12 months
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature should be above 15C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing the recommended substrate temperature should be preferably between 40C and 60C these recommended substrate temperatures ensure good curing and appearance mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 4 : 1 application with twin feed hot airless spray equipment none 6 minutes at 50C *
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Induction time Pot life
page 1/5
SIGMALINE 2500
July 2013
twin feed hot airless spray no thinner should be added approx. 0.48 - 0.78 mm (=0.019 - 0.031 in) depending on requiered production speed and dft at 40C (paint temperature) min. 19 MPa (= approx. 190 bar; 2756 p.s.i.) at 60C (paint temperature) min. 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) pumping viscosity is achieved at 40C - 60C temperature in the mixing unit must be between 40C and 70C gellation time: 4-6 minutes at 50C
for touch up and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 1.7 600
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device
page 2/5
SIGMALINE 2500
July 2013
Overcoating table for SigmaLine 2500 for dft up to 600 m (for spot repair and stripe coating only) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 20C 3 hours 1 month 30C 1.5 hour 1 month 40C 1 hour 1 month

* when exposed to sunlight maximum interval is 2 days for all mentioned temperatures
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 600 m substrate temperature 20C 30C 40C 50C 60C 70C 90C dry to handle 3 hours 90 min. 60 min. 40 min. 30 min. 20 min. 10 min. full cure 2 days 1 day 12 hours 6 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
although the paint is solvent free adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 50C 60C 70C 20 min. 5 min. 4 min. 3 min.
for touch up due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used
page 3/5
SIGMALINE 2500
July 2013
REFERENCES
Conversion tables Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Surface preparation of steel pipes and ttings Shop application Internal chemical cleaning of steel pipes in-situ application Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature
see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1492 see information sheet 1493 see information sheet 1650
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMALINE 2500
July 2013
195814
PDS dark brown
7667 2058002200
page 5/5
SIGMAPRIME 200 SERIES

Description
two component multi-purpose polyamide cured anticorrosive epoxy system
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS universal epoxy priming system suitable for all vessel areas excellent anticorrosive properties and water resistance surface tolerant, pure epoxy primer with good abrasion and chemical resistance excellent adhesion to steel, shop primer, galvanised steel and non-ferrous metals excellent recoatability suitable for application and curing in a wide range of climatic conditions suitable for bulk supply and twin feed application suitable on wet blast cleaned substrates (damp or dry) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) alu light, alu yellow, grey, yellow/green, redbrown eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) SigmaPrime 200: SigmaPrime 200 K: 1.3 g/cm 1.4 g/cm 57 2% 60 2% max. 326 g/kg max. 287 g/kg max. 430 g/l (approx. 3.6 lb/gal) max. 392 g/l (approx. 3.3 lb/gal) 75 - 200 m depending on system 100 - 200 m depending on system 7.6 m/l for 75 m,2.9 m/l for 200 m 6 m/l for 100 m,3 m/l for 200 m 1.5 hour at 20C min. see tables * max. see tables * 7 days * (data for components) at least 24 months
page 1/6

April 2013
for immersion exposure: steel or steel with not appoved zinc silicate shop primer: blast cleaned (dry or wet ) to ISO-SA2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2L (blasting prole 30 - 75 m) IMO-MSC.215(82) Requirements for Water Ballast Tanks and IMOMSC.288(87) for Cargo tanks of Crude Oil Tankers (specied areas only): steel; ISO 8501-3:2006 grade P2, with all edges treated to a rounded radius of minimum 2 mm or subject to three pass grinding or at least equivalent process before painting steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m for shop primer with IMO type approval; no additional requirements for shop primer without IMO type approval; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 removing at least 70% of intact shop primer, blasting prole 30 - 75 m dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992) for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or according to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 galvanized steel; cleaned from grease, salts. contamination and roughened up. previous coat; (e.g. SigmaPrime 200) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3104, 3105, 3106 (spec. 2), 3107, 3108
page 2/6

April 2013
Thinner 91-92 0 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.53 - 0.74 mm (= 0.021 - 0.029 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) no extra thinner necessary up to 5% Thinner 91-92 can be added if desired Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate for SigmaPrime 200 theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 7.6 75 4.6 125 3.6 160 2.9 200
Film thickness and spreading rate for SigmaPrime 200 K theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 6.0 100 4.8 125 3.8 160 3.0 200
max. dft: Dry Film Thickness of 2000 m may occur occasionally (minor areas) where multiple overlapping is unavoidable (i.e. around scallops, corners, erection joint lines etc.). PPG must be consulted in case of DFT readings fall outside this recommendation.
page 3/6

April 2013
Overcoating table for SigmaPrime 200 or 200 K for dft up to 160 m substrate temperature with various two pack epoxy coatings minimum interval Max interval when exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval Max interval when not exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C 1 hour
13 hours 6 hours
2.5 hours 1.5 hour
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 160 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 5 hours 3 hours 1.5 hour 45 min. 30 min. dry to handle 14 hours 8 hours 4 hours 2.5 hours 1.5 hour full cure 21 days 14 days 7 days 5 days 4 days
page 4/6

April 2013
REFERENCES
Conversion tabels see information sheet 1410 Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in conned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1491 Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1650 PPG Protective & Marine Coatings Ballast Tank Working Procedure New Building for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 5/6

April 2013
202391 211291 244820 244832 330749 330752
PDS SigmaPrime 200 yellow/green SigmaPrime 200 grey SigmaPrime 200 K grey SigmaPrime 200 K redbrown SigmaPrime 200 K alu light SigmaPrime 200 K alu yellow
7416 4009002200 (202390 base, 202389 hardener) 9515052200 (211282 base, 202389 hardener) 9515052150 (243529 base, 240992 hardener) 2008002150 (243540 base, 240992 hardener) 9000002150 (330748 base, 240992 hardener) 9300002150 (330751 base, 240992 hardener)
page 6/6
SIGMAPRIME 700
6 pages April 2013 Revision of April 2011
Description
two component multi purpose polyamide cured anticorrosive epoxy system
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy primer/coating in protective coating systems for steel and non ferrous metals good adhesion to steel and galvanised steel good adhesion to non ferrous metals good ow and wetting properties good water and corrosion resistance cures at temperatures down to +5C suitable for touching up of weld seams and damages of epoxy coatings during construction excellent recoatability can be overcoated with most alkyd-, chlorinated rubber-, vinyl-, epoxy- and two component polyurethane coatings compatible with well designed cathodic protection systems suitable on wet blast cleaned substrates (damp or dry) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) grey, redbrown, yellow/green, green eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 70 2% max. 227 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 313 g/l (approx. 2.6 lb/gal) 100 - 200 m depending on system * 7.0 m/l for 100 m 3.5 m/l for 200 m 2 hours * min. see tables * max. see tables * 7 days *
at least 12 months
page 1/6
SIGMAPRIME 700
April 2013
for immersion exposure: steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2L (blasting prole 30 - 75 m) IMO-MSC.215(82) Requirements for Water Ballast Tanks and IMOMSC.288(87) for Cargo tanks of Crude Oil Tankers (specied areas only): steel; ISO 8501-3:2006 grade P2, with all edges treated to a rounded radius of minimum 2 mm or subject to three pass grinding or at least equivalent process before painting steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m for shop primer with IMO type approval; no additional requirements for shop primer without IMO type approval; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 removing at least 70% of intact shop primer, blasting prole 30 - 75 m dust quantity rating "1 for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992) for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or according to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 galvanised steel; cleaned from grease, salts, contamination and roughened up previous coat; (e.g. SigmaPrime 700) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85%
marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3104, 3105, 3106 (spec. 1), 3107, 3108
page 2/6
SIGMAPRIME 700
April 2013
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.53 - 0.74 mm (= 0.021 - 0.029 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) no extra thinner is necessary, but up to 5% Thinner 91-92 can be added if desired Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 7.0 100 5.6 125 4.4 160 3.5 200
max. dft: Dry Film Thickness of 2000 m may occur occasionally (minor areas) where multiple overlapping is unavoidable (i.e. around scallops, corners, erection joint lines etc.). PPG must be consulted in case of DFT readings fall outside this recommendation.
page 3/6
SIGMAPRIME 700
April 2013
Overcoating table for SigmaPrime 700 for dft up to 160 m substrate temperature with various two pack epoxy coatings minimum interval Max interval when exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval Max interval when not exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval 5C 10C 20C 4 hours 30C 40C
15 hours 9 hours
2.5 hours 1.5 hour
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 160 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour dry to handle 18 hours 12 hours 9 hours 6 hours 3 hours full cure 21 days 14 days 7 days 5 days 5 days
page 4/6
SIGMAPRIME 700
April 2013
REFERENCES
Conversion tabels see information sheet 1410 Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in conned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1491 Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1650 PPG Protective & Marine Coatings Ballast Tank Working Procedure New Building for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 5/6
SIGMAPRIME 700
April 2013
245824 245825 321760 267441 267442 269714 317126 317127 317128
PDS grey redbrown green grey redbrown yellow/green redbrown grey yellow/green
7930 9515052150 (245344 base, 245346 hardener) 2008002150 (245345 base, 245346 hardener) 4000002150 (321758 base, 245346 hardener) 5000002200 (267438 base, 267440 hardener) 2008002200 (267439 base, 267440 hardener) 4009002200 (321758 base, 267440 hardener) 2008002200 (317121 base, 317124 hardener) 5000002200 (317122 base, 317124 hardener) 4009002200 (317123 base, 317124 hardener)
page 6/6
SIGMA RAPID DRY FLOOR PAINT

DESCRIPTION
one component oor nish based on Urethane modied alkyd very fast drying particularly suitable for interior oors and decks can be applied on steel and concrete minimum substrate temperature 5 C
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) Flash point RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
red, grey - highgloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.0 g/cm 47 2% max. 450 g/l (approx. 3.8 lb/gal) 35 m 13.4 m/l 60 min. at 20C min. 6 hours max. no limitations at least 12 months 38C concrete oors should be at least 28 days old with a moisture content of under 4% and prepared by abrasive blasting to remove laitance and friable material apply to suitable prepared and primed steel or sound aged coatings which are dry and free from any contamination stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
AIR SPRAY BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT Thinner 20-05 0 - 2% Thinner 20-05 NOTE: it is recommended that the 1st coat to be applied to concrete should be thinned by approx. 10%
page 1/2
SIGMA RAPID DRY FLOOR PAINT

March 2010
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
REFERENCES
PDS
7232UK
page 2/2
SIGMARINE 24
3 pages January 2013 Revision of July 2009
Description
modied zinc phosphate alkyd primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS economic general purpose maintenance and new building primer suitable for use on superstructures and on steel surfaces not normally exposed to water immersion the adhesion of subsequent coats is not affected by long weathering periods of the primer should not be used over zinc primers, except when exposed to dry interior conditions to be recoated with conventional paint systems a thickness of 75 m can be obtained by spray application in one operation by means of the crosscoat technique certicate for low ame spread: see sheet 1883 COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES yellow, brown, red, grey, dark grey (offwhite only on request) at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.4 g/cm 56% 2% max. 245 g/kg ( Directive 1999/13;/EC,SED) max. 343 g/l (approx. 2.9 lb/gal) 35 - 75 m per coat 16 m/l for 35 m 7.5 m/l for 75 m 3 hours at 5C 2 hours at 20C min. 48 hours at 5C, 24 hours at 20C max. unlimited at least 12 months steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel; power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St2 shop primed steel; sweep blasted or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Ss or SPSS-Pt2 previous coat; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point but not above 50C marine system sheets: 3102, 3103, 3104, 3105, 3107
stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
page 1/3
SIGMARINE 24
January 2013
Thinner 20-05 0 - 3%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 - 0.48 mm (= 0.017 - 0.019 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1740 - 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 20-05 0 - 2% Thinner 20-05 It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMARINE 24
January 2013
136774 136775 272264 182331 327075
PDS brown yellow red grey darkgrey
7135 2000002200 3000002200 0000692200 5000002200 9000002200
page 3/3
SIGMARINE 35
3 pages February 2013 Revision of June 2009
Description
micaceous iron oxide (mio) alkyd topcoat
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS excellent resistance to atmospheric industrial exposure conditions high UV resistance mio effect COLOURS AND GLOSS according to the Micaceous Iron Oxide Colour card of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.5 g/cm 51% 2% max. 254 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 391 g/l (approx. 3.3 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 50 - 75 m 10.2 m/l for 50 m 6.8 m/l for 75 m 1 hour min. 16 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months suitable primer; (e.g. Sigmarine 24) dry and free from any contamination previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point but not above 50C stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Thinner 20-05 5 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.3 MPa (= approx. 2 - 3 bar; 29 - 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 20-05 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 mm (= 0.018 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1740 - 2176 p.s.i.)
BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
page 1/3
SIGMARINE 35
February 2013
Thinner 20-05 0 - 2% Thinner 20-05 It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMARINE 35
February 2013
PDS
7244
page 3/3
SIGMARINE 48
3 pages February 2013 Revision of July 2009
Description
general purpose gloss paint based on a modied alkyd resin
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS particularly suitable as a nish for boottop, topside, deck and deck equipment a quick drying, hard, tough, water- and weather resistant coating with moderate gloss retention can be applied over most intact alkyd paints this coating is particularly suitable for areas intermittently exposed to waterimmersion and atmospheric conditions also available with non-skid material (supplied separately) for use on deck surfaces certicate for low ame spread: see sheet 1883 COLOURS AND GLOSS white and various other colours (see also the SigmaCare Shade Card of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.2 g/cm 45-49% 2% (colours) - 48% 2% (white) max. 345 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 402 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) 35 m per coat 12.8 - 14.0 m/l (colours) - 13.7 m/l (white) for 35 m 1 hour at 20C 3 hours at 5C min. 16 hours at 20C, 24 hours at 5C max. unlimited at least 24 months previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point but not above 50C systems for boottop and topside systems for superstructure and deck tting system sheet: 3102 system sheet: 3104
BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
page 1/3
SIGMARINE 48
February 2013
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT Worldwide availability
Thinner 20-05 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 20-05 0 - 2%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 8 - 12 MPa (= approx. 80 - 120 bar; 1160 - 1740 p.s.i.) Thinner 20-05 0 - 2% Thinner 20-05 It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMARINE 48
February 2013
136828
PDS white
7238 7000002200
page 3/3
SIGMARINE 49
Description
high gloss alkyd nishing coat suitable for interior and exterior use easy application by brush with excellent ow good weather resistance high opacity good colour retention gas proof: no discolouration with sulphur dioxide not suitable for immersion in water or continuous splash of water can be applied over most intact alkyd paints certicate for low ame spread: see sheet 1883
white (other colours on request) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 0.9 - 1.2 g/cm (colours) - 1.1 g/cm (white) 50-55% 2% (colours) - 50% 2% (white) max. 360 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) (white) max. 407 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) (white) 35 m per coat 14.3 - 15.7 m/l (colours) - 14.3 m/l (white) for 35 m 3 hours min. 16 hours max. unlimited at least 24 months previous suitable coat; (e.g. Sigmarine 40, Sigmarine 24) dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point but not above 50C marine system sheets: 3104, 3105
stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Thinner 20-05 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.)
page 1/3
SIGMARINE 49
February 2013
Thinner 20-05 0 - 2%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 12 MPa (= approx. 120 bar; 1740 p.s.i.) Thinner 20-05 0 - 3% Thinner 20-05 It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMARINE 49
February 2013
136845
PDS white
7240 7000002200
page 3/3
SigmaRine RP Oil
2 pages March 2013 Revision of December 2002
Description
A clear rust preventing oil based on petroleum resin designed to be used for lubricating oil and fuel oil tanks
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS a temporary protective coating for a tank inside during construction with a quick drying property COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES yellowish clear liquid (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 0.89 g/cm 60% 2% 20 m per coat 30 m/l for 20 m 30 min. at 20 C min. 2 hours at 20C max. unlimited at least 12 months steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or SSPS steel; power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St2 surface should be dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point stir well before use normally no thinner to be used brush, roller or spray (air or airless spray ) application AIRLESS SPRAY Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure REFERENCES 0.038 - 0.048 mm (= 0.001 - 0.0019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 1/2
SigmaRine RP Oil
March 2013
page 2/2
SIGMASHIELD 2 (SigmaShield 825 LT )

5 pages October 2012 Revision of September 2011
Description
two component high solids glassake reinforced polyamine cured epoxy coating low temperature curing down to 0C excellent abrasion and impact resistance high glassake level excellent resistance to corrosion long term protection at areas subject to heavy wear and tear very low water permeability, due to glassake barrier tar free resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals suitable for immersion service compatible with cathodic protection systems up to 750 m in a single coat
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (EPA Method 24) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
black (other (light) colours on request) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 87% 3% max. 172 g/l ( approx. 1.5 lb/gal ) by EPA Method 200 - 750 m depending on system 4.4 m/l for 200 m * min. 16 hours * max. 3 months * 16 days at 20 C
at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m primed steel; (e.g. SigmaCover 280) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/5

October 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 50 : 50 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure very good mechanical mixing of base and hardener is essential thinner should be added after mixing the components lters should be removed from spray equipment 1 hour at 20 C *
Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER
Thinner 21-06 6 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% for dft of about 400 m approx. 0.53 - 0.79 mm (= 0.021 - 0.031 in) 19.0 - 22.5 MPa (= approx. 190 - 225 bar; 2756 - 3263 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair due to thixotropy it is difcult to obtain a smooth lm by brush although this does not affect performance
CLEANING SOLVENT
Thinner 90-58 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 4.4 200 1.2 750
page 2/5

October 2012
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 2 for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature with itself with polyurethanes minimum interval maximum interval minimum interval maximum interval 10C 16 hours 1 month 16 hours 14 days 20C 7 hours 1 month 7 hours 7 days 30C 4 hours 1 month 4 hours 4 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets {1433} and {1434})
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 24 hours 8 hours 5 hours full cure 16 days 8 days 5 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets {1433} and {1434}) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 2 hours 1 hour 30 min.
page 3/5

October 2012
REFERENCES
see information sheet {1410} see information sheet {1411} see information sheet {1430} see information sheet {1431} see information sheet {1433} see information sheet {1434} see information sheet {1490} see information sheet {1491} see information sheet {1650}
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5

October 2012
PDS
7749
page 5/5
SIGMASHIELD 220
5 pages June 2013 Revision of October 2009
Description
two component reinforced high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy primer general purpose primer for coating systems for steel good abrasion resistance outstanding sea water resistance excellent corrosion resistance good resistance against chemically polluted water resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection
yellow/green gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 78 2% max. 176 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 262 g/l (approx. 2.2 lb/gal) 125 m 6.2 m/l for 125 m * 4 hours min. 3.5 hours * max. 14 days * 5 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or powertool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3L steel with approved shop primer; power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3107
page 1/5
SIGMASHIELD 220
June 2013
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 2 - 4 bar; 29 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 7.8 100 6.2 125 80 m
page 2/5
SIGMASHIELD 220
June 2013
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 220 for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature with epoxy coatings with polyurethanes minimum interval minimum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C 1.5 hour 4 hours 4 days
14 hours 7 hours 28 days 28 days
3.5 hours 2 hours 14 days 7 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 14 hours 7 hours 3.5 hours 2 hours 1.5 hour full cure 17 days 14 days 7 days 5 days 3 days Service - water immersion 10 days 7 days 5 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
page 3/5
SIGMASHIELD 220
June 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMASHIELD 220
June 2013
192274
PDS yellow/green
7922 4009002200
page 5/5
SIGMASHIELD 220 LT
4 pages October 2009 Revision of January 2008
DESCRIPTION
two component reinforced high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy primer general purpose primer for coating systems for steel cures at temperatures down to -10C good abrasion resistance outstanding sea water resistance excellent corrosion resistance good resistance against chemically polluted water resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after
yellow/green - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 78 2% max. 161 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 240 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 100 - 125 m 7.8 m/l for 100 m, 6.2 m/l for 125 m * 4 hours min. 10 hours * max. 14 days * 7 days * (data for components)
at least 12 months
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved shop primer; power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 substrate temperature should be between -10C up to 15C during application and curing and at least 3C above dew point and free from ice and any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is possible, but curing to hardness takes longer and complete resistance will be reached when temperature increases maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3107
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 220 LT
October 2009

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 2 - 4 bar; 28 - 57 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: 7.8 100 6.2 125 80 m
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 220 LT
October 2009
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 220 LT for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature with epoxy coatings with polyurethanes minimum interval minimum interval maximum interval -10C 36 hours 72 hours 28 days 0C 22 hours 48 hours 28 days 5C 16 hours 36 hours 28 days 10C 10 hours 24 hours 14 days 15C 7 hours 16 hours 10 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature -10C 0C 5C 10C 15C dry to handle full cure for immersion in sea water 18 days 10 days 7 days 5 days 4 days full cure
-28 days 14 days 7 days 5 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 5C 10C Worldwide availability 2 hours 1 hour
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 220 LT
October 2009
REFERENCES
202660
PDS yellow/green
7926 4009002200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 400
(SIGMASHIELD 825 )
5 pages August 2013 Revision of July 2012
Description
two component high solids glassake reinforced polyamine cured epoxy coating excellent abrasion and impact resistance high glassake level excellent resistance to corrosion long term protection at areas subject to heavy wear and tear very low water permeability, due to glassake barrier tar free resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals application and curing at temperatures down to 10C suitable for immersion service compatible with cathodic protection systems up to 750 m in a single coat
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (EPA Method 24) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
black (other (light) colours on request) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 87 3% max. 172 g/l (approx. 1.4 lb/gal) 200 - 750 m depending on system 4.4 m/l for 200 m * 6 hours * at 20C min. 24 hours * max. 3 months *
8 days

steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m primed steel; (e.g. SigmaCover 280) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/5
SIGMASHIELD 400
(SIGMASHIELD 825 )
August 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 50 : 50 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure very good mechanical mixing of base and hardener is essential thinner should be added after mixing the components lters should be removed from spray equipment 2 hours at 20C *
Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER
Thinner 21-06 6 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% for dft of about 400 m approx. 0.53 - 0.79 mm (= 0.021 - 0.031 in) 19.0 - 22.5 MPa (= approx. 190 - 225 bar; 2756 - 3263 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair due the thixotropy it is difcult to obtain a smooth lm by brush although this does not affect performance
CLEANING SOLVENT
Thinner 90-58 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 4.4 200 1.2 750
page 2/5
SIGMASHIELD 400
(SIGMASHIELD 825 )
August 2013
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 400 for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature with itself with polyurethanes minimum interval maximum interval minimum interval maximum interval 10C 36 hours 3 months 36 hours 1 month 20C 16 hours 3 months 16 hours 1 month 30C 10 hours 3 months 10 hours 14 days 40C 8 hours 1 month 8 hours 7 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) surface should be dry and free from any contamination
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C touch dry 24 hours 6 hours 4 hours dry to handle 48 hours 20 hours 12 hours full cure 21 days 8 days 4 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C/50F 20C/68F 30C/86F Worldwide availability 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
page 3/5
SIGMASHIELD 400
(SIGMASHIELD 825 )
August 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMASHIELD 400
(SIGMASHIELD 825 )
August 2013
242373
PDS black
7745 8000002200
page 5/5
SIGMASHIELD 420
4 pages August 2012 Revision of February 2011
Description
two component reinforced high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating coating for cargo tanks of bulk- or oil carriers and storage tanks build coat for underwater- and boottop systems excellent abrasion and impact resistance outstanding (sea)water resistance easy to clean
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES SYSTEM SPECIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
grey, redbrown (other colours on request) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.6 g/cm 81% 2% max. 153 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 239 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 125 - 200 m depending on system 5.4 m/l for 150 m 4.1 m/l for 200 m * 3 hours at 20 C min. 10 hours * max. 14 days *
at least 12 months
previous coat; (e.g. SigmaCover 280 or SigmaShield 220) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3107
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components none 1.5 hour at 20 C *
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 420
August 2012
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.7 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% for 200 m dft, 10% for 100 m dft approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: Overcoating table for SigmaShield 420 for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C 1.5 hour 4 days 4 hours 4 days 8.1 100 5.4 150 4.6 175 4.1 200 75 m
with epoxy coatings with polyurethanes
minimum interval maximum interval minimum interval maximum interval
3.5 hours 2 hours 14 days 14 days 7 days 7 days
surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 420
August 2012
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 15 hours 8 hours 3.5 hours 2 hours 1.5 hour full cure 17 days 14 days 7 days 5 days 3 days Service - water immersion 10 days 7 days 5 days 4 days 3 days
for cargo hold application: for full cure for hard angular cargoes, please contact your nearest PPG Protective & Marine Coatings sales ofce adequate ventilation to remove solvent must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) should SigmaShield 420 or the total coating system (2 x 125 m) be applied in excess of the specied dry lm thickness, then the time necessary to reach full cure will be increased Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 3 hours 1.5 hour 45 min.
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 420
August 2012
190960 192367
PDS grey redbrown
7951 5177052200 6179052200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 420 LT
4 pages February 2011 Revision of October 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component reinforced high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating coating for cargo tanks of bulk- or oil carriers and storage tanks build coat for underwater- and boottop systems cures at temperatures down to -10C excellent abrasion and impact resistance outstanding (sea)water resistance easy to clean
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
grey, redbrown (other colours on request) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.6 g/cm 81 2% max. 123 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 191 g/l (approx. 1.6 lb/gal) 125 - 200 m depending on system 5.4 m/l for 150 m, 4.1 m/l for 200 m * min. 10 hours * max. 14 days * 7 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
previous coat; (e.g. SigmaCover 280 (LT) or SigmaShield 220 (LT)) dry and free from ice and any contamination substrate temperature should be between -10C up to 15C during application and curing and at least 3C above dew point and free from ice and any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is possible, but curing to hardness takes longer and complete resistance will be reached when temperature increases maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85%
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 420 LT
February 2011
marine
system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3107
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% for 200 m dft, 10% for 100 m dft approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.7 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: 8.1 100 5.4 150 4.6 175 4.1 200 75 m
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 420 LT
February 2011
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 420 LT for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature with epoxy coatings with polyurethanes minimum interval minimum interval maximum interval -10C 48 hours 72 hours 28 days 0C 24 hours 48 hours 28 days 5C 10 hours 36 hours 28 days 10C 5 hours 24 hours 14 days 15C 4 hours 16 hours 10 days
surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature -10C 0C 5C 10C 15C dry to handle full cure for immersion in sea water 18 days 10 days 7 days 5 days 4 days full cure
-28 days 14 days 7 days 5 days
for cargo hold application: for full cure for hard angular cargoes, please contact your nearest PPG Protective & Marine Coatings sales ofce adequate ventilation to remove solvent must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) should SigmaShield 420 LT or the total coating system be applied in excess of the specied dry lm thickness, then the time necessary to reach full cure will be increased Pot life (at application viscosity) 5C 10C Worldwide availability 2 hours 1 hour
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 420 LT
February 2011
REFERENCES
202661 202662 202659
PDS grey grey redbrown
7955 5177052200 5163052200 6179052200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 460
Description
two component high solids glassake reinforced polyamine adduct epoxy coating excellent abrasion and impact resistance suitable for use on ice-going vessels excellent resistance to corrosion long term protection at areas subject to heavy wear and tear resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals very low water permeability, due to glassake barrier
black (other (light) colours on request) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 81 2% max. 165 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 246 g/l (approx. 2.1 lb/gal) 250 - 400 m depending on system 3.2 m/l for 250 m 2.0 m/l for 400 m * 3 hours min. 16 hours * max. 28 days *
5 days *

steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m suitable primer; (e.g. SigmaShield 220 (LT), SigmaCover 280 (LT)) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/5
SIGMASHIELD 460
June 2013
marine mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25
system sheets: 3101, 3102
Induction time Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER
the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure very good mechanical mixing of base and hardener is essential thinner should be added after mixing the components lters should be removed from spray equipment none 1.5 hour at 20C *
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% for dft of about 400 m approx. 0.53 - 0.79 mm (= 0.021 - 0.031 in) 19.0 - 22.5 MPa (= approx. 190 - 225 bar; 2756 - 3263 p.s.i.) Brush application only only for touch up and spot repair due to thixotropy it is difcult to obtain a smooth lm by brush although this does not affect performance Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing:
maximum recommended dft for complex structures is 250 m
3.2 250
2.0 400 80 m
page 2/5
SIGMASHIELD 460
June 2013
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 460 for dft up to 400 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 400 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 16 hours 8 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour dry to handle 30 hours 16 hours 8 hours 5 hours 3 hours Service - water immersion 14 days 10 days 5 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 3 hours 1.5 hour 45 min.
page 3/5
SIGMASHIELD 460
June 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMASHIELD 460
June 2013
191640
PDS black
7952 8000002200
page 5/5
SIGMASHIELD 460 LT
Description
two component high solids glassake reinforced polyamine adduct epoxy coating excellent abrasion and impact resistance cures at temperatures down to -10C long term protection at areas subject to heavy wear and tear excellent resistance to corrosion suitable for use on ice-going vessels very low water permeability, due to glassake barrier resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
black (other (light) colours on request) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 81 2% max. 150 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 224 g/l (approx. 1.9 lb/gal) 250 - 400 m depending on system 3.2 m/l for 250 m 2 m/l for 400 m min. 16 hours * max. 14 days * 7 days (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m suitable primer; (e.g. SigmaShield 220 (LT), SigmaCover 280 (LT)) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be between -10C up to 15C during application and curing and at least 3C above dew point and free from ice and any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is possible, but curing to hardness takes longer and complete resistance will be reached when temperature increases maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% marine system sheets: 3101, 3102
page 1/5
SIGMASHIELD 460 LT
June 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 5C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure very good mechanical mixing of base and hardener is essential thinner should be added after mixing the components lters should be removed from spray equipment
Induction time Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER

Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% for dft of about 400 m approx. 0.53 - 0.79 mm (= 0.021 - 0.031 in) 19.0 - 22.5 MPa (= approx. 190 - 225 bar; 2756 - 3263 p.s.i.) Brush aplication only only for touch up and repair due to thixotropy it is difcult to obtain a smooth lm by brush although this does not affect performance Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 3.2 250 2.0 400 80 m
page 2/5
SIGMASHIELD 460 LT
June 2013
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 460 LT for dft up to 400 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -10C 0C 5C 10C 15C
surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 400 m substrate temperature -10C 0C 5C 10C 15C dry to handle 72 hours 36 hours 28 hours 16 hours 12 hours Service - water immersion -18 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 5C 10C Worldwide availability 2 hours 1 hour
page 3/5
SIGMASHIELD 460 LT
June 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMASHIELD 460 LT
June 2013
220252
PDS black
7972 8000002200
page 5/5
SIGMASHIELD 620
4 pages January 2013 Revision of April 2009
Description
two component high solids amine cured epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS specialised coating for use under SigmaGlide fouling release system excellent impact resistance excellent water resistance COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval redbrown, blue gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.6 g/cm 85% 2% max. 150 g/kg max. 235 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 150 m 5.7 m/l for 150 m 3 hours at 20 C min. 6 hours * max. 5 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE at least 12 months
previous coat; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 20C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 20C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components none 1.5 hour at 20 C * * see additional data no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (=0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.)
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 620
January 2013
BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
no thinner should be added Thinner 90-53 Overcoating table for SigmaShield 620 for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature 20C 6 hours 5 days 30C 4 hours 3 days 40C 2 hours 2 days
with SigmaGlide 790
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 3.5 hours 2 hours 1.5 hour full cure 7 days 5 days 3 days Service - water immersion 5 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation to remove solvent must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) for advice please contact your nearest PPG Protective & Marine Coatings sales ofce Pot life (at application viscosity) 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 1.5 hour 45 min.
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 620
January 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 620
January 2013
252062 344452 256894
PDS redbrown K redbrown blue
7948 6179052200 6179052150 1000002200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 880
Description
two component high build polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating primarily designed for use in offshore splashzone maintenance outstanding sea water resistance excellent corrosion resistance good abrasion resistance continues to cure when immersed in water long term protection in a single coat application resistant to well designed cathodic protection suitable on wet blast or ultra high pressure water (UHPWW) cleaned substrates (damp or dry)
yellow, black (other colours on request) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.45 g/cm 85% 2% max. 122 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 207 g/l (approx. 1.7 lb/gal) 200 - 1000 m depending on system 4.3 m/l for 200 m * 3 hours * min. 3.5 hours * max. 14 days at least 12 months
coating performance will depend upon the surface preparation degree blast cleaning steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2, blasting prole of 40 - 80 m is recommended hand/power tool cleaning steel; recommended hand or power tool cleaned to ISO-St3 for new buidling and ISO-St2 for maintenance coated steel existing sound epoxy coating systems sufciently roughened, dry and free from any contamination Hydrojetting clean till VIS WJ2/3L substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 880
February 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 thinner should be added after mixing the components do not thin more than is required by appropriate application property too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure none 2 hours at 20 C *
Thinner 91-92 4 - 8%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 2 - 4 bar; 29 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 8%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 4.3 200 1.7 500
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 880 for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature with epoxy coatings with polyurethanes with itself with various epoxy- and polyurethane coatings minimum interval minimum interval -5C 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
36 hours 14 hours 7 hours 3.5 hours 2 hours 1.5 hour 48 hours 22 hours 14 hours 10 hours 6 hours 4 hours 4 days
maximum interval 60 days 40 days 32 days 28 days 21 days 14 days maximum interval 35 days 28 days 21 days 14 days 7 days surface should be dry and free from any contamination
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 880
February 2013
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature -5C 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 24 hours 10 hours 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour dry to handle 48 hours 24 hours 16 hours 8 hours 5 hours 3 hours
The curing time is related to the D.F.T. of the paint and ventilation of the drying condition. High D.F.T and poor ventilation will slow curing premature exposure to water will lead to whitening of dark colours when applied between tides on jetties, piling etc. this will not affect anticorrosive properties of the coating adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 880
February 2013
PDS yellow black
7743 1018262200 8000002200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 880XS
4 pages July 2013 Revision of July 2013
DESCRIPTION
two component extremely high solids polyamine adduct cured pure epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS primarily designed for hot twin feed application suitable for Longkey or equivalent automatic processing lines. suitable for hot applied hot cured and hot applied cold cured applications properties improved by hot application, better than conventional cold applied cold cured version (ex. PPG SigmaShield 880 ) outstanding sea water resistance excellent corrosion resistance excellent adhesion on blasted steel up to 20 MPa excellent impact resistance long term protection in a single coat application resistant to well designed cathodic protection suitable for bulk supply (base 900 L; hardener 300 L ) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (EPA Method 24) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES grey, black semi-gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.65 g/cm 98 2% max. 27 g/kg (45 g/l; approx. 0.4 lb/gal) 500 - 1200 m depending on system 1.2 m/l for 800 m * 3 hours * at 20C 11 minutes for hot applied and hot cured conditions min. 3.5 hours * at least 12 months
coating performance will depend upon the surface preparation degree blast cleaning steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2, blasting prole of 75 - 100 m is recommended coated steel existing sound epoxy coating systems sufciently roughened, dry and free from any contamination Hydrojetting clean till VIS WJ2/3L substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 880XS
July 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 application with twin feed hot airless spray equipment do not thin more than is required by appropriate application property too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure none 4 min. at 60C *
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
twin feed hot airless spray no thinner should be added If necessary 0 - 5% Thinner 91-92 is recommended.
Please mix thinner with same volume for base and hardener to keep the same mixing ratio
approx. 0.58 - 0.78 mm (= 0.023 - 0.031 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.)
pumping viscosity is achieved at 40C - 60C temperature in the mixing unit must be between 55C and 65C BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT CLEANING PROCEDURE only for touch up and spot repair (recommended SigmaShield 880) None Thinner 90-53 Cleaning procedure of the spray equipment mixed material will become insoluble within a few minutes after mixing at 60C parts of the spraying equipment containing mixed base and hardener must be cleaned immediately after completion of the job or during any interruption ADDITIONAL DATA Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 1.9 500 1.2 800 0.8 1200
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 880XS
July 2013
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 880XS for dft up to 800 m substrate temperature with itself minimum interval maximum interval 10C 10 hours no limitation 20C 5 hours 30C 2.5 hours 40C 2 hours
surface should be dry and free from any contamination CURING Curing table for dft up to 800 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C 40C 60C touch dry 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours 60 min. 20 min. dry to handle 16 hours 8 hours 4 hours 2 hours 30 min. full cure 14 days 7 days 4 days 2 days 18 hours
curing of dry to handle at 100 - 110C needs approx. 10 minutes adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C 40C 60C REFERENCES 90 min. 60 min. 30 min. 15 min. 4 min. see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 880XS
July 2013
350196
PDS grey
7724 5000002200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 880 Aluminium

4 pages May 2013 Revision of August 2012
Description
two component surface tolerant high solid MIO/Aluminium epoxy coating contains Micaceous Iron Oxide and Aluminium excellent corrosion resistance good abrasion resistance continues to cure when immersed in water long term protection in a single coat application resistant to well designed cathodic protection suitable on wet blast or ultra high pressure water (UHPWW) cleaned substrates (damp or dry)
Silver grey (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 80 2% max. 220 g/l (approx. 1.8 lb/gal) 200 - 1000 m depending on system 4.0 m/l for 200 m * 3 hours * min. 3.5 hours * max. 14 days at least 12 months
coating performance will depend upon the surface preparation degree blast cleaning steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2, blasting prole of 40 - 80 m is recommended hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3L coated steel existing sound epoxy coating systems sufciently roughened, dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 do not thin more than is required by appropriate application property too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components none 2 hours at 20C *
page 1/4

May 2013
Thinner 91-92 4 - 8%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 2 - 4 bar; 29 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 8%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 4 200 1.6 500
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 880 AL for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature with epoxy coatings with polyurethanes with itself with various epoxy- and polyurethane coatings minimum interval minimum interval -5C 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
36 hours 14 hours 7 hours 3.5 hours 2 hours 1.5 hour 48 hours 22 hours 14 hours 10 hours 6 hours 4 hours 4 days
maximum interval 60 days 40 days 32 days 28 days 21 days 14 days maximum interval 35 days 28 days 21 days 14 days 7 days surface should be dry and free from any contamination
page 2/4

May 2013
Curing
The curing time is related to the D.F.T. of the paint and ventilation of the drying condition. High D.F.T and poor ventilation will slow curing premature exposure to water will lead to whitening of dark colours when applied between tides on jetties, piling etc. this will not affect anticorrosive properties of the coating adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4

May 2013
page 4/4
SigmaShield 880GF
4 pages February 2013 Revision of August 2012
Description
two component surface tolerant high solid glassake epoxy coating Primarily designed for use in offshore splash zone maintenance Suitable for use in heavy duty and corrosive environments Outstanding sea water resistance Excellent corrosion resistance Enhanced impact and abrasion resistance Continues to cure when immersed in water Long term protection in a single coat application Resistant to well designed cathodic protection suitable on wet blast or ultra high pressure water (UHPWW) cleaned substrates (damp or dry)
yellow, black (other colours on request) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.45 g/cm 85% 2% max. 122 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 207 g/l (approx. 1.7 lb/gal) 200 - 1000 m depending on system 4.3 m/l for 200 m * 3 hours * at 20 C min. 3.5 hours * max. 14 days at least 12 months
coating performance will depend upon the surface preparation degree blast cleaning steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2, blasting prole of 40 - 80 m is recommended hand/power tool cleaning steel; recommended hand or power tool cleaned to ISO-St3 for new buidling and ISO-St2 for maintenance coated steel existing sound epoxy coating systems sufciently roughened, dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/4
SigmaShield 880GF
February 2013
Thinner 91-92 4 - 8%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 2 - 4 bar; 29 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 8%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m/l dft in m 4.3 200 1.7 500
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 880 GF for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature with epoxy coatings with polyurethanes with various epoxy- and polyurethane coatings with itself minimum interval minimum interval -5C 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
36 hours 14 hours 7 hours 3.5 hours 2 hours 1.5 hours 48 hours 22 hours 14 hours 10 hours 6 hours 4 hours 4 days
maximum interval 35 days 28 days 21 days 14 days 7 days
maximum interval 60 days 40 days 32 days 28 days 21 days 14 days surface should be dry and free from any contamination
page 2/4
SigmaShield 880GF
February 2013
Curing
The curing time is related to the D.F.T. of the paint and ventilation of the drying condition. High D.F.T and poor ventilation will slow curing premature exposure to water will lead to whitening of dark colours when applied between tides on jetties, piling etc. this will not affect anticorrosive properties of the coating adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent based paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
page 3/4
SigmaShield 880GF
February 2013
PDS yellow black
7758 1018262200 8000002200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 880MIO
4 pages January 2013 Revision of January 2013
Description
two component high build polyamine micaceous iron oxide pigmented adduct cured epoxy coating primarily designed for use in offshore splashzone maintenance outstanding sea water resistance excellent corrosion resistance good abrasion resistance continues to cure when immersed in water long term protection in a single coat application resistant to well designed cathodic protection suitable on wet blast or ultra high pressure water (UHPWW) cleaned substrates (damp or dry) meets the requirements of AS 3750.14 N33, N55 as specied in AS2700 gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.45 g/cm 85% 2% max. 122 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 207 g/l (approx. 1.7 lb/gal) 200 - 1000 m depending on system 4.3 m/l for 200 m * 3 hours * min. 3.5 hours * max. 14 days at least 12 months
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
coating performance will depend upon the surface preparation degree blast cleaning steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2, blasting prole of 40 - 80 m is recommended hand/power tool cleaning steel; hand or power tool cleaned to ISO-St3 minimum for small areas and atmospheric exposure only coated steel existing sound epoxy coating systems sufciently roughened, dry and free from any contamination Hydrojetting clean till VIS WJ2/3L substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 880MIO
January 2013
Induction time Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended Thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
Thinner 91-92 4 - 8%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 2 - 4 bar; 29 - 58 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 8%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m/l dft in m 4.3 200 1.7 500
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 880MIO for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature with epoxy coatings with polyurethanes with itself with various epoxy- and polyurethane coatings minimum interval minimum interval maximum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C 1.5 hour 4 hours 14 days 4 days
3.5 hours 2 hours 28 days 14 days 21 days 7 days
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 880MIO
January 2013
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 10 hours 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour dry to handle 28 hours 16 hours 8 hours 5 hours 3 hours
premature exposure to water will lead to whitening of dark colours when applied between tides on jetties, piling etc. this will not affect anticorrosive properties of the coating adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C REFERENCES 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 880MIO
January 2013
PDS
7728
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 905
DESCRIPTION
two component glassake reinforced solvent free amine cured epoxy coating suitable for both marine and offshore use one coat protection for cargo holds with excellent corrosion resistance excellent abrasion and impact resistance, especially to hard angular cargoes good resistance to various chemicals good visibility due to light colour reduced explosion risk and re hazard can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) ideal for immersed, non immersed and partially immersed such as splash zones, decks etc.,
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
green - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 100% max. 107 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 141 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 400 - 500 m 2.5 m/l for 400 m * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 5 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
for cargo holds: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m for immersed areas: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m, dry and free from any contamination coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L (blasting prole 50 - 100 m) substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing cargo holds system sheet: 3107
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 905
March 2011
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 when mixing the temperature of the base and hardener should be at least 20C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY

heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature application with 45:1 airless spray equipment is possible provided in-line heated high pressure hoses are used in case of using 45:1 airless spray equipment the paint must be heated to approx. 30C in order to obtain the right application viscosity length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (= 0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 905
March 2011
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: 2.5 400 2.0 500 150 - 200 m
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m maximum dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured for some days (depending on ambient temperature) after application due to the penetration of the measuring device into the paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for SigmaShield 905 for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 36 hours 20 days 20C 24 hours 20 days 30C 16 hours 14 days 40C 12 hours 7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 60 hours 30 hours 16 hours 10 hours 8 hours full cure 15 days 7 days 5 days 3 days 2 days
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 905
March 2011
Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 40C 60 min. 45 min. 25 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
190476
PDS green
7954 4000002200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 1090
(SigmaCover Armour Compound)
5 pages November 2012 Revision of February 2010
Description
two component ultra high build int reinforced solvent free polyamine cured, epoxy compound seamless water impermeable layer with excellent anticorrosive properties suitable for the protection of steel and concrete excellent resistance against impact and wear excellent adhesion under dry and wet exposure conditions resistant to water and splash of mild chemicals can be exposed to water within 30 minutes after application texture of surface is rough suitable for decks exposed to heavy impact and abrasion
white (other colours on request) at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.0 g/cm 100% max. 35 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 68 g/l (approx. 0.6 lb/gal) *See information sheet 1411 3 - 5 mm 0.2 m/l for 5000 m (=approx.10kg/m) 0.3 m/l for 3000 m (=approx.6 kg/m) 6 - 8 hours at 20 C min. 4 days * max. 30 days * 7 days * at 20 C
at least 6 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 75 - 100 m concrete; free from laitance by blast cleaning moisture content of concrete should be max. 4% substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point
page 1/5
SIGMASHIELD 1090

November 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 90.4 : 9.6 not prepare more material than can be used within 30 minutes the temperature of the mixed base and hardener when mixing the components should be approx. 20C use always mechanical mixing equipment add the hardener while stirring the base mix thoroughly and quickly until a homogeneous material is obtained none 30 minutes at 20 C *
CLEANING SOLVENT
Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use insert a cellulose sponge into the hose inlet and force through with Thinner 90-53, repeat if necessary Overcoating table for SigmaShield 1090 for dft up to 4 mm substrate temperature 10C 7 days 30 days 30 days 20C 4 days 30 days 30 days 30C 1 day 30 days 30 days 40C 1 day 30 days 30 days
ADDITIONAL DATA
with SigmaDur 520, SigmaDur 550 minimum interval maximum interval with solventfree epoxies minimum interval maximum interval
1 day or immediately wet on wet
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 10 - 12 hours 6 - 8 hours 4 - 6 hours 4 - 4 hours dry to handle 48 hours 24 hours 16 hours 12 hours full cure 12 days 7 days 4 days 3 days
page 2/5
SIGMASHIELD 1090

November 2012
Pot life (at application viscosity) 20 C 30 C APPLICATION 30 min. 15 min.
A sprayable polymer mortar is a heavy material which has to be transported from the container with mixed material to the mortar spray gun or airless spray gun. So preferably 3/4 - 1 inch hoses should be used (for the airless spraying, just before the spraygun 5/8 inch). Care should be taken that hoses are of sufciently large diameter, are as short as possible and that no obstructions are present; otherwise the binder will be pressed out of the mortar leaving dry (untransportable) material behind. SigmaShield 1090 can be applied and compacted by trowels damaged areas should be reblasted and repaired with SigmaShield 1090 by means of lling knives porosity, blow holes and crevices in concrete should be lled with SigmaShield 1090 by hand (trowel/lling knife) larger areas can be resprayed with a beaker spray unit (e.g. Putzmeister) suitable for spraying materials like coarse lled mortars
other application methods may be possible, please contact the nearest PPG Protective & Marine Coatings sales ofce
APPLICATION BY TROWEL$$TOUCH UP
APPLICATION WITH LOW PRESSURE PUMP Orice Pressure APPLICATION BY PRESSURE VESSEL
equipment such as type "Swinger Pump"Fizom A112 tech spray systems U.S.A.
approx. 6.5 - 10 mm preferably with internal mix atomisation 0.4 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 4 - 6 bar; 58 - 87 p.s.i.) pressure vessel with bottom outlet and pressure lid vessel should not contain more than 25 litres before use vessel and hoses have to be wetted with white spirit hoses (diameter 25 mm = approx. 1 inch) not longer than 7 metres. preferably in two lenghts of 3.5 metres. at low temperature hoses have to be insulated approx. 6.5 - 10 mm preferably with internal mix atomisation 0.4 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 4 - 6 bar; 58 - 87 p.s.i.)
equipment such as "quick spray"caroussel pump and spraying equipment (Quickspray inc. Port Clinton, Ohio, U.S.A.)
Orice Pressure APPLICATION BY DISPLACEMENT FEED PUMP Orice Pressure
approx. 4 - 5 mm 0.4 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 4 - 6 bar; 58 - 87 p.s.i.)
page 3/5
SIGMASHIELD 1090

November 2012
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets
page 4/5
SIGMASHIELD 1090

November 2012
WARRANTY PPG warrants (i) its title to the product, (ii) that the quality of the product conforms to PPGs specications for such product in effect at the time of manufacture and (iii) that the product shall be delivered free of the rightful claim of any third person for infringement of any U.S. patent covering the product. THESE ARE THE ONLY WARRANTIES THAT PPG MAKES AND ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, UNDER STATUTE OR ARISING OTHERWISE IN LAW, FROM A COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY OTHER WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, ARE DISCLAIMED BY PPG. Any claim under this warranty must be made by Buyer to PPG in writing within ve (5) days of Buyers discovery of the claimed defect, but in no event later than the expiration of the applicable shelf life of the product, or one year from the date of the delivery of the product to the Buyer, whichever is earlier. Buyers failure to notify PPG of such non-conformance as required herein shall bar Buyer
140425
PDS white
7490 7001002120
page 5/5
SIGMASHIELD 1200
Description
two component abrasion resistant solvent free amine cured phenolic epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS single coat system designed for under water hull of ice going and ice breaking vessels recognised by Lloyd's register as an abrasion resistant ice coating excellent abrasion and impact resistance resistant to well designed cathodic protection low co-efcient of friction suitable for new construction or maintenance/repair also suitable for tanks and other structures requiring abrasion resistance excellent resistance to crude oil up to 90C excellent water resistance good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals and solvents can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) reduced explosion risk and re hazard COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after light grey, dark grey, brown (other colours on request) gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 100% max. 97 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 143 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 400 - 500 m 2.5 m/l for 400 m 2 m/l for 500 m * 6 hours min. 24 hours * max. 2 months * 5 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/5
SIGMASHIELD 1200
June 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 when mixing the temperature of the base and hardener should be at least 20C no thinner should be added at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application none 1 hour at 20C *
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment with a minium of 60 : 1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (=0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4061 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22MPa(= approx.220bar; 3000 p.s.i.) for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 2.5 400 2.0 500
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/5
SIGMASHIELD 1200
June 2013
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 1200 for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature minimum interval with itself Max interval when not exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval 10C 36 hours 3 months 20C 24 hours 2 months 30C 16 hours 1 month
with itself and SigmaCover 525 and Max interval when exposed SigmaCover 456 to direct sunshine maximum interval with SigmaDur 550 Max interval when exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval
22 days
14 days
7 days
14 days
7 days
4 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 30 hours 16 hours 10 hours full cure 7 days 5 days 3 days
although the paint is solvent free adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 60 min. 45 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used
page 3/5
SIGMASHIELD 1200
June 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMASHIELD 1200
June 2013
195822
PDS lightgrey
7744 5177052200
page 5/5
SIGMASHIELD 1200 LT
5 pages August 2012 Revision of October 2009
Description
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS single coat system designed for under water hull of ice going and ice breaking vessels recognised by Lloyd's register as an abrasion resistant ice coating excellent abrasion and impact resistance resistant to well designed cathodic protection low co-efcient of friction suitable for new construction or maintenance/repair also suitable for tanks and other structures requiring abrasion resistance excellent resistance to crude oil up to 90C excellent water resistance good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals and solvents can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) cures at temperatures down to +5C reduced explosion risk and re hazard COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after black gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 100% max. 92 g/kg max. 136 g/l (approx. 1.1 lb/gal) 400 - 500 m 2.5 m/l for 400 m 2 m/l for 500 m * 8 hours at 10 C min. 24 hours * max. 22 days * 5 days * at 10 C (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing dry and free from any contamination
page 1/5
SIGMASHIELD 1200 LT
August 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 when mixing the temperature of the base and hardener should be at least 20C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added none 30 minutes at 20 C *
no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (=0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4061 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) twin feed hot airless spray heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment with a minium of (60:1) pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature length of hoses should be as short as possible
for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 2.5 400 2 500 150 m
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/5
SIGMASHIELD 1200 LT
August 2012
measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured for some days (depending on ambient temperature) after application due to the penetration of the measuring device into the paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for SigmaShield 1200 LT for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature minimum interval with itself with itself, SigmaCover 525 and SigmaCover 456 Max interval when not exposed to direct sunshine Max interval when exposed to direct sunshine 5C 36 hours 22 days 10C 24 hours 22 days 20C 12 hours 14 days 30C 6 hours 10 days
14 days
14 days
7 days
5 days
although the paint is solvent free adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 20 C 30 C 30 min. 20 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.
page 3/5
SIGMASHIELD 1200 LT
August 2012
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMASHIELD 1200 LT
August 2012
241652
PDS black
7746 8000002200
page 5/5
SIGMASHIELD 1200 TF
5 pages February 2013 Revision of February 2013
Description
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS single coat system designed for under water hull of ice going and ice breaking vessels recognised by Lloyd's register as an abrasion resistant ice coating can be applied by heavy duty twin feed hot airless spray equipment excellent abrasion and impact resistance resistant to well designed cathodic protection low co-efcient of friction suitable for new construction or maintenance/repair also suitable for tanks and other structures requiring abrasion resistance excellent resistance to crude oil up to 90C excellent water resistance good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals and solvents cures at temperatures down to +5C reduced explosion risk and re hazard COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES offwhite, cream gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 100% max. 92 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 136 g/l (approx. 1.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 400 - 600 m 2.5 m/l for 400 m 2 m/l for 500 m * 8 hours at 10 C min. 24 hours * max. 22 days * 5 days * at 10 C (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing dry and free from any contamination
page 1/5
SIGMASHIELD 1200 TF
February 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 when mixing the temperature of the base should be at least 40C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added none 30 minutes at 20 C *
no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (=0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4061 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) at 40C (paint temperature) min.20 MPa (= approx 200 bar; 2900 p.s.i.) twin feed hot airless spray in-line heating or insulated hoses may necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature length of hoses should be as short as possible
for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 2.5 400 2 500 1.7 600 150 m
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/5
SIGMASHIELD 1200 TF
February 2013
measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured for some days (depending on ambient temperature) after application due to the penetration of the measuring device into the paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for SigmaShield 1200 TF for dft up to 600 m substrate temperature with itself minimum interval Max interval when not exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval with itself, SigmaCover 525 and SigmaCover 456 Max interval when exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval 5C 36 hours 22 days 10C 24 hours 22 days 20C 12 hours 14 days 30C 6 hours 10 days
14 days
14 days
7 days
5 days
although the paint is solvent free adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 30 min. 20 min. 15 min. 5 - 10 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase
page 3/5
SIGMASHIELD 1200 TF
February 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMASHIELD 1200 TF
February 2013
PDS
7709
page 5/5
SigmaShield 4800
3 pages May 2013 Revision of February 2013
Description
Glassake Polyester Coating Glassake polyester coating High performance coating for new or old steel Cures through wide temperature range Resists many aggressive atmospheric environments Suitable for sea water immersion
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA Mass density Volume solids Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Shelf life (cool and dry place)
White. Light grey at 1.2 g/cm 100% ( see information sheet 1726) 600 - 850 m per coat 0.3 m/l for 300 m 0.6 m/l for 600 m 0.85 m/l for 850 m Base 12 months, Hardener 6 months stored at temperatures below 20C Frequent temperature cycling will shorten storage life, Minimum temperature for a satisfactory cure is 10C\50F. To prevent moisture condensation during application, surface temperature must be at least 3C/5F above dew point. Ensure good ventilation when applied in conned areas to assist evaporation and elimination of solvents. steel; remove all loose rust,dirt, oil and grease or other contaminants from surface Blast to Sa 2 ISO 8501-1 or SSPC-SP-10. Blast to achieve a 50 to 75 m (2-3 mils) prole as determined with Testex Press-O-Film tape or similar instrument. mixing ratio by volume: resin to cure 98.5: 1.5 1 hours at 20C
The pot life will vary substantially with temperature
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Pot life
AIRLESS SPRAY AIRLESS PUMP 45:1 or greater, t leather seals and remove uid lters, 10mm diameter (3/8) nylon lined hoses, large bore gun with 0.6mm to 1.5mm reverse clean tip. Typical tip size is 0.75 to 0.85mm with a 45 fan. The size of tip and fan pattern will vary with the nature of the work. Pressure to suit hose lengths and working conditions (circa 200 bar) CLEANING SOLVENT Cleaner: Thinner 50-02
page 1/3
SigmaShield 4800
May 2013
ADDITIONAL DATA
Drying times substrate temperature Dry through minimum interval Dry to recoat maximum interval 20C / 68F 5 hours 72 hours
Consult your PPG representative for specic recommendations.

The maximum recoating time will reduce signicantly at high temperature or in string sunlight
APPLICATION
never add any solvent to SigmaShield 4800 never add catalyst without continuous stirring never add more than the recommended amount of catalyst It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SigmaShield 4800
May 2013
PDS
7790
page 3/3
SigmaShield 4801
3 pages May 2013 Revision of February 2013
Description
Glassake Polyvinylester Coating Glassake polyester coating High performance coating for new or old steel Suitable for wide Ph range Excellent resistance to chemical attach Excellent resistance to demineralised water Good resistance to a wide range of solvents. Suitable for high temperature immersion
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA Mass density Volume solids Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place)
White. at 1.2 g/cm 99% ( see information sheet 1726) 500 - 3000 m (Standard 500-1200m) 1.33 m/l (65 ft/gal) for 750 m 2.00 m/l (98 ft/gal) for 500 m 0.83 m/l (41 ft/gal) for 1200 m 4 days at 20C Base and catalayst ( hardener) 6 months stored at temperatures below 20C Frequent temperature cycling will shortage storage life Minimum temperature for a satisfactory cure is 10C\50F. To prevent moisture condensation during application, surface temperature must be at least 3C/5F above dew point. Ensure good ventilation when applied in conned areas to assist evaporation and elimination of solvents. mixing ratio by volume: resin to cure 98: 2 50 min. at 20C
The pot life will vary substantially with temperature
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Pot life
AIRLESS SPRAY AIRLESS PUMP 45:1 or greater, t leather seals and remove uid lters, 10mm diameter (3/8) nylon lined hoses, large bore gun with 0.6mm to 1.5mm reverse clean tip. Typical tip size is 0.75 to 0.85mm with a 45 fan. The size of tip and fan pattern will vary with the nature of the work. Pressure to suit hose lengths and working conditions (circa 200 bar) CLEANING SOLVENT Cleaner: Thinner 50-02
page 1/3
SigmaShield 4801
May 2013
ADDITIONAL DATA
Drying times substrate temperature Dry to recoat minimum interval Dry to recoat maximum interval 20C / 68F 5 hours 48 hours
Minimum Recoating: As soon as gel has occured and whilst still tacky The Maximum overcoating times can vary substantially with climatic conditions and such has to be observed. Standard is 48 hours at 20C, however strong UV /Sunlight will substantially reduce the overcoating time. Once maximum recoating time has been reached, adhesion values attained by an subsequent coat will reduce dramatically. Should this occur overcoating should be treated as repair, with the coating ash blasted to provide a physical key. Styrene cannot be used to reactivate the surface of this product and may impair adhesion. Take care to avoid contamination before application or subsequent coat. Ensure ventilation during cure.
The maximum recoating time will reduce signicantly at high temperature or in string sunlight
Curing
Curing table substrate temperature 20C / 68F full cure 4 days
APPLICATION
never add any solvent to SigmaShield 4801 never add catalyst without continuous stirring never add more than the recommended amount of catalyst It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SigmaShield 4801
May 2013
PDS
7791
page 3/3
SIGMATHERM 175
Description
heat resistant modied alkyd aluminium nish heat resistant up to 175C high brilliancy spray application improves the appearance a minimum drying time of 3 days at 20C should be allowed before exposure to heat
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place)
aluminium gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.0 g/cm 47 2% max. 411 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 417 g/l (approx. 3.5 lb/gal) 25 m per coat 18.8 m/l for 25 m 3 hours at 5 - 10C 1 hour at 20C min. 36 hours at 5 - 10C, 16 hours at 20C max. unlimited at least 12 months, longer storage period may affect the brilliancy previous coat; (e.g. Sigmarine 24) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point for heat resistant systems system sheet: 3140
RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES SYSTEM SPECIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Thinner 20-05 0 - 3%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) no thinner should be added approx. 0.33 - 0.38 mm (= 0.013 - 0.015 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1740 - 2176 p.s.i.)
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
page 1/3
SIGMATHERM 175
May 2013
BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT Worldwide availability
no thinner should be added Thinner 20-05 It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMATHERM 175
May 2013
136663
PDS aluminium
7260 9000002200
page 3/3
SIGMATHERM 230
4 pages April 2013 Revision of June 2011
Description
two component high build heat resistant phenolic epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS suitable as heat resistant system under insulation up to 230C good anticorrosive properties good application properties, resulting in a smooth layer no post curing is required to obtain mechanical strength COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES pink, grey eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 68% 2% max. 195 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 329 g/l (approx. 2.7 lb/gal) 100 - 150 m * 4.5 m/l for 150 m * 2 - 3 hours at 20 C * 14 - 16 hours at 5 C * min. 8 hours * max. 14 days *
see curing table *

steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of SigmaTherm 230 substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 87 : 13 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components allow induction time before use 5C - 20 min. 10C - 15 min. 15C - 10 min. 2 hours at 20 C *
Induction time
Pot life
page 1/4
SIGMATHERM 230
April 2013
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) only for spot repair and stripe coating Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Overcoating table for SigmaTherm 230 for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 6 hours 7 days
with itself
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C Pot life (at application viscosity) 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 2 hours 1 hour full cure 7 days 5 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
page 2/4
SIGMATHERM 230
April 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMATHERM 230
April 2013
273020 273021 273022 273023
PDS pink pink grey grey
7445 6007001400 6007002200 5000001400 5000002200
page 4/4
SIGMATHERM 350
Description
heat resistant silicone/acrylic nish
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS excellent resistance against weathering a minimum drying time of 3 days at 20C should be allowed before exposure to heat heat resistant up to 350C to be used for the internal and external protection of steel surfaces widely compatible with inorganic zinc primers COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) white, aluminium (other colours on request) semi-gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.2 g/cm (white) 1.1 g/cm (aluminium) 39% 2% (white) 422 (aluminium) max. 492 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) (white) max.491 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC,SED) (aluminium) max. 590 g/l (approx. 4.9 lb/gal) (white) max. 540 g/l (approx. 4.5 lb/gal) ( aluminium ) 25 - 30 m 15.6 m/l for 25 m (white) 16.8 m/l for 25 m (aluminium) 1 - 2 hours min. 18 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months thermal aluminium sprayed steel or thermal zinc sprayed steel; dry and free from any contamination suitable zinc silicate primer (e.g. SigmaZinc 158); dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa3, blasting prole 40 - 70 m substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point by using a mistcoat technique it is possible to apply SigmaTherm 350 on top of a zinc silicate primer power agitate to uniform consistency no thinner should be added 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) no thinner should be added approx. 0.38 - 0.48 mm (=0.015 - 0.019 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1740 - 2176 p.s.i.)
Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
page 1/3
SIGMATHERM 350
June 2013
BRUSH/ROLLER
for touch up and spot repair only Thinner 21-06 It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Explanation to product data sheets Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safety indications Conversion tables Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMATHERM 350
June 2013
168790 186132
aluminium PDS white
9000002200 7565 7000002200
page 3/3
SIGMATHERM 450
3 pages April 2013 Revision of October 2009
Description
heat resistant silicone based nish heat resistant up to 450C to be used for the internal and external protection of steel surfaces good weather resistance after a drying time of 3 days at 20C a minimum temperature of 200C for 2 hours is necessary to obtain sufcient mechanical strength
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
aluminium eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.0 g/cm 24% 2% max. 612 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 639 g/l (approx. 5.3 lb/gal) 30 m 8 m/l for 30 m 30 min. at 20 C 45 min. at 10 C min. 16 hours max. unlimited at least 6 months zinc silicate primer; (e.g. SigmaZinc 158) dry and free from any zinc salts previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination thermal aluminium sprayed steel or thermal zinc sprayed steel; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point power agitate to uniform consistency by using a mistcoat technique it is possible to apply SigmaTherm 450 on top of a zinc silicate primer no thinner should be added 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) no thinner should be added approx. 0.38 - 0.48 mm (=0.015 - 0.019 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1740 - 2176 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 21-06
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER
CLEANING SOLVENT
page 1/3
SIGMATHERM 450
April 2013
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMATHERM 450
April 2013
186350
PDS aluminium
7563 9000002200
page 3/3
SIGMATHERM 500
Description
heat resistant modied alkyd aluminium coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS to be used for the internal and external protection of steel surfaces heat resistant up to 500C; a minimum of 200C is necessary to fuse the aluminium coating a minimum drying time of 3 days at 20C should be allowed before exposure to heat application by spray improves the appearance COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) aluminium eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.1 g/cm 32% 2% max. 561 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 600 g/l (approx. 5.0 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 25 m 12.8 m/l for 25 m 3 hours at 5- 10C 1 hour at 20 C min. 48 hours at 5 - 10C, 24 hours at 20C max. no limitations at least 12 months, longer storage period may affect the brilliancy steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa3, blasting prole 40 - 70 m
RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES SYSTEM SPECIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
for heat resistant systems
system sheet: 3140
stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) no thinner should be added 2 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.)
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
page 1/3
SIGMATHERM 500
February 2013
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT Worldwide availability
no thinner should be added approx. 0.38 mm (= 0.015 in) 8 - 12 MPa (= approx. 80 - 120 bar; 1160 - 1740 p.s.i.) no thinner should be added Thinner 20-05 It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMATHERM 500
February 2013
136661
PDS aluminium
7261 9000002200
page 3/3
SIGMATHERM 520
Description
one component heat resistant moisture curing (ethyl) silicate nish to be used for the internal and external protection of steel surfaces up to 520C when applied on top of suitable zinc silicate primers minimizes the formation of zinc salts on atmospheric exposure cures at temperatures down to -5C no post curing is required to obtain mechanical strength
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
aluminium at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.2 g/cm 38% 2% max. 494 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 588 g/l (approx. 4.9 lb/gal) 40 m * (25 m on top of the zinc silicate) 9.5 m/l for 40 m 60 min. at 20 C min. 5 hours * max. unlimited, contamination must be removed 12 hours * at least 12 months suitable zinc silicate primer (e.g. SigmaZinc 158); dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts during application substrate temperatures ranging from -5C up to +50C are acceptable substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point relative humidity during curing should be above 50% stir thoroughly till homogeneous strain paint through a 30 - 60 mesh screen agitate continuously during application Thinner 90-53 10 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.7 - 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 90-53 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.38 - 0.46 mm (= 0.015 - 0.018 in) 12 MPa (= approx. 120 bar; 1740 p.s.i.)
page 1/4
SIGMATHERM 520
April 2013
BRUSH/ROLLER
only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 9.5 40 on top of zinc silicate approx. 25
if is not possible to measure the actual dft as the nish will soak partly into porous zinc silicate primer immediatly after spraying the nish should have a completely wet appearance excessive thickness in overlapping areas should be avoided otherwise cracking and aking may occur Overcoating table (relative humidity during curing should be above 50%) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 3 hours
48 hours 36 hours 10 hours 5 hours unlimited
the surface should be (kept) wet for the next 4 hours curing can be accelerated by spraying water on to the coated surface 4 hours after application relative humidity below 50% requires a much longer minimum overcoating interval Curing Curing table (relative humidity during curing should be above 50%) substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 2 hours 2 hours 1 hour 30 min. 15 min. 10 min. full cure 48 hours 36 hours 24 hours 12 hours 6 hours 4 hours
page 2/4
SIGMATHERM 520
April 2013
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMATHERM 520
April 2013
153167
PDS aluminium
7555 9000002180
page 4/4
SIGMATHERM 538
4 pages January 2013 Revision of November 2012
Description
one component heat resistant moisture curing (ethyl) silicate nish
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS can withstand substrate temperatures up to +540C, under normal atmospheric exposure conditions minimizes the formation of zinc salts on atmospheric exposure no post curing is required to obtain mechanical strength COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES white, grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.7 g/cm 62% 2% max. 276 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 480 g/l (approx. 4.0 lb/gal) 125 m 5.0 m/l for 125 m 60 min. at 20 C 12 hours * at least 12 months suitable zinc silicate primer; dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point relative humidity during curing should be above 50% in case SigmaZinc 158 or SigmaZinc 9 Series is being used the substrate shall be fresh water washed prior to application of Sigmatherm 538 stir thoroughly till homogeneous agitate continuously during application Thinner 21-06 10 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2.0 - 2.5 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.63 - 0.75 mm (= 0.025 - 0.03 in) 12 MPa (= approx. 120 bar; 1740 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 21-06
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER
CLEANING SOLVENT
page 1/4
SIGMATHERM 538
January 2013
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m/l dft in m 5.0 m/l 125
it is not possible to measure the actual dft as the nish will soak partly into the porous zinc silicate primer immediatly after spraying the nish should have a completely wet appearance excessive thickness in overlapping areas should be avoided otherwise cracking and aking may occur Curing Curing table (relative humidity during curing should be above 50%) substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours full cure 48 hours 24 hours 12 hours 8 hours
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Worldwide availability It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used
page 2/4
SIGMATHERM 538
January 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMATHERM 538
January 2013
PDS aluminium
7592 9000002180
page 4/4
SIGMATHERM 540
Description
one component heat resistant moisture curing silicone aluminium heat resistant up to 540C on steel, grit blasted to ISO-Sa2 heat resistant up to 400C on rusted steel, power tool cleaned to ISO-St3 to be used for the internal and external protection of steel surfaces no heat cure necessary between coats excellent resistance against weathering also suitable on top of zinc silicate primer a minimum drying time of 3 days at 20C should be allowed before exposure to heat
aluminium eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.1 g/cm 45% 2% max. 427 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 478 g/l (approx. 4.0 lb/gal) 25 m 18 m/l for 25 m 45 min. at 20 C min. 16 hours at least 6 months steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel; pretreated according to ISO-St3 suitable zinc silicate primer (e.g. SigmaZinc 158); dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point power agitate to uniform consistency no thinner should be added 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 44 - 58 p.s.i.) For Roller application the best results will be obtained by using ne foam type rollers Thinner 21-06
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER
CLEANING SOLVENT
page 1/3
SIGMATHERM 540
June 2012
Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMATHERM 540
June 2012
218773 218772
PDS aluminium aluminium
7564 9000002200 9000001500
page 3/3
SIGMAWELD 15
3 pages January 2013 Revision of October 2009
Description
fast drying one component alkyd based anticorrosive prefabrication primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates good cutting and welding properties (electrodes) provides corrosion protection up to 6 months, when applied at a dft of 30 m (depending on exposure conditions and blasting prole) fast drying properties can be used as a rst coat in various paint systems for atmospheric exposure conditions only COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval redbrown at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.3 g/cm 40% 2% max. 396 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 527 g/l (approx. 4.4 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 30 m 13.3 m/l 10 min. at substrate temperature of 20C 3 min. at substrate temperature of 40C + ventilation min. 12 hours max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition at least 6 months steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m for automatic application a substrate temperature between 35 - 40C is recommended substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during storage and construction, contamination of the prefabrication primer should be limited after fabrication, surface defects should be treated according to the scheme below contamination weldseams burned areas damaged corroded areas to be removed SPSS-Pt2 SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)
page 1/3
SIGMAWELD 15
January 2013
stir well before use the temperature of the paint should be above 15C strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen some addition of thinner might be necessary depending on routing, line speed and steel temperature agitate continuously during application Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.0 - 1.5 mm 0.15 - 0.2 MPa (= approx. 1.5 - 2 bar; 22 - 29 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 - 0.58 mm (= 0.017 - 0.023 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1740 - 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT Worldwide availability
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMAWELD 15
January 2013
171947
PDS redbrown
7112 0000002200
page 3/3
SIGMAWELD 120
3 pages January 2013 Revision of October 2009
Description
two component polyamide cured epoxy prefabrication primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates good cutting and welding properties, including MMA and gravity welding provides corrosion protection up to 6 months, when applied at a dft of 22 m (depending on exposure conditions and blasting prole) fast drying properties can be used as a rst coat in various paint systems for atmospheric exposure conditions only COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval redbrown at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.1 g/cm 21% 2% max. 593 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 653 g/l (approx. 5.4 lb/gal) 22 m 9.5 m/l for 22 m 6 minutes at substrate temperature of 20C 4 minutes at substrate temperature of 40C min. 12 hours max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition at least 12 months steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m for automatic application a substrate temperature between 35 - 40C is recommended substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during storage and construction, contamination of the prefabrication primer should be limited after fabrication, surface defects should be treated according to the scheme below
contamination weldseams burned areas damaged corroded areas to be removed SPSS-Pt2 SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)
page 1/3
SIGMAWELD 120
January 2013
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen mixed paint is ready for use some addition of thinner (Thinner 90-53) might be necessary depending on routing, line speed and steel temperature agitate continuously during application
Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT Worldwide availability
24 hours at 20 C Thinner 90-53 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.0 - 1.5 mm 0.15 - 0.2 MPa (= approx. 2 - 2 bar; 22 - 29 p.s.i.) Thinner 90-53 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 - 0.58 mm (= 0.017 - 0.023 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1740 - 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 90-53 It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMAWELD 120
January 2013
179591
PDS redbrown
7173 2008002200
page 3/3
SIGMAWELD 165
5 pages May 2013 Revision of December 2009
Description
two component moisture curing, zinc (ethyl) silicate prefabrication primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates fast drying properties good cutting and excellent welding properties, including MIG/MAG welding in various positions (either automatic or manual welding) provides corrosion protection up to 9 months, when applied at a dft of 13 m (depending on exposure conditions and blasting prole) can be used as a rst coat in various paint systems suitable for sea water immersion in combination with controlled cathodic protection systems excellent thermal stability minimizes heat damage during hot work procedures no adherence of weldspatter at surrounding primed surface approved by Lloyd's Register of Shipping for use as prefabrication primer (see sheet 1880) COLOURS AND GLOSS grey, reddish grey at BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 30 2% max. 428 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 645 g/l (approx. 5.4 lb/gal) 13 m - see further: "Recommended substrate conditions and temperatures" 20 m/l for 13 m 6 min. at substrate temperature of 20C 3 min. at a substrate temperature of 40C min. 3 days max. 9 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition (data for components) binder: at least 9 months paste: at least 12 months
page 1/5
SIGMAWELD 165
May 2013
on steel blasted to above prole, the recommended dft, 13 m, corresponds to 15 m as measured on a smooth test panel minimum thickness for a closed lm is 13 m measured on a smooth test panel substrate temperature may be up to max. 50C for automatic application a substrate temperature of 30C is recommended depending on exact substrate temperature and actual condition on side a different thinner may be required substrate temperature at least 3C above dew point relative humidity during curing should be above 50% and below 85% dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992) primers system sheet: 3015
SYSTEM SPECIFICATION SECUNDARY SURFACE PREPARATION
during storage and construction, contamination of the prefabrication primer should be limited after fabrication, surface defects should be treated according to the scheme below where two possible surface treatments are indicated, the choice of treatment is dependent on the location and on the system to be applied (see system sheets) the preferred pretreatment for optimal results is shown; other possibilities are indicated in brackets areas contamination weldseams burned damaged corroded white rust immersed conditions to be removed or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 SPSS-ID Pt2 (SCAP*) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 atmospheric conditions to be removed SPSS-Pt2 SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-ID Pt1 (SCAP*)
* cleaning by silicon carbide impregnated abrasive pad Dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3). Note that the back of welded plate may show discoloration (especially on plate where llets have been welded on), this is not to be confused with burned areas and does not require special treatment. Burned through areas may be present (this happens especially when welding thin steel) and these should then be treated as per 'burned areas' above.
page 2/5
SIGMAWELD 165
May 2013
mixing ratio by volume: binder to paste 55 : 45 the temperature of the mixture of binder and paste should preferably be above 15C stir the paste thoroughly before adding the binder add gradually one third of the binder to the pigment paste stir thoroughly till homogeneous add remaining binder and continue stirring until the mixture is homogeneous strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen mixed paint is ready for use some addition of thinner (Thinner 90-53) might be necessary depending on routing, line speed and steel temperature agitate continuously during application 24 hours at 20C Thinner 90-53 0 - 35%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 90-53 0 - 35%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.49 - 0.64 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 8 - 12 MPa (= approx. 80 - 120 bar; 1160 - 1740 p.s.i.) Note: Depending on exact application conditions a different thinner may be required to ensure optimal application properties. Consult the PPG Protective & Marine Coatings representative in your area when required. recommended Thinner 90-53 It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used
Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
page 3/5
SIGMAWELD 165
May 2013
REFERENCES
Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMAWELD 165
May 2013
244462 179169
PDS grey reddish grey
7171 0000002180 5010002180
page 5/5
SIGMAWELD 190
Description
two component moisture curing, low zinc (ethyl) silicate prefabrication primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates fast drying properties good cutting and excellent welding properties, including MIG/MAG welding in various positions (either automatic or manual welding) provides regular, smooth weld seams low fume release during welding and cutting no adherence of weldspatter at surrounding primed surface excellent thermal stability minimizes heat damage during hot work procedures can be used as a rst coat in various paint systems suitable for sea water immersion in combination with controlled cathodic protection systems approved by Lloyd's Register of Shipping for use as prefabrication primer (see sheet 1880) redbrown (grey on request) at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval 1.2 g/cm 25% 2% max. 552 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC,SED) max. 680 g/l (approx. 5.7 lb/gal) 18 m - see further: "Recommended substrate conditions and temperatures" 11.4 m/l for 18 m 6 min. at substrate temperature of 20C 3 min. at substrate temperature of 40C min. 3 days max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition (data for components) binder: at least 9 months paste: at least 12 months
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C
page 1/5
SIGMAWELD 190
May 2013 RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m on steel blasted to above prole, the recommended dft, 18 m, corresponds to 22 m as measured on a smooth test panel minimum thickness for a closed lm is 15 m measured on a smooth test panel substrate temperature may be up to max. 35C for automatic application a substrate temperature of 30C is recommended substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point relative humidity during curing should be above 50% and below 85% dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992) primers system sheet: 3015
during storage and construction, contamination of the prefabrication primer should be limited after fabrication, surface defects should be treated according to the scheme below where two possible surface treatments are indicated, the choice of treatment is dependent on the location and on the system to be applied (see system sheets) the preferred pretreatment for optimal results is shown; other possibilities are indicated in brackets areas contamination weldseams burned damaged corroded white rust immersed conditions to be removed or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 SPSS-ID Pt2 (SCAP*) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 atmospheric conditions to be removed SPSS-Pt2 SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-ID Pt1 (SCAP *)
page 2/5
SIGMAWELD 190
May 2013 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE mixing ratio by volume: binder to paste 66.7 : 33.3 the temperature of the mixture of binder and paste should preferably be above 15C stir the paste thoroughly before adding the binder add gradually one third of the binder to the pigment paste stir thoroughly till homogeneous add remaining binder and continue stirring until the mixture is homogeneous strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen mixed paint is ready for use some addition of thinner (Thinner 90-53) might be necessary depending on routing, line speed and steel temperature agitate continuously during application 24 hours at 20 C no thinner should be added 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) no thinner should be added approx. 0.43 - 0.53 mm (= 0.017 - 0.021 in) 8 - 12 MPa (= approx. 80 - 120 bar; 1160 - 1740 p.s.i.) recommended Thinner 90-53 It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used
Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT Worldwide availability
page 3/5
SIGMAWELD 190
May 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMAWELD 190
May 2013
179171 179172
PDS redbrown grey
7167 2008002180 5000002180
page 5/5
SIGMAWELD 199
Description
two component moisture curing, low zinc (ethyl) silicate prefabrication primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates fast drying properties good cutting and excellent welding properties, including MIG/MAG welding in various positions (either automatic or manual welding) provides regular, smooth weld seams low fume release during welding and cutting no adherence of weldspatter at surrounding primed surface excellent thermal stability minimizes heat damage during hot work procedures can be used as a rst coat in various paint systems suitable for sea water immersion in combination with controlled cathodic protection systems approved by Lloyd's Register of Shipping for use as prefabrication primer (see sheet 1880) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval redbrown (grey on request) at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 25 2% max. 521 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 676 g/l (approx. 5.6 lb/gal) 18 m - see further: "Recommended substrate conditions and temperatures" 11.4 m/l for 18 m 6 min. at substrate temperature of 20C 3 min. at substrate temperature of 40C min. 3 days max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition (data for components) binder: at least 9 months paste: at least 12 months
page 1/4
SIGMAWELD 199
June 2013
steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m on steel blasted to above prole, the recommended dft, 18 m, corresponds to 22 m as measured on a smooth test panel minimum thickness for a closed lm is 15 m measured on a smooth test panel substrate temperature may be up to max. 35C for automatic application a substrate temperature of 30C is recommended substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point relative humidity during curing should be above 50% and below 85% dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992) primers system sheet: 3015
during storage and construction, contamination of the prefabrication primer should be limited after fabrication, surface defects should be treated according to the scheme below where two possible surface treatments are indicated, the choice of treatment is dependent on the location and on the system to be applied (see system sheets) the preferred pretreatment for optimal results is shown; other possibilities are indicated in brackets areas contamination weldseams burned damaged corroded white rust immersed conditions to be removed or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 SPSS-ID Pt2 (SCAP*) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 atmospheric conditions to be removed SPSS-Pt2 SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-ID Pt1 (SCAP*)
page 2/4
SIGMAWELD 199
June 2013
mixing ratio by volume: binder to paste 66.7 : 33.3 the temperature of the mixture of binder and paste should preferably be above 15C stir the paste thoroughly before adding the binder add gradually one third of the binder to the pigment paste stir thoroughly till homogeneous add remaining binder and continue stirring until the mixture is homogeneous strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen mixed paint is ready for use some addition of thinner (Thinner 90-53) might be necessary depending on routing, line speed and steel temperature agitate continuously during application 24 hours at 20C no thinner should be added 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) no thinner should be added approx. 0.43 - 0.53 mm (= 0.017 - 0.021 in) 8 - 12 MPa (= approx. 80 - 120 bar; 1160 - 1740 p.s.i.) recommended Thinner 90-53 It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT Worldwide availability
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMAWELD 199
June 2013
179165 179167
PDS redbrown grey
7177 2008002180 5000002180
page 4/4
SIGMAWELD 210
4 pages November 2012 Revision of March 2011
Description
two component moisture curing, zinc (ethyl) silicate prefabrication primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates fast drying properties good cutting and excellent welding properties, including MIG/MAG welding in various positions (either automatic or manual welding) provides corrosion protection up to 9 months can be used as a rst coat in various paint systems suitable for sea water immersion in combination with controlled cathodic protection systems excellent thermal stability minimizes heat damage during hot work procedures no adherence of weldspatter at surrounding primed surface approved by Lloyd's Register of Shipping for use as prefabrication primer COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval grey, reddish grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.1 g/cm 38% 2% max. 299 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 607 g/l (approx. 5.1 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 15 - 20 m 19 m/l for 20 m 2 - 4 min. at substrate temperature of 20C 1 - 2 min. at substrate temperature of 40C min. 16 hours max. 9 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition (data for components) binder: at least 6 months paste: at least 12 months steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m substrate temperature may be up to max. 35C for automatic application a substrate temperature of 30C is recommended substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point relative humidity during curing should be above 50% and below 85% dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992)
page 1/4
SIGMAWELD 210
November 2012
during storage and construction, contamination of the prefabrication primer should be limited after fabrication, surface defects should be treated according to the scheme below where two possible surface treatments are indicated, the choice of treatment is dependent on the location and on the system to be applied (see system sheets) the preferred pretreatment for optimal results is shown; other possibilities are indicated in brackets areas contamination weldseams immersed conditions to be removed or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 SPSS-ID Pt2 (SCAP *) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 atmospheric conditions to be removed SPSS-Pt2
burned
SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)
damaged corroded
SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)
white rust
SPSS-ID Pt1 (SCAP *)
page 2/4
SIGMAWELD 210
November 2012
mixing ratio by volume: binder to paste 50 : 50 the temperature of the mixture of binder and paste should preferably be above 15C stir the paste thoroughly before adding the binder add gradually one third of the binder to the pigment paste stir thoroughly till homogeneous add remaining binder and continue stirring until the mixture is homogeneous strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen mixed paint is ready for use some addition of thinner (Thinner 40-25) might be necessary depending on routing, line speed and steel temperature agitate continuously during application 8 hours at 20 C Thinner 40-25 0 - 35%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.0 - 1.5 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 40-25 0 - 35%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.49 - 0.64 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 8 - 12 MPa (= approx. 80 - 120 bar; 1160 - 1740 p.s.i.) Thinner 90-58 Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1650
Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT Worldwide availability
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMAWELD 210
November 2012
PDS
7159
page 4/4
SIGMAZINC 11
4 pages November 2012 Revision of March 2011
Description
one component inorganic zinc silicate coating single pack zinc silicate good anticorrosive properties dry heat resistance up to 400C quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after
grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 2.1 g/cm 58% 2% max. 263 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 559 g/l (approx. 4.7 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 65 m 8.9 m/l for 65 m 30 min. at 10 C 5 min. at 15 C 4 min. at 20 C min. 16 hours at 20C * max. several months at least 12 months
Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place)
RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.3 MPa (= approx. 2 - 3 bar; 29 - 44 p.s.i.)
page 1/4
SIGMAZINC 11
November 2012
Thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 mm (= 0.017 in) 10 - 15 MPa (= approx. 100 - 150 bar; 1450 - 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 3% Thinner 21-06 Overcoating table substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 24 hours 20C 16 hours
several months when free from zinc salts and contamination
zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure conditions in clean exterior conditions, a maximum interval of 14 days can be tolerated, but in industrial or marine conditions this interval should be reduced to the practical minimum before overcoating visible surface contamination must be removed by high pressure water cleaning, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning
page 2/4
SIGMAZINC 11
November 2012
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMAZINC 11
November 2012
PDS
7359
page 4/4
SIGMAZINC 19
Description
one component zinc rich epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS good anticorrosive properties, the dry lm contains 90% zinc by weight designed for repair of two component zinc epoxy primers and zinc silicate primers can be used as a reconditioner for aged derusted galvanised steel dries at temperatures down to -10C dry heat resistance 125C with peaks up to 175C the superimposed system must be unsaponiable quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 2.4 g/cm 38 2% max. 246 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 584 g/l (approx. 4.9 lb/gal) 35 m 10.9 m/l for 35 m 30 min. at 10C 5 min. at 15C 4 min. at 20C min. 2 hours at 20C * max. several months at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m aged hot-dip galvanised steel with rusty spots; thoroughly derusted to ISOSt3 or ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m zinc rich epoxies and zinc silicates; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point can be applied down to -10C provided the surface is free from moisture and ice stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
page 1/4
SIGMAZINC 19
June 2013
Thinner 91-79 20 - 25%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.3 MPa (= approx. 2 - 3 bar; 29 - 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-79 20 - 25%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 mm (= 0.017 in) 10 - 15 MPa (= approx. 100 - 150 bar; 1450 - 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-79 0 - 3% Thinner 90-53 Overcoating table for SigmaZinc 19 for dft up to 35 m substrate temperature -10C 6 hours 5C 4 hours 10C 3 hours 20C 2 hours
with SigmaCover 522, minimum interval SigmaCover 435, SigmaCover 456 maximum interval
zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure conditions in clean exterior conditions, a maximum interval of 14 days can be tolerated, but in industrial or marine conditions this interval should be reduced to the practical minimum before overcoating visible surface contamination must be removed by high pressure water cleaning, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning when a long overcoating interval is required, it is recommended to overcoat SigmaZinc 19 as soon as possible with a suitable sealer coat Worldwide availability It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used
page 2/4
SIGMAZINC 19
June 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMAZINC 19
June 2013
136782
PDS grey
7370 0000001800
page 4/4
SIGMAZINC 68 HS
5 pages October 2012 Revision of June 2012
Description
three component high solids polyamide adduct cured zinc epoxy primer designed as a system primer for various paint systems excellent anticorrosive properties quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval can serve as a holding primer for various maintenance systems for a total repair very good primer for systems with high solids epoxy buildcoats complies with SSPC-Paint 20 and ISO 12944.5 meets RCSC specication for structural joints using ASTM A325 or A490 bolts, Class B grey, reddish grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 3.1 g/cm 70% 2% max. 288 g/l (approx. 2.4 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 75 m depending on system 9.3 m/l for 75 m * 2 hours * at 20 C min. 2 hours * max. several months *
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
at least 12 months
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to SPSS-Ss for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to SPSS or powertool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point
page 1/5
SIGMAZINC 68 HS
October 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener to powder: 46 : 20 : 34 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components none 16 hours at 20 C Thinner 91-92 0 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2.2 mm 0.3 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 3 - 6 bar; 44 - 87 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 - 0.48 mm (= 0.017 - 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 10% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 9.3 75 7.0 100
page 2/5
SIGMAZINC 68 HS
October 2012
Overcoating table for dft 100 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 6 hours 20C 2 hours 30C 1 hour 40C 1 hour
3 months when free from zinc salts and contamination
zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure conditions in clean exterior conditions, a maximum interval of 3 months can be tolerated, but in industrial or marine conditions this interval should be reduced to the practical minimum before overcoating visible surface contamination must be removed by high pressure water cleaning, sweep blasting or mechanical clean Curing Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C touch dry 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour dry to handle 36 hours 8 hours 4 hours full cure 20 days 7 days 5 days
SigmaZinc 68 HS can be applied at temperatures between 5C and 10C, but the curing rate will be very low for such applications alternative zinc rich primers are recommended: SigmaZinc 19, SigmaZinc 158 and SigmaZinc 160 for systems exposed to atmospheric conditions, SigmaGuard 750 for systems exposed to immersed conditions adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.
page 3/5
SIGMAZINC 68 HS
October 2012
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMAZINC 68 HS
October 2012
PDS
7403
page 5/5
SigmaZinc 68SP
Description
two component high solids polyamine adduct cured zinc rich epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS Designed as a system primer in various paint systems for aggressive environments excellent anticorrosive properties quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval very good primer for systems with high solids epoxy buildcoats complies with the compositional requirements of ISO 12944-5 COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES reddish grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 3.0 g/cm ( mixed product ) 65 2% max. 106 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 310 g/l (approx. 2.6 lb/gal) 60 - 100 m depending on system 11 m/l for 60 m 3 hours at 20C * min. 3 hours at 20C max. several months * 7 days at 20C * at least 12 months
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40-70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to SPSS-Ss for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40-70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer pretreated according to SPSS or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 90 : 10 the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components none 8 hours at 20C *
page 1/4
SigmaZinc 68SP
May 2013
Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 1.5 - 2.0 mm (= 0.059 - 0.079 in) 0.3 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 3 - 6 bar; 44 - 87 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 - 0.48 mm (= 0.017 - 0.019 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2901 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Overcoating table at 60 m dft substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 6 hours 20C 3 hours 30C 2 hours 40C 1 hour 10.8 60 6.5 100
zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure conditions in clean exterior conditions, a maximum interval of 3 months can be tolerated, but in industrial or marine conditions this interval should be reduced to the practical minimum before overcoating visible surface contamination must be removed by high pressure water cleaning, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning
page 2/4
SigmaZinc 68SP
May 2013
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 75 m substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 1.5 hours dry to handle 8 hours 5 hours 4 hours 2 hours full cure 20 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
adequate ventilation to remove solvent must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Worldwide availability It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SigmaZinc 68SP
May 2013
PDS
7068
page 4/4
SIGMAZINC 102
4 pages October 2009 Revision of March 2007
DESCRIPTION
two component polyamide cured zinc epoxy primer economical zinc epoxy primer for various paint systems good corrosion prevention properties quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval can serve as a holding primer for various maintenance systems for a total repair the superimposed system must be unsaponiable complies with SSPC-Paint 20 grey - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.1 g/cm 55 2% max. 193 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 410 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) 25 - 50 m depending on blasting prole; dfts of more then 50 m are not recommended 22 m/l for 25 m * 15 min. at 20C * min. 6 hours * max. several months * 7 days (data for components)
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Curing time
at least 12 months steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 78 : 22 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
none 24 hours at 20C, 6 hours at 35C
page 1/4
SIGMAZINC 102
October 2009
Thinner 91-92 0 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 - 0.48 mm (= 0.017 - 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
Thinner 91-92 0 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2.2 mm 0.3 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 3 - 6 bar; 43 - 85 p.s.i.)
Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 22.0 25 15.7 35 11.0 50
page 2/4
SIGMAZINC 102
October 2009
Overcoating table for dft 25 - 50 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval interior maximum interval exterior 5C 24 hours 10C 8 hours 20C 6 hours 30C 4 hours 40C 3 hours
several months when free from zinc salts and contamination 14 days in clean conditions
zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure conditions in industrial or marine conditions or if a long recoat interval is required, it is recommended to apply a suitable sealer direct after the minimum recoating interval before overcoating visible surface contamination must be removed by high pressure water cleaning, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning Curing table substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 40 min. 30 min. 15 min. 10 min. dry to handle 4 hours 2 hours 2 hours 1 hour full cure 20 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
SigmaZinc 102 can be applied at temperatures down to 5C, but the curing rate will be very low for such applications alternative zinc rich primers are recommended: SigmaZinc 19, SigmaZinc 158 and SigmaZinc 160 for systems exposed to atmospheric conditions, SigmaGuard 750 for systems exposed to immersed conditions adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.
page 3/4
SIGMAZINC 102
October 2009
REFERENCES
179384
PDS grey
7402 0000001800
page 4/4
SIGMAZINC 102 HS
5 pages December 2012 Revision of September 2009
Description
two component high solids polyamide cured zinc epoxy primer very good primer for systems with high solids epoxy buildcoats can also be used as a system primer for various other paint systems good anticorrosive properties quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval complies with SSPC-Paint 20
grey, redbrown at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.4 g/cm 66% 2% max. 120 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 286 g/l (approx. 2.4 lb/gal) 60 - 150 m depending on system 11 m/l for 60 m * 2 hours at 20 C min. 6 hours * max. several months *
at least 12 months
page 1/5
SIGMAZINC 102 HS
December 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components none 8 hours at 20 C Thinner 91-92 0 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2.2 mm 0.3 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 3 - 6 bar; 44 - 87 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 - 0.48 mm (= 0.017 - 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 10% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m/l dft in m 11.0 60 8.8 75 6.6 100 4.4 150
page 2/5
SIGMAZINC 102 HS
December 2012
Overcoating table for SigmaZinc 102 HS for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 10 hours 20C 6 hours 30C 4 hours 40C 3 hours
zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure conditions in industrial or marine conditions or if a long recoat interval is required, it is recommended to apply a suitable sealer direct after the minimum recoating interval before overcoating any visible surface contamination must be removed by high pressure water cleaning, sandwashing, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning Curing Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour dry to handle 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 1.5 hour full cure 20 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
SigmaZinc 102 HS can be applied at temperatures between 5C and 10C, but the curing rate will be very low for such applications alternative zinc rich primers are recommended: SigmaZinc 19 or SigmaFast 302 adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Worldwide availability It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used
page 3/5
SIGMAZINC 102 HS
December 2012
REFERENCES
Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMAZINC 102 HS
December 2012
284208 202554
grey PDS redbrown
5000001800 7702 2008001800
page 5/5
SIGMAZINC 105
4 pages July 2013 Revision of January 2013
Description
two component zinc epoxy primer excellent anticorrosive properties quick drying, can be overcoated after 25 minutes excellent application properties cures at temperatures down to -5C
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.0 g/cm 65 2% max. 208 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 408 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) 50 - 80 m depending on system 12.8 m/l for 50 m * 10 min. at 20C min. 25 min. * max. 1 year * at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m substrate temperature must be at least 3C above dew point during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
Pot life AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
4 hours at 20C Thinner 21-06 15 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.6 mm 0.3 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 3 - 6 bar; 44 - 87 p.s.i.)
page 1/4
SIGMAZINC 105
July 2013
Thinner 21-06 5 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.38 - 0.53 mm (= 0.015 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 12.8 50 8.1 80
Overcoating table for SigmaZinc 105 for dft up to 50 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 60 min. 12 months 0C 45 min. 10C 30 min. 20C 25 min. 30C 20 min.
Overcoating table for SigmaZinc 105 for dft up to 80 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 80 min. 12 months 0C 60 min. 10C 50 min. 20C 40 min. 30C 35 min.
surface should be dry and free from any contamination an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure conditions zinc primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should not be weathered for long periods before overcoating before overcoating any visible surface contamination must be removed by sandwashing, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning
page 2/4
SIGMAZINC 105
July 2013
Curing
Curing table for SigmaZinc 105 for dft up to 80 m substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C touch dry 60 min. 40 min. 25 min. 10 min. <10 min. dry to handle 80 min. 60 min. 50 min. 40 min. 35 min.
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tables Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMAZINC 105
July 2013
PDS
7069
page 4/4
SIGMAZINC 109
Description
two component zinc rich polyamide cured epoxy primer designed as a system primer for various paint systems good corrosion prevention properties quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval can also serve as a holding primer for various maintenance systems when a short overcoating interval is required topcoats must be unsaponiable certicate for welding: see sheet 1880 complies with SSPC-Paint 20 and ISO 12944.5 grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.7 g/cm 46% 2% max. 174 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 469 g/l (approx. 3.9 lb/gal) (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) 25 - 40 m depending on blasting prole 11.5 m/l for 40 m * 10 min. * at 20 C min. 6 hours * max. several months *
7 days *
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m SigmaZinc 109 must not be applied at a temperature below 5C substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components none 48 hours at 20 C
page 1/4
SIGMAZINC 109
March 2013
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2.2 mm 0.3 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 3 - 6 bar; 44 - 87 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 - 0.48 mm (= 0.017 - 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 18.4 25 11.5 40
Overcoating table for Sigmazinc 109 for dft up to 40 m substrate temperature with SigmaCover 522, minimum interval SigmaCover 435, SigmaCover 456 maximum interval 10C 8 hours 20C 6 hours 30C 4 hours
on surface free from zinc salts; several months
zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure conditions in clean exterior conditions, a maximum interval of 14 days can be tolerated, but in industrial or marine conditions this interval should be reduced to the practical minimum before overcoating any visible surface contamination must be removed by sandwashing, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning when a longer overcoating interval is required, it is recommended to overcoat SigmaZinc 109 as soon as possible with SigmaCover 522
page 2/4
SIGMAZINC 109
March 2013
Curing
Curing table for dft up to 40 m substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 30 min. 20 min. 10 min. 8 min. full cure 20 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
SigmaZinc 109 can be applied at temperatures down to 5C, but the curing rate will be very low for such applications alternative zinc rich primers are recommended: SigmaZinc 19, SigmaZinc 158 and SigmaZinc 160 for systems exposed to atmospheric conditions, SigmaGuard 750 for systems exposed to immersed conditions adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Worldwide availability It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1410 see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4
SIGMAZINC 109
March 2013
179500
PDS grey
7401 0000001800
page 4/4
SIGMAZINC 109 HS
5 pages October 2012 Revision of July 2011
Description
two component high solids polyamide adduct cured zinc rich epoxy primer designed as a system primer for various paint systems excellent anticorrosive properties quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval can serve as a holding primer for various maintenance systems for a total repair very good primer for systems with high solids epoxy buildcoats complies with SSPC-Paint 20 and ISO 12944.5 grey, reddish grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.8 g/cm 66% 2% max. 106 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 299 g/l (approx. 2.5 lb/gal) 60 - 150 m depending on system 11 m/l for 60 m * 2.5 hours * at 20 C min. 4 hours * max. several months * 7 days at 20 C
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after
at least 12 months
page 1/5
SIGMAZINC 109 HS
October 2012
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components none 8 hours at 20 C Thinner 91-92 0 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2.2 mm 0.3 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 3 - 6 bar; 44 - 87 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 - 0.48 mm (= 0.017 - 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 10% Thinner 90-53 Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m 11 60 8.8 75 6.6 100 4.4 150
page 2/5
SIGMAZINC 109 HS
October 2012
Overcoating table for dft 100 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 8 hours 20C 4 hours 30C 3 hours 40C 2 hours
zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should not be weathered for long periods before overcoating in clean exterior conditions, a maximum interval of 3 months can be tolerated, but in industrial or marine conditions this interval should be reduced to the practical minimum an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure conditions before overcoating visible surface contamination must be removed by high pressure water cleaning, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning Curing Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 5 hours 3 hours 2.5 hours 1 hour dry to handle 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 1.5 hour full cure 20 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
SigmaZinc 109 HS can be applied at temperatures between 5C and 10C, but the curing rate will be very low for such applications alternative zinc rich primers are recommended: SigmaZinc 19, SigmaZinc 158 and SigmaZinc 160 for systems exposed to atmospheric conditions, SigmaGuard 750 for systems exposed to immersed conditions adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of Sigma Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.
page 3/5
SIGMAZINC 109 HS
October 2012
REFERENCES
Safety indications Safe working in conned spaces Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Explanation to product data sheets Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Directives for ventilation practice Conversion tabels Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMAZINC 109 HS
October 2012
WARRANTY PPG warrants (i) its title to the product, (ii) that the quality of the product conforms to PPGs specications for such product in effect at the time of manufacture and (iii) that the product shall be delivered free of the rightful claim of any third person for infringement of any U.S. patent covering the product. THESE ARE THE ONLY WARRANTIES THAT PPG MAKES AND ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, UNDER STATUTE OR ARISING OTHERWISE IN LAW, FROM A COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY OTHER WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, ARE DISCLAIMED BY PPG. Any claim under this warranty must be made by Buyer to PPG in writing within ve (5) days of Buyers discovery of the claimed defect, but in no event later than the expiration of the applicable shelf life of the product, or one year from the date of the delivery of the product to the Buyer, whichever is earlier. Buyers failure to notify PPG of such non-conformance as required herein shall bar Buyer
284209 218766
PDS grey reddish grey
7701 5000001800 5010001800
page 5/5
SIGMAZINC 158
7 pages July 2013 Revision of May 2013
Description
two component moisture curing zinc (ethyl) silicate primer certicate for ASTM A-490 class 'B' for slip co-efcient complies with the compositional requirements of SSPC Paint 20, Level 2 anticorrosive primer for structural steel suitable as a system primer in various paint systems based on unsaponiable binders galvanic action eliminates sub lm corrosion can withstand substrate temperatures from -90C up to +400C, under normal atmospheric exposure conditions when suitably topcoated provides excellent corrosion protection for steel substrates up to +540C good low temperature curing good impact and abrasion resistance must not be exposed to alkaline (more than pH 9) or acidic (less than pH 5.5) liquids
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness
grey, greenish grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.3 g/cm 65 2% max. 219 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 507 g/l (approx. 4.2 lb/gal) average dft 75 m with a minimum of 60 m on smooth non pitted, blast cleaned steel average dft 100 m with a minimum of 75 m on rough or pitted, blast cleaned steel 8.7 m/l for 75 m * 30 minutes at 20C min. 12 hours * max. unlimited, zinc salts must be removed 12 hours *
page 1/7
SIGMAZINC 158
July 2013
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss, welds, rusty and damaged areas blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 weathered galvanised steel; blast cleaned to remove rust, to roughen the surface and to remove any zinc salts which might be present substrate temperatures from -5C up to +50C during application are acceptable substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point relative humidity during curing should be above 50% mixing ratio by volume: binder to zinc powder 81 : 19 Many of Sigma's zinc silicates are supplied as 2 pack materials consisting of a jerrycan with pigmented binder and a drum containing a bag of zinc powder. To ensure proper mixing of both components the instructions given below must be followed. To avoid lumps in the paint do not add the binder to the zinc powder. 1) Take the bag with zinc powder out of the drum. 2) Shake the binder in the jerrycan a few times to reach a certain degree of homogenisation. 3) Pour about 2/3 of the binder in the empty drum. 4) With the jerrycan now reduced in weight and containing more free space, shake it vigorously to obtain a homogeneous mix with no deposits left on the bottom, and add this to the drum. 5) Add the zinc powder gradually to the pigmented binder in the drum and at the same time continuously stir the mixture by using a mechanical mixer (keep the speed low). 6) Stir the zinc dust powder thoroughly through the binder (high speed) and keep stirring till, a homogeneous mixture is obtained. 7) Strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen. 8) Agitate continuously during application (low speed). The use of a dedicated pump with a constant agitation for a zinc silicate coating is recommended. Note: At application temperature above 30C addition of max 10% by volume of Thinner 90-53 may be necessary. none 12 hours at 20C *
page 2/7
SIGMAZINC 158
July 2013
only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 90-53 5 - 15% apply a visible wet coat with a max. dft of 25 m same for subsequent coats in order to obtain the required dft Thinner 90-53 only valid for spray application if the dft is below specication and an extra coat of SigmaZinc 158 has to be applied, SigmaZinc 158 should be thinned down with 25 - 50% Thinner 90-53, in order to obtain a visible wet coat that remains wet for some time highly pigmented zinc silicate primers produce dry lms with void spaces in between the particles Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 8.7 75 6.5 100 35 m
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 3/7
SIGMAZINC 158
July 2013
above 150 m dft mudcracking can occur Overcoating table (relative humidity during curing should be above 50%) substrate temperature minimum interval -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C
maximum interval unlimited, provided the surface is cleaned from contamination and zinc salts a relative humidity below 50% requires a much longer overcoating time if part of a coating system and in order to avoid possible popping effects (pinholes) SigmaZinc 158 should be sealed with approved coatings SigmaZinc 158 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water (from the atmosphere or immersion) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time before entering service or overcoating, a sufcient degree of cure should be obtained when curing conditions are unfavourable or when reduced overcoat times are desired, curing can be accelerated 4 hours after application by: wetting or soaking with water, keeping the surface wet for the next 2 hours, followed by drying wetting or soaking with a 0.5% ammonia solution, followed by drying before overcoating with topcoats, SigmaZinc 158 should always be visibly dry and checked on sufcient curing for measuring of the curing, the MEK rub test according to ASTM 4752 is a suitable method: after 50 double rubs with a cloth soaked in MEK (or alternatively Thinner 90-53) no dissolving of the coating should be observed
page 4/7
SIGMAZINC 158
July 2013
Curing
Curing table (relative humidity during curing should be above 50%) substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 2 hours 2 hours 1 hour 30 min. 30 min. 30 min. full cure 24 hours 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 6 hours 4 hours
SigmaZinc 158 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water, (from the atmosphere) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 0C 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 24 hours 16 hours 12 hours 6 hours
page 5/7
SIGMAZINC 158
July 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 6/7
SIGMAZINC 158
July 2013
179568
PDS greenish grey
7558 0000002185
page 7/7
SIGMAZINC 158KRA
5 pages March 2013 Revision of February 2013
Description
two component moisture curing zinc (alkyl) silicate primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS anticorrosive primer for structural steel suitable as a system primer in various paint systems based on unsaponiable binders galvanic action eliminates sub lm corrosion can withstand substrate temperatures from -90C up to +400C, under normal atmospheric exposure conditions good low temperature curing good impact and abrasion resistance certicate for ASTM A-490 class 'B' for slip co-efcient must not be exposed to alkaline (more than pH 9) or acidic (less than pH 5.5) liquids COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness metal grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.14 g/cm 65% 3% max. 525 g/l (approx. 4.4 lb/gal) when used as a system primer with dft 60 m on smooth non pitted, blast cleaned steel average dft 100 m with a minimum of 75 m on rough or pitted, blast cleaned steel 8.7 m/l for 75 m * 30 minutes at 20 C min. 24 hours max. unlimited, zinc salts must be removed
12 hours *
(data for components) binder: at least 9 months pigment: at least 24 months (store pigment moisture free)
for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 weathered galvanised steel; blast cleaned to remove rust, to roughen the surface and to remove any zinc salts which might be present substrate temperatures from -5C up to +50C during application are acceptable substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point
page 1/5
SIGMAZINC 158KRA
March 2013
mixing ratio by volume: binder to zinc powder 84.2 : 15.8 Add the zinc powder gradually to the pigmented binder in the drum and at the same time continuously stir the mixture by using a mechanical mixer . Stir the zinc dust powder thoroughly through the binder. do not mix in reverse order, in order to avoid lumps in the paint strain the mixture through a 30-60 mesh screen Agitate continuously during application At application temperature above 30C addition of max 10% by volume of Thinner 90-53 may be necessary. none 12 hours at 20 C *
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner
Thinner 90-53 0 - 10% 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 90-53 0 - 10% approx. 0.38 - 0.53 mm (= 0.015 - 0.021 in) approx. 112 bar (1624 psi) BRUSH: only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 90-53 rst coat not to be thinned down, max. dft 35 m next coat to be thinned down with Thinner 90-53 ( 10-25% by volume), so that a visible wet coat can be applied, max. dft 25 m
Thinner 90-53 if the dft is below specication and an extra coat of SigmaZinc 158KRA has to be applied, SigmaZinc 158KRA should be thinned down with approx. 50% Thinner 90-53, in order to obtain a visible wet coat that remains wet for some time
page 2/5
SIGMAZINC 158KRA
March 2013
ADDITIONAL DATA
highly pigmented zinc silicate primers produce dry lms with void spaces in between the particles Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 8.7 75 6.5 100
please note: over application may lead to mud-cracking Overcoating table (relative humidity during curing should be above 50%) substrate temperature minimum interval -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C
maximum interval unlimited, provided the surface is cleaned from contamination and zinc salts a relative humidity below 50% requires a much longer overcoating time if part of a coating system and in order to avoid possible popping effects (pinholes) SigmaZinc 158 KRAshould be sealed with approved coatings SigmaZinc 158KRA is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water (from the atmosphere or immersion) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time before entering service or overcoating, a sufcient degree of cure should be obtained when curing conditions are unfavourable or when reduced overcoat times are desired, curing can be accelerated 4 hours after application by: wetting or soaking with water, keeping the surface wet for the next 2 hours, followed by drying wetting or soaking with a 0.5% ammonia solution, followed by drying before overcoating with topcoats, SigmaZinc 158KRA should always be visibly dry and checked on sufcient curing for measuring of the curing, the MEK rub test according to ASTM 4752 is a suitable method: after 50 double rubs with a cloth soaked in MEK (or alternatively Thinner 90-53) no dissolving of the coating should be observed
page 3/5
SIGMAZINC 158KRA
March 2013
Curing
SigmaZinc 158KRA is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water, (from the atmosphere) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 24 hours 16 hours 12 hours 6 hours
It is always the aim of PPG Protective and Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis. However, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMAZINC 158KRA
March 2013
PDS
7558K
page 5/5
SIGMAZINC 160
Description
two component moisture curing inorganic zinc (ethyl) silicate primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS anticorrosive primer for structural steel two component product consisting of clear binder and zinc paste suitable as a system primer in various paint systems based on unsaponiable binders galvanic action eliminates sub lm corrosion can withstand substrate temperatures from -90C up to +400C, under normal atmospheric exposure conditions when suitably topcoated provides excellent corrosion protection for steel substrates up to +500C good low temperature curing good impact and abrasion resistance complies with SSPC-Paint 20 COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness greenish grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.3 g/cm 65% 2% max. 218 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 503 g/l (approx. 4.2 lb/gal) when used as a system primer with dft 60 m on smooth, non pitted, blast cleaned steel average dft 100 m with a minimum of 75 m on rough or pitted, blast cleaned steel 8.7 m/l for 75 m * 30 min. at 20 C min. 12 hours * max. unlimited, zinc salts must be removed
12 hours * (data for components)
at least 6 months
page 1/6
SIGMAZINC 160
April 2012
for water immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss, welds, rusty and damaged areas blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with aopproved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 weatherend galvanised steel; blast cleaned to remove rust, to roughen the surfase and to remove any zinc salts which might be presemt substrate temperatures from -5C up to +50C during application are acceptable substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point a relative humidity of > 50% is recommended mixing ratio by volume: paste to binder 64.5 : 35.5 use a mechanical mixer stir the paste thoroughly before adding the binder add the binder gradually to the paste stir thoroughly till homogeneous do not mix in reverse order strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen agitate continuously during application Agitate continuously during application (low speed). The use of a dedicated pump with a constant agitation for a zinc silicate coating is recommended. Note: At application temperature above 30C addition of max 10% by volume of Thinner 90-53 may be necessary. 12 hours at 20 C *
Pot life
Thinner 90-53 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 90-53 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.64 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2176 p.s.i.)
page 2/6
SIGMAZINC 160
April 2012
only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 90-53 5 - 15% apply a visible wet coat with a max. dft of 25 m same for subsequent coats in order to obtain the required dft Thinner 90-53 only valid for spray application if the dft is below specication and an extra coat of SigmaZinc 160 has to be applied, SigmaZinc 160 should be thinned down with 25 - 50% Thinner 90-53, in order to obtain a visible wet coat that remains wet for some time highly pigmented zinc silicate primers produce dry lms with void spaces in between the particles Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m/l dft in m 10.8 60 8.7 75 6.5 100 5.2 125
CLEANING SOLVENT upgrading
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table (relative humidity during curing should be above 50%) substrate temperature minimum interval -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C
Max recoat unlimited, provided the surface is cleaned from maximum interval contamination and zinc salts a relative humidity below 50% requires a much longer overcoating time before entering service or overcoating, a sufcient degree of cure should be obtained before overcoating with topcoats, SigmaZinc 160 should always be visibly dry and checked on sufcient curing if part of a coating system and in order to avoid possible popping effects (pinholes) SigmaZinc 160 should be sealed with approved coatings when curing conditions are unfavourable or when reduced overcoat times are desired, curing can be accelerated 4 hours after application by: wetting or soaking with water, keeping the surface wet for the next 2 hours, followed by drying wetting or soaking with a 0.5% ammonia solution, followed by drying for measuring of the curing, the MEK rub test according to ASTM 4752 is a suitable method: after 50 double rubs with a cloth soaked in MEK (or alternatively Thinner 90-53) no dissolving of the coating should be observed
page 3/6
SIGMAZINC 160
April 2012
Curing
SigmaZinc 160 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water (from the atmosphere) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time relative humidity during curing recommended to be above 50% adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 24 hours 16 hours 12 hours 6 hours
page 4/6
SIGMAZINC 160
April 2012
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 5/6
SIGMAZINC 160
April 2012
179322
PDS greenish grey
7560 0000002180
page 6/6
SIGMAZINC 9 (SigmaZinc170)
7 pages October 2012 Revision of September 2011
Description
two component moisture curing zinc (ethyl) silicate coating anticorrosive primer for structural steel high zinc content resulting in excellent corrosion protection complies with SSPC-Paint 20 suitable as a system primer in various paint systems based on unsaponiable binders galvanic action eliminates sub lm corrosion good low temperature curing good impact and abrasion resistance must not be exposed to alkaline (more than pH 9) or acidic (less than pH 5.5) liquids
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness
grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.4 g/cm 65% 2% max. 221 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 480 g/l (approx. 4.0 lb/gal) average dft 75 m with a minimum of 60 m on smooth non pitted, blast cleaned steel average dft 100 m with a minimum of 75 m on rough or pitted, blast cleaned steel 8.7 m/l for 75 m * 15 min. at 20 C * min. 16 hours * max. unlimited, zinc salts must be removed 32 hours * at 20 C
page 1/7
October 2012
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss, welds, rusty and damaged areas blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 weatherend galvanised steel; blast cleaned to remove rust, to roughen the surfase and to remove any zinc salts which might be presemt substrate temperatures from -5C up to +50C during application are acceptable substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point relative humidity should be above 50%
mixing ratio by volume: binder to zinc powder 78 : 22 Many of Sigma's zinc silicates are supplied as 2 pack materials consisting of a jerrycan with pigmented binder and a drum containing a bag of zinc powder. To ensure proper mixing of both components the instructions given below must be followed. To avoid lumps in the paint do not add the binder to the zinc powder. 1) Take the bag with zinc powder out of the drum. 2.) Shake the binder in the jerrycan a few times to reach a certain degree of homogenisation. 3.) Pour about 2/3 of the binder in the empty drum. 4.) With the jerrycan now reduced in weight and containing more free space, shake it vigorously to obtain a homogeneous mix with no deposits left on the bottom, and add this to the drum. 5.) Add the zinc powder gradually to the pigmented binder in the drum and at the same time continuously stir the mixture by using a mechanical mixer (keep the speed low). 6.) Stir the zinc dust powder thoroughly through the binder (high speed) and keep stirring till, a homogeneous mixture is obtained. 7.) Strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen. 8.) Agitate continuously during application (low speed). 9.) The use of a dedicated pump with a constant agitation for a zinc silicate coating is recommended. Note: At application temperature above 30C addition of max 10% by volume of Thinner 90-53 may be necessary. none 8 hours at 20 C *
page 2/7
October 2012
only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 90-53 5 - 15% apply a visible wet coat with a max. dft of 25 m same for subsequent coats in order to obtain the required dft Thinner 90-53 only valid for spray application if the dft is below specication and an extra coat of SigmaZinc 9 has to be applied, SigmaZinc 9 should be thinned down with 25 - 50% Thinner 90-53, in order to obtain a visible wet coat that remains wet for some time highly pigmented zinc silicate primers produce dry lms with void spaces in between the particles Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m2/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing:
above 150 m mudcracking can occur
CLEANING SOLVENT upgrading
ADDITIONAL DATA
8.7 75 35 m
6.5 100
5.2 125
page 3/7
October 2012
Overcoating table (relative humidity during curing should be minimum 50%) substrate temperature minimum interval -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C * 40C
maximum interval unlimited, provided the surface is cleaned from contamination and zinc salts Overcoating table (relative humidity during curing should be above 70%) substrate temperature minimum interval -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C
maximum interval unlimited, provided the surface is cleaned from contamination and zinc salts a relative humidity below 50% requires a much longer overcoating time if part of a coating system and in order to avoid possible popping effects (pinholes) SigmaZinc 9 should be sealed with approved coatings SigmaZinc 9 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water from the atmosphere during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time before entering service or overcoating, a sufcient degree of cure should be obtained when curing conditions are unfavourable or when reduced overcoat times are desired, curing can be accelerated 4 hours after application by: wetting or soaking with water, keeping the surface wet for the next 2 hours, followed by drying wetting or soaking with a 0.5% ammonia solution, followed by drying before overcoating with topcoats, SigmaZinc 9 should always be visibly dry and checked on sufcient curing for measuring of the curing, the MEK rub test according to ASTM 4752 is a suitable method: after 50 double rubs with a cloth soaked in MEK (or alternatively Thinner 90-53) no dissolving of the coating should be observed
page 4/7
October 2012
Curing
SigmaZinc 9 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water from the atmosphere during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time relative humidity during curing recommended to be above 50% adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets {1433} and {1434}) Pot life (at application viscosity) 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C Worldwide availability 16 hours 12 hours 8 hours 4 hours
page 5/7
October 2012
REFERENCES
see information sheet {1410} see information sheet {1411} see information sheet {1430} see information sheet {1431} see information sheet {1433} see information sheet {1434} see information sheet {1490} see information sheet {1491} see information sheet {1650}
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 6/7
October 2012
PDS
7570
page 7/7
SIGMAZINC 9FD
5 pages January 2013 Revision of April 2012
Description
two component moisture curing zinc (ethyl) silicate coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS A heavy duty primer that protects with just a single coat Outstanding application characteristics over a wide range of atmospheric conditions with fast curing Can be applied by airless or conventional spray High-metallic zinc content provides long-term corrosion protection that reduces maintenance costs COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20 C Mass density Volume solids VOC (UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Shelf life (cool and dry place) grey at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.58 g/cm 62% 2% max. 567 g/l 65 m per coat 9.5 m/l for 65 m * 30 min. at 20 C * binder: at least 6 months powder: at least 12 months
mixing ratio by volume: binder to zinc powder 74 : 26 Many of Sigma's zinc silicates are supplied as 2 pack materials consisting of a jerrycan with pigmented binder and a drum containing a bag of zinc powder. To ensure proper mixing of both components the instructions given below must be followed. To avoid lumps in the paint do not add the binder to the zinc powder. Take the bag with zinc powder out of the drum. Shake the binder in the jerrycan a few times to reach a certain degree of homogenisation. Pour about 2/3 of the binder in the empty drum. With the jerrycan now reduced in weight and containing more free space, shake it vigorously to obtain a homogeneous mix with no deposits left on the bottom, and add this to the drum. Add the zinc powder gradually to the pigmented binder in the drum and at the same time continuously stir the mixture by using a mechanical mixer (keep the speed low). Stir the zinc dust powder thoroughly through the binder (high speed) and keep stirring till, a homogeneous mixture is obtained. Strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen.
page 1/5
SIGMAZINC 9FD
January 2013
Agitate continuously during application (low speed). The use of a dedicated pump with a constant agitation for a zinc silicate coating is recommended. Note: At application temperature above 30C addition of max 10% by volume of Thinner 90-53 may be necessary. Induction time Pot life none 8 hours at 20 C *
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
Thinner 40-25 or Thinner 90-53 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 44 p.s.i.) Thinner 40-25 or Thinner 90-53 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.64 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 9 - 12 MPa (= approx. 90 - 120 bar; 1305 - 1740 p.s.i.) Thinner 90-53 or Thinner 90-58 highly pigmented zinc silicate primers produce dry lms with void spaces in between the particles Film thickness and spreading rate theoritical spreading rate m/l dft in m 8.7 75 6.5 100 5.2 125
page 2/5
SIGMAZINC 9FD
January 2013
Overcoating table (relative humidity during curing should be minimum 50%) substrate temperature minimum interval -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C * 40C
maximum interval unlimited, provided the surface is cleaned from contamination ,zinc salts and not to be covered by itselff a relative humidity below 50% requires a much longer overcoating time if part of a coating system and in order to avoid possible popping effects (pinholes) SigmaZinc 9 should be sealed with approved coatings SigmaZinc 9FD is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water from the atmosphere during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing tim before entering service or overcoating, a sufcient degree of cure should be obtained when curing conditions are unfavourable or when reduced overcoat times are desired, curing can be accelerated 4 hours after application by: wetting or soaking with water, keeping the surface wet for the next 2 hours, followed by drying wetting or soaking with a 0.5% ammonia solution, followed by drying before overcoating with topcoats, SigmaZinc 9FD should always be visibly dry and checked on sufcient curing for measuring of the curing, the MEK rub test according to ASTM 4752 is a suitable method: after 50 double rubs with a cloth soaked in MEK (or alternatively Thinner 90-53) no dissolving of the coating should be observed
page 3/5
SIGMAZINC 9FD
January 2013
Curing
SigmaZinc 9FD is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water from the atmosphere during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time relative humidity during curing recommended to be above 50% adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C REFERENCES 16 hours 12 hours 8 hours 4 hours see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1650
Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 4/5
SIGMAZINC 9FD
January 2013
PDS
7578
page 5/5
PASSIVE FIRE PROTECTION

PROTECTION OF STEEL FROM CELLULOSIC FIRES
STEELGUARD 551
Description
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 60 minutes protection from cellulosic res off-site or on-site application up to 1500 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested and assessed to BS 476-20/21 and certied with various national requirements white matt (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.35 g/cm 75% 3% max. 257 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 330 g/l (UK PG6/23/(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1500 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.07 m/l for 700 m * 30 minutes * min. 6 hours with itself * min. 48 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
approved primer, dry, sound and free from contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during application and drying should not be applied under 5C and above 40C relative humidity during application must be lower than 85% stir thoroughly till homogeneous and free of lumps too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance
page 1/4

STEELGUARD 551
February 2013
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle angle Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT ADDITIONAL DATA
when needed up to 5% Thinner 21-06 may be used 20 - 50, depending on shape of steel parts approx. 0.48 - 0.53 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2901 p.s.i.)
note a 30 mesh / 500 m internal lter is recommended
for small areas only (touch up and repair) no thinner should be added Thinner 21-06 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: Overcoating table for Steelguard 551 for dft up to 700 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 6 hours 30C 4 hours 3.75 200 1.88 400 1.07 700 0.75 1000 300 m
with itself
Overcoating table for Steelguard 551 for dft up to 1000 m substrate temperature with Steelguard 2458 minimum interval maximum interval 5C 4 hours 10C 2 hours 15C 90 min. 20C 60 min. 30C 45 min.
Overcoating table for Steelguard 551 for dft up to 1000 m. substrate temperature with other approved top coats minimum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C
120 hours 72 hours 60 hours 48 hours 36 hours unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited
page 2/4

STEELGUARD 551
February 2013
Curing
Drying table for dft up to 700 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 120 min. 90 min. 60 min. 30 min. 20 min.
drying times may vary considerable depending on ambient conditions, A/V -1(Hp/A) of section and applied lm thickness
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4

STEELGUARD 551
February 2013
287680
PDS white
7761 3000AM2200
page 4/4

STEELGUARD 552
Description
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 60 minutes protection from cellulosic res 60 minutes SCI assesment of beams with circular web openings off-site or on-site application up to 1500 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested and assessed to international and national standards such as ENV 13381-4 and BS 476-20/21 and certied with various national requirements white matt (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.35 g/cm 75% 3% max. 257 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 330 g/l (UK PG6/23/(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1500 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.07 m/l for 700 m * 30 minutes * min. 6 hours with itself * min. 48 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
page 1/4

STEELGUARD 552
February 2013
for small areas only (touch up and repair) no thinner should be added Thinner 21-06 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: Overcoating table for Steelguard 552 for dft up to 700 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 6 hours 30C 4 hours 3.75 200 1.88 400 1.07 700 0.75 1000 0.50 1500 300 m
with itself
page 2/4

STEELGUARD 552
February 2013
Curing
drying times may vary considerable depending on ambient conditions, A/V m-1(Hp/A) of section and applied lm thickness
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4

STEELGUARD 552
February 2013
299480
PDS white
7762 3000AM2200
page 4/4

STEELGUARD 553
Description
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides 90 minutes protection from cellulosic res off-site or on-site application up to 1500 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested and assessed to international and national standards such as ENV 13381-4 and BS 476-20/21 and certied with various national requirements white matt (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.35 g/cm 75% 3% max. 257 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 330 g/l (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1500 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.07 m/l for 700 m * 30 min. * min. 6 hours with itself * min. 48 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
page 1/4

STEELGUARD 553
February 2013
when needed up to 5% Thinner 21-06 may be used 20 - 50, depending on shape of steel parts approx. 0.48 - 0.63 mm (=0.019 - 0.025 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2901 p.s.i.)
with itself
page 2/4

STEELGUARD 553
February 2013
Curing
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4

STEELGUARD 553
February 2013
299481
PDS white
7763 3000AM2200
page 4/4

STEELGUARD 554
Description
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides 120 minutes protection from cellulosic res off-site or on-site application up to 1500 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested and assessed to international and national standards such as ENV 13381-4 and BS 476-20/21 and certied with various national requirements white matt (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.35 g/cm 75% 3% max. 257 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 330 g/l (UK PG6/23/(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1500 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.07 m/l for 700 m * 30 minutes * min. 6 hours with itself * min. 48 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
page 1/4

STEELGUARD 554
February 2013
with itself
page 2/4

STEELGUARD 554
February 2013
Curing
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4

STEELGUARD 554
February 2013
299482
PDS white
7764 3000AM2200
page 4/4

STEELGUARD 561
4 pages February 2013 Revision of December 2010
Description
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 120 minutes protection from cellulosic res fast drying, providing short handling times off-site or on-site application up to 1000 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested and assessed to international and national standards such as BS 476-20/21, GOST, NT Fire021 and NEN and certied with various national requirements white matt (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.35 g/cm 75% 3% max. 255 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 327 g/l (UK PG6/23/(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1000 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.07 m/l for 700 m * 20 minutes * min. 4 hours with itself * min. 24 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
page 1/4

STEELGUARD 561
February 2013
for small areas only (touch up and repair) no thinner should be added Thinner 21-06 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: Overcoating table for Steelguard 561 for dft up to 700 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 6 hours 20C 4 hours 30C 3 hours 3.75 200 1.88 400 1.50 500 1.07 700 0.75 1000 300 m
with itself
10 hours 8 hours
Overcoating table for Steelguard 561 for dft up to 1000 m substrate temperature with Steelguard 2458 minimum interval maximum interval 5C 2 hours 10C 1.5 hour 15C 1 hour 20C 30 min. 30C 20 min.
page 2/4

STEELGUARD 561
February 2013
Curing
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4

STEELGUARD 561
February 2013
287680
PDS white
7765 3000AM2200
page 4/4

STEELGUARD 562
Description
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 60 minutes protection from cellulosic res 60 minutes SCI assesment of beams with circular web openings fast drying, providing short handling times off-site or on-site application up to 1000 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested and assessed to international and national standards such as ENV 13381-4 and BS 476-20/21 and certied with various national requirements white matt (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.35 g/cm 75% 3% max. 255 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 327 g/l (UK PG6/23/(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1000 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.07 m/l for 700 m * 20 minutes * min. 4 hours with itself * min. 24 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
page 1/4

STEELGUARD 562
February 2013
note: a 30 mesh / 500 m internal lter is recommended
for small areas only (touch up and repair) no thinner should be added Thinner 21-06 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: 3.75 200 1.88 400 300 m 1.50 500 1.07 700 0.75 1000
Overcoating table for Steelguard 562 for dft up to 700 m substrate temperature with itself minimum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 15C 6 hours 20C 4 hours 30C 3 hours
10 hours 8 hours
page 2/4

STEELGUARD 562
February 2013
Curing
REFERENCES
Conversion tabels Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications explosion hazard- toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4

STEELGUARD 562
February 2013
PDS white
7766 3000AM2200
page 4/4

STEELGUARD 563
4 pages February 2013 Revision of April 2010
Description
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides 90 minutes protection from cellulosic res fast drying, providing short handling times off-site or on-site application up to 1000 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested and assessed to international and national standards such as ENV 13381-4 and BS 476-20/21 and certied with various national requirements white matt (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.35 g/cm 75% 3% max. 255 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 327 g/l (UK PG6/23/(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1000 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.07 m/l for 700 m * 20 minutes * min. 4 hours with itself * min. 24 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
page 1/4

STEELGUARD 563
February 2013
with itself
10 hours 8 hours
page 2/4

STEELGUARD 563
February 2013
Curing
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4

STEELGUARD 563
February 2013
PDS white
7767 3000AM2200
page 4/4

STEELGUARD 564
4 pages February 2013 Revision of April 2011
Description
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides 120 minutes protection from cellulosic res fast drying, providing short handling times off-site or on-site application up to 1000 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested and assessed to international and national standards such as ENV 13381-4 and BS 476-20/21 and certied with various national requirements white matt (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.35 g/cm 75% 3% max. 255 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 327 g/l (UK PG6/23/(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1000 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.07 m/l for 700 m * 20 minutes * min. 4 hours with itself * min. 24 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
page 1/4

STEELGUARD 564
February 2013
with itself
10 hours 8 hours
page 2/4

STEELGUARD 564
February 2013
Curing
drying times may vary considerable depending on ambient conditions, A/V m-1 (Hp/A) of section and applied lm thickness
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4

STEELGUARD 564
February 2013
PDS white
7768 3000AM2200
page 4/4

STEELGUARD 581
Description
one component thin-lm water borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 90 minutes protection from cellulosic res 60 minutes SCI assesment of beams with circular web openings on-site application up to 700 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 and C2 internal environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required tested and assessed to BS 476-20/21 and certied with various national requirements
white matt (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.43 g/cm 70% 3% max. 20 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 30 g/l (UK PG6/23/(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 700 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.0 m/l for 700 m * 2 hours * min. 16 hours with itself * min. 18 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 6 months
approved primer, dry, sound and free from contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during application and drying should not be applied under 10C and above 40C relative humidity during application and drying must be lower than 80% stir thoroughly till homogeneous and free of lumps too much water results in reduced sag resistance must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport
page 1/4

STEELGUARD 581
February 2013
when needed up to 5% tap water may be used 20 - 50, depending on shape of steel parts approx. 0.43 - 0.53 mm (=0.017 - 0.021 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2901 p.s.i.)
for small areas only (touch up and repair) no thinner should be added tap water Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: Overcoating table for Steelguard 581 for dft up to 700 m substrate temperature 10C 24 hours unlimited 24 hours unlimited 15C 20 hours unlimited 20 hours unlimited 20C 16 hours unlimited 18 hours unlimited 30C 12 hours unlimited 14 hours unlimited 3.5 200 1.75 400 1.4 500 1 700 300 m
with itself with approved top coats
minimum interval maximum interval minimum interval maximum interval
Note: the water content of SteelGuard 581 shall not exceed 4% prior to overcoating
Curing
Drying table for dft up to 700 m substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
page 2/4

STEELGUARD 581
February 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4

STEELGUARD 581
February 2013
291802
PDS white
7769 3000AM2200
page 4/4

STEELGUARD FM 549
Description
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 120 minutes protection from cellulosic res off-site or on-site application up to 1500 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 and C2 internal environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required tested and assessed to international and national standards such as BS 476-20/21, AS1530:4 and certied with various national requirements white matt (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 68% 3% max. 293 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 325 g/l (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1500 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 0.97 m/l for 700 m * 30 minutes * min. 6 hours with itself * min. 48 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
page 1/4

STEELGUARD FM 549
February 2013
for small areas only (touch up and repair) no thinner should be added Thinner 21-06 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 549 for dft up to 700 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 6 hours 30C 4 hours 3.40 200 1.70 400 0.97 700 0.68 1000 0.45 1500 300 m
with itself
Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 549 for dft up to 1000 m substrate temperature with Steelguard 2458 minimum interval maximum interval 5C 4 hours 10C 2 hours 15C 90 min. 20C 60 min. 30C 45 min.
Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 549 for dft up to 1000 m. substrate temperature with other approved top coats minimum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C
page 2/4

STEELGUARD FM 549
February 2013
Curing
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4

STEELGUARD FM 549
February 2013
287671
PDS white
7731 3000AM2200
page 4/4

STEELGUARD FM 550
Description
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 120 minutes protection from cellulosic res off-site or on-site application up to 1500 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested and assessed to international and national standards such as BS 476-20/21, UL 263, AS 1530:4, GB 14907 and certied with various national requirements
white matt (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 68% 3% max. 293 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 325 g/l (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1500 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 0.97 m/l for 700 m * 30 min. * min. 6 hours with itself * min. 48 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
page 1/4

STEELGUARD FM 550
February 2013
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle angle Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
Notes;- all lters including surge bottle and gun lters to be removed - a 30 mesh / 500 m internal lter is recommended
for small areas only (touch up and repair) no thinner should be added Thinner 21-06 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 550 for dft up to 700 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 6 hours 30C 4 hours 3.40 200 1.70 400 0.97 700 0.68 1000 300 m
with itself
Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 550 for dft up to 1000 m substrate temperature with Steelguard 2458 minimum interval maximum interval 5C 4 hours 10C 2 hours 15C 90 min. 20C 60 min. 30C 45 min.
page 2/4

STEELGUARD FM 550
February 2013
Curing
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4

STEELGUARD FM 550
February 2013
287673
PDS white
7732 3000AM2200
page 4/4

STEELGUARD FM 560
Description
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 120 minutes protection from cellulosic res fast drying, providing short handling times off-site or on-site application up to 1000 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested and assessed to international and national standards such as BS 476-20/21, AS 1530:4 and certied with various national requirements
white, grey matt (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 68% 3% max. 294 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 325 g/l (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1000 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 0.97 m/l for 700 m * 20 min. * min. 4 hours with itself * min. 24 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
page 1/4

STEELGUARD FM 560
February 2013
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle angle Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
for small areas only (touch up and repair) no thinner should be added Thinner 90-58 Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 560 for dft up to 700 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 6 hours 20C 4 hours 30C 3 hours 3.40 200 1.70 400 1.36 500 0.97 700 300 m
with itself
10 hours 8 hours
Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 560 for dft up to 1000 m substrate temperature with Steelguard 2458 minimum interval maximum interval 5C 120 min. 10C 90 min. 15C 60 min. 20C 30 min. 30C 20 min.
page 2/4

STEELGUARD FM 560
February 2013
Curing
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4

STEELGUARD FM 560
February 2013
289363
PDS white
7733 3000AM2200
page 4/4

STEELGUARD FM 585
Description
one component thin-lm water borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 90 minutes protection from cellulosic res on-site application up to 700 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 and C2 internal environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required tested and assessed to international and national standards such as ENV 13381-4, BS 476-20/21 and NT Fire 021 and certied with various national requirements
white matt (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.43 g/cm 70% 3% max. 20 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 30 g/l (UK PG 6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 700 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.0 m/l for 700 m * 2 hours * min. 16 hours with itself * min. 18 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 6 months
approved primer, dry, sound and free from contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during application and drying should not be applied under 10C and above 40C relative humidity during application and drying must be lower than 80% stir thoroughly till homogeneous and free of lumps too much water results in reduced sag resistance must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport
page 1/4

STEELGUARD FM 585
February 2013
when needed up to 5% tap water may be used 20 - 50, depending on shape of steel parts approx. 0.43 - 0.53 mm (=0.017 - 0.021 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2901 p.s.i.)
for small areas only (touch up and repair) no thinner should be added tap water Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Maximum dft when brushing: Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 585 for dft up to 700 m substrate temperature 10C 24 hours 24 hours unlimited 15C 20 hours 20 hours unlimited 20C 16 hours 18 hours unlimited 30C 12 hours 14 hours unlimited 3.50 200 1.75 400 1.40 500 1.00 700 300 m
with itself with approved top coats
minimum interval minimum interval maximum interval
Note: the water content of SteelGuard FM 585 shall not exceed 4% prior to overcoating
Curing
Drying table for dft up to 700 m substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
page 2/4

STEELGUARD FM 585
February 2013
REFERENCES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 3/4

STEELGUARD FM 585
February 2013
289315
PDS white
7735 3000AM2200
page 4/4
STEEL PROTECTION Internal dry exposure Alkyd paint system

a two page issue EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of suitable for pretreatment Inside buildings with neutral atmosphere. Relative humidity below 60%.
SYSTEM
4010
September 2005 revision of October 2004
alkyd maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, and dispersion paint chlorinated rubber, vinyl, bitumen, and epoxy tar paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium intact areas, to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; galvanised steel and aluminium; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering and primed with Sigmarine 24 in a dft of 35 m/1.4 mils steel; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. SPSS-Pt2 and primed with Sigmarine 24 in a dft of 35 m/1.4 mils Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 49 35 m/1.4 mils 35 m/1.4 mils
paint system note
if a semigloss finish is required, Sigmarine 49 can be replaced by Sigmarine 41
SPECIFICATION 2: pretreatment
alkyd system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. SPSS-Pt2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 49 50 m/2.0 mils 35 m/1.4 mils
paint system note
SPECIFICATION 3: pretreatment paint system
fast drying alkyd new construction system steel; derusted to ISO-St3 - SPSS - Pt2 SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 40 60 m/2.4 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal dry exposure Alkyd paint system
SYSTEM
4010
September 2005
REFERENCES SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 40 Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 41 Sigmarine 49 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7155 see product data sheet 7234 see product data sheet 7135 see product data sheet 7240 see product data sheet 7256 see product data sheet 7213 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
Limitation of Liability - The information in this data sheet is based upon laboratory tests we believe to be accurate and is
intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the products made by Sigma Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use. Sigma Coatings has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. Sigma Coatings does therefore not accept any liability arising from loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). The data contained herein are liable to modification as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. This data sheet replaces and annuls all previous issues and it is therefore the users responsibility to ensure that this sheet is current prior to using the product.
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal dry exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4011
EXPOSURE CONDITIONS:
Inside buildings with neutral atmosphere Relative humidity below 60%. recoatable epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber, vinyl and dispersion paint bitumen and epoxy tar paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium intact areas, to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; galvanised steel and aluminium; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering and primed with SigmaCover 256 in a dft of 50 m/2 mils steel; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 256 in a dft of 50 m/2 mils SigmaDur 550 50 m/2.0 mils
SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of suitable for pretreatment
paint system note
if a semigloss finish is required, SigmaDur 550 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520 or SigmaDur 580
recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. SPSS-Pt2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering SigmaCover 256 SigmaDur 550 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system note
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal dry exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system
SYSTEM
4011
September 2005
epoxy polyurethane system for new construction especially suitable for inshop application steel; derusted to ISO-St3 or SPSS-Pt2 galvanised steel: free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering SigmaFast 205 SigmaDur 550 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system note
REFERENCES SigmaCover 256 SigmaDur 520 SigmaDur 550 SigmaDur 580 SigmaFast 205 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7412 see product data sheet 7524 see product data sheet 7537 see product data sheet 7530 see product data sheet 7802 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal dry exposure Acrylic dispersion system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4012
June 2004 revision of 7-2003
Inside buildings with neutral atmosphere. Relative humidity below 60%. Complies with ISO 12944, Part 2, corrosivity category C1. acrylic dispersion maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber, vinyl, dispersion and epoxy tar paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium intact areas, to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; galvanised steel and aluminium; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering and primed with Sigma Aquacover 22 in a dft of 50 m/2 mils steel; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 and primed with Sigma Aquacover 20 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils Sigma Aquacover 40 50 m/2.0 mils
SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with suitable for pretreatment
paint system note
acrylic dispersion paints require adequate ventilation to obtain sufficient drying conditions
acrylic dispersion system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 40 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system note
acrylic dispersion paints require adequate ventilation to obtain sufficient drying conditions on galvanised steel or aluminium Sigma Aquacover 22 should be used instead of Sigma Aquacover 20
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal dry exposure Acrylic dispersion system
SYSTEM
4012
July 2003
SPECIFICATION 3: pretreatment paint system note
acrylic dispersion system for new construction derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 40 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
REFERENCES Sigma Aquacover 22 Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 40 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7145 see product data sheet 7149 see product data sheet 7251 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
SYSTEM
INTERNAL DRY EXPOSURE WATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM

a one page issue
4016
Inside buildings with neutral atmosphere. Relative humidity below 60%. Complies with ISO 12944, part 2, corrosivity category C1. waterborne epoxy system, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 galvanised steel and aluminium; degreased and roughened by suitable means (e.g. sand papering) Sigma Aquacover 400 low should preferably be carried out according to this specification 75 m/3.0 mils
SPECIFICATION 1 pretreatment
coating system expected durability (ISO-12944 part 5) maintenance REFERENCES
Sigma Aquacover 400 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specification for mineral abrasives
see product data sheet 7871 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
page 1/1
STEEL PROTECTION Internal wet exposure Alkyd paint system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4020
Inside buildings where condensation may occur. Atmospheres with low pollution and dry climate. RH up to 80%. alkyd maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane and dispersion paint chlorinated rubber, vinyl, bitumen and epoxy tar paint galvanised steel and aluminium intact areas; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering damaged and rusty areas; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. SPSS-Pt2 and primed with Sigmarine 24 in a dft of 50 m/2 mils Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 49 35 m/1.4 mils 35 m/1.4 mils
SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of not suitable for pretreatment
paint system note
SPECIFICATION 2: not suitable for pretreatment paint system
alkyd system for a total repair or new construction galvanised steel and aluminium complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 49 50 m/2.0 mils 35 m/1.4 mils 35 m/1.4 mils
note
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal wet exposure Alkyd paint system
SYSTEM
4020
September 2005
fast drying alkyd new construction system steel derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 40 60 m/2.4 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
REFERENCES SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 40 Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 41 Sigmarine 49 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7155 see product data sheet 7234 see product data sheet 7135 see product data sheet 7213 see product data sheet 7256 see product data sheet 7240 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal wet exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4021
Inside buildings where condensation may occur Atmospheres with low pollution and dry climate. RH up to 80%. recoatable epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber, vinyl and dispersion paint bitumen and epoxy tar paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium intact areas, to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; galvanised steel and aluminium; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 60 m/2.4 mils steel; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 256 in a dft of 60 m/2.4 mils SigmaCover 456 SigmaDur 550 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system note
if a semigloss finish is required, SigmaDur 550 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520
SPECIFICATION 2: suitable for pretreatment
recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for a total repair, or new construction steel, galvanised steel and aluminium complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 456 SigmaDur 550 60 m/2.4 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system
note
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal wet exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system
SYSTEM
4021
September 2005
epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction especially suitable for in-shop application steel; derusted to ISO Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 SigmaFast 205 SigmaDur 550 100 m/4.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
REFERENCES SigmaCover 256 SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 456 SigmaDur 520 SigmaDur 550 SigmaFast 205 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management
see product data sheet 7412 see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7466 see product data sheet 7524 see product data sheet 7537 see product data sheet 7802 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal wet exposure Acrylic dispersion system

a two page issue EXPOSURE CONDITIONS:
SYSTEM
4022
Inside buildings where condensation may occur. Atmospheres with low pollution and dry climate. RH up to 80%. acrylic dispersion maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber, vinyl, dispersion and epoxy tar paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium intact areas, to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; galvanised steel and aluminium; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering and primed with Sigma Aquacover 22 in a dft of 50 m/2 mils steel; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 and primed with Sigm Aquacover 20 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils Sigma Aquacover 40 Sigma Aquacover 40 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with suitable for pretreatment
paint system note
acrylic dispersion paints require adequate ventilation to obtain sufficient drying conditions
acrylic dispersion system for a total repair or new construction steel, galvanised steel and aluminium complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 40 Sigma Aquacover 40 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system
note
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal wet exposure Acrylic dispersion system
SYSTEM
4022
June 2004
acrylic dispersion system for new construction steel; derusted to ISO Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 40 Sigma Aquacover 40 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
REFERENCES Sigma Aquacover 22 Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 40 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7145 see product data sheet 7149 see product data sheet 7251 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal wet exposure High solids epoxy/polyurethane system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4024
October 2004 revision of 7-2003
Inside buildings where condensation may occur. Atmospheres with low pollution and dry climate. RH up to 80%. surface tolerant high solids epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination damaged and corroded areas; steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 630 in a dft of 60 m/2.4 mils galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened,dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 60 m/2.4 mils SigmaCover 630 SigmaDur 580 60 m/2.4 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system
surface tolerant high solids epoxy/polyurethane system for total repair or new construction steel, galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering or sweep blasting SigmaCover 630 SigmaDur 580 100 m/4.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system notes
a galvanised steel or aluminium substrate should be primed with SigmaCover 280 instead of SigmaCover 630
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal wet exposure High solids epoxy/polyurethane system
SYSTEM
4024
October 2004
high solids epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction steel; derusted to ISO Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 SigmaCover 805 SigmaDur 580 125 m/5.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
REFERENCES SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 630 SigmaCover 805 SigmaDur 580 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7430 see product data sheet 7726 see product data sheet 7530 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
SYSTEM
INTERNAL WET EXPOSURE WATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM

a one page issue
4026
June 2004 Revision 12-2003
Inside buildings where condensation may occur. Atmospheres with low pollution and dry climate. RH up to 80%. Complies with ISO 12944, part 2, corrosivity category C2. waterborne epoxy system, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 galvanised steel and aluminium; degreased and roughened by suitable means (e.g. sand papering) Sigma aquacover 400 medium should preferably be carried out according to this specification 100 m/4.0 mils
SPECIFICATION 1 pretreatment
coating system expected durability (ISO-12944 part 5) maintenance REFERENCES
Sigma aquacover 400 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specification for mineral abrasives
see product data sheet 7871 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
page 1/1
STEEL PROTECTION Rural atmospheric exposure Alkyd paint system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4030
This environment usually covers areas away from the coast and separate from industrial or urban activity. Corrosive attack is governed mostly by humidity, rainfall and ultraviolet radiation, but is normally less aggressive than an industrial or coastal environment. Average sulphur dioxide contents is lower than 10 g per m air. Salt content in rain water is lower than 12 mg per litre rain. alkyd maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber, vinyl, bitumen and epoxy tar paint galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination intact areas; to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with Sigmarine 24 in a dft of 50 m/2 mils Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 49 35 m/1.4 mils 35 m/1.4 mils
paint system note
if a semigloss finish is required Sigmarine 49 can be replaced by Sigmarine 41
alkyd system for a total repair or new construction galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to min.ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 49 50 m/2.0 mils 35 m/1.4 mils 35 m/1.4 mils
note
if a semigloss finish is required Sigmarine 49 can be replaced by Sigmarine 41
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Rural atmospheric exposure Alkyd paint system
SYSTEM
4030
September 2005
fast drying alkyd new construction system steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 40 60 m/2.4 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 40 Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 41 Sigmarine 49 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7155 see product data sheet 7234 see product data sheet 7135 see product data sheet 7213 see product data sheet 7256 see product data sheet 7240 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Rural atmospheric exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4031
This environment usually covers areas away from the coast and separate from industrial or urban activity. Corrosive attack is governed mostly by humidity, rainfall and ultraviolet radiation, but is normally less aggressive than an industrial or coastal environment. Average sulphur dioxide contents is lower than 10 g per m air. Salt content in rain water is lower than 12 mg per litre rain. recoatable epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, chlorinated rubber, vinyl and polyurethane paint bitumen and epoxy tar paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination intact areas; to be roughened damaged and corroded areas; steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 630 in a dft of75 m/3.0 mils galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened, dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 m/3.0 mils SigmaCover 456 SigmaDur 550 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system note
recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for a total repair or new construction steel, galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering SigmaCover 630 (aluminium) SigmaCover 456 SigmaDur 550 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system
Notes
if a semigloss finish is required, SigmaDur 550 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520 a galvanised steel or aluminium substrate should be primed with SigmaCover 280 instead of SigmaCover 630
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Rural atmospheric exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system
SYSTEM
4031
September 2005
SPECIFICATION 3: pretreatment paint system Notes
recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 SigmaFast 205 SigmaDur 550 100 m/4.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaCover 456 SigmaCover 630 SigmaDur 520 SigmaDur 550 SigmaFast 205 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7466 see product data sheet 7430 see product data sheet 7524 see product data sheet 7537 see product data sheet 7802 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Rural atmospheric exposure Acrylic dispersion system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4032
This environment usually covers areas away from the coast and separate from industrial or urban activity. Corrosive attack is governed mostly by humidity, rainfall and ultraviolet radiation, but is normally less aggressive than an industrial or coastal environment. Average sulphur dioxide contents is lower than 10 g per m air. Salt content in rain water is lower than 12 mg per litre rain. Complies with ISO 12944, part 2, corrosivity category C3. acrylic dispersion maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint bitumen and epoxy tar paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination intact areas; to be roughened damaged and corroded areas; steel; derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 and primed with Sigma Aquacover 20 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened and primed Sigma Aquacover 22 in a dft of 50 m/2 mils Sigma Aquacover 40 Sigma Aquacover 40 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system
acrylic dispersion system for a total repair steel, galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system, derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 40 Sigma Aquacover 40 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system
note
for galvanised steel and aluminium Sigma Aquacover 20 should be replaced by Sigma Aquacover 22
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Rural atmospheric exposure Acrylic dispersion system
SYSTEM
4032
June 2004
acrylic dispersion system for new construction steel; derusted to ISO Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 40 Sigma Aquacover 40 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: Because of the waterborn character of this type of paint, good weather conditions are essential to obtain maximum performance The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 22 Sigma Aquacover 40 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7149 see product data sheet 7145 see product data sheet 7251 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Rural atmospheric exposure High solids epoxy/polyurethane system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4034
This environment usually covers areas away from the coast and separate from industrial or urban activity. Corrosive attack is governed mostly by humidity, rainfall and ultraviolet radiation, but is normally less aggressive than an industrial or coastal environment. Average sulphur dioxide contents is lower than 10 g per m air. Salt content in rain water is lower than 12 mg per litre rain. surface tolerant high solids epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination damaged and corroded areas; steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 630 in a dft of 60 m/2.4 mils galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened, dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 60 m/2.4 mils SigmaCover 630 SigmaDur 580 60 m/2.4 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system
surface tolerant high solids epoxy/polyurethane system for total repair or new construction steel, galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering or sweep blasting SigmaCover 630 SigmaCover 630 SigmaDur 580 60 m/2.4 mils 60 m/2.4 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system
notes
a galvanised steel or aluminium substrate should be primed with SigmaCover 280 instead of SigmaCover 630 2 primer coats applied by roller may be replaced by 1 coat of 125 m/5 mils dft when applied by airless spray
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Rural atmospheric exposure High solids epoxy/polyurethane system
SYSTEM
4034
October 2004
high solids epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction steel; derusted to ISO Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 SigmaCover 805 SigmaDur 580 125 m/5.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 630 SigmaCover 805 SigmaDur 580 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7430 see product data sheet 7726 see product data sheet 7530 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
SYSTEM
RURAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE WATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM

a two page issue
4036
This environment usually covers areas away from the coast and separate from industrial or urban activity. Corrosive attack is governed mostly by humidity, rainfall and ultraviolet radiation, but is normally less aggressive than an industrial or coastal environment. Average sulphur dioxide contents is lower than 10 g per m air. Salt content in rain water is lower than 12 mg per litre rain. Complies with ISO 12944, part 2, corrosivity category C3. waterborne epoxy system, suitable for steel steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 Sigma aquacover 200 Sigma aquacover 400 medium should preferably be carried out according to this specification 75 m/3.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
SPECIFICATION 1 pretreatment coating system expected durability (ISO-12944 part 5) maintenance
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more.
page 1/2
SYSTEM
RURAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE WATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM
4036
June 2004
REFERENCES Sigma aquacover 200 Sigma aquacover 400 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specification for mineral abrasives see product data sheet 7870 see product data sheet 7871 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposure Alkyd paint system
SYSTEM
4040
INDUSTRIAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and chemical pollution will accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterised by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 g per m air. COASTAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and salt spray will accelerate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterised by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre rain.
alkyd maintenance system for intact areas and spotrepair alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber, vinyl, bitumen and epoxy tar paint galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination intact areas; to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with 2 coats Sigmarine 24 in a dft of 2 x 40 m (1.6 mils) Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 49 35 m/1.4 mils 35 m/1.4 mils
paint system note
if a semigloss finish is required, Sigmarine 49 can be replaced by Sigmarine 41 finishes in, mio or aluminium are available on request
alkyd system for a total repair or new construction galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to min.ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 49 40 m/1.6 mils 40 m/1.6 mils 35 m/1.4 mils 35 m/1.4 mils
note
if a semigloss finish is required, Sigmarine 49 can be replaced by Sigmarine 41 finishes in, mio or aluminium are available on request
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposure Alkyd paint system
SYSTEM
4040
September 2005
fast drying alkyd system for new construction, especially suitable for in-shop application steel; blast cleaned to ISO Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO St3 shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 40 SigmaFast 40 75 m/3.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 40 Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 41 Sigmarine 49 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7155 see product data sheet 7234 see product data sheet 7135 see product data sheet 7213 see product data sheet 7256 see product data sheet 7240 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system
a three page issue EXPOSURE CONDITIONS:
SYSTEM
4041
recoatable epoxy polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint bitumen and epoxy tar paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination intact areas; to be roughened damaged and corroded areas; steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 630 (aluminium) in a dft of 75 m/3 mils galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened, dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils SigmaCover 456 SigmaDur 520 SigmaDur 520 can be replaced by SigmaDur 550 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system note
page 1/3
SYSTEM
4041
September 2005
recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for total repair or new construction steel, galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering SigmaCover 630 (aluminium) SigmaCover 456 SigmaDur 520 75 m/3.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system
notes
a galvanised steel or aluminium substrate should be primed with SigmaCover 280 instead of SigmaCover 630 (aluminium) SigmaDur 520 can be replaced by SigmaDur 550
recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction, especially suitable for in-shop application Steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St3 Shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 SigmaFast 205 SigmaFast 205 SigmaDur 550 SigmaDur 550 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520 75 m/3.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system
notes
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler.
page 2/3
SYSTEM
4041
September 2005
REFERENCES SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 456 SigmaCover 630 SigmaDur 520 SigmaDur 550 SigmaFast 205 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7466 see product data sheet 7430 see product data sheet 7524 see product data sheet 7537 see product data sheet 7802 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 3/3
STEEL PROTECTION Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposure High solids epoxy/polyurethane system
a three page issue
SYSTEM
4042
INDUSTRIAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and chemical pollution accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterised by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 g per m air. COASTAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and salt spray will accelerate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterised by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre rain.
surface tolerant high solids epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination damaged and corroded areas; steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 630 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened, dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils SigmaCover 630 SigmaDur 580 75 m/3.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system
page 1/3
SYSTEM
4042
October 2004
surface tolerant high solids epoxy/polyurethane system for total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removalof old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering or sweep blasting SigmaCover 630 SigmaCover 630 SigmaDur 580 75 m/3.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system
notes
galvanised steel or aluminium substrate should be primed with SigmaCover 280 instead of SigmaCover 630 2 primer coats applied by roller may be replaced by 1 coat of 150 m/6 mils dft when applied by airless spray
High solids epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 SigmaCover 805 SigmaDur 580 150 m/6.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system
page 2/3
SYSTEM
4042
October 2004
REFERENCES SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 630 SigmaCover 805 SigmaDur 580 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7430 see product data sheet 7726 see product data sheet 7530 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 3/3
STEEL PROTECTION Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposure Solvent free epoxy/polyurethane system
a three page issue
SYSTEM
4045
September 2005 revision of December 2003
surface tolerant solvent free epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination damaged and corroded areas; steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 1500 in a dft of 125 m/5 mils galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened, dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 1500 in a dft of 125 m/5 mils SigmaCover 1500 SigmaDur 580 125 m/5.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system note
SigmaDur 580 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520 or SigmaDur 550
page 1/3
SYSTEM
4045
September 2005
surface tolerant solvent free epoxy/polyurethane system for total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering or sweep blasting SigmaCover 1500 SigmaDur 580 125 m/5.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system notes
Solvent free epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 SigmaCover 1500 SigmaDur 580 125 m/5.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system notes
page 2/3
SYSTEM
4045
September 2005
REFERENCES SigmaCover 1500 SigmaDur 520 SigmaDur 550 SigmaDur 580 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7715 see product data sheet 7524 see product data sheet 7537 see product data sheet 7530 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 3/3
SYSTEM
INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE

WATERBORNE EPOXY/HIGH SOLIDS POLYURETHANE SYSTEM
4046
June 2004
INDUSTRIAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultra violet radiation and chemical pollution will accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterised by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 g per m air. COASTAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultra violet radiation and salt spray will accelerate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterised by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre. Complies with ISO 12944, part 2, corrosivity category C4.
SPECIFICATION 1 pretreatment coating system
waterborne high solids epoxy/polyurethane system with a fair resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals steel, weldseams and rusty areas; derusted to ISO-Sa2 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Ss or SPSS-Pt2 Sigma aquacover 200 Sigma aquacover 400 Sigmadur 580 high should preferably be carried out according to this specification 100 m/4.0 mils 100 m/4.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
expected durability (ISO-12944 part 5) maintenance
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life time of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the actual surface area. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. By giving more attention to these areas, the life time of the protective system will be extended. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: a bead with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with a sharp crest having a radius under 2 mm a grinder should be applied. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more.
page 1/2
SYSTEM
INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE

WATERBORNE EPOXY/HIGH SOLIDS POLYURETHANE SYSTEM
4046
June 2004
REFERENCES Sigma aquacover 400 Sigma aquacover 200 Sigmadur 580 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specification for mineral abrasives see product data sheet 7871 see product data sheet 7870 see product data sheet 7530 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposure Solvent free epoxy/polymeric urethane system
a three page issue EXPOSURE CONDITIONS:
4047
March 2004
surface tolerant solvent free epoxy/polymeric urethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination damaged and corroded areas; steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 1500 in a dft of 125 m/5 mils galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened, dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 1500 in a dft of 125 m/5 mils SigmaCover 1500 SigmaDur 1800 125 m/5.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system
page 1/3
4047
March 2004
SPECIFICATION 2:
surface tolerant solvent free epoxy/polymeric urethane system for total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering or sweep blasting SigmaCover 1500 SigmaDur 1800 125 m/5.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
pretreatment
paint system
Solvent free epoxy/polymeric urethane system for new construction steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 SigmaCover 1500 SigmaDur 1800 125 m/5.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system
page 2/3
4047
March 2004
REFERENCES SigmaCover 1500 SigmaDur 1800 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7715 see product data sheet 7725 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 3/3
STEEL PROTECTION Atmospheric exposure with abrasion/impact Solvent free flint reinforced epoxy system
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4050
September 2005 revision of July 2003
INDUSTRIAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and chemical pollution accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall-out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterised by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 g per m air. Additional abrasion and impact exposure is expected. COASTAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and salt spray will accelarate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterised by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre rain. Additional abrasion and impact exposure is expected.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain good performance it is essential that the old paint system should be completely removed. For maximum performance the surface should be abrasive blast cleaned to a suitable anchor pattern. SPECIFICATION 1: suitable for pretreatment paint system notes solvent free, flint reinforced epoxy system with an excellent resistance to impact and abrasion suitable for total repair and new construction steel (galvanised steel) steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 75-100 m/3-4 mils SigmaShield 1090 3000 m/120 mils SigmaShield 1090 can be applied on galvanised steel, but this will occur only occasionally galvanised steel has to be sweepblasted with inert grit to obtain the required blasting profile
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Atmospheric exposure with abrasion/impact Solvent free flint reinforced epoxy system
SYSTEM
4050
September 2005
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by SigmaShield 1090. REFERENCES SigmaShield 1090 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7490 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
Atmospheric exposure with abrasion/impact High solids glassflake reinforced epoxy system
a two page issue
4051
INDUSTRIAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and chemical pollution accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterised by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 g per m air. Additional abrasion and impact exposure is expected. COASTAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and salt spray will accelerate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterised by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre rain. Additional abrasion and impact exposure is expected.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential that the old paint system should be removed completely. For maximum performance the surface should be blast cleaned to a suitable anchor pattern. SPECIFICATION 1: high solids glassflake reinforced epoxy system with an improved resistance to abrasion and impact suitable for total repair or new construction steel (galvanised steel and aluminium) steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1,6-2.8 mils SigmaCover 280 SigmaShield 460 75 m/ 3.0 mils 400 m/16.0 mils
suitable for pretreatment paint system note
in case of a complex structure we recommend to apply a dft of 2 x 200 m (8 mils) galvanised steel has to be sweepblasted with inert grit to obtain the required blasting profile
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Atmospheric exposure with abrasion/impact High solids glassflake reinforced epoxy system
SYSTEM
4051
September 2005
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaCover 280 SigmaShield 460 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7952 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
High temperature resistant alkyd paint system Temperature up to 175C / 350F

a two page issue
4060
High temperature surfaces: The surface temperature has more influence on coating performance than surrounding atmospheric conditions. Thermal shock may be a consideration.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system from defective areas and to blast clean or to obtain a profile by disc sanding using discs with rough abrasive. SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of suitable for not suitable for pretreatment paint system alkyd system for temperatures up to 175C/350F suitable for total repair or new construction alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint silicone and silicate paint steel galvanised steel, aluminium sprayed steel and zinc sprayed steel removal of damaged paint (if applicable) and derusting by blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2 or disc sanding to SPSS-Pt3 Sigmarine 24 SigmaTherm 175 SigmaTherm 175 SigmaTherm 175 35 m/1.4 mils 25 m/1.0 mils 25 m/1.0 mils 25 m/1.0 mils
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: In many cases some parts of the surface will not have been exposed to a really high temperature, because a temperature gradient across the surface existed. These parts may be in relatively good condition and can be recoated for cosmetic reasons with the last coat of the system, provided that contamination is removed and that the surface is sufficiently roughened. If the existing coats prove to be in a brittle condition, then they should be considered as damaged and removed completely.
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION High temperature resistant alkyd paint system Temperature up to 175C / 350F
SYSTEM
4060
September 2005
REFERENCES Sigmarine 24 SigmaTherm 175 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7135 see product data sheet 7260 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
High temperature resistant silicate/acrylic paint system Temperature up to 350C / 662F

a two page issue
4061
High temperature surfaces: The temperature aspect is usually of greater importance than the general atmosphere. Thermal shock may need to be considered.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system from defective areas and to blast clean or to obtain a profile by disc sanding using discs with rough abrasive. SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of suitable for not suitable for pretreatment zinc silicate/silicone-acrylic system for temperatures up to 350C / 662 F suitable for total repair or new construction silicate paint alkyd, epoxy, silicone and polyurethane paint steel galvanised steel, aluminium sprayed steel and zinc sprayed steel removal of damaged paint (if applicable) and derusting of steel by blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2 or disc sanding to SPSS-Pt3 using discs with rough abrasive SigmaZinc 158 SigmaTherm 350 75 m/3.0 mils 30 m/1.2 mils
paint system
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
High temperature resistant silicate/acrylic paint system Temperature up to 350C / 662F
4061
September 2005
REFERENCES SigmaTherm 350 SigmaZinc 158 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7565 see product data sheet 7558 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION High temperature resistant epoxy system Temperature up to 200C / 390F
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4062
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system from defective areas and to blast clean or to obtain a profile by disc sanding using discs with rough abrasive. SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of suitable for pretreatment epoxy system resistant to industrial pollution and temperatures up to 200C/390F suitable for total repair or new construction alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane and silicate paint silicone paint steel, galvanised steel, aluminium sprayed steel and zinc sprayed steel removal of damaged paint (if applicable) and derusting of steel or roughening of galvanised steel by blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2 or disc sanding to SPSS-Pt3 to prevent contamination, aluminium sprayed steel and zinc sprayed steel should be painted as soon as possible, preferably within some hours of the metal spraying contaminated metal sprayed steel should be high pressure water cleaned to remove contamination the surface must be dry before painting SigmaCover 435 SigmaCover 435 SigmaCover 435 light shades may discolour above 130C 60 m/2.4 mils 60 m/2.4 mils 60 m/2.4 mils
paint system
note
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION High temperature resistant epoxy system Temperature up to 200C / 390F
SYSTEM
4062
October 2004
REFERENCES SigmaCover 435 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7465 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION High temperature resistant silicate system Temperature up to 400C / 750F
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4064
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system from defective areas and to blast clean or to obtain a profile by disc sanding using discs with rough abrasive. SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of suitable for not suitable for pretreatment full silicate system for temperatures up to 400C/750F suitable for total repair or new construction suitable silicate paint alkyd, epoxy, silicone and polyurethane paint steel galvanised steel, aluminium sprayed steel and zinc sprayed steel removal of damaged paint (if applicable) and derusting of steel by blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2 or disc sanding to SPSS-Pt3 using discs with rough abrasive SigmaZinc 158 SigmaTherm 520 75 m/3.0 mils 40 m/1.6 mils
paint system
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION High temperature resistant silicate system Temperature up to 400C / 750F
SYSTEM
4064
September 2005
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
High temperature resistant silicate/silicone system Temperature up to 540C / 1000F

4067
April 2007
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system from defective areas and to blast clean or to obtain a profile by disc sanding using discs with rough abrasive. SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of suitable for not suitable for pretreatment paint system system for temperatures up to 540C/1000F suitable for total repair or new construction suitable silicate paint alkyd, epoxy, silicone and polyurethane paint steel galvanised steel, aluminium sprayed steel and zinc sprayed steel removal of damaged paint (if applicable) and derusting of steel by blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2 SigmaZinc 158 SigmaTherm 540 SigmaTherm 540 75 m/3.0 mils 25 m/1.0 mils 25 m/1.0 mils
SPECIFICATION 2: not on top of suitable for pretreatment paint system
system for temperatures up to 540C/1000F suitable for total repair or new construction alkyd, epoxy, silicone and polyurethane paint steel, aluminium sprayed steel and zinc sprayed steel removal of damaged paint (if applicable) and derusting of steel by blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2 SigmaTherm 540 SigmaTherm 540 25 m/1.0 mils 25 m/1.0 mils
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
High temperature resistant silicate/silicone system Temperature up to 540C / 1000F
4067
April 2007
intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the products made by Sigma Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use. SigmaKalon Marine & Protective Coatings has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. SigmaKalon Marine & Protective Coatings does therefore not accept any liability arising from loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). The data contained herein are liable to modification as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. This data sheet replaces and annuls all previous issues and it is therefore the users responsibility to ensure that this sheet is current prior to using the product.
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in water or subsoil conditions Epoxy tar system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4070
Immersion in water in conjunction with or without cathodic protection. Subsoil and splashzone are also considered as immersion condition. epoxy tar maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 70C/160F epoxy, epoxy tar and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber, vinyl and bitumen paint high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination intact areas; to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils SigmaCover 300 brown SigmaCover 300 black 125 m/5.0 mils 125 m/5.0 mils
SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of pretreatment
paint system notes
for health reasons this system should not be used for the storage of potable water for consumption when cathodic protection or high temperatures are applied the pretreatment must be improved to ISO-Sa2 or SSPS-Pt3 locally
epoxy tar system for a total repair or new construction, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 70C/160F after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 locally SigmaCover 300 brown SigmaCover 300 black 150 m/6.0 mils 150 m/6.0 mils
if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils may be used when cathodic protection or high temperatures are applied the pretreatment must be improved to ISO-Sa2 or SSPS-Pt3 locally
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in water or subsoil conditions Epoxy tar system
SYSTEM
4070
October 2004
epoxy tar system for new construction steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 steel with approved zinc silicate shopprimer; power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 or sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss weldseams, burned and rusty areas blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 SigmaCover 300 brown SigmaCover 300 black 150 m/6.0 mils 150 m/6.0 mils
paint system note
if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils may be used when cathodic protection or high temperatures are applied the pretreatment must be improved to ISO-Sa2 or SSPS-Pt3 locally
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 300 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance manual see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7472 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in water or subsoil conditions Solvent free epoxy system
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4071
April 2009 revision of September 2005
Immersion in water in conjunction with or without cathodic protection. Subsoil and splashzone are also considered as immersion condition. solvent free epoxy maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair, resistant to cathodic protection epoxy-, polyurethane-, epoxy tar paint chlorinated rubber-, vinyl-, bitumen paint high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination intact areas; to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 locally if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 can be used in a dft of 75 m/3 mils 300 m/12.0 mils
paint system notes
SigmaGuard CSF 650
if cathodic protection is applied SigmaCover 280 should be used for the storage of potable water SigmaGuard CSF 585 should be used instead of SigmaGuard CSF 650 (see information sheet 1882) for the storage of potable water local health regulations must also be observed with respect to primer and coating
solvent free epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 50C/120F after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 (locally) if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 may be used in a dft of 75 m/3 mils SigmaGuard CSF 650 300 m/12.0 mils
paint system notes
if cathodic protection is applied SigmaCover 280 should be used for the storage of potable water SigmaGuard CSF 585 should be used instead of SigmaGuard CSF 650 (see information sheet 1882) for the storage of potable water local health regulations must also be observed with respect to primer and coating
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in water or subsoil conditions Solvent free epoxy system
SYSTEM
4071
April 2009
SPECIFICATION 3:
solvent free phenolic epoxy system with improved resistance against abrasion for new construction, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 60C/ 140 F steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 m/2-4 mils Novaguard 840 500 m/20.0 mils if abrasion resistance is required Novaguard 840 can be replaced by SigmaShield 1200
pretreatment paint system note
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life time of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the actual surface area. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. By giving more attention to these areas, the life time of the maintenance system will be extended. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm a grinder should be applied. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES Novaguard 840 SigmaCover 280 SigmaGuard CSF 650 SigmaGuard CSF 585 SigmaShield 1200 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Certificates for potable water Tools for maintenance manual see product data sheet 7768 see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7443 see product data sheet 7785 see product data sheet 7744 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1882 see information sheet 4007
intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the Sigma Coatings products made by PPG Protective & Marine Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does therefore not accept any liability arising from loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). The data contained herein are liable to modification as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. This data sheet replaces and annuls all previous issues and it is therefore the users responsibility to ensure that this sheet is current prior to using the product.
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in water or subsoil conditions High solids tar free epoxy system
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4072
Immersion in water (in conjunction with or) without cathodic protection. Subsoil and splashzone are also considered as immersion condition. high solids tar free epoxy maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 60C/140F epoxy, epoxy tar and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber, vinyl and bitumen paint high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paintand contamination intact areas; to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 and primed with SigmaCover 630 (aluminium) in a dft of 125 m/5 mils SigmaCover 805 the individual coats may not exceed 2 x the specified dft 150 m/6.0 mils
paint system note
high solids tar free epoxy system for total repair, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 60C/140F after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2 SigmaCover 805 (aluminium) SigmaCover 805 150 m/6.0 mils 150 m/6.0 mils
the individual coats may not exceed 2 x the specified dft if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils can be used
high solids tar free epoxy system for new construction, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 60C/140F steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 SigmaCover 805 (aluminium) SigmaCover 805 150 m/6.0 mils 150 m/6.0 mils
the individual coats may not exceed 2 x the specified dft if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils can be used
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in water or subsoil conditions High solids tar free epoxy system
SYSTEM
4072
October 2004
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 630 SigmaCover 805 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance manual see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7430 see product data sheet 7726 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in hot water Phenolic epoxy system - Mio epoxy system
a three page issue
SYSTEM
4076
Non-saline water: Sea water:
hot water applicable to e.g. water tanks, storage tanks and domestic water systems. hot sea and other saline waters.
GENERAL ASPECTS: Protection against hot water by a coating system is in fact very critical. Only the combination of very good pretreatment, correct film thicknesses, good curing and optimal ventilation after application of the coating will give the desired protection against the influence of hot water. Good surface preparation is essential if good performance of hot water resistant systems is to be achieved. A pitted corroded surface, impurities in the protective coating or bad workmanship will result in failures. In service the steel substrate should have about the same temperature as the hot water itself in order to avoid blistering (as a result of the cold wall effect). Equipment, tank or vessel must therefore be sheltered against cold wind and/or insulated adequately to reduce heat transfer through the steel wall plus coating system. Application of the paints must be done very carefully, avoiding excess thickness, avoiding solvent trapping and maintaining good ventilation and curing conditions throughout the application process. (See sheet 1434). Forced curing by means of hot water of 60C or by means of hot air will give definitely better results and is strongly recommended. SPECIFICATION 1: pretreatment phenolic epoxy system for a total repair or new construction resistant to hot water (100C/210F) after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 m/2-4 mils Phenguard 930 Phenguard 935 Phenguard 940 100 m/4.0 mils 100 m/4.0 mils 100 m/4.0 mils
paint system
notes
to ensure optimal performance it is essential to check, prior to application, the cleaned surface on soluable salts the maximum acceptable level is 60 mg/m2 (12 s/cm) spot repair can be made using same system existing coating around damages should be carefully feathered the individual coats may not exceed 1,5 x the specified dft
page 1/3
SYSTEM
4076
April 2009
mio epoxy system for a total repair or new construction resistant to hot water (100C/210F) after high pressure water cleaning, complete removalof old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel by means of blast cleaning to min. ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-75 m/1.6-3.0 mils SigmaCover 522 SigmaCover 522 SigmaCover 522 80 m/3.2 mils 80 m/3.2 mils 80 m/3.2 mils
paint system
notes
to ensure optimal performance it is essential to check, prior to application, the cleaned surface on soluable salts the maximum acceptable level is 60 mg/m2 (12 s/cm) spot repairs can be made using same system existing coating around damages should be carefully feathered the individual coats may not exceed 2 x the specified dft
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding.
page 2/3
SYSTEM
4076
April 2009
REFERENCES Phenguard 930 Phenguard 935 Phenguard 940 SigmaCover 522 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance manual see product data sheet 7409 see product data sheet 7435 see product data sheet 7436 see product data sheet 7420 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 3/3
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in chemicals Phenolic epoxy system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4081
Immersion in or splash of chemicals, acids and alkalies Application areas: transport tanks, storage tanks and equipment continuously or intermittently exposed to a wide range of solvents, fatty acids, chemicals, monomers and water, including fresh water, hot water and foodstuffs. A full resistance list is available.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain an optimal result it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system (see 4005). Existing coating around damages should be feather edged carefully. The chemical resistance will be determined by the existing coating system and the spot repair. SPECIFICATION 1: phenolic epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, resistant to immersion and splash of chemicals according to the tankcoating resistance list; for indications see also sheet 4009 after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to at least ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 m/2-4 mils Phenguard 930 Phenguard 935 Phenguard 940 100 m/4.0 mils 100 m/4.0 mils 100 m/4.0 mils
pretreatment
paint system
note
the individual coats may not exceed 1,5 x the specified dft
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in chemicals Phenolic epoxy system
SYSTEM
4081
April 2009
REFERENCES Phenguard 930 Phenguard 935 Phenguard 940 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7409 see product data sheet 7435 see product data sheet 7436 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in chemicals Solvent free epoxy system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4082
Immersion in or splash of chemicals, acids and alkalies. Application areas: storage tanks and equipment continuously or intermittently exposed to aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons and water.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain an optimal result it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system (see 4005). Existing coating around damages should be feather edged carefully. The chemical resistance will be determined by the existing coating system and the spotrepair. SPECIFICATION 1: solvent free phenolic epoxy system for new construction or total repair, resistant to immersion and splash of chemicals as indicated by data in sheet 4009 if an old paint system is present, high pressure water cleaning and complete removal steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 m/2-4 mils Novaguard 840 400 m/16.0 mils if a holding primer is required a suitable epoxy primer should be applied in a dft of 75 m/3mils
pretreatment
paint system note
solvent free epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, resistant to immersion and splash of chemicals as indicated by data in sheet 4009 after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 m/2-4 mils Sigmaguard CSF 650 400 m/16.0 mils
paint system note
if a holding primer is required a suitable epoxy primer should be applied in a dft of 75m/3mils
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in chemicals Solvent free epoxy system
SYSTEM
4082
April 2009
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding. REFERENCES Novaguard 840 Sigmaguard CSF 650 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7468 see product data sheet 7443 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in chemicals Zinc ethyl silicate system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4083
Immersion in or splash of chemicals, specifically solvents. Application areas: for storage tanks for aggressive solvents. The resistance to acidic or alkaline chemicals is limited due to the zinc pigment. A full resistance list is available.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain an optimal result it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system (see 4005). Existing coating around damages should be feather edged SPECIFICATION 1: zinc ethyl silicate system for a total repair or new construction; resistant to immersion and splash of chemicals according to the tankcoating resistance list, for indications see also sheet 4009 after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1.6-2.8 mils SigmaGuard 750 75 m/3.0 mils
pretreatment
paint system
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in chemicals Zinc ethyl silicate system
SYSTEM
4083
September 2005
REFERENCES SigmaGuard 750 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7551 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oil High solids epoxy system
a two page issue
4090
January 2008 revision of September 2005
Immersion in or splash of refined petroleum products and crude oil. Application areas: storage tanks and equipment continuously exposed to aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons and a limited range of solvents and chemicals. A full resistance list is available.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain an optimal result it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system (see 4005). Existing coating around damages should be feather edged carefully. SPECIFICATION 1: high solids epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for refined petroleum products and crude oil, resistant to crude oil temperatures up to 70C/160F complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2 SigmaGuard 720 SigmaGuard 720 125 m/5.0 mils 125 m/5.0 mils
if a holding primer is required, a suitable primer (e.g. SigmaCover 522) should be applied in a dft of 50 m/2 mils
SPECIFICATION 2:
high solids epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for refined petroleum products and crude oil, resistant to crude oil temperatures up to 70C/160F complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2 SigmaGuard 730 SigmaGuard 730 150 m/6.0 mils 150 m/6.0 mils
if a holding primer is required, a suitable primer (e.g. SigmaCover 522) should be applied in a dft of 50 m/2 mils
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oil High solids epoxy system
4090
January 2008
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaCover 522 SigmaGuard 720 SigmaGuard 730 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7420 see product data sheet 7433 see product data sheet 7459 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the Sigma Coatings products made by SigmaKalon Marine & Protective Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use. SigmaKalon Marine & Protective Coatings has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. SigmaKalon Marine & Protective Coatings does therefore not accept any liability arising from loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). The data contained herein are liable to modification as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. This data sheet replaces and annuls all previous issues and it is therefore the users responsibility to ensure that this sheet is current prior to using the product.
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oil Epoxy tar system
a two page issue
4091
Immersion in crude oil or splash of crude oil or refined petroleum products. Application areas: storage tanks and equipment continuously or intermittently exposed to crude oil and (waste) water.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system. (see 4005) Existing coatings around damages should be feather edged carefully. SPECIFICATION 1: pretreatment epoxy tar system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for crude oil, resistant to temperatures up to 70C/160F complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2 if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 can be applied in a dft of 75 m/3 mils SigmaCover 300 brown SigmaCover 300 black 125 m/5.0 mils 125 m/5.0 mils
paint system note
in contact with refined petroleum products leaching of coal tar can be expected
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oil Epoxy tar system
4091
October 2004
REFERENCES SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 300 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7472 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oil Solvent free epoxy system
a two page issue
4092
Immersion in crude oil or splash of crude oil or refined petroleum products. Application areas: storage tanks and equipment continuously or intermittently exposed to aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons and a limited range of solvents and chemicals. A full resistance list is available.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system. (see 4005) Existing coatings around damages should be feather edged carefully. SPECIFICATION 1: solvent free phenolic epoxy system for new construction or total repair, suitable for refined petroleum products and crude oil, resistant to crude oil temperatures up to 90C/194F if an old paint system is present complete removal of the system is required after high pressure water cleaning steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 m/2-4 mils Novaguard 840 400 m/16.0 mils
pretreatment
paint system notes
quality of the applied coating should be checked on pinholes and holidays and repaired according to this specification to fill pittings a scrapelayer of Novaguard 840 could be applied more detailed information with regards to protection of tank bottoms can be found in separate manual
SPECIFICATION 2:
solvent free epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for refined petroleum products and crude oil, resistant to crude oil temperatures up to 60C/140F after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 m/2-4 mils SigmaCover 522 Sigmaguard CSF 650 50 m/ 2.0 mils 400 m/16.0 mils
pretreatment
paint system notes
quality of the applied coating should be checked on pinholes and holidays and repaired according to this specification to fill pittings a scrapelayer of Sigmaguard CSF 650 could be applied
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oil Solvent free epoxy system
4092
April 2009
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by a scrapelayer of the solvent free epoxy of the coating system (Novaguard 840 or Sigmaguard CSF 650). REFERENCES Novaguard 840 SigmaCover 522 Sigmaguard CSF 650 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7468 see product data sheet 7420 see product data sheet 7443 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in waste water and slurry Epoxy tar system
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4101
Applicable to river installations, sewage-treatment tanks, water tanks and domestic water systems, and where abrasion can be expected.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system. (see 4005) Existing coating around damages should be feather edged carefully. SPECIFICATION 1: pretreatment epoxy tar system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for waste water and mud complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2 if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 can be applied in a dft of 50 m/2 mils SigmaCover 300 brown SigmaCover 300 black 150 m/6.0 mils 150 m/6.0 mils
paint system note
to prevent severe pitting when exposed to acidic water the quality of the coating system should be checked on pinholes and holidays and repaired according to this specification
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in waste water and slurry Epoxy tar system
SYSTEM
4101
October 2004
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in waste water and slurry High solids tar free epoxy system
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4102
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system. (see 4005) Existing coating around damages should be feather edged carefully. SPECIFICATION 1: pretreatment paint system note high solids epoxy tar free system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for waste water and mud complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2 SigmaCover 805 SigmaCover 805 150 m/6.0 mils 150 m/6.0 mils
the individual coats may not exceed 2 x the specified dft if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 75 m/3.0 mils can be used
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in waste water and slurry High solids tar free epoxy system
SYSTEM
4102
October 2004
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in waste water and slurry Solvent free phenolic epoxy system
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4103
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system. (see 4005) Existing coating around damages should be feather edged carefully. SPECIFICATION 1: Solvent free phenolic epoxy system with improved resistance against abrasion for a total repair or new construction, suitable for waste water and mud complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 m/2-4 mils SigmaShield 1200 500 m/20.0 mils
pretreatment paint system
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in waste water and slurry Solvent free phenolic epoxy system
SYSTEM
4103
September 2005
REFERENCES SigmaShield 1200 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7744 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION System for special conditions Zinc epoxy primed steel
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4113
GENERAL ASPECTS: Due to its good anticorrosive properties, zinc epoxy primers are often specified for new fabrication. However, in maintenance coating systems zinc epoxy primers cannot be applied on top of existing organic coatings, because of lack of adhesion. Nevertheless as a result of the good experience with the new fabrication coating system it is often decided to start the maintenance coating system again with a zinc epoxy primer. In that case a full reblast of the substrate is necessary. If a full reblast is impossible other recommendations for maintenance are given in sheets 4041-4042. SPECIFICATION 1: pretreatment high solids system for a total repair or new construction, using a zinc epoxy primer, followed by an epoxy build coat after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1.6-2.8 mils SigmaZinc 102 HS SigmaCover 805 if gloss retention is required, see specification 2 60 m/2.4 mils 150 m/6.0 mils
paint system note
SPECIFICATION 2:
high solids system for a total repair or new construction, using a zinc epoxy primer, followed by an epoxy build coat and finished with a recoatable polyurethane finish after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1.6-2.8 mils SigmaZinc 102 HS SigmaCover 805 SigmaDur 580 60 m/2.4 mils 150 m/6.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
pretreatment
paint system
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION System for special conditions Zinc epoxy primed steel
SYSTEM
4113
September 2005
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding. REFERENCES SigmaCover 805 SigmaDur 580 SigmaZinc 102 HS Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7726 see product data sheet 7530 see product data sheet 7702 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
RENOVATION OF PITTED TANK BOTTOMS
Glass mat reinforced solvent-free phenolic epoxy coating system

a two page issue
4145
January 2012 revision of 09-2005
SPECIFICATION 1
Glass mat reinforced solvent-free epoxy coating system resistant to crude oil (up to 90C/194F), aliphatic hydrocarbons, leaded and unleaded gasoline and aviation fuels for additional information see Sigma TankSelect steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 (SSPC-SP10) blasting profile; 50-100 m (2.0-4.0 mils) primer (see item 2) SigmaGuard 260 pitfilling (see item 3) optional NovaGuard 840 levelling of lap joints (see item 4) NovaGuard 830 coving of corners (see item 4) optional NovaGuard 830 coating + laminate (see item 5 and 6) NovaGuard 840 (clear) + Non-woven Glass mat coating (see item 7) NovaGuard 840 (clear) optional layer (see items 8 and 9) NovaGuard 840 (clear) + Non-woven Glass mat + NovaGuard 840 (clear) * coating (see item 10) NovaGuard 840 1200 m (48,0 mils) 450 gr/m (1,5 oz/ft) 400 m (16.0 mils) 400 m (16.0 mils) 450 gr/m (1,5 oz/ft) 400 m (16.0 mils) 400 m (16.0 mils) 75 m (3.0 mils)
pretreatment paint system
* if needed to improve wetting of the mat
Coating procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. For blasting and coating guidelines: see sheet 4139. Application of primer of SigmaGuard 260 - dft 75 m(3.0 mils). Before starting the final coating the substrate should be inspected for hidden steel defects. If necessary adequate repairs should be carried out. Pitting can be filled by using a scrape layer of NovaGuard 840 (see sheet 4139). For incomplete welded areas in the chine transition, striker plate bedding and lap joints etc., levelling is accomplished by trowel application using NovaGuard 830. page 1/2
RENOVATION OF PITTED TANK BOTTOMS
Glass mat reinforced solvent-free phenolic epoxy coating system

6. 7. 8.
4145
January 2012
"Stripe coat" of the prepared sharp edges and welding seams with NovaGuard 840. Apply the next full coat of Sigma NovaGuard 840 wet on wet or after appropriate cure. Application of first coat of NovaGuard 840 (clear) - dft 500 m (20.0 mils) Apply within an appropriate time non-woven Glass mat 450 g/m (1.5 oz/ft). The non-woven Glass mat should be brought into intensive contact with the liquid epoxy material using washer rollers and ribbed rollers. The surface should be smooth and free from air inclusions. Application of 2nd coat NovaGuard 840 (clear) - dft 400-500 m (16.0-20.0 mils) as required to thoroughly wet out the Glass mat. Optional second layer of dft 400-500 m (16.0-20.0 mils) NovaGuard 840 (clear) followed by a second layer of non-woven Glass mat. Optional (if optional item 8 is used) coat NovaGuard 840 (clear) - dft 400-500 m (16.0-20.0 mils). Application of one coat of NovaGuard 840 - dft 400 m (16.0 mils). The dried film, a minimum of 600 m/24,0 mils has to be tested for the presence of pores, and repaired, where necessary, with NovaGuard 840 (see also 5). See also 2.7.10 of the working procedure.
9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Note: The coats on the side shells must be applied step-wise in such a way that the system thickness gradually decreases up the vertical sides. REFERENCES NovaGuard 830 NovaGuard 840 SigmaGuard 260 Safe working in confined spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Working procedures - general guidelines see product data sheet 7945 see product data sheet 7468 see product data sheet 7944 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4139
The information in this data sheet is based upon laboratory tests we believe to be accurate and is intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the Sigma Coatings products made by PPG Protective & Marine Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does therefore not accept any liability arising from loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). The data contained herein are liable to modification as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. This data sheet replaces and annuls all previous issues and it is therefore the users responsibility to ensure that this sheet is current prior to using the product.
page 2/2
INFORMATION
DIRECTIVES FOR VENTILATION PRACTICE

a three page issue
1434
Ventilation is required for reasons of health and safety. In addition for solvent containing coatings the quality of a coating system is greatly affected by the amount and type of residual solvent in the layer when the coating dries or cures. Adhesion, water resistance, mechanical and chemical properties can all be adversely affected when solvents remain trapped in the paint film. Very slow evaporation of trapped solvents can also develop internal stresses due to shrinkage. The ventilation must be maintained throughout the application process at a minimum level of 10% of LEL value and for a period after application is completed when the paint cures or dries. As a guide line for good ventilation after application the confined space should be ventilated 4 to 5 times its contents per hour. Product data sheets indicate when any special ventilation requirements are required. Hot ventilation: Ventilating air with too high temperature can cause surface curing of epoxy coatings and although it may be necessary to produce a dry substrate before painting, the steel and air temperature should be such that when the application starts, the temperature of the ventilation (dehumidifier/heater) should be dropped so that the conditions stay stable. Hot ventilation air should be replaced by cool dry ventilation air as soon as possible after application of any coat is completed. Good ventilation consists of at least extraction at the lowest areas, but in most cases when controlled conditions are needed, also of air input (dry and/or heated). The combination of in and output must be correctly balanced. The opening of the extraction hose should be close to the bottom of the tank (approx 30-60 cm). Ventilation air should be directed to the bottom of the tank or compartment and should be extracted by exhaust fans of correctly balanced capacity. For complex structures the ventilation should be distributed over all compartments and confined spaces in order to facilitate good ventilation in all areas. BALLAST TANKS AND OTHER CONFINED SPACES. Due to regulations of the shipbuilding industry ballast tanks and double skin tanks count for many square meters confined spaces. Therefore it is necessary to pay good attention to the ventilation conditions during application, drying and curing of the coating on these areas. Depending on the structure of the ballast tanks, forced ventilation or natural ventilation is used during coating of the new building blocks. However, natural ventilation in many cases is not sufficient due to half open box conditions and can cause serious drawbacks related to health and safety as well as curing and performance of the coating. When ventilation is not sufficient solvents will not be removed, but will drift to the lower part of the section. As normally first the upperparts of a section will be painted, the solvents evaporating from the applied coating will drift to the lower part where it will attack the earlier applied coating (not yet fully cured) and this coating will absorb part of the solvents and swell. This coating will then be overcoated and problems related to bad adhesion, curing, water resistance etc. will result. In case of waterborne paints, this advice is not valid. Water vapour rises to the upper areas of the tank and may give condensation. Therefore it is recommended to position an extra exhaust outlet at the top of the tank.
page 1/3
INFORMATION
1434
June 2013
Also in this case ventilation is of utmost importance as drying under insufficient ventilation will prevent paint film formation.
page 2/3
INFORMATION
1434
June 2013
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY - IN NO EVENT WILL PPG BE LIABLE UNDER ANY THEORY OF RECOVERY (WHETHER BASED ON NEGLIGENCE OF ANY KIND, STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT) FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN ANY WAY RELATED TO, ARISING FROM, OR RESULTING FROM ANY USE MADE OF THE PRODUCT. The information in this sheet is intended for guidance only and is based upon laboratory tests that PPG believes to be reliable. PPG may modify the information contained herein at any time as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the PPG product, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific inquiry, or otherwise, are based on data, which to the best of PPGs knowledge, is reliable. The product and related information is designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills in the industry and it is the end-users responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its own particular use and it shall be deemed that Buyer has done so, as its sole discretion and risk. PPG has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. Therefore, PPG does not accept any liability arising from any loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this information (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). Variations in the application environment, changes in procedures of use, or extrapolation of data may cause unsatisfactory results. This sheet supersedes all previous versions and it is the Buyers responsibility to ensure that this information is current prior to using the product. Current sheets for all PPG Protective & Marine Coatings Products are maintained at www.ppgpmc.com. The English text of this sheet shall prevail over any translation thereof.
page 3/3
INFORMATION
PSX 700 EPOXY SILOXANE QUALITY ASPECTS APPLICATION

A three page issue
1721
June 2013
INTRODUCTION PSX 700 Epoxy Siloxane coating is a high quality solvent free product developed to achieve long lasting corrosion protection as a durable finish over anti corrosive primer systems. This document is created to maximize the advantages this product can offer. To achieve the maximum performance and attractive finish PSX 700 should be applied according its application instructions. The nature of its solvent free composition is main cause for a number of precautions that should be taken into account when applying this material. 1. COLOUR AND GLOSS PSX 700 is formulated with a very high colour pigment loading to ensure hiding power when applied as a one coat finish directly on zinc dust based primers. The full range of industrial colours is produced using special PSX colour tinters and six different PSX 700 base coats. The solvent free colour tinters of PSX 700 are based on the same binder technology. The unique product properties of PSX 700 are not reduced by organic acrylate binders as commonly used in universal tint systems. This unique tinting system also avoids variation in properties with varying tinter volumes from different colours. To ensure colour continuity it is recommended that repairs or overlapping surfaces are made using one tint batch. Also different application techniques may influence product colour and appearance. When there is to a longer time lap between initial application and repair it is recommended to extend repairs to edges or welds coating full areas which will minimize visibility of colour variations between batches. 2. MIXING PSX 700 Epoxy Siloxane is a two component product. The curing and crosslinking is a balanced process of hydrolyzation and reaction between the base coat and hardener. The mixing ration between base coat and hardener is 4 to 1 by volume. This ratio is of high importance and care must be taken that accuracy is ensured. Preferably only full units are mixed. Splitting units must be reduced to the absolute minimum. Inaccurate mixing may result in reduced performance of the product. The high difference in viscosity between base and hardener needs to be taken into account when using plural component spray equipment. Plural component spray equipment must be equipped with a volume metering system and ensure that no back-flow of the low viscosity hardener or reduced volume supply of the high viscous base can occur. 3. THINNERS PSX 700 is supplied as a solvent free product with related application advantage of having no flash points. Thinning is not required under most circumstances. However, contrary to typical solvent free products PSX 700 can be thinned to accommodate the product to particular application conditions if required. It must be realized that after thinning PSX 700 the flashpoint of the used thinner needs to be taken into account during application. It is essential that thinning of PSX 700 is always done with the recommended thinners. The solvent free nature of PSX 700 can result in incompatibility effects when unsuitable solvents are used. Effects can influence proper mixing of components, curing, flow and colour. Thinners to be used are PPG Thinner 60-12 (Amercoat 911) or Thinner 21-06 (Amercoat 65). When used above 32C (90F) the Thinner 21-25 (Amercoat 101) is recommended. The recommended equipment cleaner is PPG Thinner 90-58 (Amercoat 12)
1/3
INFORMATION
1721
June 2013
4. OVERCOATING OF INORGANIC ZINC PRIMERS A mist coat / full coat application technique is required when applying over inorganic zinc primers to prevent application bubbling. Thin the mist coat up to 15% with PPG Thinner 60-12 (Amercoat 911). When used on substrates with temperatures above 32C (90F) use Thinner 21-25 (Amercoat 101). Ensure dry spray is removed from the surface. See also Information sheet 1706 for further recommendations on overcoating zinc based primers. 5. STRIPE COATING When PSX 700 is used as top coat in a two coat system it is of importance that the system thickness is accurate on all critical areas like edges, corners, welding seams and difficult to reach locations. It is required to apply on the primer coat an epoxy stripe coat on all these areas before application of PSX 700. It is recommended to use for this a contrasting, recoatable epoxy primer or build coat. Check with your PPG Protective & Marine Coatings representative for a selection of options. 6. FILM THICKNESS The inorganic nature and hydrolyzation process that occurs while curing of PSX 700 is resulting in a volume reduction of this material. Although solvent free it results in the final retained solids content of 90 volume % as is indicated on the Product Datasheet. It is for this reason that the application at a wet film thickness over 275 microns that will result in a dry film thickness over 250 microns is not acceptable. PSX 700 should always be applied in recommended dry film thicknesses between 75 and 175 microns measured as described in ISO 12944 Part 5 with a maximum dft. of 250 microns. Exceeding this maximum with a second repair coat is only acceptable when this first layer is fully cured. (alternative: 30 days after application of the first layer) 7. RECOATING When recoating new applied PSX 700 on repair areas with too low thickness or on damaged places it may occur that the fresh cured PSX 700 rejects adhesion of the second coat. This is usually shown immediately by a cissing or crawling back effect of the new wet applied material. In such occurrence the area to be repaired must first be solvent wiped with Thinner 21-06 (Amercoat 65). This will remove the effect and make the surface recoatable again. After aging and weathering exposure for longer periods the solvent cleaning before recoating is no longer required. 8. FORCE CURING When PSX 700 is to be cured with force curing equipment care must be taken that after application a short induction time of more 10 minutes at ambient conditions is used before exposer to hot air. This short pre-reaction time will prevent boiling-off from the low viscous hardener causing the mixing ration going off balance. It will also prevent breaking-up of the thixotropic agent in the formulation that could otherwise cause sagging of film forming disturbances of the wet film. Force curing should be limited to 90C (195F) to avoid any affects on the product performance or colour accuracy.
2/3
INFORMATION

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
1721
IN NO EVENT WILL PPG BE LIABLE UNDER ANY THEORY OF RECOVERY (WHETHER BASED ON NEGLIGENCE OF ANY KIND, STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT) FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN ANY WAY RELATED TO, ARISING FROM, OR RESULTING FROM ANY USE MADE OF THE PRODUCT. The information in this sheet is intended for guidance only and is based upon laboratory tests that PPG believes to be reliable. PPG may modify the information contained herein at any time as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the PPG product, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific inquiry, or otherwise, are based on data, which to the best of PPGs knowledge, is reliable. The product and related information is designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills in the industry and it is the end-users responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its own particular use and it shall be deemed that Buyer has done so, as its sole discretion and risk. PPG has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. Therefore, PPG does not accept any liability arising from any loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this information (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). Variations in the application environment, changes in procedures of use, or extrapolation of data may cause unsatisfactory results. This sheet supersedes all previous versions and it is the Buyers responsibility to ensure that this information is current prior to using the product. Current sheets for all PPG Protective & Marine Coatings Products are maintained at www.ppgpmc.com. The English text of this sheet shall prevail over any translation thereof.
3/3
INFORMATION
Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 Application & User Manual

a fifteen page issue GENERAL
1726
May 2013
The purpose of this manual is to provide information relating to the safe handling, storage and use of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 products from PPG Industries. The notes within this manual are given in good faith and are to be considered supplementary to other information such as the Technical Data Sheet and Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) available from our web site. It is stressed that the user of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 must ensure that they carry out a full risk assessment in line with their Duty of Care and other Legislative Requirements as appropriate. The user is also advised to read various guidance documents issued by the UK HSE for the safe handling and storage of Organic Peroxides. There are references to this documentation elsewhere in this manual. The information contained in this manual is based upon current best knowledge and is considered to be accurate at the time of publication. However, the contents will be subject to revision from time to time due to our policy of continuously improving our products, processes and service.
Page 1 of 15
INFORMATION

May 2013
1 2 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 13
1726
Application and Use Manual Contents

Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 Application & Use Manual Revision Control Application and Use Manual contents 1.0 introduction 2.0 Safe Use and Disposal of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 2.1 Hazards Associated with Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 catalyst 2.2 Disposal 2.2.1 Disposal of Waste from Mixing and Application Operations 2.2.1.1 Unmixed base 2.2.1.2 Mixed paint 2.2.1.3 Full or part bottles of peroxide catalyst 2.2.1.4 Empty used bottles of peroxide containing dregs' 2.2.2 Disposal of Spillage 2.2.2.1 Spillage of the base component 2.2.2.2 Spillage of the base component 2.2.2.3 A spillage of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 catalyst 2.3 Specific Hazards to be aware of when handling and applying Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 2.3.1 Addition of hydrocarbon solvent to thin the material 2.3.2 Addition of MEKP to base that is not being stirred 2.3.3 Excessive addition of MEKP to base 2.3.4 Mixed material left to stand over break periods 2.3.5 Disposal of MEKP into waste skips containing organic matter Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 Safe Handling - Dos and donts 3.0 Surface reparation 3.1 Steel Surfaces 3.1.1 Preparation Prior to Blast Cleaning 3.1.1.1 Degreasing 3.1.1.2 Surface Defect Repair 3.1.1.3 Blast Cleaning 3.1.1.4 Soluble salt contamination 3.2 Concrete Surfaces 3.2.1 Concrete Preparation 4.0 Handling, Storage and Application guidelines 4.1 Storage 4.2 Mixing Procedure For . Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 4.3 Application 4.3.1 Spray Application 4.3.2 Application Procedure for Press Faced Flanges 4.4 Removal and Repair Procedure 5.0 Spreading Rates and Overcoating Times 5.1 Spreading Rates Surface Profile Surface Porosity Method of Application Normal Wastage Over Application 5.2 Over-coating Times
Page 2 of 15
INFORMATION

May 2013
1726
1.0 Introduction
Sigmashield 4800/4801 coatings and linings are high performance, glass flake reinforced ester and polyester products developed and supplied under PPG Industries strict standards of quality control and in compliance with its ISO 9001:2000 registration. The permeability of resin-based linings can be significantly reduced by the use of high performance flake fillers, and due to their size and purity glass flakes exhibit outstanding performance in this respect. As they are only 3-4 microns thick there can be as many as 150 layers of overlapping glass flakes in a 1 mm thick coating. The distribution and nature of the glass flake throughout the coating has a reinforcing effect, increasing resistance to impact and abrasion, enhancing resistance to undercutting. Shrinkage stress in the resin is reduced and the coefficient of expansion becomes closer to that of steel, which with its excellent adhesion makes Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 ideally suited to the lining of steel vessels where thermal shock is encountered. Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 cures by a chemical reaction, which is initiated by use of a catalyst. The product is supplied as a base component (a blend of resin and reinforcing glass flake) and a separate catalyst, which is added to the base just prior to application. The reaction between the base and the catalyst is exothermic and produces an increase in temperature, which can significantly reduce the effective working pot life. It is therefore essential to follow the recommended procedure as closely as possible to avoid undue wastage of material and damage to equipment. All information given in this literature is based on a catalyst level of 0.5% of total weight, which will provide the optimal protection for the majority of applications. It is possible to adjust the ratio of catalyst between 0.5% and 1%, however, an increase in catalyst will significantly reduce pot life and variation of catalyst level is at the users own discretion. In certain cases, where the ultimate in chemical resistance is required, it may be necessary to post cure the coating by means of additional heating. In such cases the specification for the job in question will identify the need. Further information relating to individual products is given in the relevant data sheet and the detailed project specification. Typical uses for Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 Agitators Ballast Tanks Steel Tank Linings Valves Hoppers Pilings Concrete Bunds Fan Cases Floor Channels Scrubbers Ships Holds Pipe Lines Pumps Road Tankers Stacks Structural Ships Hulls Shutes Silos
Page 3 of 15
INFORMATION

May 2013
1726
2.0 Safe Use and Disposal of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801
This information is given as a basic guide only and no liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions, or for any action or inaction on the part of the user. Users must ensure that they have undertaken a proper risk assessment of any process involving the use of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 have made themselves fully aware of the necessary safe handling precautions. Reference should be made to the relevant Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 Product Safety Data Sheet, Container Label and Product Technical Data Sheet. In the UK the Health and Safety Executive have issued a guidance note entitled: Guidance Note CS21 'The Storage and Handling of Organic Peroxides'. Where UK HSE guidance is relevant, customers are advised to obtain a copy of this document for reference.
2.1 Hazards Associated with Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 catalyst

The catalyst used to cure Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 is supplied in small polythene bottles, separate to the pigmented 'base' component. The catalyst is a highly reactive, combustible and thermally unstable substance that can undergo self accelerating decomposition. It is also powerful oxidising agent and will react violently with other organic chemicals. Selfaccelerating decomposition occurs when a reaction generates heat (an exotherm), which speeds up the reaction generating still more heat and so on. This can lead to the release of hot flammable gases, which may ignite spontaneously. Explosion can occur where these gases are contained and unable to escape. Initiation of the runaway reaction can be by heating or by contamination (at concentrations as low as parts per million) with various substances. Where organic peroxides are spilled onto combustible materials such as paper or wood a fire may result. The recommended storage temperature of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 catalyst is between +5 C and +25 C and should be strictly observed. Specific legislation governs the storage of organic peroxides and HSE Guidance Note CS21 gives details of these as well as guidance on the construction and operation of dedicated storage facilities. The principal storage recommendations are: Keep in original containers Hold within the predetermined temperature limits Keep in dedicated stores Prevent contact/contamination with other materials Minimise the quantity at the workplace - only have present enough for the job in hand Always wear as a minimum, face shield and gloves designed for use with chemical liquids.
Page 4 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
2.2 Disposal
Reference should be made to the MSDS and to Guidance Note CS21 (where applicable) but in general Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 catalyst must not be mixed with other products and must be kept separate from the base until it is required for mixing and application.
2.2.1 Disposal of Waste from Mixing and Application Operations

There are four scenarios to consider for disposal: 2.2.1.1 Unmixed base. Dispose of as 'special waste. Poses no greater risk than other paint types. 2.2.1.2 Mixed paint. If units are mixed only as required then the quantity is likely to be less than 20 litres. Part filled units (less than 20 litres) are placed in a 'bath of cold water such that the water Ievel comes almost to the top of the pail but does not cover it. This will dissipate the heat generated allowing the reaction to proceed in a controlled manner. Once the mixed material has fully reacted and cooled (usually overnight would be sufficient) it may be disposed of as special waste'. 2.2.1.3 Full or part bottles of peroxide catalyst. A waste container of clean water should be available in which to pour the contents of a full or part full bottle of peroxide catalyst. Care should be taken to ensure that the volume of peroxide added does not exceed the volume of clean water initially in the container. The peroxide will be de-activated by the water and thus 'made safe'. The wastewater should then be disposed of as 'special waste - water containing di-isobutyl phthalate'. 2.2.1.4 Empty used bottles of peroxide containing dregs'. As above these should be washed out using clear water, the washings being contained in a special waste' container and disposed of as in c. above.
2.2.2 Disposal of Spillage

Prior to first use of the product a full risk analysis must be conducted and the most appropriate method defined. The requisite equipment can then be made available and staff trained to deal quickly and safely with any spillage that occurs.
2.2.2.1 Spillage of the base component

This is best contained and collected with a non-combustible material e.g. Vermiculite and placed in a suitable container. It may safely be disposed of as 'special waste'.

This is best contained and collected with a non-combustible material e.g. Vermiculite and placed in a suitable container. DO NOT then confine the collected waste in a container with a tight fitting lid. Immerse the waste container in a bath of cold water as detailed in 2.2.1.2 above. Once cool dispose of as 'special waste'.
Page 5 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
2.2.2.3 A spillage of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 catalyst
This needs to be dealt with quickly and the most appropriate method will depend on the quantity spilled, the floor type and other hazards such as electrical equipment. In all cases water may be used to de-activate the peroxide and it is strongly recommended that sufficient clean water is available at the workplace to deal with any spill that may occur. On a non-absorbent floor where pooling of the spillage may occur it may be more appropriate to contain and collect the spill using a non-combustible material e.g. Vermiculite and place this in a suitable container. DO NOT then confine the collected waste in the container with a tight fitting lid. Thoroughly soak the contained waste with water to deactivate the peroxide, leave overnight in a safe place and dispose of as 'special waste - containing di-isobutyl phthalate'. On floors that are absorbent the peroxide may quickly soak into the surface making the use of Vermiculite impracticable. Use copious amounts of water to de-activate the peroxide as quickly as possible but be aware of any hazards such as electrical equipment. Do no allow the waste to enter the drains. Collect the waste and dispose of as 'special waste - containing di-isobutyl phthalate'. Keep the workplace and floor area clear of organic paint, which will react with peroxide catalyst. Do not attempt to soak up a spill using paper, rags, etc, as these will react with the catalysts and may spontaneously ignite. Do not dispose of empty or surplus peroxide catalyst in: Empty drums of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 base or mixed paint Part full drums of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 base or mixed paint Other waste containers such as skips, etc Before disposal consideration should be given to the Control of Pollution Act and The Environmental Protection Act. Specific advice and guidance should also be sought from the Environmental Agency using information presented in the Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 MSDS.
2.3 Specific Hazards to be aware of when handling and applying
Sigmashield 4800 / 4801
The following is not an exhaustive list of safe practices with peroxide catalyst, but are based on specific hazards that have occurred in the workplace during the use of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 . All users are strongly advised to read all literature available including HSE Guidance Note CS21, Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 MSDS, TDS and Container Labels or contact PPG Industries for advice.
2.3.1 Addition of hydrocarbon solvent to thin the material.

As noted above when peroxides react they generate heat, which increases the temperature of the bulk. The increased temperature accelerates the reaction, which increases the temperature still further. As the temperature rises the volatile solvents are driven off and at some point the temperature may become high enough to spontaneously ignite the vapours. Never add any solvent to Sigmashield 4800 / 4801
Page 6 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
2.3.2 Addition of MEKP to base that is not being stirred.
Where the catalyst is added without stirring there is a localised high concentration of organic peroxide. Such a localised concentration difference could be considered as 'contamination of the peroxide, a known cause of runaway reaction. The temperature may increase sufficiently to cause auto-ignition. Never add catalyst without continuous stirring.
2.3.3 Excessive addition of MEKP to base.

The more peroxide added to the base, the faster the reaction progresses increasing the rate of heating and therefore reducing the time to reach auto-ignition temperature. Correct handling of peroxide and adherence to our published guidelines will avoid these problems. Never add more than the recommended amount of catalyst.
2.3.4 Mixed material left to stand over break periods.

As described above the reaction generates heat, which drives the reaction faster, in turn generating more heat, and so on. If the heat cannot be lost faster than it can be generated a runaway reaction will occur. Using the material reduces the bulk in the container, which reduces the potential for heat build-up. When applied on a surface the large area allows heat to dissipate more quickly than it builds up. Do not allow mixed material to stand. The pot life is short and as well as the risks of fire can Iead to application equipment seizing up. Read the data sheets for information relating to the pot life.
2.3.5 Disposal of MEKP into waste skips containing organic matter.

Do not dispose of empty or part empty Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 catalyst containers in waste skips or in empty pails of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 base. At the point of contact between the peroxide and the 'organic matter' there is a high concentration of peroxide. This is a 'contamination' situation similar to that discussed above and can Iead to a runaway reaction and subsequent fire.
Page 7 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 Safe Handling Dos and Donts

The following list is intended as a quick guide only. Your company has been supplied with more detailed notes of guidance on the safe handling of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 as well as Product Safety Data Sheets - if in doubt ask to see these. When handled correctly Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 products are safe to use. DO Keep in original containers. Keep in dedicated stores. Keep within the storage temperature limits. Minimise the quantity at the workplace. Prevent contact/contamination with other materials. Wear face shield and gloves when handling peroxide catalyst. Add catalyst with continual stirring. Use mixed product straight away. Plan your work schedule in advance. Soak up catalyst spills using vermiculite or similar non-combustible material, or water to de-activate. Use water bath to cool pails of surplus mixed paint. DONT Do not contaminate unused peroxide. Do not add excess catalyst. Do not add solvent thinners. Do not leave mixed paint unattended. Do not re-seal containers holding mixed but unused surplus paint. Do not throw empty catalyst bottles into empty base containers. Do not spill catalyst onto paper, cardboard, wood or similar. Do not soak up catalyst spills wait paper or rags. Do not confine the waste. Do not mishandle catalyst or mixed product fire may result.
Page 8 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
3.0 Surface Preparation

3.1 Steel Surfaces
3.1.1 Preparation Prior to Blast Cleaning
3.1.1.1 Degreasing All surfaces must be clean, dry and free from oil, grease, and other surface contaminants prior to grit blasting. This may be carried out by high-pressure hot water detergent wash and rinse, or scrubbing with an emulsifiable solvent degreaser followed by thorough fresh water rinsing. Apart from small areas, solvent cleaning by hand is not recommended, as there is a tendency for oil and grease to be spread around and re-deposited on the surface as the solvent evaporates. Where it is unavoidable, very frequent changes of a suitable absorbent cotton cloth are essential. Health and Safety Regulations must also be observed. Ultra High Pressure (UHP) Water Blasting at pressures in excess of 25,000 psi, is also an effective method for the removal of oil and grease. 3.1.1.2 Surface Defect Repair All surface defects, including weld splatter, cracks, surface laminations and deep pitting likely to be detrimental to the protective paint system must be removed. All fins at saw cuts; burrs and sharp edges shall be removed by grinding to a minimum radius of 3mm. Welds must be inspected for condition, as these are often a source of corrosion. Undercut welds, blowholes, discontinuous seams and other defects must be rectified by building up with new weld. Uneven welds are likely to be the source of corrosion and high spots will need to be ground smooth. It is not necessary to grind flush. 3.1.1.3 Blast Cleaning Blasting should not take place when the relative humidity is greater than 90% and the surface temperature of the steel is less than 3C below the temperature of the dew point. Surfaces should be prepared by blast cleaning to BS 7079 Part A1:1989 (ISO 8501-1:1988), Sa 2.5 and shall have a surface profile conforming with COARSE grade using ISO 8503-1 (1988) BS 7079 Part E1 (1989) Grit Comparator. If a surface profile comparator is not available then the measured profile should be in the range 75 125 microns. The risk of oil impregnated grit re-contaminating the surface cannot be stressed too strongly. For this reason the use of re-cycled grit is not recommended. Spent abrasives should be removed completely from prepared surfaces by vacuum cleaning, stiff brushing, or by blowing clean with dry, oil-free compressed air. Freedom from residual grit, shot, dust, etc. shall be checked by the use of transparent self-adhesive tape. The adhesive side of the tape should be pressed onto the surface and when removed, inspected for adherent rust, scale and abrasive dust. Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 should be applied before visible re-rusting occurs or within 4 hours (in an internal environment), whichever is the sooner. If discolouration or flash rusting occurs, it will be necessary to re-blast surfaces as above. Inhibitive treatments applied to the steel to prevent re-rusting are not to be used.
Page 9 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
3.1.1.4 Soluble salt contamination The maximum recommended chloride ion concentration on the steel surface is 5 g/cm2. Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 products are not suitable for application to zinc based surfaces, including inorganic zinc silicate, zinc rich epoxy, zinc metal spray or galvanised steel.
3.2 Concrete Surfaces

3.2.1 Concrete Preparation
Concrete is by nature a variable surface for the application of coatings and linings. Each job needs to be carefully assessed individually before treatment, to evaluate the best method of surface preparation. This is particularly the case with old unknown concrete and PPG Industries Technical Department should be consulted for advice and to determine the need for a site inspection. In general the following points should be taken into consideration: Concrete must be at least eight weeks old with moisture content of no more than 5%. Skimmed floors may well suffer from surface laitance, which is best removed by controlled blast cleaning to avoid exposing concrete aggregate. In the case of coarse concrete, mechanical scabbling may be a more advisable alternative. All cracks and other imperfections should be cut out with square edges and made good with an approved cement mortar or filler. The edges must be close knit and the filling level with the surrounding surface. All knibs should be removed, and repairs allowed to dry thoroughly before being coated.
Page 10 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
4.0 Handling, Storage and Application Guidelines

4.1 Storage
The Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 are supplied in 20 Kg or 5 Kg units, which are supplied with a bottle containing 2% of 714 by weight. For application under elevated temperature ambient conditions above 25C the material is supplied in a retarded form. This assists in controlling the rate of temperature increase and in extending the workable pot life at these higher temperatures. Under extreme application temperature conditions additional retarder may be required. This would normally be supplied following discussion with PPG Industries. Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 must be stored between +5 C and +25 C. The lower the temperature at the time of mixing, the longer the workable pot life.
4.2 Mixing Procedure For Sigmashield 4800 / 4801

In hot climates surface temperatures can easily reach 60C in direct sunlight so remove only sufficient containers for immediate use and keep in the shade. Stand these on a wooden pallet or similar to reduce heat transmission from the ground before mixing and during application. The temperature of the mixed material should be monitored; once this exceeds 40C the remaining working pot life is severely limited. The following graph shows practical pot life carried out under high temperature conditions and clearly demonstrates the influence of initial temperature on working pot life. In the case of the samples mixed at the higher temperature pot lives are unacceptably low for practical use, whereas samples cooled initially to 25C before mixing have acceptable working pot lives. WARNING Pot lives are only approximate. Should obvious thickening or lumpiness develop the material must immediately be removed and discarded and the equipment flushed using Thinner 50-02 Never add 714 to the base before adding and thoroughly mixing retarder if supplied separately. Never add 714 to the retarder or vice versa. Never attempt to thin Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 with Thinner or other solvents, since these can seriously impair the performance of the material.
Page 11 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
4.3 Application
Minimum air temperature 3C Maximum relative humidity 85% Steel temperature must be at least 3C above the dew point temperature. Maximum air/substrate temp 45C
4.3.1 Spray Application

A mechanical stirrer of the paddle type is required for mixing the material prior to use. An open top pail containing appropriate cleansing solvent (Thinner 50-02) should be available for flushing pump unit, together with a selection of tools for removal of gun, hoses and pump wet end. Operatives must wear suitable protective clothing and appropriate health and safety advice to be followed in all cases. The spray pump should be an airless type with a minimum ratio of 45:1 and a delivery rate of 4 litres per minute. The pump should be fitted with leather seals although Teflon (PTFE) is acceptable. All fluid filters should be removed from the system. A 10mm (3/8) I.D. nylon fluid hose is required. Fluid hose of small diameter is unsuitable and must not be used. The gun should be large bore mastic type (Graco Hydramastic Golden) fitted with swivel connector to allow free movement of the hose. Tip size between 0.58mm and 1.01mm (23-40 thou) can be used with appropriate fan angle for the piece to be coated. Reverse-a-clean or Titan adjustable tips are ideally suited to this application. It is recommended that spray equipment is flushed with styrene monomer immediately before spraying and cleaned with Thinner 50-02 during and at the completion of the spray operation. We recommend flushing of the equipment be undertaken at regular intervals if significant quantities of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 are to be applied. Ideally, two airless spray pumps should be employed, one for spraying, whilst the second pump is circulating solvent (Thinner 50-02) ready for switching, every hour (or less as circumstances dictate) to prevent possible seizing of equipment with catalysed material. Working pot life after mixing of retarded material normally 40 minutes at an initial mixing temperature of 25C.
Page 12 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
4.3.2 Application Procedure for Press Faced Flanges

This procedure covers the application of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 glass flake reinforced polyester and ester linings on flanges to obtain the smoothest possible finish. Surface should be grit blasted and primed in accordance with the relevant application data sheets, and one coat of the lining system applied. A melamine-faced chipboard (16mm thick) should be obtained and cut to the outside size of the flange face to be lined. Ideally this board should be drilled to accept nuts and bolts for clamping it in place through bolt holes already present in the flange, alternatively G clamps can be used but these are only really suitable for small flanges. This should then be thoroughly waxed and polished 3 to 5 times using a suitable mould release wax. A small quantity of the specified Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 material should then be mixed thoroughly with the correct quantity and type of 714 and applied at approximately 1000 microns onto the waxed surface. Allow to cure. The glass flake material on the board should be over-coated with freshly mixed material and the flange face should be coated simultaneously while the two surfaces are still wet they should be clamped together as described in 4 above. Remove excess material, for example in nozzle bore while in the uncured state. Leave overnight before removing board by sharp lateral force. Clean off excess material from edges, bore, and bolt holes using a rasp or file taking care not to penetrate through to the steel.
NB: For raised face flanges a spacer may be incorporated into the wet material on the Melamine board if considered necessary, to ensure a minimum thickness.
4.4 Removal and Repair Procedure

Existing surfaces should be clean and free from previous cargo, contamination, etc. Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 should be removed using angle grinders to a firm edge and these edges feathered to provide a gentle transition from substrate to the original upper surface. The underlying steel surface should then be spot-blasted in accordance with section 3.1.1.3 immediately prior to coating. The Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 system should then be re-applied to the specified film thickness in line with the recommendations set down elsewhere in this manual.
Page 13 of 15
INFORMATION

May 2013
1726
5.0 Spreading Rates and Overcoating Times

5.1 Spreading Rates
The spreading rates shown in our Technical Data Sheets as 'Theoretical Spread at Normal Dry Film Thickness' are calculated from the volume solids of that product. The figure given is the spread that would be achieved if the paint were applied evenly to a plane surface without any losses at the dry film thickness indicated. The theoretical volume spread rate is calculated by the equation: m2 /ltr = 10 x % v (s) DFT in microns The theoretical weight spread rate is calculated by the equation: m2 /kg = 10 x % v (s) DFT in microns x SG or Kg /m2 = DFT in microns x SG 10 x % v (s)
Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 contains styrene, which is not considered a solvent as it chemically reacts with the resin in the presence of the 714. Hence Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 has a theoretical volume solids of 100%. However, styrene is volatile and a small amount can be lost during application prior to reaction occurring. Also Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 can physically 'shrink' as the polymer cures. Together these two factors can lead to the practical thickness being less than that expected theoretically. To account for this our Technical Data Sheets show a typical, practical volume solid of 80% 5%. Many factors must be considered when estimating practical spreading rates of paint and allowance must be made for: Surface Profile The degree of roughness of a surface (which may be natural, due to erosion/corrosion or from abrasive blasting) has an effect on the amount of paint used to cover the surface. This factor has a greater influence on first coat paints than on subsequent coats. Surface Porosity The degree of porosity of concrete and other surfaces will obviously have an effect on the amount of paint used, especially in the case of the first coat. The more porous the surface the more paint will be used.
Page 14 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
Method of Application Spray application generally causes more losses of paint than other methods, e.g. brush or roller. Quite severe losses can be caused due to over-spray and due to windy conditions during external painting. Normal Wastage This would include drips from brushes/rollers, residues left unused in spray pipelines, on brushes and in pots, drums, etc. Accessibility of Surfaces to be Painted Losses can occur if staging is erected in such a way as to make it difficult for painters to apply paint. Similarly, bad lighting or obstructions, which may make continuous work difficult, can also cause wastage. Over Application Where a minimum dry film thickness is specified an operator will normally apply more than the minimum in order to avoid deficiency corrections at a later stage. Measured dry film thicknesses are generally, therefore, found to be higher than the minimum film thickness specified. The variable nature of these and other factors mean that it is difficult for the paint manufacturer to give recommendations wastage. The estimation of a suitable allowance to cover losses in any particular circumstances can be best undertaken by the professional painting contractor or estimator in the light of their wider practical experience.
5.2 Over-coating Times

The minimum over-coating times which we show in our data sheets indicate the time to be allowed for the drying and sufficient hardening of the coating before applying further coats of paint and assume: That the coating has been applied at the normal recommended thickness. That the drying conditions during and after application were good, particularly in respect of temperature, ventilation and relative humidity. That the paint used for over-coating is suitable for the purpose and is applied by a suitable method.
It will be appreciated that the over-coating times shown in the data sheets are liable to variation if the above conditions are not met. Maximum over-coating times, where shown, indicate the optimum period wherein over-coating should be undertaken, to obtain satisfactory inter-coat adhesion. Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 products have an 'air inhibited surface' and are therefore indefinitely over-coatable (except wax topcoat). The over-coating times do not indicate the time required to develop maximum chemical or weather resistance
Page 15 of 15
INFORMATION
CONVERSION TABLES
a four page issue
1410
June 2013 revision of 06-2002 PRESSURE
GENERAL 1 atmosphere 1 foot 1 Imp. gallon 1 litre 1 litre 1 metre 1 sq. foot 1 sq. metre 1 US gallon 1 yard 1 metre degree C degree F = = = = = = = = = = = = = 14.223 lb/sq.in. 0.305 metre 4.546 litres 0.220 Imp. gallon 0.264 US gallon 3.281 feet 0.093 sq. metre 10.765 sq. feet 3.785 litres 0.915 metre 1.0936 yard 5/9 x (degree F - 32) 9/5 x degree C + 32
(kg/cm) atmosphere (bar) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(p.s.i.) lb/sq.in. 14.2 28.4 42.7 56.9 71.1 85.3 99.6 113.8 128.0 142.2
(kg/cm) atmosphere (bar) 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200
(p.s.i.) lb/sq.in. 1420 1560 1710 1850 1990 2130 2280 2420 2560 2700 2840
VOLUME 1 Imperial gallon = = 1 litre = = 1 US gallon = = litres 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 50 100 4.55 litre 1.2 US gallons 0.22 Imperial gallon 0.26 US gallon 3.79 litre 0.83 Imperial gallon US gallons 0.26 0.53 0.79 1.06 1.32 1.58 1.85 2.11 2.38 2.64 3.96 5.28 13.21 26.42
DRY FILM THICKNESS microns (m) mils 8 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0 microns (m) mils 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8 5.0 5.2 5.4 5.6 5.8 6.0 6.2 6.4 6.6 6.8 7.0 7.2 7.4 7.6 7.8 8.0 microns (m) mils 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275 280 285 290 295 300 8.2 8.4 8.6 8.8 9.0 9.2 9.4 9.6 9.8 10.0 10.2 10.4 10.6 10.8 11.0 11.2 11.4 11.6 11.8 12.0 microns (m) mils 305 310 315 320 325 330 335 340 345 350 355 360 365 370 375 380 385 390 395 400 12.2 12.4 12.6 12.8 13.0 13.2 13.4 13.6 13.8 14.0 14.2 14.4 14.6 14.8 15.0 15.2 15.4 15.6 15.8 16.0
Imperial gallons 0.22 0.44 0.66 0.88 1.10 1.32 1.54 1.76 1.98 2.20 3.30 4.40 11.00 22.00
page 1/4
INFORMATION
CONVERSION TABLES
1410
June 2013
SPREADING RATE Sq.m./l 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 Sq.ft./ Imp.gal 49 54 59 64 68 73 78 83 88 93 98 103 108 112 117 122 127 132 137 142 147 152 156 161 166 171 176 181 186 191 196 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 sq.ft./ US gal 41 45 49 53 57 61 65 69 73 77 81 85 89 94 98 102 106 110 114 118 122 126 130 134 138 142 146 151 155 159 163 167 171 175 179 183 187 191 195 199 Sq.m./l 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 6.0 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 7.0 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 8.0 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 Sq.ft./ Imp.gal 244 249 254 259 264 269 274 279 284 288 293 298 303 308 313 318 323 328 332 337 342 347 352 357 362 367 372 376 381 386 391 396 401 406 411 416 420 425 430 435 sq.ft./ US gal 203 208 212 216 220 224 228 232 236 240 244 248 252 256 260 265 269 273 277 281 285 289 293 297 301 305 309 313 317 321 325 330 334 338 342 346 350 354 358 362 Sq.m./l 9.0 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 22.5 23.0 23.5 24.0 24.5 Sq.ft./ Imp.gal 440 445 450 455 460 464 469 474 479 484 490 515 540 560 585 610 635 660 685 710 735 760 780 805 830 855 880 905 930 955 980 1000 1025 1050 1075 1100 1125 1150 1175 1200 sq.ft./ US gal 366 370 374 378 383 387 391 395 399 403 405 425 450 470 490 510 530 550 570 590 610 630 650 670 690 710 735 755 775 795 815 835 855 875 895 915 935 955 975 995
page 2/4
INFORMATION
CONVERSION TABLES
1410
June 2013
VISCOSITY IN SECONDS DIN cup 4 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 Ford cup 4 15 17 18 19 21 22 23 25 26 28 29 30 31 33 34 35 38 40 43 45 48 51 Afnor coupe 4 17 18 20 21 23 24 25 27 28 30 31 32 34 35 36 38 40 43 46 48 51 54 B.S. cup 4 19 20 22 23 25 26 28 29 31 32 33 34 36 37 38 40 43 46 49 52 54 57 DIN cup 4 44 46 48 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 Ford cup 4 53 55 58 60 67 73 79 86 92 98 104 111 117 123 136 148 160 173 185 198 210 223 Afnor coupe 4 56 59 62 64 71 78 84 91 97 104 110 117 124 130 144 157 171 184 197 210 224 237 B.S. cup 4 60 63 66 69 75 82 89 96 105 109 116 123 130 138 152 166 180 194 207 221 235 249
page 3/4
INFORMATION
CONVERSION TABLES
1410
June 2013
TEMPERATURE C 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F 14.0 15.8 17.6 19.4 21.2 23.0 24.8 26.6 28.4 30.2 32.0 33.8 35.6 37.4 39.2 41.0 42.8 44.6
C = ( F - 32 ) x 5/9 C 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 24 26 28 30 F 46.4 48.2 50.0 51.8 53.6 55.4 57.2 59.0 60.8 62.6 64.4 66.2 68.0 72.0 75.0 79.0 82.0 86.0 C 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 F 90 93 97 100 104 108 111 115 118 122 131 140 149 158 167 176 185 194 C 95 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 F 203 212 230 248 266 284 302 320 338 356 374 392 482 572 662 752 842 932
Limitation of Liability - IN NO EVENT WILL PPG BE LIABLE UNDER ANY THEORY OF RECOVERY (WHETHER BASED ON NEGLIGENCE OF ANY KIND, STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT) FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN ANY WAY RELATED TO, ARISING FROM, OR RESULTING FROM ANY USE MADE OF THE PRODUCT. The information in this sheet is intended for guidance only and is based upon laboratory tests that PPG believes to be reliable. PPG may modify the information contained herein at any time as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the PPG product, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific inquiry, or otherwise, are based on data, which to the best of PPGs knowledge, is reliable. The product and related information is designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills in the industry and it is the end-users responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its own particular use and it shall be deemed that Buyer has done so, as its sole discretion and risk. PPG has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. Therefore, PPG does not accept any liability arising from any loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this information (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). Variations in the application environment, changes in procedures of use, or extrapolation of data may cause unsatisfactory results. This sheet supersedes all previous versions and it is the Buyers responsibility to ensure that this information is current prior to using the product. Current sheets for all PPG Protective & Marine Coatings Products are maintained at www.ppgpmc.com. The English text of this sheet shall prevail over any translation thereof.
page 4/4
INFORMATION
EXPLANATION TO PRODUCT DATA SHEETS

an nine page issue
1411
June 2013 revision of October 2010
GENERAL For ease of reference figures are usually stated in one unit only. Equivalents are given in the conversion tables. See sheets 1410 Conversion tables, 1412 Nomograph conversion from english units to metric units and 1413 S.I. units. All values are given for temperature of 20C (68F) and relative humidity of 70%, unless stated otherwise. GLOSS With a Lange gloss gauge 5 ranges of gloss have been determined, compared with a standard sheet of black polished glass. The gloss values are determined on Lange gloss gauge (angle 60) according to ISO 2813 (= ASTM D-523). The expressions used in the data sheets are: Flat corresponds with 0- 15% Eggshell corresponds with 15- 30% Semi-gloss corresponds with 30- 60% Gloss corresponds with 60- 80% High-gloss corresponds with 80-100% (at 20 angle above 70%) In practice, the level of gloss and surface finish will be dependent upon a number of factors, including application and the condition of the surface to be overcoated. COLOUR For products supplied in different colours three colour quality levels exist: 1. Good For finishes in general, especially based on polyurethane, this quality matches the colour standard 2. Approximate For undercoats and low gloss topcoats in general, this quality level is close to the colour standard 3. Best Match For primers in general, this quality level is near to the colour standard MICACEOUS IRON OXIDE AND/OR ALUMINIUM CONTAINING PAINTS Micaceous iron oxide and/or aluminium containing paints show different appearance and colour impression depending on thickness and application method. A touch-up by brushing may be visible on a sprayed area. SHELF LIFE The period from the date of manufacture during which the paint can be transported and stored in undamaged and unopened packing at temperatures between 5-35C, without any influence on the application or performance of the paint. After exceeding this period the paint is subject to reinspection. Water-borne products must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport.
page 1/9
INFORMATION
1411
June 2013
SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS & TEMPERATURES In order to achieve optimal application results, the technical requirements as stated in the relevant product data sheets should be followed. It is recommended that during the application and initial curing, the substrate temperature does not exceed 40 C, unless otherwise stated in the relevant PDS. However, maintaining the required conditions in practice might prove difficult, and the substrate temperature may occasionally exceed the recommended limits. In such cases special care must be taken to ensure proper substrate wetting and film formation, avoid excessive over spray, dry spray, sagging and other application related coating defects. Precautions such as additional thinning of the coating, providing suitable sun/heat protection and/or forced ventilation might be adequate. However, maintaining the recommended application conditions will facilitate optimal application results. For further details regarding substrate conditions and temperatures refer to: Information Sheet 1490 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Information Sheet 1650 Relative Humidity / Substrate Temperature / Air Temperature
page 2/9
INFORMATION
1411
June 2013
FULL CURE Full cure means, that the properties of a paint as described in the product data sheet are achieved (suitable for service). However, in case of dry bulk carriage an extra curing time may be required before the coating has reached its full mechanical strength and is suitable for carriage of hard angular cargoes FLASH POINT For paints the flash point is determined according to ISO 1523 (= ASTM D-3278, corresponding to Sigma method SM 311-41) or calculated. For thinners the flash point is determined according to DIN 51755 (corresponding to Sigma method SM 311-42) or calculated. Please always refer to the latest Material Safety Data Sheet for the paint and thinners. OVERCOATING TABLE The data given is a fair indication for normal conditions, longer drying times are necessary at lower temperatures and under unfavourable weather and/or ventilation conditions and higher dry film thicknesses. For epoxy coatings the minimum curing time for the recommended dft is given in the data sheets. For average dfts 50% higher, the minimum overcoating time should be multiplied by 1,5 and for average dfts 100% higher the multiplication factor is 2,5. Recoating data are based on atmospheric exposure, for other exposure conditions contact your nearest sales office. TOUCH DRY The touch dry time corresponds with the tack free time measured in accordance with ASTM D-1640 (corresponding with Sigma method SM 315-01). The touch dry time will be influenced by dft, ventilation conditions and substrate temperature. DRY TO HANDLE The dry to handle time corresponds with the dry-through time measured in accordance with ASTM D-1640 (corresponding with Sigma method SM 315-01) and indicates the time when walking over is possible. The dry-to-handle time will be influenced by dft, ventilation conditions and substrate temperature and should not be necessarily interpreted as ready for transportation due to the likelihood of excessive damage. DRY FILM THICKNESS (dft) / WET FILM THICKNESS (wft) The dry film thickness can be calculated from the applied wet film thickness: dft x 100 dft = wft x % volume solids wft = 100 % volume solids Recommended dft The dry film thickness for a paint system indicated in our system sheets is the recommended dft for the specific exposure conditions and based on airless spray application. Dft specifications referred to herein are valid for the coatings and coating systems in this manual unless mentioned otherwise in the respective product and system sheets.
page 3/9
INFORMATION
1411
June 2013
Minimum dft for application The minimum dft of a paint system (also a one coat system) should follow the 90/10 rule (e.g. 90% of the recommended dft is acceptable for up to 10% of the readings only), whilst for individual coats the minimum dft should not be lower than 80% of the recommended dft, and must form a closed film. Maximum dft for application - General Application of a paint at thicknesses in excess of the dft recommended on the product data sheet may result in performance problems. Such problems include solvent retention and a reduction in cohesive strength in association with certain types of topcoat. In a coating system, the dft of a primer is of the utmost importance. In general, Sigma Coatings would restrict the dft of any primer to 1.5 times that specified on the product data sheet. For a coating system, including the individual coats (except the primer), the maximum dft is 2 times the recommended dft, whereas for the critical areas of a painted structure, 10% of the readings can be between 2 and 2.2 times the recommended dft. Critical areas are e.g. weld seams, edges, bolts, corners, nuts and areas of difficult access. For coating specifications requiring coating thicknesses which exceed the recommended dfts as mentioned in the product and system sheets, the maximum dft allowed should be established per project prior to startup. Over-application and its consequences is a complex subject and is dependent on the generic type of system, recommended dft and number of coats, as well as the intended exposure. Please refer to your local Sigma Coatings office if you should have any questions on this important issue. The life time of any protective coating system is also determined by the dry film thickness applied to critical areas. The dft of all of these critical areas should be closely monitored and controlled by the application of stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system (or as recommended otherwise by Sigma Coatings). Please note that if a solvented coating has been applied over the specified dft then the minimum overcoating time must be increased to ensure that sufficient time is given for solvent evaporation. Care must also be taken to avoid over-application on critical areas during the progress of the job. Overapplication does not lead to enhanced performance life time of the coating system. Maximum dft for application - Linings For linings for severe exposure conditions or reinforced solvent free systems, the dft of the primer and the subsequent coatings can be more critical. Dft limitations are detailed in the respective system / product data sheets.
page 4/9
INFORMATION
1411
June 2013
VOC Until further notice, the heavy duty Marine and PC coatings industries in Europe must comply with the VOC Directive 1999/13/EC (SED). VOC values (in g/kg) to assist with the annual calculation of the solvent limits related to the SED requirements, are mentioned on each Product Datasheet as well as on the label of all products. For decorative, functional and protective coatings used in buildings, the VOC Directive 2004/42/EC applies. This is based on compliant coatings. Label Example: 1999/13/EC : 320 g/kg 2004/42/IIa (i) 600 (2007) 360 Explanation Label Example: 1999/13/EC : 320 g/kg 2004/42/IIa (i) 600 (2007) 360 Max VOC according to Directive 1999/13/EC for material in the can. Reference to the sub-category according to Directive 2004/42/IIa Threshold limit for sub-category according to Directive 2004/42/IIa from 1.1.2007 till 1.1.2010 The max content of VOC in g/l of the product in a ready to use condition (including maximum amount of thinner according to Product Datasheet).
SOLIDS CONTENT BY VOLUME This value is given in the product data sheet. It can be determined by a laboratory test, Sigma Method 31410 corresponding to ISO method 3233 or calculated from the formulation. The calculated theoretical solids content by volume is in general lower than the determined solids content by volume. The latter approximates best to practice, assuming that the table for spreading rate losses is used correctly. Diluents with a high boiling point and low vapour pressure are widely used in solvent free coatings, they will remain in the cured film under normal ambient conditions and will therefore have negligible effect on the volume solids of these specific products. Furthermore, due to the relative high boiling point and rather low vapor pressure of these diluents, the ventilation requirements when using solvent free coatings in confined spaces to maintain the internal atmosphere at 10% of the Lower Explosion Limit, will be unchanged. TOLERANCES Values given for specific gravity, theoretical spreading rate and solids content are averages from standard production batches; these values can vary slightly, also for colours of one product.
page 5/9
INFORMATION
1411
June 2013
VENTILATION Adequate ventilation during application and curing of the coating is not only required for health and safety reasons but also to ensure that the coating gives optimal performance. Stagnant air/high vapour concentrations in confined spaces must be avoided. Forced ventilation will help to avoid high vapour concentrations and possible solvent entrapment in the coating which may produce a temporary plasticising effect. Ventilation with cold, humid air in the drying stage should be avoided. Also avoid ventilation with heated air during the wet film forming stage as this approach may give skinning and increased solvent entrapment. For more information, see the following data sheets: 1430 Safety indications 1431 Safety in confined spaces and health safety, explosion hazard - toxic hazard 1434 Directives for ventilation practice THEORETICAL SPREADING RATE The theoretical spreading rate m/l for a given dry film thickness can be calculated from: m/l = % volume solids x 10 dry film thickness (in m) PRACTICAL SPREADING RATE The practical spreading rate depends on a number of factors: surface condition and profile, application method, normal, high build or solvent-free paint, skill of labour and weather conditions. It is often estimated at about 70 % of the theoretical spreading rate but under many conditions this is still far too high. For calculation purposes the following table has been composed in which spreading rate LOSSES are compiled. Substrates like wood and concrete are not included because they present too many other variable factors, especially in the preparation, the filling of pores, etc. RECOMMENDED THINNERS This product must only be thinned using the recommended Sigma thinners. The use of alternative thinners, particularly these containing alcohols, can severely inhibit the curing mechanism of certain coating types and will influence the performance. In case of the use of other thinners than advised, Sigma Coatings will not accept any responsibility.
page 6/9
INFORMATION
1411
June 2013
ESTIMATED LOSSES IN PERCENTAGES ALL FIGURES 10 DEPENDING ON CIRCUMSTANCES (AS GUIDE ONLY) BARE STEEL/FIRST COAT 4) Type of surface and application method NEW blast-cleaned A-B-C ISO-Sa2 inside LARGE 1) airless spray air-spray roller airless spray air-spray roller-brush airless spray brush 30 40 35 45 50 25 85 20 40 50 35 55 60 25 85 20 OLD derusted C St 3 / D ISO-Sa2 40 50 40 55 65 25 85 20 50 60 40 65 65 30 85 20 COATED STEEL/NEXT COAT NEW including shop primer OLD due for maintenance outside 45 55 40 60 60 30 85 30
outside inside
outside inside 25 35 30 40 45 20 85 20
outside inside 35 45 30 50 55 20 85 20 35 45 40 50 60 30 85 30
SMALL 2)
FRAMEWORK 3)
1) LARGE SURFACES 2) SMALL SURFACES 3) FRAMEWORK : 4) PRIMERS : steel profile
: hull, decks, deckhouses, tanks, holds : masts, water ways, machinery, structural steel and complex structures ladders, piping and railings consumption of first coat is always higher than for subsequent coats because of the
Estimation of volume of paint necessary for a paint job can be calculated from: 10 x A x DFT = Q VS x (100-W) EXAMPLE Q A DFT VS W = = = = = quantity in litre area in m dry film thickness % volume solids (see data sheet) estimated losses (see table) Q A DFT VS W Q = = = = = to be calculated 1000 m 100 m 50% 40%
= 10 x 1000 x 100 = 333 ltr. 50 x (100-40)
page 7/9
INFORMATION
1411
June 2013
NOZZLE ORIFICE AND SPRAY ANGLE In the product data sheets only the recommended orifice is stated. The choice of the spray angle depends very much on the practical situation. The table below compares orifice and angle with the corresponding codes of various manufacturers. Please consult other manufacturers for their corresponding codes. ORIFICE Inches 0,007 0,009 0,009 0,011 0,011 0,011 0,013 0,013 0,013 0,013 0,015 0,015 0,015 0,018 0,018 0,021 0,021 0,026 0,026 0,026 0,036 0,036
1) In
WIWA - Spray Tips 1) Angle 40 40 65 25 40 65 25 50 65 80 40 65 80 65 80 65 80 40 65 95 40 80 018/40 023/40 -028/25 028/40 028/65 033/25 033/50 033/65 033/80 038/40 038/65 -046/65 -053/65 -066/40 066/65 -091/40 091/80 ----
GRACO - Spray Tips 2) Contractor Finish 163-407 163-409 163-609 163-211 163-411 163-611 163-213 163-513 163-613 163-813 163-415 163-615 163-815 163-618 163-818 163-621 163-821 163-426 163-626 163-926 ---
mm's 0.18 0.23 0.23 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.46 0.46 0.53 0.53 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.91 0.91
269-211 269-411 -269-213 269-513 269-613 -269-415 269-615 269-815 --269-621 269-821 ------
the WIWA number the relation between orifice and angle is clear
2) Orifice Size determines how many liters per minute can be atomized through the airless spray tip. The last two digits of the part number tell the Orifice Size in thousandths of an inch. In this example, the orifice is 0.381 mm (015"). For ordering use the complete number. Orifice Orifice Tip No. 163-415 Spray Width or Tip No. 269-415 Spray Width
Spray Width is based on spraying distance 305 mm (12") from the surface. Double the fourth digit of the tip part number to determine the approximate minimum Spray Width in inches. Add two inches to that number for maximum width. In this example, this tip size produces a 203-254 mm (8-10") spray pattern (width) at 305 mm (12") distance from the surface.
page 8/9
INFORMATION
1411
June 2013
MIXING RATIO - twin-feed products The mix ratios in volume for twin-feed applied products should be retrieved from specific data sheets. It is very important that right ratios are maintained but deviations up to max. 3% are acceptable unless otherwise stated on specific data sheets. These products are generally supplied ready for use after mixing of components as extra diluting is not allowed. INDUCTION TIME If mentioned on the product data sheet the coating should be thoroughly mixed and left for the recommended time for the particular temperature conditions at application. This induction time or precuring of the product ensures that the coating will give the required performance and application properties. POT LIFE This gives the time interval after mixing of the components of the coating during which the material can be applied, without change of application and performance properties of the coating. For solvent containing coatings an extra addition of thinner up to 5% is allowed. For solvent free coatings addition of thinner is not permitted. For solvent free and high solid coatings an exothermic reaction occurs, resulting in gelation shortly after reaching the end of the pot life. It is important to clean equipment with the recommended cleaning thinner before the pot life has expired and/or directly after completion of application of the paint.
page 9/9
INFORMATION
SAFETY INDICATIONS
a three page issue
1430
Most paints contain flammable solvents and some contain materials which can harm the skin, or damage the health if swallowed or inhaled. Whilst most countries have developed regulations to control labelling, storage and use of toxic or hazardous material as yet there is no agreed international code or system. Sigma Coatings will adopt the local requirements in any country where their products are sold, but since it is quite impossible and even confusing to apply all the marks which could be required for every country, a Sigma Coatings system has been developed which is standard for our products throughout the world. We will then add local regulation markings in addition, if required. Two major classes of risk must be controlled and precautions defined which will reduce the risk to acceptable levels: A) Health risks, these include: 1. Gases or vapours. These could include solvent evaporation during the drying period, or perhaps formed during heating of the painted object. 2. Liquids in the paint. These might be solvents, or perhaps binders, which may be toxic if swallowed or inhaled as spray droplets, or dermatitic or toxic in contact with the skin. 3. Powders or dusts. These can be formed during heating painted objects (e.g. flame cutting or welding painted steel), or be present in powder formed during sanding operations, or in spray mist. B) Fire or explosion risks, these include: 1. Fire risk during storage or transport. Most paints other than water based products can be ignited and will support flame. 2. Explosion hazard during application. Flammable solvents in mixture with oxygen in air can explode within certain concentration limits if ignited or detonated. The following sentences are used to define the classes of hazard and this data sheet gives details of precautions which should be taken in each case.
page 1/3
INFORMATION
SAFETY INDICATIONS
1430
June 2013
Relatively harmless paint
Normal measures which are always applicable are: Wash hands regularly and thoroughly with warm water/soap. Immediately cover any wound or cut. Do not roll cigarettes, smoke, or eat with dirty hands. Beware of possible dust or fumes resulting from sand papering or burning. Check carefully that there is no possible fire or explosion risk. Check whether extra ventilation is required. Flash point of paints and solvents is stated in all our product data sheets. This is the lowest temperature at which a mixture of the material with air can ignite or explode. If the temperature of the air is near, or above, the flash point it is essential that sufficient ventilation air is provided to reduce the concentration of solvent well below the lower explosive limit (L.E.L.). Mixtures of solvent and air can only explode when the concentration lies between the lower and upper explosive limits. These limits vary from one solvent to another but the LEL is usually about 50 g per 1 m of air. This is described in detail in sheet 1431. In brief 200 m ventilation air is required per kilo of solvent to maintain an atmosphere below 10% of LEL. Such a mixture is safe even at temperatures above the flash point. Solvents and other components in some paints can irritate the skin, and although in normal paints this may only be a minor and temporary irritation, dermatitis of sensitive skins can be caused by solvents or chemicals in some paints. These are indicated by this glove sentence. Barrier creams together with gloves, goggles and possibly face masks should be used. In all cases, however, the habit of using solvents to clean the skin after painting should be discouraged. Contact of paint with the skin should be avoided by use of barrier creams and protective gloves. Any paint on the skin should be removed at once with skin cleaning liquids or jellies and then washed with water. Dust, smoke and spray mist can be filtered by face masks containing a dust filter cartridge. Cartridges are also available which absorb both dust and solvents. These are only effective whilst there is no apparent smell of solvent. The filter is exhausted when the odour of solvent can be detected and the filter should then be changed. It is most important that the correct filter for the class of work should be used. These are described by the manufacturers of the face mask and filter.
Highly flammable paint. Flash point up to and including 23C (DIN 53213).
Gloves recommended Paint which irritates or affects skin or mucous membranes.
Mask recommended Inhalation of dust and spraymist is harmful.
page 2/3
INFORMATION
SAFETY INDICATIONS
1430
June 2013
Fresh Air Mask recommended Toxic substances in paints usually enter the body by inhalation of gases, vapours, fumes, dusts or spray mists. An indication of the level of hazard is Inhalation of vapour and the Threshold Limits Value (T.L.V.), at one time called Maximum Allowable dust is harmful. Concentration (M.A.C.). This is the concentration which can be tolerated by a healthy worker for 8 hours a day without adverse effects. The lower the figure, the more toxic the substance. The concentrations are given either as parts per million (ppm), i.e. cm of vapour per m of air, or for solid dusts as mg per m. The minimum volume for air required to achieve this safe level of concentration will be given in our data sheets. This volume may in some cases be as much as 20 times that required to reach 10% of LEL and in some classes of work it may be impractical to supply the volume of air required to allow the required rate of usage of paint in the compartment. In such cases it is essential that operators are supplied with, and required to use, fresh air masks or respirators fed with clean air at positive pressure. It is important that the mask has a good facial fit. See also sheet 1431. Paint contains heavy toxic Keep skin covered as far as possible, wear gloves and protect the eyes. substances and is dangerous. Avoid contamination of the skin. Provide very good ventilation and wear fresh air mask. Change all overclothes and shoes immediately after finishing the work. Keep dirty cloths and other objects separate, destroy or clean contaminated clothes with care. Wash the hands very thoroughly. Handle empty containers with care and avoid contamination of the environment with any poisonous paint or waste. THE SIGMA WARNING SYSTEM will show one, or a combination of more than one, of the described sentences. The safety code required in each country will be added to drums used in that country.
page 3/3
INFORMATION
SAFETY IN CONFINED SPACES AND HEALTH SAFETY EXPLOSION HAZARD - TOXIC HAZARD
a five page issue
1431
When paints containing solvents are applied in enclosed or confined spaces, two hazards can exist, explosion and toxicity and precautions must be taken to eliminate them. General aspects of explosion hazards The nature of this hazard is explained in detail below. The essential precaution to be taken is that sufficient ventilation air must be provided to maintain the ratio of vapour/air at no more than 10% of the lower explosive limit. The method for calculation is given below and data on minimum ventilation air quantity is given in product data sheets. If the flash point of the solvent is above the working temperature, then an explosion cannot occur. However, it may still be necessary to ventilate to provide a clean working atmosphere or to eliminate toxic hazard. An explosion is simply very rapid burning of a flammable mixture (in the case of paint, it is the burning of solvent vapour in oxygen contained in the air). The speed of combustion is so great that there is extremely rapid development of heat and pressure (6 to 9 times the original pressure). This can lead to destruction of the compartment and injury to work people. Three factors must be present to create an explosion. a. The mixture of vapour and air must be between the lower explosive limit (LEL) and the upper explosive limit. b. The mixture must be at a temperature above the flash point temperature of the vapour. c. A source of ignition with high enough temperature and energy must be present to initiate the explosion reaction. These three factors explain the reasons for the safety precautions. Ventilation to provide an atmosphere below LEL It is usual to specify that ventilation should be provided to reduce vapour concentration to less than 10% of LEL. This large safety margin is required to allow for variations in ventilation in all parts of a compartment. (P x A) + (Q x B) The minimum ventilation air in m per minute may be calculated from the formula: t Calculation P Q A B t = = = = = volume of paint applied in the compartment in litres during time t minutes. volume of added solvent used in the paint applied in the compartment in litres in time t minutes. ventilation air quantity for 1 litre of paint to reach 10% LEL. ventilation air quantity for 1 litre of solvent to reach 10% LEL. time of application in minutes of volume P of paint.
page 1/5
INFORMATION
1431
June 2013
Example 100 litres of paint (P) plus 5 litres of thinner (Q) are used within 45 minutes (t). Value A is e.g. 60 m (given in product data sheet). Value B is e.g. 130 m (given in product data sheet). Ventilation air quantity m per minute to reach 10% LEL is: (100 x 60) + (5 x 130) = 147.7 m per minute. 45 Remarks This quantity of ventilation air must be maintained throughout the application of the paint and also during the period of evaporation of solvent. The ventilation must be arranged so that all parts of the compartment are properly ventilated. It is necessary for the applicator or the contractor to check vapour concentrations (in varying positions) regularly with an explosion meter. If the concentration rises above 10% LEL, painting must stop until the vapour concentration is reduced to a safe level again. Flash point If possible paints with flash points above the ambient temperature should be used. This often is not possible, particularly in compartments heated up by strong sunlight in summer. In such cases it is even more essential that ventilation below 10% LEL is maintained. Sources of ignition Sparks, hot surfaces, flames and all other sources of ignition must be absolutely prevented. Flame proof lighting and electrical equipment must be used, spark proof tools and clothing should be used and all work must be prohibited in adjacent compartments. All equipment, whether electrical or not electrical (e.g. pneumatic pumps, spray tips, etc.) must be adequately earthed to ensure no accumulation of static electrical charge.
TOXIC HAZARD page 2/5
INFORMATION
1431
June 2013
General aspects of toxic hazard Many solvents used in paint have some degree of toxicity and it is necessary to provide sufficient ventilation air to maintain safe atmosphere below the threshold limit value (TLV). With many common solvents this may be impractical when applying large volumes of paint in a short time. In such cases ventilation to give a clear visibility and safety from explosion will still be necessary. It will also be necessary to provide operators in the compartment with fresh air masks or hoods. Barrier creams and protective clothing may also be necessary. Full details are given below and data for calculation of RAQ (required air quantity) are also provided. It is necessary to keep certain rules when using any paint since all can be harmful (even ordinary emulsion paints are dangerous if swallowed!). The following are basic safety precautions: Inhalation of dust and fumes This must be avoided by the use of ventilation or extraction. products should be used in well ventilated areas forced ventilation or fresh air masks should be used in confined spaces a face mask should be worn when spraying, sanding or blast cleaning Skin contact Some substances used in paint may cause irritation after repeated or prolonged contact with the skin and in susceptible cases there is a risk of dermatitis. operatives with a history of skin sensitivity should not be employed in processes where skin contact can occur prolonged or repeated contact of paint with the skin should be avoided barrier cream should be supplied and used gloves should be worn do not wash hands with solvent use a proprietary hand cleanser Ingestion The ingestion (swallowing) of paint must always be avoided. food should not be brought into or consumed in the work area where coatings are stored or used thorough washing of hands and face is essential after applying paint, particularly before eating or smoking if paint or thinners should accidently be swallowed, seek medical attention immediately
page 3/5
INFORMATION
1431
June 2013
Eye protection Steps should be taken to prevent material entering the eyes. goggles should be worn whenever necessary if the eyes become contaminated they should be irrigated with water; seek medical attention immediately Theoretical ventilation requirements In the product data sheets, data are given for the minimum required ventilation air quantity (RAQ) in cubic metres when 1 litre of paint is applied or when 1 litre of thinner is used. The TLV (=threshold limit value) for the mixture of components and solvents in the paint or for the mixture of solvents used in thinners has been calculated. Calculation The quantity of ventilation air required in m per minute during application and drying can be calculated from the formula: (P x M) + (Q x N) t P Q M N t = = = = = quantity of paint consumed in litres. quantity of thinner consumed in litres. min. ventilation air quantity needed to reach TLV of 1 litre of paint. min. ventilation air quantity needed to reach TLV of 1 litre of thinner. application time in minutes.
Example 100 litres of paint (P) are consumed in 45 minutes (t). 5 Litres of thinner (Q) were added to thin down the paint to the prescribed application viscosity. Value M is e.g. 780 m (see product data sheet). Value N is e.g. 2170 m (see product data sheet). The ventilation air quantity required during application and drying to reach TLV is: (100 x 780) + (5 x 2170) = 1974 m per minute 45 Remarks In semi-confined areas such as rooms with open doors and windows or the super structure of a ship, natural ventilation will be about 2 to 5 times the content of the room or space per hour, depending on weather conditions. The amount of fresh air necessary to reach TLV will be approximately 10 to 20 times the amount of fresh air necessary to reach 10% of LEL. When it is impractical to ventilate in such a way that TLV is not reached then fresh air masks must be used.
page 4/5
INFORMATION
1431
June 2013
Emergency procedure It may be necessary to enter an atmosphere which is unsafe. (You may have to rescue somebody). Before entering a confined space or tank ensure that: you wear breathing apparatus you wear a lifeline the lifeline is properly tended a watch is kept on you a means of communication exists a system of signals is agreed you and everybody else involved understand the signals You must also make sure that: a back-up or rescue squad is equipped to render assistance resuscitation equipment is on hand If you have to keep watch or tend a lifeline: keep a careful watch on your men below If you cannot see them: call out to them from time to time make sure they answer If they do not answer repeated calls or if they show signs of drunkenness or unusual behaviour: RAISE THE ALARM IMMEDIATELY DO NOT ATTEMPT TO RESCUE THE VICTIM BY YOURSELF DO NOT BECOME A VICTIM
page 5/5
INFORMATION
SAFE WORKING IN CONFINED SPACES

A two page issue June 2013 Revision of October 1999
Safe working is always of the greatest importance, but particularly during application of tank coatings. The illustrations on this sheet indicate the quite simple principal measures that will ensure safe working.
INFORMATION

June 2013
INFORMATION

a three page issue
1434
Ventilation is required for reasons of health and safety. In addition for solvent containing coatings the quality of a coating system is greatly affected by the amount and type of residual solvent in the layer when the coating dries or cures. Adhesion, water resistance, mechanical and chemical properties can all be adversely affected when solvents remain trapped in the paint film. Very slow evaporation of trapped solvents can also develop internal stresses due to shrinkage. The ventilation must be maintained throughout the application process at a minimum level of 10% of LEL value and for a period after application is completed when the paint cures or dries. As a guide line for good ventilation after application the confined space should be ventilated 4 to 5 times its contents per hour. Product data sheets indicate when any special ventilation requirements are required. Hot ventilation: Ventilating air with too high temperature can cause surface curing of epoxy coatings and although it may be necessary to produce a dry substrate before painting, the steel and air temperature should be such that when the application starts, the temperature of the ventilation (dehumidifier/heater) should be dropped so that the conditions stay stable. Hot ventilation air should be replaced by cool dry ventilation air as soon as possible after application of any coat is completed. Good ventilation consists of at least extraction at the lowest areas, but in most cases when controlled conditions are needed, also of air input (dry and/or heated). The combination of in and output must be correctly balanced. The opening of the extraction hose should be close to the bottom of the tank (approx 30-60 cm). Ventilation air should be directed to the bottom of the tank or compartment and should be extracted by exhaust fans of correctly balanced capacity. For complex structures the ventilation should be distributed over all compartments and confined spaces in order to facilitate good ventilation in all areas. BALLAST TANKS AND OTHER CONFINED SPACES. Due to regulations of the shipbuilding industry ballast tanks and double skin tanks count for many square meters confined spaces. Therefore it is necessary to pay good attention to the ventilation conditions during application, drying and curing of the coating on these areas. Depending on the structure of the ballast tanks, forced ventilation or natural ventilation is used during coating of the new building blocks. However, natural ventilation in many cases is not sufficient due to half open box conditions and can cause serious drawbacks related to health and safety as well as curing and performance of the coating. When ventilation is not sufficient solvents will not be removed, but will drift to the lower part of the section. As normally first the upperparts of a section will be painted, the solvents evaporating from the applied coating will drift to the lower part where it will attack the earlier applied coating (not yet fully cured) and this coating will absorb part of the solvents and swell. This coating will then be overcoated and problems related to bad adhesion, curing, water resistance etc. will result. In case of waterborne paints, this advice is not valid. Water vapour rises to the upper areas of the tank and may give condensation. Therefore it is recommended to position an extra exhaust outlet at the top of the tank.
page 1/3
INFORMATION
1434
June 2013
Also in this case ventilation is of utmost importance as drying under insufficient ventilation will prevent paint film formation.
page 2/3
INFORMATION
1434
June 2013
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY - IN NO EVENT WILL PPG BE LIABLE UNDER ANY THEORY OF RECOVERY (WHETHER BASED ON NEGLIGENCE OF ANY KIND, STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT) FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN ANY WAY RELATED TO, ARISING FROM, OR RESULTING FROM ANY USE MADE OF THE PRODUCT. The information in this sheet is intended for guidance only and is based upon laboratory tests that PPG believes to be reliable. PPG may modify the information contained herein at any time as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the PPG product, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific inquiry, or otherwise, are based on data, which to the best of PPGs knowledge, is reliable. The product and related information is designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills in the industry and it is the end-users responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its own particular use and it shall be deemed that Buyer has done so, as its sole discretion and risk. PPG has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. Therefore, PPG does not accept any liability arising from any loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this information (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). Variations in the application environment, changes in procedures of use, or extrapolation of data may cause unsatisfactory results. This sheet supersedes all previous versions and it is the Buyers responsibility to ensure that this information is current prior to using the product. Current sheets for all PPG Protective & Marine Coatings Products are maintained at www.ppgpmc.com. The English text of this sheet shall prevail over any translation thereof.
page 3/3
INFORMATION
CLEANING OF STEEL AND REMOVAL OF RUST

a ten page issue DERUSTING METHODS
1490
May 2013 revision of June 2007
The effective life time of a coating applied onto a steel surface is dependent to a very large extent on how thoroughly the surface has been prepared prior to painting. Surface preparation consists of primary surface preparation which aims to remove mill scale, rust and foreign matter from a steel surface prior to the application of a shop primer (prefabrication primer) or primer. Secondary surface preparation aims to remove rust and foreign matter, if any, from a steel surface coated with a shop primer (prefabrication primer) or primer prior to application of the anticorrosive paint system. A steel surface can be derusted in the following ways.
Wire brushing
Wire brushing, usually done with rotating wire brushes, is a conventional method, not suitable for the removal of mill scale, but suitable for the preparation of weld seams. The main disadvantage is, that treated surfaces are often not completely free of corrosion products and tend to become polished and contaminated with oil. This decreases the adhesion of priming paints and the performance of a paint system. Chipping or mechanical chipping is usually done in combination with wirebrushing. It is sometimes suitable for local repairs with conventional or special formulated paint systems. It is not suitable for general preparation of surfaces to be coated with epoxy or chlorinated rubber paints. It can be used for the removal of thick rust scale and economizes in later blasting operations. To remove rust, paint etc. from corners and angles in order to achieve a cleaned surface with a profile. Flame cleaning involves de-rusting by thermal treatment making use of burning equipment (acetylene or propane and oxygen). It removes almost all mill scale, but rust to a lesser extent. Therefore this method cannot meet the requirements of modern paint systems. Disc sanding involves use of rotating discs covered with abrasive material. It is used for local repairs. The quality of these discs has been very much improved, and these can give good standards of preparation.
Chipping
Needle hammer Flame cleaning
Disc sanding
page 1/10
INFORMATION
1490
May 2013
Sweep blasting
A hand operated form of superficial blast cleaning in which a primed or coated steel surface is roughened and is free of almost all visible contamination. (except oil contamination or traces of rust) A: light sweep, purpose: roughening of intact coating and improving the adhesion of subsequent coats Abrasive: fine (0,2-0,5 mm) is most suitable when the paint surface under treatment is not to be destroyed B: heavy sweep (approx ISO-Sa1), purpose: removing of not sound coating areas - layers Abrasive: small to medium (0,2-0,5/0,2-1,5 mm) Reference: Repainting of old metallic structures, limited blast cleaning scale Technical Guide, November 1993 Laboratoire Central des Ponts et Chausses 58,bd Lefebvre, F 75732 Paris Cedex 15
Dry blast cleaning
The impingement of a high kinetic energy stream of abrasive onto the surface to be prepared. It is either hand operated by jet or automatically by impeller and is the most thorough method of derusting. Centrifugal blast cleaning, compressed air blast cleaning and vacuum blast cleaning are well known types. The particles are as far as practical spherical and solid and should not contain more than the minimum practical amount of tails and irregular shapes. Primers to be used for shot blasted steel should be checked on performance. The particles show good angularity form with sharp cutting edges and should be substantially free from half-rounds (i.e. shot split in half). Unless otherwise stated in the specifications a mineral grit should be used.
Shot
Grit
page 2/10
INFORMATION
1490
May 2013
Water (abrasive) cleaning/jetting (Terminology NACE) Water (abrasive) blast cleaning
Different types of water (abrasive) cleaning/jetting are in use Below you will find the most commonly used ones For more info see also information sheet 1498 (Hydrojetting) Some examples of these techniques are given below, not pretending to be complete. New developments with wet blasting methods are presented regularly, improving the efficiency and reducing the amount of water or grit. LOW PRESSURE WATER ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING Pressure = 6-8 bar Water consumption = 90-300 l/hour Cleaning speed = 10-16 m/hour, depending on material to be removed Result: a surface cleanliness and blasting profile as required can be obtained. LOW PRESSURE HUMIDIFIED ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING Pressure = 6-8 bar Water consumption = 5-60 l/hour Cleaning speed = 10-16 m/hour, depending on material to be removed Result: a surface cleanliness and blasting profile as required can be obtained. ULTRA HIGH PRESSURE WATER JETTING (UHPWJ) Pressure - more than 1700 bar Use: Complete removal of all coatings and rust. The result can be compared with dry abrasive blast cleaning, but with flash rust after drying. The original blasting profile will be maintained. HIGH PRESSURE WATER JETTING (HPWJ) Pressure - from 700 to 1700 bar Use: Most paints and corrosion products will be removed, Magnetite and hard tightly adherent coating may be left but can be removed with difficulty. The original blasting profile will be maintained.
page 3/10
INFORMATION
1490
May 2013
Water cleaning
LOW PRESSURE WATER CLEANING (LPWC) Pressure - lower than 350 bar Use: Removal of salt, dirt and poorly adherent surface contamination. Mainly washing of surface HIGH PRESSURE WATER CLEANING (HPWC) Pressure - from 350 to 700 bar Use: Loose paint, rust, debris and material in pits will be removed, but black iron oxide (Magnetite) will remain. A uniform matte finish cannot be achieved. STEAM CLEANING Pressure = 100-120 bar Use: Removal of water soluble or water emulsified contamination; the substrate dries quicker compared to a water rinsed substrate.
ISO STANDARDS
When specifying a precise degree of de-rusting and cleaning of a steel surface prior to painting, PPG PMC uses the ISO standard ISO 8501-1-1988 and ISO 8504-1992. This indicates the following rust grades: A = steel surface largely covered with adherent mill scale but little, if any, rust. B = steel surface which has begun to rust and from which the mill scale has begun to flake. C = steel surface on which the mill scale has rusted away or from which it can be scraped, but with slight pitting visible when viewed normally. D = steel surface on which the mill scale has rusted away and on which general pitting is visible when viewed normally.
ISO 8501-1 Applicable to bare mill-scaled or rusty steel
page 4/10
INFORMATION
1490
May 2013
DEGREES OF PRIMARY SURFACE PREPARATION ISO-St Hand and power tool cleaning
The ISO standard indicates six preparation degrees. The following standards are often used in specifications: Surface preparation by hand and power tool cleaning, such as scraping, wire-brushing, machine-brushing and grinding, is designated by the letters St. Prior to hand and power tool cleaning, any heavy layers of rust shall be removed by chipping. Visible oil, grease and dirt shall also be removed. After hand and power tool cleaning, the surface shall be cleaned from loose dust and debris. When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease and dirt, and from poorly adhering mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. As for St2, but the surface shall be treated much more thoroughly to give a metallic sheen arising from the metallic substrate Surface preparation by blast cleaning is designated by the letters Sa Prior to blast cleaning, any heavy layers of rust shall be removed by chipping. Visible oil, grease and dirt shall also be removed. After blast cleaning, the surface shall be cleaned from loose dust and debris. When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease and dirt, and from poorly adhering mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease and dirt and from most of the mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. Any residual contamination shall be firmly adhering. When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease and dirt and from mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. Any remaining traces of contamination shall show only as slight stains in the form of spots or stripes.
ISO-St2 Thorough hand and power tool cleaning ISO-St3 Very thorough hand and power tool cleaning ISO-Sa Blast cleaning
ISO-Sa1 Light blast cleaning ISO-Sa2 Thorough blast cleaning ISO-Sa2 Very thorough blast cleaning
page 5/10
INFORMATION
1490
May 2013
ISO-Sa3 blast cleaning to visually clean steel Remark
When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease and dirt and shall be free from mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. It shall have a uniform metallic color. The photographs in the ISO Standard publication are given as illustration only. They do not represent the complete preparation degree, which also includes a cleaning operation which is not visible in the photographs. (colorless contamination). As far as blast cleaning is concerned, equivalents according to British and American standards are given in the following table. ISO 8501-01 Sa3 Sa2 Sa2 BS 4232 1st quality 2nd quality 3rd quality SSPC-Vis 1 * White metal Near white Commercial SP 5 SP 10 SP 6
Equivalents
* for more details see SSPC-SP com Roughness of blast cleaned steel To specify the roughness, a variety of values is used. Such as Rz, Rt and Ra. Rz = average peak to valley height = blasting profile Rt = maximum peak to valley height Ra = average distance to an imaginary centre line which can be drawn between peaks and valleys = C.L.A. = Centre Line Average (ISO 3274) Normally PPG PMC uses Rz values. Blasting Profile (Rz) = 4 to 6 times C.L.A. (Ra). The direct measuring of the dft of primers applied onto blast cleaned steel in a thickness up to 30 m is very inaccurate. A primer dft of 30 m and more gives an average thickness and not the thickness present on the peaks.
page 6/10
INFORMATION
1490
May 2013
When in the specifications blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2 is mentioned a blasting profile Rz of 35-50 m should be obtained using mineral grit unless otherwise mentioned. Above a Ra roughness of 17 m (= blasting profile Rz of 100 m) it is recommended to use an additional coat of primer to cover the roughness. A roughness profile above 100 m often results if heavily rusted steel is blast clean JAPANESE STANDARDS Standard for the preparation of steel surface prior to painting SPSS-1984 Surface condition These establish a systematic standard for secondary surface preparation prior to protective painting when shop primers (prefabrication primers) are used in the construction process of hull or steel structures. H A F D R = = = = = shop primed steel surface in way of hand welding shop primed steel in way of automatic welding shop primed steel surface in way of gas-burning shop primed steel surface having white zinc salt shop primed steel surface having rust in the form of spots
GRADES OF SECONDARY SURFACE PREPARATION The Japanese Standard indicates six preparation degrees. The following standards are often used in specifications. SPSS-Pt2 Surface prepared by wire brushing for the surface condition A, D and R,by wire brushing and disc sander for the surface condition H,by disc sander for the surface condition F. Almost all rust and foreign matter are fairly removed. If mentioned for other surface conditions (e.g. primed or coated steel), almost all rust and foreign matter, have to be removed by wire brushing and/or disc sander.
page 7/10
INFORMATION
1490
May 2013
SPSS-Pt3
Surface prepared by wire brushing and (in combination with!) disc sander for the surface condition H and A and by disc sander for the surface condition F, R and D. Rust and foreign matter are removed to the extent that the surface has a uniform metallic sheen. If mentioned for other surfaces conditions (e.g. primed or coated steel) all rust and foreign matter has to be removed to the extent that the surface has a uniform metallic sheen. Also used for the preparation of primed or coated substrate to remove rust from small areas such as scratches, pinpoints or areas of mechanical damage.
SPSS-Ss
Surface prepared by light blast cleaning of slug sands or grits. (Shop primer (prefabrication primer) with the little trace of rust is noticeable.) Also used for the preparation of a primed or coated substrates or galvanized steel to roughen the surface and to remove contamination or traces of rust. In the Japanese Standard the expressions Sd2 and Sd3 are used, which are equivalent to the Swedish expressions Sa2 and Sa3. Preparation grades of welds, cut edges and other area with surface imperfections. See illustrations in the standard
Remarks ISO 8501-3 Grade P2
page 8/10
INFORMATION
1490
May 2013
Degree of cleanliness
The ISO and the Japanese Standards give a visual impression of the quality of the derusted steel. However, chemical contamination like water soluble salts etc. are not visible and remains partly on the surface. Presence of excessive amounts of water soluble salts can cause blistering of the coating by osmosis. Water soluble salts in mineral abrasives. For tankcoatings the maximum value of water soluble salts in mineral abrasives is 250 S/cm (conductivity) (ISO 11127-6 1993). See further sheet 1491 Water soluble salts on the steel surface (ISO 8502-9 1998). Our maximum acceptable levels of water soluble salts, calculated as mixed salts, on treated substrate prior to coating application depends on the area and expected service conditions. mixed salts Cargo tanks Immersed areas Dry cargo holds 50 mg/m 80 mg/m 100 mg/m conductivity (V=15 ml) (10.0 S/cm) (16.0 S/cm) (20.0 S/cm)
Note
Determination of water soluble salts: see information sheet 1468 For water ballast tank areas to be treated in accordance with IMO resolution MSC 215(82) and cargo tank areas of Crude Oil tanks to be treated in accordance with IMO resolution MSC 288(87): water soluble salts limit equivalent to sodium chloride after blasting/grinding must be equal to or lower than 50 mg/m of sodium chloride. For areas exposed to atmosphere conditions; We recommend the limit per dry cargo holds as noted in the table. Prior to treatment the substrate should be High Pressure Washed with Fresh (clean) water. As a guidance we recommend that the conductivity of abrasives prior to treatment should not be higher than 250 S/cm.
page 9/10
INFORMATION

May 2013 REFERENCES Determination of water soluble salts according to the Bresle method (ISO 8502-6 2006) Specification for mineral abrasives Hydrojetting
1490
Limitation of Liability - IN NO EVENT WILL PPG BE LIABLE UNDER ANY THEORY OF RECOVERY (WHETHER BASED ON NEGLIGENCE OF ANY KIND, STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT) FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN ANY WAY RELATED TO, ARISING FROM, OR RESULTING FROM ANY USE MADE OF THE PRODUCT. The information in this data sheet is intended for guidance only and is based upon laboratory tests that PPG believes to be reliable. PPG may modify the information contained herein at any time as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the PPG product, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific inquiry, or otherwise, are based on data, which to the best of PPGs knowledge, is reliable. The product and related information is designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills in the industry and it is the end-users responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its own particular use and it shall be deemed that Buyer has done so, as its sole discretion and risk. PPG has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. Therefore, PPG does not accept any liability arising from any loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise).|Variations in the application environment, changes in procedures of use, or extrapolation of data may cause unsatisfactory results. This data sheet supersedes all previous versions and it is the Buyers responsibility to ensure that this data sheet is current prior to using the product. Current data sheets for all PPG Protective & Marine Coatings products are maintained at www.ppgpmc.com. The English text of this data sheet shall prevail over any translation thereof.
page 10/10
INFORMATION
SPECIFICATION FOR MINERAL ABRASIVES (ISO 11126)

a two page issue SCOPE
1491
June 2013 revision of June 2007
This specification covers mineral abrasives such as corundum, aluminium silicate slag, or any slag mixtures which are suitable for removing rust, scale, old paint or shop primer from steel by blast cleaning and giving a satisfactory anchor pattern. This specification covers only those abrasives commonly known as utility grades. REQUIREMENTS Material The abrasive may be any material meeting the requirements of this specification. It shall be composed of clean, sound, hard particles free from foreign substances such as dirt, oil, grease, toxic substances, organic matter and water soluble salts. The abrasive supplier shall certify that any product to be delivered conforms to all requirements stated herein. pH 100 gram of a representative abrasive sample is crushed using a mortar and pestle. Approximately 50 grams of the crushed sample is added to 200 ml de-ionized water. The pH of this slurry is then determined through the use of an electronic pH meter with an accuracy of 0.01 pH unit. A slurry mixture prepared in this way shall not have a pH below 6.20. Water Soluble Salts (ISO 11127-6 1993) The abrasive is mixed with de-ionized water, conductivity max. 1 S/cm, in the proportion 1:1, e.g. 100 g abrasive to 100 cm water. The mixture is shaken for 5 minutes, allowed to settle for at least 1 hour and then shaken again for 5 minutes. Some of the water is decanted, the temperature is recorded and the conductivity measured by a conductivity gauge. If the conductivity gauge does not have any temperature compensation adjustment, the conductivity should be converted to 20C or measurement should be carried out at this temperature. If the conductivity exceeds 250 S/cm the abrasive is rejected. If the abrasive is to be used for High Pressure Wet Abrasive Blastcleaning the total amount of water soluble matter should be below 0,5% by weight. Moisture Content Approximately 200 grams of abrasive shall be weighed to the nearest 0.1 g in a tared weighing dish and dried at 105 to 110C for 3 hours or more until successive weighings after additional 1 hour heating periods show a weight change of not more than 0.1%. The percentage of moisture is calculated as follows: percent moisture = original weight - final weight x 100 original weight of sample The moisture content for material deliverd in bags or in bulk shall not exceed 0.5% by weight. Oil and Grease The abrasive shall not be contaminated with oil and grease. 10 cm abrasive is shaken with 10 cm methylene chloride for about 5 minutes. 5 drops of the solvent are applied to a clean glass plate. After complete evaporation of the solvent the glass plate is exposed to ultraviolet light in total darkness. If there is blue fluorescence the abrasive is rejected.
page 1/2
INFORMATION
1491
June 2013
Hardness Examine the abrasive material under a low-power microscope (10 x) and, if grains of different colour or character are present, select a few grains of each. Separately place the grains thus differentiated between two glass microscope slides. While applying pressure, slowly move one slide over the other with a reciprocating motion for 10 seconds. Examine the glass surface and, if scratched, the material shall be considered as having a minimum hardness of 6 on Mohs scale. If any grains that fail to scratch glass are present, in any appreciable quantity, the total batch is rejected. Grain Shape The individual abrasive grains shall be angular in shape. Surface Profile The abrasive material shall produce a prescribed blasting profile Rz value (varying between 30-100 m)
page 2/2
INFORMATION
Surface preparation of steel pipes and fittings Shop application

a three page issue
1492
May 1998 reprint of 8-88
SURFACE PREPARATION Surface preparation of steel pipes must be carried out according to the Dutch standard NEN 6901 or the Swedish standard SIS 055900. The metal surface must be freed from mill scale, corrosion and all contaminations such as oil, grease, dirt, soluble salts, markings and old coatings. Weldspatters and laminations must also be removed. The coating must be applied as soon as possible after completion of the surface preparation. CHEMICAL PRETREATMENT The substrate must be precleaned to remove dirt, grease and oil. Pickling must be carried out on an industrial scale by one of the following methods. The first table describes a pickling process followed by a double water rinse. The second table describes a phosphating process consisting of pickling and rinsing followed by phosphating. The requirements for the pickling and the phosphating process are drawn up to avoid excess thickness of phosphate layers and to ensure that no acids remain on the substrate. All pickling - rinsing or phosphating liquids must be renewed when the concentrations specified are reached (see tables). The content of the bath must also be renewed when the pretreated metal leaves the bath with contamination or if sediment interferes the action of the pickling process. Table 1Pickling Process Pickling Hydrochloric acid Sulphuric acid 55 - 220 g/l 50 - 295 g/l ambient 50 - 65C 100 g/l 70 g/l till complete removal of millscale and rust First Rinsing Min. water temperature Max. acid concentration Duration ambient 0,75 g/l 5 min. Second Rinsing Min. water temperature Max. acid concentration Duration 70C 0,20 g/l 1 min. 70C 0,10 g/l 1 min. ambient 0,25 g/l 5 min.
Acid concentration Temperature Max. iron concentration Duration
page 1/3
INFORMATION
1492
May 1998
Table 2Pickling/Phosphating Process Pickling Hydrochloric acid Sulphuric acid 55 - 220 g/l 50 - 295 g/l ambient 50 - 65C 100 g/l 70 g/l till complete removal of millscale and rust Rinsing Min. water temperature Max. acid concentration Duration 60 - 65C 0,75 g/l 5 min. Phosphating Temperature Duration Max. iron content Normal phosphoric acid concentration Phosphoric acid concentration for application of epoxyand polyurethane coatings * 80C 5 min. 5 g/l 20 - 10 g/l 80C 5 min. 5 g/l 20 - 10 g/l 80C 5 min. 5 g/l 20 - 10 g/l 65C 1,00 g/l 5 min. --Phosphoric acid 105 - 225 g/l 60 - 85C 30 g/l
5 g/l
5 g/l
5 g/l
* The performance of epoxy- or polyurethane coatings on phosphated steel should always be checked in advance. BLAST CLEANING Before blast cleaning the surface should be thoroughly degreased by means of suitable detergents or emulsifiers. Irregularities in the pipe surface should be removed by grinding or rotating discs. The surface should be dry before blasting. Blasting must be carried out until to standard of cleanliness of SIS-Sa2 of the Swedish norm SIS055900 (see sheet 1490). Usually a blasting profile (Rz) is recommended of approx. 50 micrometers which means a Ra or CLA value of 10-15 micrometers.
page 2/3
INFORMATION
1492
May 1998
Ventilation of sufficient capacity has to be used in order to maintain a workable and safe climate during blast cleaning. The pipes should rotate during the blasting operation at a sufficient speed to obtain a regular blasted surface. Only suitable abrasives according to specification should be used (see sheet 1491). Attention should be given to the weld seams which have to be blast cleaned in a way that the whole weld seam is pretreated. Abrasives and dust should be removed completely from the blasted surface. ROTATING WIRE BRUSH CLEANING Pipes to be used for the transport of Natural Gas, showing only minor rust and in good condition, may be pretreated by rotating wire brushes before they are coated with a flowcoat. Before wire brush cleaning the surface should be thoroughly degreased by means of suitable detergents or emulsifiers. Irregularities in the pipe surface should be removed by grinding or rotating discs. The surface should be dry before blasting. Cleaning must be carried out until to standard of cleanliness of SIS-St3 of the Swedish norm SIS055900 (see sheet 1490). Ventilation of sufficient capacity has to be used in order to maintain a workable and safe climate during wire brush cleaning. The pipes should rotate during the cleaning operation at a sufficient speed to obtain a regular cleaned surface.
page 3/3
INFORMATION
INTERNAL CHEMICAL CLEANING OF STEEL PIPES In-situ application
1493
GENERAL ASPECTS The "in situ" cleaning process for new and old, often corroded, pipe lines should be started with a thorough inspection of the pipe line. The internal diameter of the pipe line has to be checked and samples of rust and debris have to be collected to confirm that the cleaning operation will give the desired results. Because the total cleaning procedure will consist of a number of pig runs, a lot of information can be collected about the vertical head and elevation profile of the pipe line which knowledge is of great importance for the final coating operation. Besides that it is critical, it is very important that all pig trains containing water, chemical liquids and drying liquids are being launched solid, travel solid and are being received solid in order to clean the pipe line with success. Any condition that might impose a significant under pressure in any liquid train can cause air intrusion resulting in inadequate surface preparation and transfer of liquids to a position behind the train. The improvement in cleanliness should be continuously monitored by analysing the cleaning and pretreatment liquids, followed by, if available, inspection through a camera pig. New in situ blast cleaning methods have been developed (sand jetting system) which may be very useful also to recoat previously coated pipe lines. Removal of Dirt Dirt, sand, loose rust, loose mill scale, bolts, parts of welding rods, corrosion debris, loose scale and remainders of products previously transported to be removed by mechanical cleaning with wire brush pigs and scraper pigs followed by line washing with fresh water and solvents. Degreasing Degreasing is extremely important as the presence of oil or grease will interfere with the subsequent acid cleaning. Detergent/water flushing requires a number of passes until analysis of the degreasing agents proves that all oil and grease is removed. Chemical cleaning All mill scale and rust has to be removed completely also from corrosion pits by several passes of prescribed strength inhibited acid solutions until the internal surface is near to white metal. The spend chemicals used for cleaning have to be monitored by analysis, the degree of surface preparation has to be checked by usual inspection. Passivating After the chemical cleaning all soluble salts have to be removed (often chlorides). To prevent flash rust formation a run with a prescribed concentration of inhibiting or passivating solution is to be carried out followed by rinsing the pipe line with fresh water until the water reach neutrality. Drying All moisture in the pipe line has to be removed in order that a dry steel surface is available for coating by sending selected drying solvents through the pipe line followed by pigging with foam pigs together with dry air or nitrogen ventilation. In this way a clean and dry surface is achieved, together with a dehumidified atmosphere within the pipe line giving optimal conditions to coat the pipe line in situ.
page 1/1
INFORMATION
SURFACE PREPARATION OF CONCRETE (FLOORS)

a three page issue GENERAL ASPECTS Once a coating or a polymer flooring has been selected it is essential that the surface preparation of concrete is done correctly, otherwise optimum performance will not be obtained.
1496
June 2013 revision of February 2009
New concrete: In the case of newly made concrete it is important that the concrete has been laid for a minimum of 28 days before applying a coating or polymer flooring. The moisture content of the concrete should be below 4 % by weight. The release of the surplus water is dependant on the thickness of the concrete, the season, the temperature and relative humidity of the environment and the prevailing ventilation conditions. So the moisture content of the concrete should always be measured. The moisture content at the concrete surface can be measured by an electronic instrument called Protimeter (Protimeter plc, U.K. telex 849305). An indication in the red area means that the concrete is still too wet. An indication in the green area means that the concrete can be coated. An indication in the yellow area means be careful. A concrete area of approx. 4 m should be covered by a plastic sheet for 24 hours after which the measurement has to be repeated. If the indication becomes red then the subfloor is still too wet to apply a flooring. A major problem with new concrete floors is the top surface layer known as laitance. This water rich top layer is formed during the binding period and is mechanically weak. In addition to the poor mechanical properties, the laitance has a chemical composition different from the rest of the concrete. Concrete floors with this laitance are obviously poor substrates to apply coatings to. It should therefore be a pre-condition that the laitance has been removed prior to the application of any floor coating or polymer flooring. Old concrete: The removal of all oils, greases etc., together with the removal of the remains of any previously applied coating is required to ensure a sound base for the application of a coating, polymer flooring or screed. SURFACE PREPARATION In order to ensure good adhesion and the long term performance of any floor coating or polymer flooring it is essential that the correct type of surface preparation is carried out. The removal of chemicals, oil, grease and fat must be completed before any other preparation work commences such as e.g. blasting or acid etching (ASTM D4259 or ASTM D4260). Mechanical tool cleaning must always be followed by removal of dust by means of vacuum cleaners. Removal of chemicals from floor surfaces: Concrete that has become contaminated by chemicals must be neutralised before coating. If the contamination is acidic, it must be neutralised with an alkaline cleaner and rinsed thoroughly with fresh water. If the contamination is alkaline it can be cleaned with detergents and/or steam. Oil and grease contamination can be removed by a combination of solvents, steam and/or detergents depending on the severity of the contamination.
page 1/3
INFORMATION
1496
February 2009
Abrasive blast cleaning: Abrasive blast cleaning should always be the best choice for the pretreatment of concrete if polymer flooring systems have to be applied. Blast cleaning is normally carried out using an enclosed system such as a Vacu-Blast, or Auto-Blast type machine. These systems are virtually dust free and work on the principal of propelling small particles of abrasive i.e. steel shot, against the floor surface whilst at the same time vacuum recovering the dust and abrasive to a recovery hopper. In addition to cleaning the floor and removing any laitance, blasting will leave the floor surface with a profile which will enable the coating to gain a physical as well as chemical adhesion to the substrate. Blast cleaning is the recommended system for large floor areas. Scarifying: Scarifying (sometimes known as scabbling) involves the use of rotating wheels and brushes to scour the concrete surface. The scarifying equipment is pushed over the floor and the enclosed rotating wheels abrade the surface. It is not as efficient or as dust free as a Vacu-Blast machine and can in the wrong hands, cause excessive damage to the substrate. It is most effective on small areas or areas where abrasive blast cleaning cannot be carried out. Power grinding: Similar to scarifying this method can be used to open up holes and voids and to remove loose materials from the surface of poured concrete and pre-cast slabs. Power grinding is slower than blasting but could be considered for small external floor areas. One should take care that the concrete surface is not polished by the power grinding. Wire brushing: Wire brushing can be used to remove loose material from the surface and open up holes and voids in poured concrete. This can be either by power or hand wire brushing, power wire brushing giving increased productivity and effectiveness. Impact tools: Concrete surfaces can be roughened using impact tools such as needle guns etc. However this method can be slow and should only be used for small repairs. Granulating or Hammering machines work quicker but should only be used if very hard concrete must be roughened or if flooring screeds have to be applied. Impact tools are normally electrically or compressed air driven and work on a principal of a sharpened tool vibrating against the surface. It is fairly easy for an inexperienced operative to gouge the concrete surface and therefore great care should be taken when using this method of preparation. Acid etching: This method of surface preparation is most suited for use on new concrete floors (not for sand/cement screeds). It is carried out to remove laitance but will not remove old paint or oil and grease and should only be used in areas where sufficient drainage exists to allow the removal of the water and acid solutions. To carry out acid etching the following procedure should be followed: Before commencing acid etching the concrete surface should be cleaned of all loose concrete. Deposits of oil and grease should be removed by steam cleaning or by using an alkaline cleaner or detergents. Thoroughly wet the floor with water Sprinkle an 8% to 10% solution of phosphoric acid in water uniformly over the floor. The approximate spreading rate is 1,5 m to 1 litre of solution.
page 2/3
INFORMATION
1496
February 2009
The acid solution should remain on the surface for 2 to 4 minutes and then be rinsed thoroughly with clean water. The rinsing can be done with a water hose and a sweeping broom. It is important that the rinsing is done immediately to prevent the formation of salts on the surface, which are difficult to remove. The concrete surface should be checked for acidity using pH paper and should have a pH of 7 or higher. Depending on the type of concrete, more than one operation may be required to achieve a satisfactory surface profile. A thorough rinsing with clean water should be carried out after each acid etch application. The surface profile after acid etching should be similar to fine sandpaper. The concrete should be allowed to dry prior to applying the coating. Personnel involved in acid etching operations should be provided with safety goggles, protective clothing, rubber gloves and rubber boots. Rubber buckets should be used for mixing the solution. THE ACID SHOULD ALWAYS BE ADDED TO THE WATER rather than the water added to the acid. Flame cleaning: Where conditions permit, deeply impregnated oils and greases can be removed from concrete floors by flame or superheated compressed air. This method involves the use of heat to bring the oil, grease etc. to the surface and should be carried out under strict supervision with the necessary precautions being taken in view of the possible hazards involved. After flame cleaning the surface should always be power tool cleaned.
page 3/3
INFORMATION
RELATIVE HUMIDITY - SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE AIR TEMPERATURE

a four page issue
1650
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN (VENTILATION) AIR-TEMPERATURE, SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE AND RELATIVE HUMIDITY To achieve optimum results in coating work it is essential to ensure that no condensation occurs on the substrate or in-between coats during the painting process. Air at a given temperature can only contain a certain (maximum) amount of water vapour. This amount is lower at lower temperatures. The maximum water content of air at different temperatures is given in the next table: Degrees Centigrade 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 Maximum water content g/m 4,8 6,8 9,5 12,8 17,3 23,0 30,4 39,6 51,1 65,0
From these figures the relationship between dew point, air temperature and relative humidity can be calculated. This relationship is given in the next table: Relation between dew point, air temperature and relative humidity Air Temperature C 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dew point in C at a relative humidity of: 50% 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 0.8 0.1 1.0 1.9 2.8 3.7 4.7 55% 2.9 2.1 1.3 0.4 0.4 1.3 2.3 3.2 4.2 5.1 6.1 60% 1.8 1.0 0.2 0.8 1.7 2.6 3.5 4.5 5.4 6.4 7.3 65% 0.9 0.1 0.8 1.8 2.7 3.7 4.6 5.6 6.6 7.5 8.5 70% 0.0 0.9 1.8 2.8 3.8 4.7 5.6 6.6 7.6 8.6 9.5 75% 0.9 1.8 2.8 3.8 4.7 5.7 6.7 7.7 8.6 9.6 10.6 80% 1.8 2.8 3.7 4.7 5.7 6.7 7.6 8.6 9.6 10.6 11.5 85% 2.7 3.7 4.6 5.6 6.6 7.6 8.6 9.6 10.6 11.5 12.5 90% 3.6 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.4 9.4 10.4 11.4 12.4 13.4
page 1/4
INFORMATION
1650
June 2013
Air Temperature C 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Dew point in C at a relative humidity of: 50% 5.6 6.5 7.4 8.3 9.3 10.2 11.1 12.0 12.9 13.8 14.8 15.7 16.6 17.5 18.4 55% 7.0 7.9 8.8 9.7 10.7 11.6 12.5 13.5 14.4 15.3 16.2 17.2 18.1 19.1 20.0 60% 8.3 9.2 10.2 11.1 12.0 12.9 13.8 14.8 15.7 16.7 17.6 18.6 19.5 20.5 21.4 65% 9.5 10.4 11.4 12.3 13.3 14.2 15.2 16.1 17.0 17.9 18.8 19.8 20.8 21.7 22.7 70% 10.5 11.5 12.4 13.4 14.4 15.3 16.3 17.2 18.2 19.1 20.1 21.1 22.0 22.9 23.9 75% 11.6 12.5 13.5 14.5 15.4 16.4 17.4 18.4 19.3 20.3 21.2 22.2 23.2 24.1 25.1 80% 12.5 13.5 14.5 15.5 16.4 17.4 18.4 19.4 20.3 21.3 22.3 23.2 24.2 25.2 26.2 85% 13.5 14.5 15.4 16.4 17.4 18.4 19.4 20.3 21.3 22.3 23.3 24.3 25.2 26.2 27.2 90% 14.4 15.3 16.3 17.3 18.3 19.3 20.3 21.3 22.3 23.2 24.2 25.2 26.2 27.2 28.2
Using these figures curves can be drawn which give the relationship between air temperature, relative humidity and dew point. (See graph). To allow a sensible safety margin normally the substrate temperature must be at least 3 degrees centigrade above the dew point. The dew point is the temperature of a given air-water vapour mixture at which condensation starts, since at that temperature the maximum water content of the air is reached. Many important conclusions can be drawn from the graph, e.g.: at a relative humidity of 85% the lowest acceptable substrate temperature is approximately equal to the temperature of the (ventilation) air. For this reason outdoor paintwork must normally be carried out at a relative humidity below 85%. at a relative humidity of 90% the difference in temperature between substrate and dew point will be only 2C, which means that the safety margin is narrowed. This can be overcome by raising the substrate temperature by approx. 1C. at a relative humidity of 70% the relationship between the acceptable substrate temperature and the temperature of the (ventilation) air is given by the following table: air temperature C dew point C lowest acceptable substrate temperature C 5 0,0 3,0 10 4,7 7,7 20 14,4 17,4 30 23,9 26,9
page 2/4
INFORMATION
1650
June 2013
Although the substrate temperatures given in this table are well below the temperature of the surrounding air no condensation will occur under the stated prevailing conditions. if the lowest acceptable substrate temperature is for example 5C and the temperature of the atmosphere is also 5C than the ventilation air can be heated and relative humidity will then be reduced according to the following table: air temperature C relative humidity % 5 85 10 60 20 32 30 18 40 11
In general reduction in temperature leads to risk of condensation. For instance steel cooled down during the night will often show condensation and this will not evaporate until the steel is heated up again by sunlight or other means.
page 3/4
INFORMATION
1650
June 2013
page 4/4
INFORMATION

a fifteen page issue GENERAL
1726
May 2013
The purpose of this manual is to provide information relating to the safe handling, storage and use of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 products from PPG Industries. The notes within this manual are given in good faith and are to be considered supplementary to other information such as the Technical Data Sheet and Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) available from our web site. It is stressed that the user of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 must ensure that they carry out a full risk assessment in line with their Duty of Care and other Legislative Requirements as appropriate. The user is also advised to read various guidance documents issued by the UK HSE for the safe handling and storage of Organic Peroxides. There are references to this documentation elsewhere in this manual. The information contained in this manual is based upon current best knowledge and is considered to be accurate at the time of publication. However, the contents will be subject to revision from time to time due to our policy of continuously improving our products, processes and service.
Page 1 of 15
INFORMATION

May 2013
1 2 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 13
1726
Application and Use Manual Contents

Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 Application & Use Manual Revision Control Application and Use Manual contents 1.0 introduction 2.0 Safe Use and Disposal of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 2.1 Hazards Associated with Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 catalyst 2.2 Disposal 2.2.1 Disposal of Waste from Mixing and Application Operations 2.2.1.1 Unmixed base 2.2.1.2 Mixed paint 2.2.1.3 Full or part bottles of peroxide catalyst 2.2.1.4 Empty used bottles of peroxide containing dregs' 2.2.2 Disposal of Spillage 2.2.2.1 Spillage of the base component 2.2.2.2 Spillage of the base component 2.2.2.3 A spillage of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 catalyst 2.3 Specific Hazards to be aware of when handling and applying Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 2.3.1 Addition of hydrocarbon solvent to thin the material 2.3.2 Addition of MEKP to base that is not being stirred 2.3.3 Excessive addition of MEKP to base 2.3.4 Mixed material left to stand over break periods 2.3.5 Disposal of MEKP into waste skips containing organic matter Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 Safe Handling - Dos and donts 3.0 Surface reparation 3.1 Steel Surfaces 3.1.1 Preparation Prior to Blast Cleaning 3.1.1.1 Degreasing 3.1.1.2 Surface Defect Repair 3.1.1.3 Blast Cleaning 3.1.1.4 Soluble salt contamination 3.2 Concrete Surfaces 3.2.1 Concrete Preparation 4.0 Handling, Storage and Application guidelines 4.1 Storage 4.2 Mixing Procedure For . Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 4.3 Application 4.3.1 Spray Application 4.3.2 Application Procedure for Press Faced Flanges 4.4 Removal and Repair Procedure 5.0 Spreading Rates and Overcoating Times 5.1 Spreading Rates Surface Profile Surface Porosity Method of Application Normal Wastage Over Application 5.2 Over-coating Times
Page 2 of 15
INFORMATION

May 2013
1726
1.0 Introduction
Sigmashield 4800/4801 coatings and linings are high performance, glass flake reinforced ester and polyester products developed and supplied under PPG Industries strict standards of quality control and in compliance with its ISO 9001:2000 registration. The permeability of resin-based linings can be significantly reduced by the use of high performance flake fillers, and due to their size and purity glass flakes exhibit outstanding performance in this respect. As they are only 3-4 microns thick there can be as many as 150 layers of overlapping glass flakes in a 1 mm thick coating. The distribution and nature of the glass flake throughout the coating has a reinforcing effect, increasing resistance to impact and abrasion, enhancing resistance to undercutting. Shrinkage stress in the resin is reduced and the coefficient of expansion becomes closer to that of steel, which with its excellent adhesion makes Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 ideally suited to the lining of steel vessels where thermal shock is encountered. Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 cures by a chemical reaction, which is initiated by use of a catalyst. The product is supplied as a base component (a blend of resin and reinforcing glass flake) and a separate catalyst, which is added to the base just prior to application. The reaction between the base and the catalyst is exothermic and produces an increase in temperature, which can significantly reduce the effective working pot life. It is therefore essential to follow the recommended procedure as closely as possible to avoid undue wastage of material and damage to equipment. All information given in this literature is based on a catalyst level of 0.5% of total weight, which will provide the optimal protection for the majority of applications. It is possible to adjust the ratio of catalyst between 0.5% and 1%, however, an increase in catalyst will significantly reduce pot life and variation of catalyst level is at the users own discretion. In certain cases, where the ultimate in chemical resistance is required, it may be necessary to post cure the coating by means of additional heating. In such cases the specification for the job in question will identify the need. Further information relating to individual products is given in the relevant data sheet and the detailed project specification. Typical uses for Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 Agitators Ballast Tanks Steel Tank Linings Valves Hoppers Pilings Concrete Bunds Fan Cases Floor Channels Scrubbers Ships Holds Pipe Lines Pumps Road Tankers Stacks Structural Ships Hulls Shutes Silos
Page 3 of 15
INFORMATION

May 2013
1726
2.0 Safe Use and Disposal of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801
This information is given as a basic guide only and no liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions, or for any action or inaction on the part of the user. Users must ensure that they have undertaken a proper risk assessment of any process involving the use of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 have made themselves fully aware of the necessary safe handling precautions. Reference should be made to the relevant Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 Product Safety Data Sheet, Container Label and Product Technical Data Sheet. In the UK the Health and Safety Executive have issued a guidance note entitled: Guidance Note CS21 'The Storage and Handling of Organic Peroxides'. Where UK HSE guidance is relevant, customers are advised to obtain a copy of this document for reference.
2.1 Hazards Associated with Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 catalyst

The catalyst used to cure Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 is supplied in small polythene bottles, separate to the pigmented 'base' component. The catalyst is a highly reactive, combustible and thermally unstable substance that can undergo self accelerating decomposition. It is also powerful oxidising agent and will react violently with other organic chemicals. Selfaccelerating decomposition occurs when a reaction generates heat (an exotherm), which speeds up the reaction generating still more heat and so on. This can lead to the release of hot flammable gases, which may ignite spontaneously. Explosion can occur where these gases are contained and unable to escape. Initiation of the runaway reaction can be by heating or by contamination (at concentrations as low as parts per million) with various substances. Where organic peroxides are spilled onto combustible materials such as paper or wood a fire may result. The recommended storage temperature of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 catalyst is between +5 C and +25 C and should be strictly observed. Specific legislation governs the storage of organic peroxides and HSE Guidance Note CS21 gives details of these as well as guidance on the construction and operation of dedicated storage facilities. The principal storage recommendations are: Keep in original containers Hold within the predetermined temperature limits Keep in dedicated stores Prevent contact/contamination with other materials Minimise the quantity at the workplace - only have present enough for the job in hand Always wear as a minimum, face shield and gloves designed for use with chemical liquids.
Page 4 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
2.2 Disposal
Reference should be made to the MSDS and to Guidance Note CS21 (where applicable) but in general Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 catalyst must not be mixed with other products and must be kept separate from the base until it is required for mixing and application.
2.2.1 Disposal of Waste from Mixing and Application Operations

There are four scenarios to consider for disposal: 2.2.1.1 Unmixed base. Dispose of as 'special waste. Poses no greater risk than other paint types. 2.2.1.2 Mixed paint. If units are mixed only as required then the quantity is likely to be less than 20 litres. Part filled units (less than 20 litres) are placed in a 'bath of cold water such that the water Ievel comes almost to the top of the pail but does not cover it. This will dissipate the heat generated allowing the reaction to proceed in a controlled manner. Once the mixed material has fully reacted and cooled (usually overnight would be sufficient) it may be disposed of as special waste'. 2.2.1.3 Full or part bottles of peroxide catalyst. A waste container of clean water should be available in which to pour the contents of a full or part full bottle of peroxide catalyst. Care should be taken to ensure that the volume of peroxide added does not exceed the volume of clean water initially in the container. The peroxide will be de-activated by the water and thus 'made safe'. The wastewater should then be disposed of as 'special waste - water containing di-isobutyl phthalate'. 2.2.1.4 Empty used bottles of peroxide containing dregs'. As above these should be washed out using clear water, the washings being contained in a special waste' container and disposed of as in c. above.
2.2.2 Disposal of Spillage

Prior to first use of the product a full risk analysis must be conducted and the most appropriate method defined. The requisite equipment can then be made available and staff trained to deal quickly and safely with any spillage that occurs.

This is best contained and collected with a non-combustible material e.g. Vermiculite and placed in a suitable container. It may safely be disposed of as 'special waste'.

This is best contained and collected with a non-combustible material e.g. Vermiculite and placed in a suitable container. DO NOT then confine the collected waste in a container with a tight fitting lid. Immerse the waste container in a bath of cold water as detailed in 2.2.1.2 above. Once cool dispose of as 'special waste'.
Page 5 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
2.2.2.3 A spillage of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 catalyst
This needs to be dealt with quickly and the most appropriate method will depend on the quantity spilled, the floor type and other hazards such as electrical equipment. In all cases water may be used to de-activate the peroxide and it is strongly recommended that sufficient clean water is available at the workplace to deal with any spill that may occur. On a non-absorbent floor where pooling of the spillage may occur it may be more appropriate to contain and collect the spill using a non-combustible material e.g. Vermiculite and place this in a suitable container. DO NOT then confine the collected waste in the container with a tight fitting lid. Thoroughly soak the contained waste with water to deactivate the peroxide, leave overnight in a safe place and dispose of as 'special waste - containing di-isobutyl phthalate'. On floors that are absorbent the peroxide may quickly soak into the surface making the use of Vermiculite impracticable. Use copious amounts of water to de-activate the peroxide as quickly as possible but be aware of any hazards such as electrical equipment. Do no allow the waste to enter the drains. Collect the waste and dispose of as 'special waste - containing di-isobutyl phthalate'. Keep the workplace and floor area clear of organic paint, which will react with peroxide catalyst. Do not attempt to soak up a spill using paper, rags, etc, as these will react with the catalysts and may spontaneously ignite. Do not dispose of empty or surplus peroxide catalyst in: Empty drums of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 base or mixed paint Part full drums of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 base or mixed paint Other waste containers such as skips, etc Before disposal consideration should be given to the Control of Pollution Act and The Environmental Protection Act. Specific advice and guidance should also be sought from the Environmental Agency using information presented in the Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 MSDS.
2.3 Specific Hazards to be aware of when handling and applying
Sigmashield 4800 / 4801
The following is not an exhaustive list of safe practices with peroxide catalyst, but are based on specific hazards that have occurred in the workplace during the use of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 . All users are strongly advised to read all literature available including HSE Guidance Note CS21, Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 MSDS, TDS and Container Labels or contact PPG Industries for advice.
2.3.1 Addition of hydrocarbon solvent to thin the material.

As noted above when peroxides react they generate heat, which increases the temperature of the bulk. The increased temperature accelerates the reaction, which increases the temperature still further. As the temperature rises the volatile solvents are driven off and at some point the temperature may become high enough to spontaneously ignite the vapours. Never add any solvent to Sigmashield 4800 / 4801
Page 6 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
2.3.2 Addition of MEKP to base that is not being stirred.
Where the catalyst is added without stirring there is a localised high concentration of organic peroxide. Such a localised concentration difference could be considered as 'contamination of the peroxide, a known cause of runaway reaction. The temperature may increase sufficiently to cause auto-ignition. Never add catalyst without continuous stirring.
2.3.3 Excessive addition of MEKP to base.

The more peroxide added to the base, the faster the reaction progresses increasing the rate of heating and therefore reducing the time to reach auto-ignition temperature. Correct handling of peroxide and adherence to our published guidelines will avoid these problems. Never add more than the recommended amount of catalyst.
2.3.4 Mixed material left to stand over break periods.

As described above the reaction generates heat, which drives the reaction faster, in turn generating more heat, and so on. If the heat cannot be lost faster than it can be generated a runaway reaction will occur. Using the material reduces the bulk in the container, which reduces the potential for heat build-up. When applied on a surface the large area allows heat to dissipate more quickly than it builds up. Do not allow mixed material to stand. The pot life is short and as well as the risks of fire can Iead to application equipment seizing up. Read the data sheets for information relating to the pot life.
2.3.5 Disposal of MEKP into waste skips containing organic matter.

Do not dispose of empty or part empty Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 catalyst containers in waste skips or in empty pails of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 base. At the point of contact between the peroxide and the 'organic matter' there is a high concentration of peroxide. This is a 'contamination' situation similar to that discussed above and can Iead to a runaway reaction and subsequent fire.
Page 7 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 Safe Handling Dos and Donts

The following list is intended as a quick guide only. Your company has been supplied with more detailed notes of guidance on the safe handling of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 as well as Product Safety Data Sheets - if in doubt ask to see these. When handled correctly Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 products are safe to use. DO Keep in original containers. Keep in dedicated stores. Keep within the storage temperature limits. Minimise the quantity at the workplace. Prevent contact/contamination with other materials. Wear face shield and gloves when handling peroxide catalyst. Add catalyst with continual stirring. Use mixed product straight away. Plan your work schedule in advance. Soak up catalyst spills using vermiculite or similar non-combustible material, or water to de-activate. Use water bath to cool pails of surplus mixed paint. DONT Do not contaminate unused peroxide. Do not add excess catalyst. Do not add solvent thinners. Do not leave mixed paint unattended. Do not re-seal containers holding mixed but unused surplus paint. Do not throw empty catalyst bottles into empty base containers. Do not spill catalyst onto paper, cardboard, wood or similar. Do not soak up catalyst spills wait paper or rags. Do not confine the waste. Do not mishandle catalyst or mixed product fire may result.
Page 8 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
3.0 Surface Preparation

3.1 Steel Surfaces
3.1.1 Preparation Prior to Blast Cleaning
3.1.1.1 Degreasing All surfaces must be clean, dry and free from oil, grease, and other surface contaminants prior to grit blasting. This may be carried out by high-pressure hot water detergent wash and rinse, or scrubbing with an emulsifiable solvent degreaser followed by thorough fresh water rinsing. Apart from small areas, solvent cleaning by hand is not recommended, as there is a tendency for oil and grease to be spread around and re-deposited on the surface as the solvent evaporates. Where it is unavoidable, very frequent changes of a suitable absorbent cotton cloth are essential. Health and Safety Regulations must also be observed. Ultra High Pressure (UHP) Water Blasting at pressures in excess of 25,000 psi, is also an effective method for the removal of oil and grease. 3.1.1.2 Surface Defect Repair All surface defects, including weld splatter, cracks, surface laminations and deep pitting likely to be detrimental to the protective paint system must be removed. All fins at saw cuts; burrs and sharp edges shall be removed by grinding to a minimum radius of 3mm. Welds must be inspected for condition, as these are often a source of corrosion. Undercut welds, blowholes, discontinuous seams and other defects must be rectified by building up with new weld. Uneven welds are likely to be the source of corrosion and high spots will need to be ground smooth. It is not necessary to grind flush. 3.1.1.3 Blast Cleaning Blasting should not take place when the relative humidity is greater than 90% and the surface temperature of the steel is less than 3C below the temperature of the dew point. Surfaces should be prepared by blast cleaning to BS 7079 Part A1:1989 (ISO 8501-1:1988), Sa 2.5 and shall have a surface profile conforming with COARSE grade using ISO 8503-1 (1988) BS 7079 Part E1 (1989) Grit Comparator. If a surface profile comparator is not available then the measured profile should be in the range 75 125 microns. The risk of oil impregnated grit re-contaminating the surface cannot be stressed too strongly. For this reason the use of re-cycled grit is not recommended. Spent abrasives should be removed completely from prepared surfaces by vacuum cleaning, stiff brushing, or by blowing clean with dry, oil-free compressed air. Freedom from residual grit, shot, dust, etc. shall be checked by the use of transparent self-adhesive tape. The adhesive side of the tape should be pressed onto the surface and when removed, inspected for adherent rust, scale and abrasive dust. Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 should be applied before visible re-rusting occurs or within 4 hours (in an internal environment), whichever is the sooner. If discolouration or flash rusting occurs, it will be necessary to re-blast surfaces as above. Inhibitive treatments applied to the steel to prevent re-rusting are not to be used.
Page 9 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
3.1.1.4 Soluble salt contamination The maximum recommended chloride ion concentration on the steel surface is 5 g/cm2. Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 products are not suitable for application to zinc based surfaces, including inorganic zinc silicate, zinc rich epoxy, zinc metal spray or galvanised steel.
3.2 Concrete Surfaces

3.2.1 Concrete Preparation
Concrete is by nature a variable surface for the application of coatings and linings. Each job needs to be carefully assessed individually before treatment, to evaluate the best method of surface preparation. This is particularly the case with old unknown concrete and PPG Industries Technical Department should be consulted for advice and to determine the need for a site inspection. In general the following points should be taken into consideration: Concrete must be at least eight weeks old with moisture content of no more than 5%. Skimmed floors may well suffer from surface laitance, which is best removed by controlled blast cleaning to avoid exposing concrete aggregate. In the case of coarse concrete, mechanical scabbling may be a more advisable alternative. All cracks and other imperfections should be cut out with square edges and made good with an approved cement mortar or filler. The edges must be close knit and the filling level with the surrounding surface. All knibs should be removed, and repairs allowed to dry thoroughly before being coated.
Page 10 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
4.0 Handling, Storage and Application Guidelines

4.1 Storage
The Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 are supplied in 20 Kg or 5 Kg units, which are supplied with a bottle containing 2% of 714 by weight. For application under elevated temperature ambient conditions above 25C the material is supplied in a retarded form. This assists in controlling the rate of temperature increase and in extending the workable pot life at these higher temperatures. Under extreme application temperature conditions additional retarder may be required. This would normally be supplied following discussion with PPG Industries. Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 must be stored between +5 C and +25 C. The lower the temperature at the time of mixing, the longer the workable pot life.
4.2 Mixing Procedure For Sigmashield 4800 / 4801

In hot climates surface temperatures can easily reach 60C in direct sunlight so remove only sufficient containers for immediate use and keep in the shade. Stand these on a wooden pallet or similar to reduce heat transmission from the ground before mixing and during application. The temperature of the mixed material should be monitored; once this exceeds 40C the remaining working pot life is severely limited. The following graph shows practical pot life carried out under high temperature conditions and clearly demonstrates the influence of initial temperature on working pot life. In the case of the samples mixed at the higher temperature pot lives are unacceptably low for practical use, whereas samples cooled initially to 25C before mixing have acceptable working pot lives. WARNING Pot lives are only approximate. Should obvious thickening or lumpiness develop the material must immediately be removed and discarded and the equipment flushed using Thinner 50-02 Never add 714 to the base before adding and thoroughly mixing retarder if supplied separately. Never add 714 to the retarder or vice versa. Never attempt to thin Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 with Thinner or other solvents, since these can seriously impair the performance of the material.
Page 11 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
4.3 Application
Minimum air temperature 3C Maximum relative humidity 85% Steel temperature must be at least 3C above the dew point temperature. Maximum air/substrate temp 45C
4.3.1 Spray Application

A mechanical stirrer of the paddle type is required for mixing the material prior to use. An open top pail containing appropriate cleansing solvent (Thinner 50-02) should be available for flushing pump unit, together with a selection of tools for removal of gun, hoses and pump wet end. Operatives must wear suitable protective clothing and appropriate health and safety advice to be followed in all cases. The spray pump should be an airless type with a minimum ratio of 45:1 and a delivery rate of 4 litres per minute. The pump should be fitted with leather seals although Teflon (PTFE) is acceptable. All fluid filters should be removed from the system. A 10mm (3/8) I.D. nylon fluid hose is required. Fluid hose of small diameter is unsuitable and must not be used. The gun should be large bore mastic type (Graco Hydramastic Golden) fitted with swivel connector to allow free movement of the hose. Tip size between 0.58mm and 1.01mm (23-40 thou) can be used with appropriate fan angle for the piece to be coated. Reverse-a-clean or Titan adjustable tips are ideally suited to this application. It is recommended that spray equipment is flushed with styrene monomer immediately before spraying and cleaned with Thinner 50-02 during and at the completion of the spray operation. We recommend flushing of the equipment be undertaken at regular intervals if significant quantities of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 are to be applied. Ideally, two airless spray pumps should be employed, one for spraying, whilst the second pump is circulating solvent (Thinner 50-02) ready for switching, every hour (or less as circumstances dictate) to prevent possible seizing of equipment with catalysed material. Working pot life after mixing of retarded material normally 40 minutes at an initial mixing temperature of 25C.
Page 12 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
4.3.2 Application Procedure for Press Faced Flanges

This procedure covers the application of Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 glass flake reinforced polyester and ester linings on flanges to obtain the smoothest possible finish. Surface should be grit blasted and primed in accordance with the relevant application data sheets, and one coat of the lining system applied. A melamine-faced chipboard (16mm thick) should be obtained and cut to the outside size of the flange face to be lined. Ideally this board should be drilled to accept nuts and bolts for clamping it in place through bolt holes already present in the flange, alternatively G clamps can be used but these are only really suitable for small flanges. This should then be thoroughly waxed and polished 3 to 5 times using a suitable mould release wax. A small quantity of the specified Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 material should then be mixed thoroughly with the correct quantity and type of 714 and applied at approximately 1000 microns onto the waxed surface. Allow to cure. The glass flake material on the board should be over-coated with freshly mixed material and the flange face should be coated simultaneously while the two surfaces are still wet they should be clamped together as described in 4 above. Remove excess material, for example in nozzle bore while in the uncured state. Leave overnight before removing board by sharp lateral force. Clean off excess material from edges, bore, and bolt holes using a rasp or file taking care not to penetrate through to the steel.
NB: For raised face flanges a spacer may be incorporated into the wet material on the Melamine board if considered necessary, to ensure a minimum thickness.
4.4 Removal and Repair Procedure

Existing surfaces should be clean and free from previous cargo, contamination, etc. Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 should be removed using angle grinders to a firm edge and these edges feathered to provide a gentle transition from substrate to the original upper surface. The underlying steel surface should then be spot-blasted in accordance with section 3.1.1.3 immediately prior to coating. The Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 system should then be re-applied to the specified film thickness in line with the recommendations set down elsewhere in this manual.
Page 13 of 15
INFORMATION

May 2013
1726
5.0 Spreading Rates and Overcoating Times

5.1 Spreading Rates
The spreading rates shown in our Technical Data Sheets as 'Theoretical Spread at Normal Dry Film Thickness' are calculated from the volume solids of that product. The figure given is the spread that would be achieved if the paint were applied evenly to a plane surface without any losses at the dry film thickness indicated. The theoretical volume spread rate is calculated by the equation: m2 /ltr = 10 x % v (s) DFT in microns The theoretical weight spread rate is calculated by the equation: m2 /kg = 10 x % v (s) DFT in microns x SG or Kg /m2 = DFT in microns x SG 10 x % v (s)
Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 contains styrene, which is not considered a solvent as it chemically reacts with the resin in the presence of the 714. Hence Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 has a theoretical volume solids of 100%. However, styrene is volatile and a small amount can be lost during application prior to reaction occurring. Also Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 can physically 'shrink' as the polymer cures. Together these two factors can lead to the practical thickness being less than that expected theoretically. To account for this our Technical Data Sheets show a typical, practical volume solid of 80% 5%. Many factors must be considered when estimating practical spreading rates of paint and allowance must be made for: Surface Profile The degree of roughness of a surface (which may be natural, due to erosion/corrosion or from abrasive blasting) has an effect on the amount of paint used to cover the surface. This factor has a greater influence on first coat paints than on subsequent coats. Surface Porosity The degree of porosity of concrete and other surfaces will obviously have an effect on the amount of paint used, especially in the case of the first coat. The more porous the surface the more paint will be used.
Page 14 of 15
INFORMATION
1726
May 2013
Method of Application Spray application generally causes more losses of paint than other methods, e.g. brush or roller. Quite severe losses can be caused due to over-spray and due to windy conditions during external painting. Normal Wastage This would include drips from brushes/rollers, residues left unused in spray pipelines, on brushes and in pots, drums, etc. Accessibility of Surfaces to be Painted Losses can occur if staging is erected in such a way as to make it difficult for painters to apply paint. Similarly, bad lighting or obstructions, which may make continuous work difficult, can also cause wastage. Over Application Where a minimum dry film thickness is specified an operator will normally apply more than the minimum in order to avoid deficiency corrections at a later stage. Measured dry film thicknesses are generally, therefore, found to be higher than the minimum film thickness specified. The variable nature of these and other factors mean that it is difficult for the paint manufacturer to give recommendations wastage. The estimation of a suitable allowance to cover losses in any particular circumstances can be best undertaken by the professional painting contractor or estimator in the light of their wider practical experience.
5.2 Over-coating Times

The minimum over-coating times which we show in our data sheets indicate the time to be allowed for the drying and sufficient hardening of the coating before applying further coats of paint and assume: That the coating has been applied at the normal recommended thickness. That the drying conditions during and after application were good, particularly in respect of temperature, ventilation and relative humidity. That the paint used for over-coating is suitable for the purpose and is applied by a suitable method.
It will be appreciated that the over-coating times shown in the data sheets are liable to variation if the above conditions are not met. Maximum over-coating times, where shown, indicate the optimum period wherein over-coating should be undertaken, to obtain satisfactory inter-coat adhesion. Sigmashield 4800 / 4801 products have an 'air inhibited surface' and are therefore indefinitely over-coatable (except wax topcoat). The over-coating times do not indicate the time required to develop maximum chemical or weather resistance
Page 15 of 15
INFORMATION
ZINC SILICATES QUALITY ASPECTS APPLICATION

an eight page issue INTRODUCTION
1706
Maintenance steel
June 2013 revision of September 2005
Zinc silicates are widely specified as the primer for much of the steel utilised by the petrochemical and offshore industries. They may be used without topcoats as tank linings, but organic topcoats are normally specified for atmospheric exposure. In acidic and alkaline environments zinc corrodes rapidly and topcoats improve durability as well as appearance. Two main types of zinc silicate are now available. Water based alkyl silicates are mainly used as tank linings, although there is increasing interest in their use on structural steel. Solvent based ethyl zinc silicates are most commonly used on steel structures. The following aspects are covered in this note: 1. 2. 3. 4. Porosity topcoat bubbling removal of contamination Excessive thickness mud cracking low cohesive strength Formation of zinc salts effect of salts on performance removal of salts Spot repair of old zinc silicate/organic systems
1. POROSITY OF ZINC SILICATES Zinc silicates are by nature porous. The porous silicate matrix of a freshly applied zinc silicate does not fill all the available space between the zinc particles. This leads to a number of practical disadvantages. An understanding of these can help to avoid possible problems: a. organic topcoat bubbling b. contamination difficult to remove a. Topcoat bubbling Also known as popping or application blistering, this is a problem which causes more irritation than any other. As already mentioned zinc silicates are porous by nature. After several months of curing outdoors, the porosity gradually fills to form a close, dense film due to formation of zinc salts by reaction with moisture and carbon dioxide in the atmosphere. Most construction schedules do not allow one or two months before topcoating and the primer must be topcoated while it is under cover and still porous. This often causes bubbling of the subsequent topcoat. There is always a risk of popping when overcoating zinc silicates, but the longer they have been weathered the less the likelihood of problems.
page 1/8
INFORMATION
1706
Maintenance steel
September 2005 The mechanism Popping is caused by the release of air and gas, in bubble form, from a porous surface through freshly applied wet paint films. This causes blisters which either break, leaving a pinhole, or remain in the film. When a solvent containing organic topcoat is spray applied to a porous surface, some of the solvent penetrates into the pores. At the same time there is a drop in the surface temperature due to decompression and sudden solvent evaporation. The temperature rapidly increases again, expanding the air and gas in the pores. Additionally there is a tendency for the solvent trapped in the pores to try to release itself. These combinded actions cause the formation of bubbles.
Popping The higher the ambient temperature the greater the problem and if the surface temperature is steadily rising due to exposure to the sun the problem will be worse. Topcoat bubbling is also more likely with fast overcoating times or by drying of the zinc silicate in conditions of very low humidity. The likelihood of topcoat pinholing or blistering over inorganic zinc primers depends on both the choice of primer and the choice of topcoat. Application of a glossy (high binder content/low PVC) finish directly to a zinc silicate primer is likely to cause problems. Intact blisters or pinholes easily visible to the naked eye will usually not be accepted and will normally require repair. Very small hardly visible pinholes are usually acceptable and in practice, even if the zinc appears to be exposed at small holes, these are generally impregnated with coating. Arguments sometimes arise over whether pinholes are or are not closed. The worry being that if the zinc silicate is exposed to the atmosphere, corrosion may take place. This can easily be checked using a low voltage wet sponge tester. Usually when this test is applied to a typical zinc silicate/epoxy/polyurethane system still showing some pinholes after application of the final coat, no holidays (holes) are indicated. Response is often negative even after the first coat of epoxy, but positive on the conductive zinc primer.
page 2/8
INFORMATION
1706
Maintenance steel
June 2013 Minimising popping from the start The quality of the application of the zinc silicate plays a crucial role. It should be spray applied as an even wet film to the correct wet film thickness. In hot conditions some extra thinner may be needed. Excessive film thickness should be carefully avoided. Dry spray/overspray should also be avoided as far as possible and must be removed before topcoating. It is a loose powder which can be rubbed off by light abrasion or by rubbing with aluminium wire mesh. (This may have to be done quite quickly in hot conditions where heavy overnight condensation is usual). Conventional spray (air spray) gives the best results because it gives an extra degree of application control, but to obtain the highest productivity airless application is usually preferred. Watch out particularly for the inexperienced applicator who applies zinc primers for maximum productivity using a powerful airless unit at high pressure with a large, worn tip. The effect will be rather like using a garden hose, with clouds of dry spray settling on the surface, making the subsequent topcoat application a nightmare. The topcoat usually gets the blame for the bubbling, but the problem has been caused by poor primer application. Less problems are usually encountered if the applicator is experienced in the use of inorganic zinc primers. What if the primer has already been applied? There are a few well tried techniques which help avoid pinholing when organic topcoats are applied to a freshly applied zinc silicate. None of these can be guaranteed to be 100% effective if the primer application has been of poor quality: I Sealer coat The zinc primer is sealed by a sealer coat (also known as a tie coat) specially designed for porous surfaces eg. SigmaCover 522 (7420). Thin as described in the data sheet and apply 50m (2 mils) dry film thickness. This is generally the most effective solution and it also works for sealing zinc metal sprayed substrates. High build micaceous iron oxide pigmented topcoats Use a topcoat which is less sensitive for application bubbling. SigmaCover 435 (7427) is an example which works if the quality of the primer application is reasonable and application is done by mist coat as described below.
II
Some additional hints If the primer is porous and popping occurs, a mist coat/full coat application can be helpful. The primer is first sealed by a very thin (hardly closed) film of the first topcoat. Shortly afterwards (usually within 15 minutes) the mist coat is recoated to reach the specified dry film thickness. This technique may have to be repeated with subsequent coats. It works quite well at low temperatures, but often will not help if the surface temperature is high. Try to avoid application of the first topcoat if the surface temperature is expected to rise. If application to surfaces which have been in direct sunlight can be scheduled to take place as the surface temperature is reducing, pinholing will be almost completely avoided. (This also works for application of organic coatings to exposed concrete surfaces). Where application over a warm/hot zinc silicate cannot be avoided then the use of SigmaCover 522 (7420), thinned as described in the data sheet is a good solution. page 3/8
INFORMATION

Shop application
1706
Maintenance steel
June 2013 Zinc silicates require contact with moisture to enable full cure and a reduction in porosity. If it is practical to store steelwork outside for a while between zinc silicate and topcoat application then the risk of bubbling will be reduced. The surface may be sprayed with clean water. It is often not realised that steel coated with a solvent based zinc silicate can be moved outside very soon after application, even when it is raining. None of the above is a perfect solution for all situations. When application bubbling becomes a problem it is usually because of a complex mixture of technical and commercial reasons. If you need help, write down all information which is relevant and contact your Sigma representative. Information needed includes the coating system, thinners being used and amounts per coat, ambient temperature and surface temperature during day and night, humidity during the day and night, application equipment with tip sizes, time and exposure conditions between zinc silicate and topcoat application, thickness of primer and topcoats, presence of dry spray etc.. General considerations Topcoat bubbling occurs to some extent on all zinc silicate/organic systems. If the topcoat is a glossy yellow it will be more obvious than if it is a dull grey. Some plant owners are used to it and accept it as a fact of life, others find it unacceptable. As with most similar situations a compromise is usually necessary. It is impossible to reach an automobile finish with this type of high build system, which is primarily designed for corrosion protection in severe conditions. It is however unreasonable to expect the final customer to accept a surface that looks like the moon. If you are faced with topcoat bubbling and a well tried and tested system is being used, remember that the application of the primer is frequently the cause. Try to get this improved. Also in hot conditions try to reschedule the application or shade the area concerned. b. Removal of contamination The porous nature of zinc silicates can make certain types of contamination difficult to remove. Oils and greases can be particularly awkward with high pressure water washing with detergent, followed by clean water, being the best option for cleaning the cured primer. Solvent cleaning is sometimes used for small areas. Apart from the health and safety aspects, this often only spreads oily contamination over a wider area.
page 4/8
INFORMATION

2. EXCESSIVE THICKNESS OF ZINC SILICATES
1706
Maintenance steel
June 2013 If zinc silicates are applied at too high a dry film thickness, problems can arise eg. mud cracking or low cohesive strength. An understanding of what is happening can help avoid trouble: a. Mud Cracking In some situations after the application of a zinc silicate, the film cracks. This is due to shrinkage during drying and is known as "mud cracking" because it resembles the cracks which form in sun dried mud. There are a number of possible causes: I II Spraying to a too high dry film thickness. Application over areas of too low blast profile. This can happen particularly at welds where there are areas of very hard material. After blasting, the profile remains low and application of too much material can cause cracking. If relative humidity is high during the application and ventilation is poor this can also be a cause of cracking due to a too fast curing of the top layer. A product beyond its shelf life will often have a higher mud cracking tendency than when fresh.
III IV
The thickness at which cracking takes place depends on the formulation of the zinc silicate. Some are very critical in this respect and others rather tolerant. The mud cracking limit can be as low as 75 microns (3 mils) up to as high as 200 microns (8 mils) dry film thickness. Sigma Coatings' products perform well in this respect with the limit generally being in excess of 150 m (6 mils). For most products mud cracking only becomes a problem when internal corners of small beams and angles etc are being coated. While trying to reach the minimum dry film thickness all over, the sprayer tends to make several overlapping passes in the corners. This often leads to excessive dry film thickness and mud cracking.
Mud cracking
page 5/8
INFORMATION
1706
Maintenance steel
June 2013 When this is occasionally a problem, brushing out the corners while the primer is still wet will help. If it becomes a serious problem during airless spray application, check the angle of the tip being used. A narrow tip may have been chosen for more economical spraying of small components. This requires more passes and can cause a high build-up of wet coating in corners, making the problem worse. Switching to a wider angle will usually solve the problem and is more economical in the end, even though more material may seem to be lost due to overspray. b. Low Cohesive Strength During and just after application, conditions must be dry to let the solvent evaporate. After this the curing phase starts. The film reacts with moisture to form an insoluble inorganic silicate matrix. After the initial drying the fastest cure is provided in conditions of high humidity. Overnight condensation and warm weather are ideal. A zinc silicate which is not properly cured will remain weak and will not reach the high hardness levels expected from inorganic zinc primers. In very dry conditions a zinc silicate may take a long time to reach full hardness. (Regular spraying of the surface with clean water can be helpful in this situation). Also, if applied too thickly, through-hardening takes a long time or may even never take place. If topcoating is done on not adequately cured zinc silicate, the primer may never attain full hardness. When epoxy topcoats are applied to a not fully cured zinc silicate problems arise from the low cohesive strength of the primer. The epoxy shrinks on drying and forms a relatively brittle film. Quite minor impact damage can result in delamination by splitting in the silicate primer. The specification of a zinc silicate to be applied in conditions known to be very dry with continuous low humidity is best avoided eg. in some shop circumstances. Zinc epoxies are a better choice in this situation, although it should be noted that they generally have a lower heat resistance. 3. FORMATION OF ZINC SALTS Occasionally on site there is a problem with zinc salt formation. Zinc primers protect steel from corrosion by sacrificial protection. The zinc corrodes instead of the steel. During this corrosion process zinc reacts with oxygen, carbon dioxide and water to form a zinc salt. O2/H2O/CO2 Zn2+ ------> ZnCO3.Zn(OH)2 The exposed zinc at the surface of a zinc silicate surface can also react directly with the atmosphere causing zinc salt formation. In both cases the zinc salts are visible as a white/grey surface colouring. The composition of the zinc salts depends on the circumstances in which they were formed. In unpolluted atmospheric conditions (oxygen, carbon dioxide and water) they will be a mixture of basic zinc carbonate, zinc hydroxide and zinc oxide. These zinc salts, known as zinc patina, close-up the surface pores and thus help to protect of the steel substrate. When zinc comes into contact with pure (condensed) water and there is little or no air available, large quantities of zinc hydroxide are formed. This is called "white rust" and often occurs when a water layer is trapped between two zinc coated plates. It is also often seen in situations when a surface is almost continuously in contact with condensed water. This type of zinc salt is partially soluble in water. page 6/8
INFORMATION
1706
Maintenance steel
June 2013 Under the influence of air pollutants such as sulphur dioxide (industry) or chlorides (coastal) basic zinc sulphate or basic zinc chloride are formed. These are only slightly soluble in water and do not form a closed film and thus have no protective function. The formation of zinc salts is influenced by various factors, including the time that water remains in continuous contact with the surface. Puddles which form on steel stacked outside often result in the formation of white rust. Acid rain or chloride containing rain water cause the formation of zinc salts. In coastal regions the higher concentrations of salt in the atmosphere lead to higher quantities of zinc salts to be formed. The effect of salts on system performance Zinc salts can have a negative effect on coating performance. Loose zinc salts (eg white rust) must be removed from the surface before topcoating or they will affect adhesion. Water soluble components in zinc salts may reduce adhesion of subsequent coatings. If these remain on a primer surface, then in damp conditions water is attracted through the organic topcoat (osmosis) and the zinc salts swell, damaging the intercoat adhesion. Even if no visible zinc salts are present on a zinc primer surface, adhesion problems can occur if insufficient thickness of topcoat is applied. Water migrates through thin areas of coating and forms zinc salts under the topcoat, causing delamination. For this reason, in damp conditions or immersion, an adequate thickness of organic topcoat should cover the zinc primer. Removal of zinc salts Experience and testing have shown that small quantities of zinc salts on zinc silicate primers have a minimal influence on later anti-corrosive performance. Obviously any loose zinc salts on the surface should be removed before overcoating. Particularly for critical applications, such as immersion or service in damp conditions, it makes sense to make sure that all soluble zinc salts have been removed. Various cleaning techniques can be used: a. Washing with clean water. Ideally this is done by high pressure water washing, but washing with water and a nylon bristle brush is also a good way to make sure most soluble material is removed. Heavy deposits of white rust may have to be removed by mechanical means. b. Sweep blasting. This is frequently not possible due to excessive dust formation. It has the advantage that it roughens the surface improving the adhesion of the complete coating system. At the same time welds can be fully blasted, further improving the anti-corrosive performance of the system. c. Mechanical cleaning. This can achieve an acceptable anti-corrosive performance from the coating system. Cleaning the intact primer surface until visually clean is adequate. Complete removal of all traces of zinc salts is practically impossible and also not necessary. The most effective mechanical cleaning technique is by synthetic disk (Scotch Brite). These disks enable a controlled cleaning of the surface with very limited removal of the primer. page 7/8
INFORMATION
1706
Maintenance steel
June 2013 Specifications Sometimes specifications require that all zinc salts must be removed before topcoating. In practice the removal of all traces is difficult and reference to the Shipbuilding Research Association of Japan Standard (SPSS) for surface cleaning may be helpful. It shows photographs of zinc salt formation on zinc epoxy and zinc silicate shop primers. It can be seen that even after sweep blasting slight traces of zinc salts remain on the surface. 4. SPOT REPAIR OF OLD ZINC SILICATE/ORGANIC SYSTEMS When zinc silicate primed systems, which are in reasonable condition, are to be repaired by spot blasting of rusty areas and touch-up of the primer, followed by an organic topcoat, it is best to avoid the use of a zinc silicate for repair. This is because when sprayed on the blasted areas there will always be an overlap onto the surrounding organic coating. This inevitably results in areas of poor adhesion. The solution is to patch prime using a zinc epoxy.
page 8/8
INFORMATION

a three page issue
1492
SURFACE PREPARATION Surface preparation of steel pipes must be carried out according to the Dutch standard NEN 6901 or the Swedish standard SIS 055900. The metal surface must be freed from mill scale, corrosion and all contaminations such as oil, grease, dirt, soluble salts, markings and old coatings. Weldspatters and laminations must also be removed. The coating must be applied as soon as possible after completion of the surface preparation. CHEMICAL PRETREATMENT The substrate must be precleaned to remove dirt, grease and oil. Pickling must be carried out on an industrial scale by one of the following methods. The first table describes a pickling process followed by a double water rinse. The second table describes a phosphating process consisting of pickling and rinsing followed by phosphating. The requirements for the pickling and the phosphating process are drawn up to avoid excess thickness of phosphate layers and to ensure that no acids remain on the substrate. All pickling - rinsing or phosphating liquids must be renewed when the concentrations specified are reached (see tables). The content of the bath must also be renewed when the pretreated metal leaves the bath with contamination or if sediment interferes the action of the pickling process. Table 1Pickling Process Pickling Hydrochloric acid Sulphuric acid 55 - 220 g/l 50 - 295 g/l ambient 50 - 65C 100 g/l 70 g/l till complete removal of millscale and rust First Rinsing Min. water temperature Max. acid concentration Duration ambient 0,75 g/l 5 min. Second Rinsing Min. water temperature Max. acid concentration Duration 70C 0,20 g/l 1 min. 70C 0,10 g/l 1 min. ambient 0,25 g/l 5 min.
page 1/3
INFORMATION
1492
May 1998
Table 2Pickling/Phosphating Process Pickling Hydrochloric acid Sulphuric acid 55 - 220 g/l 50 - 295 g/l ambient 50 - 65C 100 g/l 70 g/l till complete removal of millscale and rust Rinsing Min. water temperature Max. acid concentration Duration 60 - 65C 0,75 g/l 5 min. Phosphating Temperature Duration Max. iron content Normal phosphoric acid concentration Phosphoric acid concentration for application of epoxyand polyurethane coatings * 80C 5 min. 5 g/l 20 - 10 g/l 80C 5 min. 5 g/l 20 - 10 g/l 80C 5 min. 5 g/l 20 - 10 g/l 65C 1,00 g/l 5 min. --Phosphoric acid 105 - 225 g/l 60 - 85C 30 g/l
5 g/l
5 g/l
5 g/l
* The performance of epoxy- or polyurethane coatings on phosphated steel should always be checked in advance. BLAST CLEANING Before blast cleaning the surface should be thoroughly degreased by means of suitable detergents or emulsifiers. Irregularities in the pipe surface should be removed by grinding or rotating discs. The surface should be dry before blasting. Blasting must be carried out until to standard of cleanliness of SIS-Sa2 of the Swedish norm SIS055900 (see sheet 1490). Usually a blasting profile (Rz) is recommended of approx. 50 micrometers which means a Ra or CLA value of 10-15 micrometers.
page 2/3
INFORMATION
1492
May 1998
Ventilation of sufficient capacity has to be used in order to maintain a workable and safe climate during blast cleaning. The pipes should rotate during the blasting operation at a sufficient speed to obtain a regular blasted surface. Only suitable abrasives according to specification should be used (see sheet 1491). Attention should be given to the weld seams which have to be blast cleaned in a way that the whole weld seam is pretreated. Abrasives and dust should be removed completely from the blasted surface. ROTATING WIRE BRUSH CLEANING Pipes to be used for the transport of Natural Gas, showing only minor rust and in good condition, may be pretreated by rotating wire brushes before they are coated with a flowcoat. Before wire brush cleaning the surface should be thoroughly degreased by means of suitable detergents or emulsifiers. Irregularities in the pipe surface should be removed by grinding or rotating discs. The surface should be dry before blasting. Cleaning must be carried out until to standard of cleanliness of SIS-St3 of the Swedish norm SIS055900 (see sheet 1490). Ventilation of sufficient capacity has to be used in order to maintain a workable and safe climate during wire brush cleaning. The pipes should rotate during the cleaning operation at a sufficient speed to obtain a regular cleaned surface.
page 3/3
INFORMATION
INTERNAL CHEMICAL CLEANING OF STEEL PIPES In-situ application
1493
GENERAL ASPECTS The "in situ" cleaning process for new and old, often corroded, pipe lines should be started with a thorough inspection of the pipe line. The internal diameter of the pipe line has to be checked and samples of rust and debris have to be collected to confirm that the cleaning operation will give the desired results. Because the total cleaning procedure will consist of a number of pig runs, a lot of information can be collected about the vertical head and elevation profile of the pipe line which knowledge is of great importance for the final coating operation. Besides that it is critical, it is very important that all pig trains containing water, chemical liquids and drying liquids are being launched solid, travel solid and are being received solid in order to clean the pipe line with success. Any condition that might impose a significant under pressure in any liquid train can cause air intrusion resulting in inadequate surface preparation and transfer of liquids to a position behind the train. The improvement in cleanliness should be continuously monitored by analysing the cleaning and pretreatment liquids, followed by, if available, inspection through a camera pig. New in situ blast cleaning methods have been developed (sand jetting system) which may be very useful also to recoat previously coated pipe lines. Removal of Dirt Dirt, sand, loose rust, loose mill scale, bolts, parts of welding rods, corrosion debris, loose scale and remainders of products previously transported to be removed by mechanical cleaning with wire brush pigs and scraper pigs followed by line washing with fresh water and solvents. Degreasing Degreasing is extremely important as the presence of oil or grease will interfere with the subsequent acid cleaning. Detergent/water flushing requires a number of passes until analysis of the degreasing agents proves that all oil and grease is removed. Chemical cleaning All mill scale and rust has to be removed completely also from corrosion pits by several passes of prescribed strength inhibited acid solutions until the internal surface is near to white metal. The spend chemicals used for cleaning have to be monitored by analysis, the degree of surface preparation has to be checked by usual inspection. Passivating After the chemical cleaning all soluble salts have to be removed (often chlorides). To prevent flash rust formation a run with a prescribed concentration of inhibiting or passivating solution is to be carried out followed by rinsing the pipe line with fresh water until the water reach neutrality. Drying All moisture in the pipe line has to be removed in order that a dry steel surface is available for coating by sending selected drying solvents through the pipe line followed by pigging with foam pigs together with dry air or nitrogen ventilation. In this way a clean and dry surface is achieved, together with a dehumidified atmosphere within the pipe line giving optimal conditions to coat the pipe line in situ.
page 1/1
INFORMATION

a three page issue GENERAL ASPECTS Once a coating or a polymer flooring has been selected it is essential that the surface preparation of concrete is done correctly, otherwise optimum performance will not be obtained.
1496
June 2013 revision of February 2009
New concrete: In the case of newly made concrete it is important that the concrete has been laid for a minimum of 28 days before applying a coating or polymer flooring. The moisture content of the concrete should be below 4 % by weight. The release of the surplus water is dependant on the thickness of the concrete, the season, the temperature and relative humidity of the environment and the prevailing ventilation conditions. So the moisture content of the concrete should always be measured. The moisture content at the concrete surface can be measured by an electronic instrument called Protimeter (Protimeter plc, U.K. telex 849305). An indication in the red area means that the concrete is still too wet. An indication in the green area means that the concrete can be coated. An indication in the yellow area means be careful. A concrete area of approx. 4 m should be covered by a plastic sheet for 24 hours after which the measurement has to be repeated. If the indication becomes red then the subfloor is still too wet to apply a flooring. A major problem with new concrete floors is the top surface layer known as laitance. This water rich top layer is formed during the binding period and is mechanically weak. In addition to the poor mechanical properties, the laitance has a chemical composition different from the rest of the concrete. Concrete floors with this laitance are obviously poor substrates to apply coatings to. It should therefore be a pre-condition that the laitance has been removed prior to the application of any floor coating or polymer flooring. Old concrete: The removal of all oils, greases etc., together with the removal of the remains of any previously applied coating is required to ensure a sound base for the application of a coating, polymer flooring or screed. SURFACE PREPARATION In order to ensure good adhesion and the long term performance of any floor coating or polymer flooring it is essential that the correct type of surface preparation is carried out. The removal of chemicals, oil, grease and fat must be completed before any other preparation work commences such as e.g. blasting or acid etching (ASTM D4259 or ASTM D4260). Mechanical tool cleaning must always be followed by removal of dust by means of vacuum cleaners. Removal of chemicals from floor surfaces: Concrete that has become contaminated by chemicals must be neutralised before coating. If the contamination is acidic, it must be neutralised with an alkaline cleaner and rinsed thoroughly with fresh water. If the contamination is alkaline it can be cleaned with detergents and/or steam. Oil and grease contamination can be removed by a combination of solvents, steam and/or detergents depending on the severity of the contamination.
page 1/3
INFORMATION
1496
February 2009
Abrasive blast cleaning: Abrasive blast cleaning should always be the best choice for the pretreatment of concrete if polymer flooring systems have to be applied. Blast cleaning is normally carried out using an enclosed system such as a Vacu-Blast, or Auto-Blast type machine. These systems are virtually dust free and work on the principal of propelling small particles of abrasive i.e. steel shot, against the floor surface whilst at the same time vacuum recovering the dust and abrasive to a recovery hopper. In addition to cleaning the floor and removing any laitance, blasting will leave the floor surface with a profile which will enable the coating to gain a physical as well as chemical adhesion to the substrate. Blast cleaning is the recommended system for large floor areas. Scarifying: Scarifying (sometimes known as scabbling) involves the use of rotating wheels and brushes to scour the concrete surface. The scarifying equipment is pushed over the floor and the enclosed rotating wheels abrade the surface. It is not as efficient or as dust free as a Vacu-Blast machine and can in the wrong hands, cause excessive damage to the substrate. It is most effective on small areas or areas where abrasive blast cleaning cannot be carried out. Power grinding: Similar to scarifying this method can be used to open up holes and voids and to remove loose materials from the surface of poured concrete and pre-cast slabs. Power grinding is slower than blasting but could be considered for small external floor areas. One should take care that the concrete surface is not polished by the power grinding. Wire brushing: Wire brushing can be used to remove loose material from the surface and open up holes and voids in poured concrete. This can be either by power or hand wire brushing, power wire brushing giving increased productivity and effectiveness. Impact tools: Concrete surfaces can be roughened using impact tools such as needle guns etc. However this method can be slow and should only be used for small repairs. Granulating or Hammering machines work quicker but should only be used if very hard concrete must be roughened or if flooring screeds have to be applied. Impact tools are normally electrically or compressed air driven and work on a principal of a sharpened tool vibrating against the surface. It is fairly easy for an inexperienced operative to gouge the concrete surface and therefore great care should be taken when using this method of preparation. Acid etching: This method of surface preparation is most suited for use on new concrete floors (not for sand/cement screeds). It is carried out to remove laitance but will not remove old paint or oil and grease and should only be used in areas where sufficient drainage exists to allow the removal of the water and acid solutions. To carry out acid etching the following procedure should be followed: Before commencing acid etching the concrete surface should be cleaned of all loose concrete. Deposits of oil and grease should be removed by steam cleaning or by using an alkaline cleaner or detergents. Thoroughly wet the floor with water Sprinkle an 8% to 10% solution of phosphoric acid in water uniformly over the floor. The approximate spreading rate is 1,5 m to 1 litre of solution.
page 2/3
INFORMATION
1496
February 2009
The acid solution should remain on the surface for 2 to 4 minutes and then be rinsed thoroughly with clean water. The rinsing can be done with a water hose and a sweeping broom. It is important that the rinsing is done immediately to prevent the formation of salts on the surface, which are difficult to remove. The concrete surface should be checked for acidity using pH paper and should have a pH of 7 or higher. Depending on the type of concrete, more than one operation may be required to achieve a satisfactory surface profile. A thorough rinsing with clean water should be carried out after each acid etch application. The surface profile after acid etching should be similar to fine sandpaper. The concrete should be allowed to dry prior to applying the coating. Personnel involved in acid etching operations should be provided with safety goggles, protective clothing, rubber gloves and rubber boots. Rubber buckets should be used for mixing the solution. THE ACID SHOULD ALWAYS BE ADDED TO THE WATER rather than the water added to the acid. Flame cleaning: Where conditions permit, deeply impregnated oils and greases can be removed from concrete floors by flame or superheated compressed air. This method involves the use of heat to bring the oil, grease etc. to the surface and should be carried out under strict supervision with the necessary precautions being taken in view of the possible hazards involved. After flame cleaning the surface should always be power tool cleaned.
page 3/3
INFORMATION
CONVERSION TABLES
a four page issue
1410
June 2013 revision of 06-2002 PRESSURE
GENERAL 1 atmosphere 1 foot 1 Imp. gallon 1 litre 1 litre 1 metre 1 sq. foot 1 sq. metre 1 US gallon 1 yard 1 metre degree C degree F = = = = = = = = = = = = = 14.223 lb/sq.in. 0.305 metre 4.546 litres 0.220 Imp. gallon 0.264 US gallon 3.281 feet 0.093 sq. metre 10.765 sq. feet 3.785 litres 0.915 metre 1.0936 yard 5/9 x (degree F - 32) 9/5 x degree C + 32
(kg/cm) atmosphere (bar) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(p.s.i.) lb/sq.in. 14.2 28.4 42.7 56.9 71.1 85.3 99.6 113.8 128.0 142.2
(kg/cm) atmosphere (bar) 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200
(p.s.i.) lb/sq.in. 1420 1560 1710 1850 1990 2130 2280 2420 2560 2700 2840
VOLUME 1 Imperial gallon = = 1 litre = = 1 US gallon = = litres 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 50 100 4.55 litre 1.2 US gallons 0.22 Imperial gallon 0.26 US gallon 3.79 litre 0.83 Imperial gallon US gallons 0.26 0.53 0.79 1.06 1.32 1.58 1.85 2.11 2.38 2.64 3.96 5.28 13.21 26.42
DRY FILM THICKNESS microns (m) mils 8 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0 microns (m) mils 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8 5.0 5.2 5.4 5.6 5.8 6.0 6.2 6.4 6.6 6.8 7.0 7.2 7.4 7.6 7.8 8.0 microns (m) mils 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275 280 285 290 295 300 8.2 8.4 8.6 8.8 9.0 9.2 9.4 9.6 9.8 10.0 10.2 10.4 10.6 10.8 11.0 11.2 11.4 11.6 11.8 12.0 microns (m) mils 305 310 315 320 325 330 335 340 345 350 355 360 365 370 375 380 385 390 395 400 12.2 12.4 12.6 12.8 13.0 13.2 13.4 13.6 13.8 14.0 14.2 14.4 14.6 14.8 15.0 15.2 15.4 15.6 15.8 16.0
Imperial gallons 0.22 0.44 0.66 0.88 1.10 1.32 1.54 1.76 1.98 2.20 3.30 4.40 11.00 22.00
page 1/4
INFORMATION
CONVERSION TABLES
1410
June 2013
SPREADING RATE Sq.m./l 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 Sq.ft./ Imp.gal 49 54 59 64 68 73 78 83 88 93 98 103 108 112 117 122 127 132 137 142 147 152 156 161 166 171 176 181 186 191 196 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 sq.ft./ US gal 41 45 49 53 57 61 65 69 73 77 81 85 89 94 98 102 106 110 114 118 122 126 130 134 138 142 146 151 155 159 163 167 171 175 179 183 187 191 195 199 Sq.m./l 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 6.0 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 7.0 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 8.0 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 Sq.ft./ Imp.gal 244 249 254 259 264 269 274 279 284 288 293 298 303 308 313 318 323 328 332 337 342 347 352 357 362 367 372 376 381 386 391 396 401 406 411 416 420 425 430 435 sq.ft./ US gal 203 208 212 216 220 224 228 232 236 240 244 248 252 256 260 265 269 273 277 281 285 289 293 297 301 305 309 313 317 321 325 330 334 338 342 346 350 354 358 362 Sq.m./l 9.0 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 22.5 23.0 23.5 24.0 24.5 Sq.ft./ Imp.gal 440 445 450 455 460 464 469 474 479 484 490 515 540 560 585 610 635 660 685 710 735 760 780 805 830 855 880 905 930 955 980 1000 1025 1050 1075 1100 1125 1150 1175 1200 sq.ft./ US gal 366 370 374 378 383 387 391 395 399 403 405 425 450 470 490 510 530 550 570 590 610 630 650 670 690 710 735 755 775 795 815 835 855 875 895 915 935 955 975 995
page 2/4
INFORMATION
CONVERSION TABLES
1410
June 2013
VISCOSITY IN SECONDS DIN cup 4 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 Ford cup 4 15 17 18 19 21 22 23 25 26 28 29 30 31 33 34 35 38 40 43 45 48 51 Afnor coupe 4 17 18 20 21 23 24 25 27 28 30 31 32 34 35 36 38 40 43 46 48 51 54 B.S. cup 4 19 20 22 23 25 26 28 29 31 32 33 34 36 37 38 40 43 46 49 52 54 57 DIN cup 4 44 46 48 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 Ford cup 4 53 55 58 60 67 73 79 86 92 98 104 111 117 123 136 148 160 173 185 198 210 223 Afnor coupe 4 56 59 62 64 71 78 84 91 97 104 110 117 124 130 144 157 171 184 197 210 224 237 B.S. cup 4 60 63 66 69 75 82 89 96 105 109 116 123 130 138 152 166 180 194 207 221 235 249
page 3/4
INFORMATION
CONVERSION TABLES
1410
June 2013
TEMPERATURE C 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F 14.0 15.8 17.6 19.4 21.2 23.0 24.8 26.6 28.4 30.2 32.0 33.8 35.6 37.4 39.2 41.0 42.8 44.6
C = ( F - 32 ) x 5/9 C 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 24 26 28 30 F 46.4 48.2 50.0 51.8 53.6 55.4 57.2 59.0 60.8 62.6 64.4 66.2 68.0 72.0 75.0 79.0 82.0 86.0 C 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 F 90 93 97 100 104 108 111 115 118 122 131 140 149 158 167 176 185 194 C 95 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 F 203 212 230 248 266 284 302 320 338 356 374 392 482 572 662 752 842 932
page 4/4
INFORMATION

an nine page issue
1411
June 2013 revision of October 2010
GENERAL For ease of reference figures are usually stated in one unit only. Equivalents are given in the conversion tables. See sheets 1410 Conversion tables, 1412 Nomograph conversion from english units to metric units and 1413 S.I. units. All values are given for temperature of 20C (68F) and relative humidity of 70%, unless stated otherwise. GLOSS With a Lange gloss gauge 5 ranges of gloss have been determined, compared with a standard sheet of black polished glass. The gloss values are determined on Lange gloss gauge (angle 60) according to ISO 2813 (= ASTM D-523). The expressions used in the data sheets are: Flat corresponds with 0- 15% Eggshell corresponds with 15- 30% Semi-gloss corresponds with 30- 60% Gloss corresponds with 60- 80% High-gloss corresponds with 80-100% (at 20 angle above 70%) In practice, the level of gloss and surface finish will be dependent upon a number of factors, including application and the condition of the surface to be overcoated. COLOUR For products supplied in different colours three colour quality levels exist: 1. Good For finishes in general, especially based on polyurethane, this quality matches the colour standard 2. Approximate For undercoats and low gloss topcoats in general, this quality level is close to the colour standard 3. Best Match For primers in general, this quality level is near to the colour standard MICACEOUS IRON OXIDE AND/OR ALUMINIUM CONTAINING PAINTS Micaceous iron oxide and/or aluminium containing paints show different appearance and colour impression depending on thickness and application method. A touch-up by brushing may be visible on a sprayed area. SHELF LIFE The period from the date of manufacture during which the paint can be transported and stored in undamaged and unopened packing at temperatures between 5-35C, without any influence on the application or performance of the paint. After exceeding this period the paint is subject to reinspection. Water-borne products must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport.
page 1/9
INFORMATION
1411
June 2013
SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS & TEMPERATURES In order to achieve optimal application results, the technical requirements as stated in the relevant product data sheets should be followed. It is recommended that during the application and initial curing, the substrate temperature does not exceed 40 C, unless otherwise stated in the relevant PDS. However, maintaining the required conditions in practice might prove difficult, and the substrate temperature may occasionally exceed the recommended limits. In such cases special care must be taken to ensure proper substrate wetting and film formation, avoid excessive over spray, dry spray, sagging and other application related coating defects. Precautions such as additional thinning of the coating, providing suitable sun/heat protection and/or forced ventilation might be adequate. However, maintaining the recommended application conditions will facilitate optimal application results. For further details regarding substrate conditions and temperatures refer to: Information Sheet 1490 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Information Sheet 1650 Relative Humidity / Substrate Temperature / Air Temperature
page 2/9
INFORMATION
1411
June 2013
FULL CURE Full cure means, that the properties of a paint as described in the product data sheet are achieved (suitable for service). However, in case of dry bulk carriage an extra curing time may be required before the coating has reached its full mechanical strength and is suitable for carriage of hard angular cargoes FLASH POINT For paints the flash point is determined according to ISO 1523 (= ASTM D-3278, corresponding to Sigma method SM 311-41) or calculated. For thinners the flash point is determined according to DIN 51755 (corresponding to Sigma method SM 311-42) or calculated. Please always refer to the latest Material Safety Data Sheet for the paint and thinners. OVERCOATING TABLE The data given is a fair indication for normal conditions, longer drying times are necessary at lower temperatures and under unfavourable weather and/or ventilation conditions and higher dry film thicknesses. For epoxy coatings the minimum curing time for the recommended dft is given in the data sheets. For average dfts 50% higher, the minimum overcoating time should be multiplied by 1,5 and for average dfts 100% higher the multiplication factor is 2,5. Recoating data are based on atmospheric exposure, for other exposure conditions contact your nearest sales office. TOUCH DRY The touch dry time corresponds with the tack free time measured in accordance with ASTM D-1640 (corresponding with Sigma method SM 315-01). The touch dry time will be influenced by dft, ventilation conditions and substrate temperature. DRY TO HANDLE The dry to handle time corresponds with the dry-through time measured in accordance with ASTM D-1640 (corresponding with Sigma method SM 315-01) and indicates the time when walking over is possible. The dry-to-handle time will be influenced by dft, ventilation conditions and substrate temperature and should not be necessarily interpreted as ready for transportation due to the likelihood of excessive damage. DRY FILM THICKNESS (dft) / WET FILM THICKNESS (wft) The dry film thickness can be calculated from the applied wet film thickness: dft x 100 dft = wft x % volume solids wft = 100 % volume solids Recommended dft The dry film thickness for a paint system indicated in our system sheets is the recommended dft for the specific exposure conditions and based on airless spray application. Dft specifications referred to herein are valid for the coatings and coating systems in this manual unless mentioned otherwise in the respective product and system sheets.
page 3/9
INFORMATION
1411
June 2013
Minimum dft for application The minimum dft of a paint system (also a one coat system) should follow the 90/10 rule (e.g. 90% of the recommended dft is acceptable for up to 10% of the readings only), whilst for individual coats the minimum dft should not be lower than 80% of the recommended dft, and must form a closed film. Maximum dft for application - General Application of a paint at thicknesses in excess of the dft recommended on the product data sheet may result in performance problems. Such problems include solvent retention and a reduction in cohesive strength in association with certain types of topcoat. In a coating system, the dft of a primer is of the utmost importance. In general, Sigma Coatings would restrict the dft of any primer to 1.5 times that specified on the product data sheet. For a coating system, including the individual coats (except the primer), the maximum dft is 2 times the recommended dft, whereas for the critical areas of a painted structure, 10% of the readings can be between 2 and 2.2 times the recommended dft. Critical areas are e.g. weld seams, edges, bolts, corners, nuts and areas of difficult access. For coating specifications requiring coating thicknesses which exceed the recommended dfts as mentioned in the product and system sheets, the maximum dft allowed should be established per project prior to startup. Over-application and its consequences is a complex subject and is dependent on the generic type of system, recommended dft and number of coats, as well as the intended exposure. Please refer to your local Sigma Coatings office if you should have any questions on this important issue. The life time of any protective coating system is also determined by the dry film thickness applied to critical areas. The dft of all of these critical areas should be closely monitored and controlled by the application of stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system (or as recommended otherwise by Sigma Coatings). Please note that if a solvented coating has been applied over the specified dft then the minimum overcoating time must be increased to ensure that sufficient time is given for solvent evaporation. Care must also be taken to avoid over-application on critical areas during the progress of the job. Overapplication does not lead to enhanced performance life time of the coating system. Maximum dft for application - Linings For linings for severe exposure conditions or reinforced solvent free systems, the dft of the primer and the subsequent coatings can be more critical. Dft limitations are detailed in the respective system / product data sheets.
page 4/9
INFORMATION
1411
June 2013
VOC Until further notice, the heavy duty Marine and PC coatings industries in Europe must comply with the VOC Directive 1999/13/EC (SED). VOC values (in g/kg) to assist with the annual calculation of the solvent limits related to the SED requirements, are mentioned on each Product Datasheet as well as on the label of all products. For decorative, functional and protective coatings used in buildings, the VOC Directive 2004/42/EC applies. This is based on compliant coatings. Label Example: 1999/13/EC : 320 g/kg 2004/42/IIa (i) 600 (2007) 360 Explanation Label Example: 1999/13/EC : 320 g/kg 2004/42/IIa (i) 600 (2007) 360 Max VOC according to Directive 1999/13/EC for material in the can. Reference to the sub-category according to Directive 2004/42/IIa Threshold limit for sub-category according to Directive 2004/42/IIa from 1.1.2007 till 1.1.2010 The max content of VOC in g/l of the product in a ready to use condition (including maximum amount of thinner according to Product Datasheet).
SOLIDS CONTENT BY VOLUME This value is given in the product data sheet. It can be determined by a laboratory test, Sigma Method 31410 corresponding to ISO method 3233 or calculated from the formulation. The calculated theoretical solids content by volume is in general lower than the determined solids content by volume. The latter approximates best to practice, assuming that the table for spreading rate losses is used correctly. Diluents with a high boiling point and low vapour pressure are widely used in solvent free coatings, they will remain in the cured film under normal ambient conditions and will therefore have negligible effect on the volume solids of these specific products. Furthermore, due to the relative high boiling point and rather low vapor pressure of these diluents, the ventilation requirements when using solvent free coatings in confined spaces to maintain the internal atmosphere at 10% of the Lower Explosion Limit, will be unchanged. TOLERANCES Values given for specific gravity, theoretical spreading rate and solids content are averages from standard production batches; these values can vary slightly, also for colours of one product.
page 5/9
INFORMATION
1411
June 2013
VENTILATION Adequate ventilation during application and curing of the coating is not only required for health and safety reasons but also to ensure that the coating gives optimal performance. Stagnant air/high vapour concentrations in confined spaces must be avoided. Forced ventilation will help to avoid high vapour concentrations and possible solvent entrapment in the coating which may produce a temporary plasticising effect. Ventilation with cold, humid air in the drying stage should be avoided. Also avoid ventilation with heated air during the wet film forming stage as this approach may give skinning and increased solvent entrapment. For more information, see the following data sheets: 1430 Safety indications 1431 Safety in confined spaces and health safety, explosion hazard - toxic hazard 1434 Directives for ventilation practice THEORETICAL SPREADING RATE The theoretical spreading rate m/l for a given dry film thickness can be calculated from: m/l = % volume solids x 10 dry film thickness (in m) PRACTICAL SPREADING RATE The practical spreading rate depends on a number of factors: surface condition and profile, application method, normal, high build or solvent-free paint, skill of labour and weather conditions. It is often estimated at about 70 % of the theoretical spreading rate but under many conditions this is still far too high. For calculation purposes the following table has been composed in which spreading rate LOSSES are compiled. Substrates like wood and concrete are not included because they present too many other variable factors, especially in the preparation, the filling of pores, etc. RECOMMENDED THINNERS This product must only be thinned using the recommended Sigma thinners. The use of alternative thinners, particularly these containing alcohols, can severely inhibit the curing mechanism of certain coating types and will influence the performance. In case of the use of other thinners than advised, Sigma Coatings will not accept any responsibility.
page 6/9
INFORMATION
1411
June 2013
ESTIMATED LOSSES IN PERCENTAGES ALL FIGURES 10 DEPENDING ON CIRCUMSTANCES (AS GUIDE ONLY) BARE STEEL/FIRST COAT 4) Type of surface and application method NEW blast-cleaned A-B-C ISO-Sa2 inside LARGE 1) airless spray air-spray roller airless spray air-spray roller-brush airless spray brush 30 40 35 45 50 25 85 20 40 50 35 55 60 25 85 20 OLD derusted C St 3 / D ISO-Sa2 40 50 40 55 65 25 85 20 50 60 40 65 65 30 85 20 COATED STEEL/NEXT COAT NEW including shop primer OLD due for maintenance outside 45 55 40 60 60 30 85 30
outside inside
outside inside 25 35 30 40 45 20 85 20
outside inside 35 45 30 50 55 20 85 20 35 45 40 50 60 30 85 30
SMALL 2)
FRAMEWORK 3)
1) LARGE SURFACES 2) SMALL SURFACES 3) FRAMEWORK : 4) PRIMERS : steel profile
: hull, decks, deckhouses, tanks, holds : masts, water ways, machinery, structural steel and complex structures ladders, piping and railings consumption of first coat is always higher than for subsequent coats because of the
Estimation of volume of paint necessary for a paint job can be calculated from: 10 x A x DFT = Q VS x (100-W) EXAMPLE Q A DFT VS W = = = = = quantity in litre area in m dry film thickness % volume solids (see data sheet) estimated losses (see table) Q A DFT VS W Q = = = = = to be calculated 1000 m 100 m 50% 40%
= 10 x 1000 x 100 = 333 ltr. 50 x (100-40)
page 7/9
INFORMATION
1411
June 2013
NOZZLE ORIFICE AND SPRAY ANGLE In the product data sheets only the recommended orifice is stated. The choice of the spray angle depends very much on the practical situation. The table below compares orifice and angle with the corresponding codes of various manufacturers. Please consult other manufacturers for their corresponding codes. ORIFICE Inches 0,007 0,009 0,009 0,011 0,011 0,011 0,013 0,013 0,013 0,013 0,015 0,015 0,015 0,018 0,018 0,021 0,021 0,026 0,026 0,026 0,036 0,036
1) In
WIWA - Spray Tips 1) Angle 40 40 65 25 40 65 25 50 65 80 40 65 80 65 80 65 80 40 65 95 40 80 018/40 023/40 -028/25 028/40 028/65 033/25 033/50 033/65 033/80 038/40 038/65 -046/65 -053/65 -066/40 066/65 -091/40 091/80 ----
GRACO - Spray Tips 2) Contractor Finish 163-407 163-409 163-609 163-211 163-411 163-611 163-213 163-513 163-613 163-813 163-415 163-615 163-815 163-618 163-818 163-621 163-821 163-426 163-626 163-926 ---
mm's 0.18 0.23 0.23 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.46 0.46 0.53 0.53 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.91 0.91
269-211 269-411 -269-213 269-513 269-613 -269-415 269-615 269-815 --269-621 269-821 ------
the WIWA number the relation between orifice and angle is clear
2) Orifice Size determines how many liters per minute can be atomized through the airless spray tip. The last two digits of the part number tell the Orifice Size in thousandths of an inch. In this example, the orifice is 0.381 mm (015"). For ordering use the complete number. Orifice Orifice Tip No. 163-415 Spray Width or Tip No. 269-415 Spray Width
Spray Width is based on spraying distance 305 mm (12") from the surface. Double the fourth digit of the tip part number to determine the approximate minimum Spray Width in inches. Add two inches to that number for maximum width. In this example, this tip size produces a 203-254 mm (8-10") spray pattern (width) at 305 mm (12") distance from the surface.
page 8/9
INFORMATION
1411
June 2013
MIXING RATIO - twin-feed products The mix ratios in volume for twin-feed applied products should be retrieved from specific data sheets. It is very important that right ratios are maintained but deviations up to max. 3% are acceptable unless otherwise stated on specific data sheets. These products are generally supplied ready for use after mixing of components as extra diluting is not allowed. INDUCTION TIME If mentioned on the product data sheet the coating should be thoroughly mixed and left for the recommended time for the particular temperature conditions at application. This induction time or precuring of the product ensures that the coating will give the required performance and application properties. POT LIFE This gives the time interval after mixing of the components of the coating during which the material can be applied, without change of application and performance properties of the coating. For solvent containing coatings an extra addition of thinner up to 5% is allowed. For solvent free coatings addition of thinner is not permitted. For solvent free and high solid coatings an exothermic reaction occurs, resulting in gelation shortly after reaching the end of the pot life. It is important to clean equipment with the recommended cleaning thinner before the pot life has expired and/or directly after completion of application of the paint.
page 9/9
INFORMATION
SAFETY INDICATIONS
a three page issue
1430
Most paints contain flammable solvents and some contain materials which can harm the skin, or damage the health if swallowed or inhaled. Whilst most countries have developed regulations to control labelling, storage and use of toxic or hazardous material as yet there is no agreed international code or system. Sigma Coatings will adopt the local requirements in any country where their products are sold, but since it is quite impossible and even confusing to apply all the marks which could be required for every country, a Sigma Coatings system has been developed which is standard for our products throughout the world. We will then add local regulation markings in addition, if required. Two major classes of risk must be controlled and precautions defined which will reduce the risk to acceptable levels: A) Health risks, these include: 1. Gases or vapours. These could include solvent evaporation during the drying period, or perhaps formed during heating of the painted object. 2. Liquids in the paint. These might be solvents, or perhaps binders, which may be toxic if swallowed or inhaled as spray droplets, or dermatitic or toxic in contact with the skin. 3. Powders or dusts. These can be formed during heating painted objects (e.g. flame cutting or welding painted steel), or be present in powder formed during sanding operations, or in spray mist. B) Fire or explosion risks, these include: 1. Fire risk during storage or transport. Most paints other than water based products can be ignited and will support flame. 2. Explosion hazard during application. Flammable solvents in mixture with oxygen in air can explode within certain concentration limits if ignited or detonated. The following sentences are used to define the classes of hazard and this data sheet gives details of precautions which should be taken in each case.
page 1/3
INFORMATION
SAFETY INDICATIONS
1430
June 2013
Relatively harmless paint
Normal measures which are always applicable are: Wash hands regularly and thoroughly with warm water/soap. Immediately cover any wound or cut. Do not roll cigarettes, smoke, or eat with dirty hands. Beware of possible dust or fumes resulting from sand papering or burning. Check carefully that there is no possible fire or explosion risk. Check whether extra ventilation is required. Flash point of paints and solvents is stated in all our product data sheets. This is the lowest temperature at which a mixture of the material with air can ignite or explode. If the temperature of the air is near, or above, the flash point it is essential that sufficient ventilation air is provided to reduce the concentration of solvent well below the lower explosive limit (L.E.L.). Mixtures of solvent and air can only explode when the concentration lies between the lower and upper explosive limits. These limits vary from one solvent to another but the LEL is usually about 50 g per 1 m of air. This is described in detail in sheet 1431. In brief 200 m ventilation air is required per kilo of solvent to maintain an atmosphere below 10% of LEL. Such a mixture is safe even at temperatures above the flash point. Solvents and other components in some paints can irritate the skin, and although in normal paints this may only be a minor and temporary irritation, dermatitis of sensitive skins can be caused by solvents or chemicals in some paints. These are indicated by this glove sentence. Barrier creams together with gloves, goggles and possibly face masks should be used. In all cases, however, the habit of using solvents to clean the skin after painting should be discouraged. Contact of paint with the skin should be avoided by use of barrier creams and protective gloves. Any paint on the skin should be removed at once with skin cleaning liquids or jellies and then washed with water. Dust, smoke and spray mist can be filtered by face masks containing a dust filter cartridge. Cartridges are also available which absorb both dust and solvents. These are only effective whilst there is no apparent smell of solvent. The filter is exhausted when the odour of solvent can be detected and the filter should then be changed. It is most important that the correct filter for the class of work should be used. These are described by the manufacturers of the face mask and filter.
Highly flammable paint. Flash point up to and including 23C (DIN 53213).
Gloves recommended Paint which irritates or affects skin or mucous membranes.
Mask recommended Inhalation of dust and spraymist is harmful.
page 2/3
INFORMATION
SAFETY INDICATIONS
1430
June 2013
Fresh Air Mask recommended Toxic substances in paints usually enter the body by inhalation of gases, vapours, fumes, dusts or spray mists. An indication of the level of hazard is Inhalation of vapour and the Threshold Limits Value (T.L.V.), at one time called Maximum Allowable dust is harmful. Concentration (M.A.C.). This is the concentration which can be tolerated by a healthy worker for 8 hours a day without adverse effects. The lower the figure, the more toxic the substance. The concentrations are given either as parts per million (ppm), i.e. cm of vapour per m of air, or for solid dusts as mg per m. The minimum volume for air required to achieve this safe level of concentration will be given in our data sheets. This volume may in some cases be as much as 20 times that required to reach 10% of LEL and in some classes of work it may be impractical to supply the volume of air required to allow the required rate of usage of paint in the compartment. In such cases it is essential that operators are supplied with, and required to use, fresh air masks or respirators fed with clean air at positive pressure. It is important that the mask has a good facial fit. See also sheet 1431. Paint contains heavy toxic Keep skin covered as far as possible, wear gloves and protect the eyes. substances and is dangerous. Avoid contamination of the skin. Provide very good ventilation and wear fresh air mask. Change all overclothes and shoes immediately after finishing the work. Keep dirty cloths and other objects separate, destroy or clean contaminated clothes with care. Wash the hands very thoroughly. Handle empty containers with care and avoid contamination of the environment with any poisonous paint or waste. THE SIGMA WARNING SYSTEM will show one, or a combination of more than one, of the described sentences. The safety code required in each country will be added to drums used in that country.
page 3/3
INFORMATION
a five page issue
1431
When paints containing solvents are applied in enclosed or confined spaces, two hazards can exist, explosion and toxicity and precautions must be taken to eliminate them. General aspects of explosion hazards The nature of this hazard is explained in detail below. The essential precaution to be taken is that sufficient ventilation air must be provided to maintain the ratio of vapour/air at no more than 10% of the lower explosive limit. The method for calculation is given below and data on minimum ventilation air quantity is given in product data sheets. If the flash point of the solvent is above the working temperature, then an explosion cannot occur. However, it may still be necessary to ventilate to provide a clean working atmosphere or to eliminate toxic hazard. An explosion is simply very rapid burning of a flammable mixture (in the case of paint, it is the burning of solvent vapour in oxygen contained in the air). The speed of combustion is so great that there is extremely rapid development of heat and pressure (6 to 9 times the original pressure). This can lead to destruction of the compartment and injury to work people. Three factors must be present to create an explosion. a. The mixture of vapour and air must be between the lower explosive limit (LEL) and the upper explosive limit. b. The mixture must be at a temperature above the flash point temperature of the vapour. c. A source of ignition with high enough temperature and energy must be present to initiate the explosion reaction. These three factors explain the reasons for the safety precautions. Ventilation to provide an atmosphere below LEL It is usual to specify that ventilation should be provided to reduce vapour concentration to less than 10% of LEL. This large safety margin is required to allow for variations in ventilation in all parts of a compartment. (P x A) + (Q x B) The minimum ventilation air in m per minute may be calculated from the formula: t Calculation P Q A B t = = = = = volume of paint applied in the compartment in litres during time t minutes. volume of added solvent used in the paint applied in the compartment in litres in time t minutes. ventilation air quantity for 1 litre of paint to reach 10% LEL. ventilation air quantity for 1 litre of solvent to reach 10% LEL. time of application in minutes of volume P of paint.
page 1/5
INFORMATION
1431
June 2013
Example 100 litres of paint (P) plus 5 litres of thinner (Q) are used within 45 minutes (t). Value A is e.g. 60 m (given in product data sheet). Value B is e.g. 130 m (given in product data sheet). Ventilation air quantity m per minute to reach 10% LEL is: (100 x 60) + (5 x 130) = 147.7 m per minute. 45 Remarks This quantity of ventilation air must be maintained throughout the application of the paint and also during the period of evaporation of solvent. The ventilation must be arranged so that all parts of the compartment are properly ventilated. It is necessary for the applicator or the contractor to check vapour concentrations (in varying positions) regularly with an explosion meter. If the concentration rises above 10% LEL, painting must stop until the vapour concentration is reduced to a safe level again. Flash point If possible paints with flash points above the ambient temperature should be used. This often is not possible, particularly in compartments heated up by strong sunlight in summer. In such cases it is even more essential that ventilation below 10% LEL is maintained. Sources of ignition Sparks, hot surfaces, flames and all other sources of ignition must be absolutely prevented. Flame proof lighting and electrical equipment must be used, spark proof tools and clothing should be used and all work must be prohibited in adjacent compartments. All equipment, whether electrical or not electrical (e.g. pneumatic pumps, spray tips, etc.) must be adequately earthed to ensure no accumulation of static electrical charge.
TOXIC HAZARD page 2/5
INFORMATION
1431
June 2013
General aspects of toxic hazard Many solvents used in paint have some degree of toxicity and it is necessary to provide sufficient ventilation air to maintain safe atmosphere below the threshold limit value (TLV). With many common solvents this may be impractical when applying large volumes of paint in a short time. In such cases ventilation to give a clear visibility and safety from explosion will still be necessary. It will also be necessary to provide operators in the compartment with fresh air masks or hoods. Barrier creams and protective clothing may also be necessary. Full details are given below and data for calculation of RAQ (required air quantity) are also provided. It is necessary to keep certain rules when using any paint since all can be harmful (even ordinary emulsion paints are dangerous if swallowed!). The following are basic safety precautions: Inhalation of dust and fumes This must be avoided by the use of ventilation or extraction. products should be used in well ventilated areas forced ventilation or fresh air masks should be used in confined spaces a face mask should be worn when spraying, sanding or blast cleaning Skin contact Some substances used in paint may cause irritation after repeated or prolonged contact with the skin and in susceptible cases there is a risk of dermatitis. operatives with a history of skin sensitivity should not be employed in processes where skin contact can occur prolonged or repeated contact of paint with the skin should be avoided barrier cream should be supplied and used gloves should be worn do not wash hands with solvent use a proprietary hand cleanser Ingestion The ingestion (swallowing) of paint must always be avoided. food should not be brought into or consumed in the work area where coatings are stored or used thorough washing of hands and face is essential after applying paint, particularly before eating or smoking if paint or thinners should accidently be swallowed, seek medical attention immediately
page 3/5
INFORMATION
1431
June 2013
Eye protection Steps should be taken to prevent material entering the eyes. goggles should be worn whenever necessary if the eyes become contaminated they should be irrigated with water; seek medical attention immediately Theoretical ventilation requirements In the product data sheets, data are given for the minimum required ventilation air quantity (RAQ) in cubic metres when 1 litre of paint is applied or when 1 litre of thinner is used. The TLV (=threshold limit value) for the mixture of components and solvents in the paint or for the mixture of solvents used in thinners has been calculated. Calculation The quantity of ventilation air required in m per minute during application and drying can be calculated from the formula: (P x M) + (Q x N) t P Q M N t = = = = = quantity of paint consumed in litres. quantity of thinner consumed in litres. min. ventilation air quantity needed to reach TLV of 1 litre of paint. min. ventilation air quantity needed to reach TLV of 1 litre of thinner. application time in minutes.
Example 100 litres of paint (P) are consumed in 45 minutes (t). 5 Litres of thinner (Q) were added to thin down the paint to the prescribed application viscosity. Value M is e.g. 780 m (see product data sheet). Value N is e.g. 2170 m (see product data sheet). The ventilation air quantity required during application and drying to reach TLV is: (100 x 780) + (5 x 2170) = 1974 m per minute 45 Remarks In semi-confined areas such as rooms with open doors and windows or the super structure of a ship, natural ventilation will be about 2 to 5 times the content of the room or space per hour, depending on weather conditions. The amount of fresh air necessary to reach TLV will be approximately 10 to 20 times the amount of fresh air necessary to reach 10% of LEL. When it is impractical to ventilate in such a way that TLV is not reached then fresh air masks must be used.
page 4/5
INFORMATION
1431
June 2013
Emergency procedure It may be necessary to enter an atmosphere which is unsafe. (You may have to rescue somebody). Before entering a confined space or tank ensure that: you wear breathing apparatus you wear a lifeline the lifeline is properly tended a watch is kept on you a means of communication exists a system of signals is agreed you and everybody else involved understand the signals You must also make sure that: a back-up or rescue squad is equipped to render assistance resuscitation equipment is on hand If you have to keep watch or tend a lifeline: keep a careful watch on your men below If you cannot see them: call out to them from time to time make sure they answer If they do not answer repeated calls or if they show signs of drunkenness or unusual behaviour: RAISE THE ALARM IMMEDIATELY DO NOT ATTEMPT TO RESCUE THE VICTIM BY YOURSELF DO NOT BECOME A VICTIM
page 5/5
INFORMATION

A two page issue June 2013 Revision of October 1999
Safe working is always of the greatest importance, but particularly during application of tank coatings. The illustrations on this sheet indicate the quite simple principal measures that will ensure safe working.
INFORMATION

June 2013
INFORMATION DETERMINATION OF WATER SOLUBLE SALTS ACCORDING TO THE BRESLE METHOD (ISO 8502-6 2006)
a two page issue WATER SOLUBLE SALTS ON THE STEEL SURFACE (ISO 8502-9 1998) CHLORIDE TEST BY CONDUCTIVITY METER Operating procedures for standard size Bresle Sampler (12,5cm) (A-1250) 1. Look for suitable surface on which the chloride test can be made. It can be horizontal, vertical, slanting or somewhat bulging. The main thing is that the surface is relatively dry, i.e. without noticeable dampness. In most cases it is recommended to test more than one spot to catch the variations of the chloride level. Remove the protective backing (w/Bresle Logo) and the 12,5cm2 foam circle and dispose. Adhere the cell to a dry surface and press firmly. It is critical to create a tight seal. The surface can be horizontal or vertical. Insert the 5cc syringe into the cell through the spongy foam perimeter. Do not inject beneath the cell or directly into the semi-transparent test area. Evacuate the air from the cell by drawing back on the syringe plunger. Remove and evacuate the syringe. Rinse the electrodes of the Conductivity meter with distilled or de-ionized water. Take 15 ml distilled or de-ionized water in small container and check the conductivity with the conductometer and write down the measured value. This is the blank liquid. Take 3 ml from this blank liquid and inject into the cell, as above. Be certain there are no air bubbles in the syringe. Hold the perimeter of the cell firmly during injection/removal of the syringe, otherwise leakage may occur. Remove the syringe from the test cell area and gently rub the top surface of the cell for 10-15 seconds to increase the dissolution speed of the water. Withdraw and re-inject the water a minimum of three times, rubbing the top of the cell for 10-15 seconds each time.
1468
June 2013 revision of March 2010
2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7.
8. 9.
10. Remove as much of the 3cc of liquid as possible using the syringe. 11. Empty the liquid through the syringe needle back into the blank liquid So total amount of liquid should now approx. be 15 ml. 12. Measure the liquid in the container and write down the measured value shown in the display and deduct the readings of the blank liquid and write down the result. 13. The result is: the difference between the measured value and the one of the blank liquid.
page 1/2
INFORMATION DETERMINATION OF WATER SOLUBLE SALTS ACCORDING TO THE BRESLE METHOD (ISO 8502-6 2006)
1468
June 2009
Next table gives the relation between the conductivity and the equivalent of sodium chlorides for V=15 ml: Result of conductivity 10.0 S/cm 13.3 S/cm 16.7 S/cm 20.0 S/cm 23.3 S/cm REFERENCES Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Equivalent of sodium chloride 60 mg/m2 80 mg/m2 100 mg/m2 120 mg/m2 140 mg/m2
page 2/2
INFORMATION

a ten page issue DERUSTING METHODS
1490
May 2013 revision of June 2007
The effective life time of a coating applied onto a steel surface is dependent to a very large extent on how thoroughly the surface has been prepared prior to painting. Surface preparation consists of primary surface preparation which aims to remove mill scale, rust and foreign matter from a steel surface prior to the application of a shop primer (prefabrication primer) or primer. Secondary surface preparation aims to remove rust and foreign matter, if any, from a steel surface coated with a shop primer (prefabrication primer) or primer prior to application of the anticorrosive paint system. A steel surface can be derusted in the following ways.
Wire brushing
Wire brushing, usually done with rotating wire brushes, is a conventional method, not suitable for the removal of mill scale, but suitable for the preparation of weld seams. The main disadvantage is, that treated surfaces are often not completely free of corrosion products and tend to become polished and contaminated with oil. This decreases the adhesion of priming paints and the performance of a paint system. Chipping or mechanical chipping is usually done in combination with wirebrushing. It is sometimes suitable for local repairs with conventional or special formulated paint systems. It is not suitable for general preparation of surfaces to be coated with epoxy or chlorinated rubber paints. It can be used for the removal of thick rust scale and economizes in later blasting operations. To remove rust, paint etc. from corners and angles in order to achieve a cleaned surface with a profile. Flame cleaning involves de-rusting by thermal treatment making use of burning equipment (acetylene or propane and oxygen). It removes almost all mill scale, but rust to a lesser extent. Therefore this method cannot meet the requirements of modern paint systems. Disc sanding involves use of rotating discs covered with abrasive material. It is used for local repairs. The quality of these discs has been very much improved, and these can give good standards of preparation.
Chipping
Needle hammer Flame cleaning
Disc sanding
page 1/10
INFORMATION
1490
May 2013
Sweep blasting
A hand operated form of superficial blast cleaning in which a primed or coated steel surface is roughened and is free of almost all visible contamination. (except oil contamination or traces of rust) A: light sweep, purpose: roughening of intact coating and improving the adhesion of subsequent coats Abrasive: fine (0,2-0,5 mm) is most suitable when the paint surface under treatment is not to be destroyed B: heavy sweep (approx ISO-Sa1), purpose: removing of not sound coating areas - layers Abrasive: small to medium (0,2-0,5/0,2-1,5 mm) Reference: Repainting of old metallic structures, limited blast cleaning scale Technical Guide, November 1993 Laboratoire Central des Ponts et Chausses 58,bd Lefebvre, F 75732 Paris Cedex 15
Dry blast cleaning
The impingement of a high kinetic energy stream of abrasive onto the surface to be prepared. It is either hand operated by jet or automatically by impeller and is the most thorough method of derusting. Centrifugal blast cleaning, compressed air blast cleaning and vacuum blast cleaning are well known types. The particles are as far as practical spherical and solid and should not contain more than the minimum practical amount of tails and irregular shapes. Primers to be used for shot blasted steel should be checked on performance. The particles show good angularity form with sharp cutting edges and should be substantially free from half-rounds (i.e. shot split in half). Unless otherwise stated in the specifications a mineral grit should be used.
Shot
Grit
page 2/10
INFORMATION
1490
May 2013
Water (abrasive) cleaning/jetting (Terminology NACE) Water (abrasive) blast cleaning
Different types of water (abrasive) cleaning/jetting are in use Below you will find the most commonly used ones For more info see also information sheet 1498 (Hydrojetting) Some examples of these techniques are given below, not pretending to be complete. New developments with wet blasting methods are presented regularly, improving the efficiency and reducing the amount of water or grit. LOW PRESSURE WATER ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING Pressure = 6-8 bar Water consumption = 90-300 l/hour Cleaning speed = 10-16 m/hour, depending on material to be removed Result: a surface cleanliness and blasting profile as required can be obtained. LOW PRESSURE HUMIDIFIED ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING Pressure = 6-8 bar Water consumption = 5-60 l/hour Cleaning speed = 10-16 m/hour, depending on material to be removed Result: a surface cleanliness and blasting profile as required can be obtained. ULTRA HIGH PRESSURE WATER JETTING (UHPWJ) Pressure - more than 1700 bar Use: Complete removal of all coatings and rust. The result can be compared with dry abrasive blast cleaning, but with flash rust after drying. The original blasting profile will be maintained. HIGH PRESSURE WATER JETTING (HPWJ) Pressure - from 700 to 1700 bar Use: Most paints and corrosion products will be removed, Magnetite and hard tightly adherent coating may be left but can be removed with difficulty. The original blasting profile will be maintained.
page 3/10
INFORMATION
1490
May 2013
Water cleaning
LOW PRESSURE WATER CLEANING (LPWC) Pressure - lower than 350 bar Use: Removal of salt, dirt and poorly adherent surface contamination. Mainly washing of surface HIGH PRESSURE WATER CLEANING (HPWC) Pressure - from 350 to 700 bar Use: Loose paint, rust, debris and material in pits will be removed, but black iron oxide (Magnetite) will remain. A uniform matte finish cannot be achieved. STEAM CLEANING Pressure = 100-120 bar Use: Removal of water soluble or water emulsified contamination; the substrate dries quicker compared to a water rinsed substrate.
ISO STANDARDS
When specifying a precise degree of de-rusting and cleaning of a steel surface prior to painting, PPG PMC uses the ISO standard ISO 8501-1-1988 and ISO 8504-1992. This indicates the following rust grades: A = steel surface largely covered with adherent mill scale but little, if any, rust. B = steel surface which has begun to rust and from which the mill scale has begun to flake. C = steel surface on which the mill scale has rusted away or from which it can be scraped, but with slight pitting visible when viewed normally. D = steel surface on which the mill scale has rusted away and on which general pitting is visible when viewed normally.
ISO 8501-1 Applicable to bare mill-scaled or rusty steel
page 4/10
INFORMATION
1490
May 2013
DEGREES OF PRIMARY SURFACE PREPARATION ISO-St Hand and power tool cleaning
The ISO standard indicates six preparation degrees. The following standards are often used in specifications: Surface preparation by hand and power tool cleaning, such as scraping, wire-brushing, machine-brushing and grinding, is designated by the letters St. Prior to hand and power tool cleaning, any heavy layers of rust shall be removed by chipping. Visible oil, grease and dirt shall also be removed. After hand and power tool cleaning, the surface shall be cleaned from loose dust and debris. When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease and dirt, and from poorly adhering mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. As for St2, but the surface shall be treated much more thoroughly to give a metallic sheen arising from the metallic substrate Surface preparation by blast cleaning is designated by the letters Sa Prior to blast cleaning, any heavy layers of rust shall be removed by chipping. Visible oil, grease and dirt shall also be removed. After blast cleaning, the surface shall be cleaned from loose dust and debris. When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease and dirt, and from poorly adhering mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease and dirt and from most of the mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. Any residual contamination shall be firmly adhering. When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease and dirt and from mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. Any remaining traces of contamination shall show only as slight stains in the form of spots or stripes.
ISO-St2 Thorough hand and power tool cleaning ISO-St3 Very thorough hand and power tool cleaning ISO-Sa Blast cleaning
ISO-Sa1 Light blast cleaning ISO-Sa2 Thorough blast cleaning ISO-Sa2 Very thorough blast cleaning
page 5/10
INFORMATION
1490
May 2013
ISO-Sa3 blast cleaning to visually clean steel Remark
When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease and dirt and shall be free from mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. It shall have a uniform metallic color. The photographs in the ISO Standard publication are given as illustration only. They do not represent the complete preparation degree, which also includes a cleaning operation which is not visible in the photographs. (colorless contamination). As far as blast cleaning is concerned, equivalents according to British and American standards are given in the following table. ISO 8501-01 Sa3 Sa2 Sa2 BS 4232 1st quality 2nd quality 3rd quality SSPC-Vis 1 * White metal Near white Commercial SP 5 SP 10 SP 6
Equivalents
* for more details see SSPC-SP com Roughness of blast cleaned steel To specify the roughness, a variety of values is used. Such as Rz, Rt and Ra. Rz = average peak to valley height = blasting profile Rt = maximum peak to valley height Ra = average distance to an imaginary centre line which can be drawn between peaks and valleys = C.L.A. = Centre Line Average (ISO 3274) Normally PPG PMC uses Rz values. Blasting Profile (Rz) = 4 to 6 times C.L.A. (Ra). The direct measuring of the dft of primers applied onto blast cleaned steel in a thickness up to 30 m is very inaccurate. A primer dft of 30 m and more gives an average thickness and not the thickness present on the peaks.
page 6/10
INFORMATION
1490
May 2013
When in the specifications blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2 is mentioned a blasting profile Rz of 35-50 m should be obtained using mineral grit unless otherwise mentioned. Above a Ra roughness of 17 m (= blasting profile Rz of 100 m) it is recommended to use an additional coat of primer to cover the roughness. A roughness profile above 100 m often results if heavily rusted steel is blast clean JAPANESE STANDARDS Standard for the preparation of steel surface prior to painting SPSS-1984 Surface condition These establish a systematic standard for secondary surface preparation prior to protective painting when shop primers (prefabrication primers) are used in the construction process of hull or steel structures. H A F D R = = = = = shop primed steel surface in way of hand welding shop primed steel in way of automatic welding shop primed steel surface in way of gas-burning shop primed steel surface having white zinc salt shop primed steel surface having rust in the form of spots
GRADES OF SECONDARY SURFACE PREPARATION The Japanese Standard indicates six preparation degrees. The following standards are often used in specifications. SPSS-Pt2 Surface prepared by wire brushing for the surface condition A, D and R,by wire brushing and disc sander for the surface condition H,by disc sander for the surface condition F. Almost all rust and foreign matter are fairly removed. If mentioned for other surface conditions (e.g. primed or coated steel), almost all rust and foreign matter, have to be removed by wire brushing and/or disc sander.
page 7/10
INFORMATION
1490
May 2013
SPSS-Pt3
Surface prepared by wire brushing and (in combination with!) disc sander for the surface condition H and A and by disc sander for the surface condition F, R and D. Rust and foreign matter are removed to the extent that the surface has a uniform metallic sheen. If mentioned for other surfaces conditions (e.g. primed or coated steel) all rust and foreign matter has to be removed to the extent that the surface has a uniform metallic sheen. Also used for the preparation of primed or coated substrate to remove rust from small areas such as scratches, pinpoints or areas of mechanical damage.
SPSS-Ss
Surface prepared by light blast cleaning of slug sands or grits. (Shop primer (prefabrication primer) with the little trace of rust is noticeable.) Also used for the preparation of a primed or coated substrates or galvanized steel to roughen the surface and to remove contamination or traces of rust. In the Japanese Standard the expressions Sd2 and Sd3 are used, which are equivalent to the Swedish expressions Sa2 and Sa3. Preparation grades of welds, cut edges and other area with surface imperfections. See illustrations in the standard
Remarks ISO 8501-3 Grade P2
page 8/10
INFORMATION
1490
May 2013
Degree of cleanliness
The ISO and the Japanese Standards give a visual impression of the quality of the derusted steel. However, chemical contamination like water soluble salts etc. are not visible and remains partly on the surface. Presence of excessive amounts of water soluble salts can cause blistering of the coating by osmosis. Water soluble salts in mineral abrasives. For tankcoatings the maximum value of water soluble salts in mineral abrasives is 250 S/cm (conductivity) (ISO 11127-6 1993). See further sheet 1491 Water soluble salts on the steel surface (ISO 8502-9 1998). Our maximum acceptable levels of water soluble salts, calculated as mixed salts, on treated substrate prior to coating application depends on the area and expected service conditions. mixed salts Cargo tanks Immersed areas Dry cargo holds 50 mg/m 80 mg/m 100 mg/m conductivity (V=15 ml) (10.0 S/cm) (16.0 S/cm) (20.0 S/cm)
Note
Determination of water soluble salts: see information sheet 1468 For water ballast tank areas to be treated in accordance with IMO resolution MSC 215(82) and cargo tank areas of Crude Oil tanks to be treated in accordance with IMO resolution MSC 288(87): water soluble salts limit equivalent to sodium chloride after blasting/grinding must be equal to or lower than 50 mg/m of sodium chloride. For areas exposed to atmosphere conditions; We recommend the limit per dry cargo holds as noted in the table. Prior to treatment the substrate should be High Pressure Washed with Fresh (clean) water. As a guidance we recommend that the conductivity of abrasives prior to treatment should not be higher than 250 S/cm.
page 9/10
INFORMATION

May 2013 REFERENCES Determination of water soluble salts according to the Bresle method (ISO 8502-6 2006) Specification for mineral abrasives Hydrojetting
1490
Limitation of Liability - IN NO EVENT WILL PPG BE LIABLE UNDER ANY THEORY OF RECOVERY (WHETHER BASED ON NEGLIGENCE OF ANY KIND, STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT) FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN ANY WAY RELATED TO, ARISING FROM, OR RESULTING FROM ANY USE MADE OF THE PRODUCT. The information in this data sheet is intended for guidance only and is based upon laboratory tests that PPG believes to be reliable. PPG may modify the information contained herein at any time as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the PPG product, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific inquiry, or otherwise, are based on data, which to the best of PPGs knowledge, is reliable. The product and related information is designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills in the industry and it is the end-users responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its own particular use and it shall be deemed that Buyer has done so, as its sole discretion and risk. PPG has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. Therefore, PPG does not accept any liability arising from any loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise).|Variations in the application environment, changes in procedures of use, or extrapolation of data may cause unsatisfactory results. This data sheet supersedes all previous versions and it is the Buyers responsibility to ensure that this data sheet is current prior to using the product. Current data sheets for all PPG Protective & Marine Coatings products are maintained at www.ppgpmc.com. The English text of this data sheet shall prevail over any translation thereof.
page 10/10
INFORMATION

a two page issue SCOPE
1491
June 2013 revision of June 2007
This specification covers mineral abrasives such as corundum, aluminium silicate slag, or any slag mixtures which are suitable for removing rust, scale, old paint or shop primer from steel by blast cleaning and giving a satisfactory anchor pattern. This specification covers only those abrasives commonly known as utility grades. REQUIREMENTS Material The abrasive may be any material meeting the requirements of this specification. It shall be composed of clean, sound, hard particles free from foreign substances such as dirt, oil, grease, toxic substances, organic matter and water soluble salts. The abrasive supplier shall certify that any product to be delivered conforms to all requirements stated herein. pH 100 gram of a representative abrasive sample is crushed using a mortar and pestle. Approximately 50 grams of the crushed sample is added to 200 ml de-ionized water. The pH of this slurry is then determined through the use of an electronic pH meter with an accuracy of 0.01 pH unit. A slurry mixture prepared in this way shall not have a pH below 6.20. Water Soluble Salts (ISO 11127-6 1993) The abrasive is mixed with de-ionized water, conductivity max. 1 S/cm, in the proportion 1:1, e.g. 100 g abrasive to 100 cm water. The mixture is shaken for 5 minutes, allowed to settle for at least 1 hour and then shaken again for 5 minutes. Some of the water is decanted, the temperature is recorded and the conductivity measured by a conductivity gauge. If the conductivity gauge does not have any temperature compensation adjustment, the conductivity should be converted to 20C or measurement should be carried out at this temperature. If the conductivity exceeds 250 S/cm the abrasive is rejected. If the abrasive is to be used for High Pressure Wet Abrasive Blastcleaning the total amount of water soluble matter should be below 0,5% by weight. Moisture Content Approximately 200 grams of abrasive shall be weighed to the nearest 0.1 g in a tared weighing dish and dried at 105 to 110C for 3 hours or more until successive weighings after additional 1 hour heating periods show a weight change of not more than 0.1%. The percentage of moisture is calculated as follows: percent moisture = original weight - final weight x 100 original weight of sample The moisture content for material deliverd in bags or in bulk shall not exceed 0.5% by weight. Oil and Grease The abrasive shall not be contaminated with oil and grease. 10 cm abrasive is shaken with 10 cm methylene chloride for about 5 minutes. 5 drops of the solvent are applied to a clean glass plate. After complete evaporation of the solvent the glass plate is exposed to ultraviolet light in total darkness. If there is blue fluorescence the abrasive is rejected.
page 1/2
INFORMATION
1491
June 2013
Hardness Examine the abrasive material under a low-power microscope (10 x) and, if grains of different colour or character are present, select a few grains of each. Separately place the grains thus differentiated between two glass microscope slides. While applying pressure, slowly move one slide over the other with a reciprocating motion for 10 seconds. Examine the glass surface and, if scratched, the material shall be considered as having a minimum hardness of 6 on Mohs scale. If any grains that fail to scratch glass are present, in any appreciable quantity, the total batch is rejected. Grain Shape The individual abrasive grains shall be angular in shape. Surface Profile The abrasive material shall produce a prescribed blasting profile Rz value (varying between 30-100 m)
page 2/2
INFORMATION

a four page issue
1650
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN (VENTILATION) AIR-TEMPERATURE, SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE AND RELATIVE HUMIDITY To achieve optimum results in coating work it is essential to ensure that no condensation occurs on the substrate or in-between coats during the painting process. Air at a given temperature can only contain a certain (maximum) amount of water vapour. This amount is lower at lower temperatures. The maximum water content of air at different temperatures is given in the next table: Degrees Centigrade 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 Maximum water content g/m 4,8 6,8 9,5 12,8 17,3 23,0 30,4 39,6 51,1 65,0
From these figures the relationship between dew point, air temperature and relative humidity can be calculated. This relationship is given in the next table: Relation between dew point, air temperature and relative humidity Air Temperature C 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dew point in C at a relative humidity of: 50% 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 0.8 0.1 1.0 1.9 2.8 3.7 4.7 55% 2.9 2.1 1.3 0.4 0.4 1.3 2.3 3.2 4.2 5.1 6.1 60% 1.8 1.0 0.2 0.8 1.7 2.6 3.5 4.5 5.4 6.4 7.3 65% 0.9 0.1 0.8 1.8 2.7 3.7 4.6 5.6 6.6 7.5 8.5 70% 0.0 0.9 1.8 2.8 3.8 4.7 5.6 6.6 7.6 8.6 9.5 75% 0.9 1.8 2.8 3.8 4.7 5.7 6.7 7.7 8.6 9.6 10.6 80% 1.8 2.8 3.7 4.7 5.7 6.7 7.6 8.6 9.6 10.6 11.5 85% 2.7 3.7 4.6 5.6 6.6 7.6 8.6 9.6 10.6 11.5 12.5 90% 3.6 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.4 9.4 10.4 11.4 12.4 13.4
page 1/4
INFORMATION
1650
June 2013
Air Temperature C 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Dew point in C at a relative humidity of: 50% 5.6 6.5 7.4 8.3 9.3 10.2 11.1 12.0 12.9 13.8 14.8 15.7 16.6 17.5 18.4 55% 7.0 7.9 8.8 9.7 10.7 11.6 12.5 13.5 14.4 15.3 16.2 17.2 18.1 19.1 20.0 60% 8.3 9.2 10.2 11.1 12.0 12.9 13.8 14.8 15.7 16.7 17.6 18.6 19.5 20.5 21.4 65% 9.5 10.4 11.4 12.3 13.3 14.2 15.2 16.1 17.0 17.9 18.8 19.8 20.8 21.7 22.7 70% 10.5 11.5 12.4 13.4 14.4 15.3 16.3 17.2 18.2 19.1 20.1 21.1 22.0 22.9 23.9 75% 11.6 12.5 13.5 14.5 15.4 16.4 17.4 18.4 19.3 20.3 21.2 22.2 23.2 24.1 25.1 80% 12.5 13.5 14.5 15.5 16.4 17.4 18.4 19.4 20.3 21.3 22.3 23.2 24.2 25.2 26.2 85% 13.5 14.5 15.4 16.4 17.4 18.4 19.4 20.3 21.3 22.3 23.3 24.3 25.2 26.2 27.2 90% 14.4 15.3 16.3 17.3 18.3 19.3 20.3 21.3 22.3 23.2 24.2 25.2 26.2 27.2 28.2
Using these figures curves can be drawn which give the relationship between air temperature, relative humidity and dew point. (See graph). To allow a sensible safety margin normally the substrate temperature must be at least 3 degrees centigrade above the dew point. The dew point is the temperature of a given air-water vapour mixture at which condensation starts, since at that temperature the maximum water content of the air is reached. Many important conclusions can be drawn from the graph, e.g.: at a relative humidity of 85% the lowest acceptable substrate temperature is approximately equal to the temperature of the (ventilation) air. For this reason outdoor paintwork must normally be carried out at a relative humidity below 85%. at a relative humidity of 90% the difference in temperature between substrate and dew point will be only 2C, which means that the safety margin is narrowed. This can be overcome by raising the substrate temperature by approx. 1C. at a relative humidity of 70% the relationship between the acceptable substrate temperature and the temperature of the (ventilation) air is given by the following table: air temperature C dew point C lowest acceptable substrate temperature C 5 0,0 3,0 10 4,7 7,7 20 14,4 17,4 30 23,9 26,9
page 2/4
INFORMATION
1650
June 2013
Although the substrate temperatures given in this table are well below the temperature of the surrounding air no condensation will occur under the stated prevailing conditions. if the lowest acceptable substrate temperature is for example 5C and the temperature of the atmosphere is also 5C than the ventilation air can be heated and relative humidity will then be reduced according to the following table: air temperature C relative humidity % 5 85 10 60 20 32 30 18 40 11
In general reduction in temperature leads to risk of condensation. For instance steel cooled down during the night will often show condensation and this will not evaporate until the steel is heated up again by sunlight or other means.
page 3/4
INFORMATION
1650
June 2013
page 4/4
PPG PROTECTIVE & MARINE COATINGS

PPG Protective & Marine Coatings brings unrivaled levels of innovation, experience and expertise in coatings technology, supported through our expanding global supply and distributors network in over 80 countries. We have in-depth knowledge of the industry, our customers day-to-day challenges and the environmental, health and safety standards in the marketplace. By working in close partnership with customers, our technical service representatives are able to offer an unsurpassed level of market knowledge. This enables us to respond quickly with efcient, economic solutions in all environments and industries. The result performance-enhancing coating systems that can be applied more easily, resist the elements more effectively, and deliver maximum performance with minimum downtime.
Website: www.sigmacoatings.com/protective Email: sigmacoatings.protective@ppg.com 2012 PPG Industries, all rights reserved.
0105-GLOB
No rights can be derived from the content of this publication. Unless otherwise agreed upon in writing, all products and technical advice given are subject to our standard conditions of sale, available on our website www.ppgpmc.com. Bringing innovation to the surface, PSX, STEELGUARD are trademarks or registered trademark of PPG Industries Ohio, Inc. PITT-CHAR is a registered trademark of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. SIGMA COATINGS and SIGMA COATINGS and Design, NOVAGUARD, PHENGUARD, SIGMA AQUACOVER, SIGMA AQUAWELD, SIGMACOVER, SIGMADUR, SIGMAGUARD, SIGMAPRIME, SIGMARINE, SIGMASHIELD, SIGMATHERM, SIGMAWELD and SIGMAZINC are trademarks or registered trademarks of PPG Coatings Nederland B.V.
Created January 2012

Sigma Coating S

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Sigma Coating S

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

PROTECTIVE COATINGS

DATA SHEETS | SYSTEM SHEETS | INFORMATION SHEETS

CLEANING SOLVENT Worldwide availability

- CUI - Stainless Steel - DTR - Primer - Cryogenic

Product: Hi-Temp 1027 Rev. 090412

MIXING, THINNING, AND CLEANUP:

Clean up with Thinners #5, #10, #11

APPLICATION TO HOT SURFACES:

RECOMMENDED APPLICATION PER COAT:

APPROXIMATE DRY SCHEDULE:

Product: Hi-Temp 1027 Rev. 090412

MIXING, THINNING, AND CLEANUP:

Airless Spray Minimum Fluid Line 1/4 to 3/8

Tip size 417 to 521

RECOMMENDED APPLICATION PER COAT:

Hi-Temp 1000VS Dry Film Wet Film Theoretical Coverage

Mils 2 5.9 273 ft2/gal

Microns [50] [148] [6.7 m2/l ]

Maximum Microns [63] [183] [5.4 m2/l]

Product: Hi-Temp 1000VS Rev. 082012

two component solvent free amine cured phenolic epoxy compound

Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure

Pot life 20C 30C 60 min. 45 min.

Shelf life (cool and dry place)

RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Induction time Pot life

Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure

BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT

Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 60 min. 45 min.

PDS cream green

7468 3012002200 4000001400

RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Induction time Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure

BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT

PDS green cream

7755 4194542200 3002002200

RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

24 hours 16 hours 10 hours 4 hours 7 days 6 days 5 days 4 days

RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Pot life Induction time

surface should be dry and free from any contamination

(data for components) at least 12 months

RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Pot life (at application viscosity) 10 C 20 C 30 C 6 hours 4 hours 1.5 hour

RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES

system sheet: 3141 system sheet: 3322

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Pot life Induction time

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

5C 10C 15C 20C 30C

199289 199282 199284

PDS offwhite pink grey

7959 7001002200 6007002200 5000002200

RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES

Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure

TROWEL Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT

Curing ADDITIONAL DATA